JP6800814B2 - Game machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine.

Conventionally, as a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a gaming machine is known in which a setting state such as a winning lottery probability or an execution probability of various effects is set to any one of a plurality by a setting change operation by a game hall manager. In such a game machine, for example, a setting key is inserted into a predetermined setting key insertion portion arranged on the back surface side of the game machine, the inserted setting key is rotated in a specific direction, and then the power is turned on to the game machine. As a result, it is common to control the above-mentioned setting state to a changeable setting change allowable state.

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 6-91049

However, if the setting state of the game machine is changed by being illegally controlled to the above-mentioned setting change allowable state by an operation by a fraudster other than the game field manager, the setting that the game field manager does not intend The game machine will operate in this state, and the fraud may cause loss of the game field, resulting in a decrease in the reliability of the game machine.

Therefore, an object of the present invention is to improve the reliability of the gaming machine in view of the above circumstances.

An example of the invention disclosed in the present specification is as follows.
A game board having a game area in which a game ball launched by operating a predetermined launch handle can flow down is provided, a winning lottery is performed based on the establishment of a predetermined condition, and a winning result is derived in the corresponding losing lottery. In a game machine that executes a hit game
Number game balls flowing down the gaming area has entered the special winning hole, and, with a number of not ball entrance to the winning port, the specific information calculating means for calculating the specific information about a stream of result of game balls,
A specific information display unit that displays the calculation result of the specific information calculation means, and
A setting mode generating means for generating a setting mode capable of setting a setting value regarding the probability that a winning result is derived in the winning lottery is provided.
The setting mode can be started by performing the first administrator operation when the power is turned on, and the set value can be displayed by using the specific information display unit.
In the setting mode, even if the game ball enters the winning opening, the calculation is not performed by the specific information calculation means , and even if the launch handle is operated, the game ball moves toward the game area. It is something that will never be fired
further,
The first clearing means for clearing predetermined information when the first administrator operation is performed when the power is turned on, and
A second clearing means for clearing predetermined information without starting the setting mode when a second administrator operation different from the first administrator operation is performed when the power is turned on is provided.
The specific information calculated by the specific information calculation means is not cleared by either the first clearing means or the second clearing means .

According to the present invention, the reliability of the game machine can be improved.

It is a front view of the pachinko machine which is one Embodiment of this invention. It is a right side view of a pachinko machine. It is a top view of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is a perspective view of a pachinko machine as seen from the front. It is a perspective view of a pachinko machine seen from behind. It is a perspective view of the pachinko machine seen from the front with the door frame opened from the main body frame and the main body frame opened from the outer frame. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled a pachinko machine into a door frame, a game board, a main body frame, and an outer frame and looked at from the front. It is an exploded perspective view of a pachinko machine disassembled into a door frame, a game board, a main body frame, and an outer frame and viewed from behind. It is a front view which shows an example of a game board. It is a perspective view of the game board seen from the front right. It is a perspective view of the game board seen from the front left. It is a perspective view of the game board seen from the back. It is an exploded perspective view of the game board disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from the front. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the game board for each main structure and looked at from the back. It is a front view which cut the front component and the front unit of a game board at the substantially center of the game area in the front-rear direction. It is a block diagram which shows schematic | control structure of a pachinko machine. It is a figure which shows the structure in the main control MPU. It is a figure which shows the structure of the arithmetic circuit in the main control MPU. It is a figure which shows the structure of the serial communication circuit. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the initialization process. It is a flowchart which shows the continuation of the initialization process of FIG. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a timer interrupt process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the accessory ratio calculation / display process. It is a flowchart which shows the continuation of the accessory ratio calculation / display process of FIG. It is a figure which shows an example of arrangement of the program (code) and data stored in ROM, RAM built in the main control MPU. It is a figure which shows the structure of the data stored in the area for calculating the accessory ratio. It is a figure which shows the structure of the accessory ratio indicator. It is a figure which shows the structure of a driver circuit. It is a timing diagram of the data input to a driver circuit. It is a figure which shows the mounting example of the main control board. It is a figure which shows the positional relationship between the main control MPU and the accessory ratio indicator. It is a figure which shows the load register selection table. It is a figure which shows the character generator decoding table. It is a state transition diagram of a driver circuit. It is a figure which shows the display example of the accessory ratio. It is a figure which shows the display example of the accessory ratio. It is a block diagram which shows schematic | control structure of a pachinko machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the area update process for base calculation. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a base calculation / display process. It is a figure which shows an example of the update timing of the number of prize balls, and the calculation timing of a base value. It is a figure which shows another example of the update timing of the prize ball number and the calculation timing of a base value. It is a figure which shows another example of the update timing of the prize ball number and the calculation timing of a base value. It is a figure which shows another example of the update timing of the prize ball number and the calculation timing of a base value. It is a figure which shows another example of the update timing of the prize ball number and the calculation timing of a base value. It is a flowchart which shows another example of the area update process for base calculation. It is a flowchart which shows another example of base calculation and display processing. It is a flowchart which shows another example of the area update process for base calculation. It is a flowchart which shows another example of base calculation and display processing. It is a flowchart which shows another example of the area update process for base calculation. It is a flowchart which shows another example of base calculation and display processing. It is a figure which shows the structure of the data stored in the base calculation area. It is a front view which shows another example of a game board. It is a flowchart which shows another example of the area update process for base calculation. It is a flowchart which shows another example of the area update process for base calculation. It is a flowchart which shows another example of base calculation and display processing. It is a flowchart which shows another example of base calculation and display processing. It is a flowchart which shows another example of base calculation and display processing. It is a flowchart which shows another example of base calculation and display processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the processing at the time of power-on of a peripheral control unit. It is a flowchart which shows an example of peripheral control part V blank interrupt processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the peripheral control part 1ms timer interrupt processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the display selection process. It is a figure which shows an example of the display selection table. It is a figure which shows an example of the display selection table. It is a figure which shows an example of the display selection table. It is a figure which shows an example of the display selection table. It is a figure which shows an example of the display selection table. It is a figure which shows an example of the display screen. It is a flowchart which shows another example of the area update process for base calculation. It is a flowchart which shows another example of the area update process for base calculation. It is a flowchart which shows another example of base calculation and display processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the area update process for base calculation. It is a flowchart which shows another example of the area update process for base calculation. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a timer interrupt process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of base calculation process 1. It is a flowchart which shows an example of base calculation process 2. It is a flowchart which shows another example of the base calculation process 1. It is a flowchart which shows another example of the base calculation process 2. It is a flowchart which shows another example of timer interrupt processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the base calculation process 3. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the base calculation process 4. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a base display process. It is a flowchart which shows another example of the base calculation process 3. It is a flowchart which shows another example of the base calculation process 4. It is a flowchart which shows another example of the base display processing. It is a block diagram which shows schematic | control structure of a pachinko machine. It is a figure which shows the arrangement of the frame side discharge ball sensor. It is a figure which shows the arrangement of the frame side discharge ball sensor. It is a figure which shows the connection example of a discharge ball sensor and a main control board. It is a front view which shows an example of a game board. It is a figure which shows the structure of the main control input circuit. It is a figure which shows the mounting example of the main control board. It is a figure which shows the mounting example of the main control board. It is a figure which shows the mounting example of the main control board. It is a figure which shows the configuration example of the main control I / O port. It is a figure which shows the configuration example of the main control I / O port. It is a timing diagram in the configuration example of the main control I / O port shown in FIG. 97. It is a figure which shows the change of the state (interval) to calculate the base value. It is a figure which shows the example of the character which is displayed on the base display. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the initialization process. It is a flowchart which shows the continuation of the initialization process of FIG. 101. It is a figure which shows the structure of the base calculation area 13128. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a timer interrupt process. It is a flow chart which shows an example of a base calculation process. It is a flowchart which shows the continuation of the base calculation process of FIG. 105. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the base display data generation processing. It is a flowchart which shows the modification of the base calculation process. It is a figure which shows the calculation of the base when the game state is switched. It is a figure which shows an example of the game history recorded in the game machine. It is a figure which shows the example of the error screen. It is a figure which shows the example of an error signal. It is a figure which shows the example of an error. It is a figure which shows the example of an error. It is a figure which shows the example of an error. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the processing at the time of power-on of a peripheral control unit. It is a figure which shows an example of the game history recording condition setting table. It is a figure which shows an example of a game history. It is a block diagram which shows the structure of a peripheral control board and its surroundings. It is a block diagram which shows the peripheral structure of the peripheral control SRAM. It is a figure which shows the modification of the game history recording condition setting table. It is a figure which shows the modification of the game history. It is a figure which shows the modification of the game history. It is a figure which shows the modification of the game history. It is a block diagram which shows schematic | control structure of the pachinko machine which has a setting part. It is a perspective view of the pachinko machine having a setting part seen from the back with the door open. FIG. 6 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine shown in FIG. 126 as viewed from behind with the door closed. It is a figure which shows the setting part of the pachinko machine shown in FIG. 126. It is a figure which shows the modification of the setting part. It is a block diagram which shows schematic | control structure of the pachinko machine which has a setting part. It is a perspective view which looked at the game board which has a setting part from the back. It is a perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine which mounted the game board shown in FIG. 131 from the back. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the initialization process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of setting change processing and setting display processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of setting change processing and setting display processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of a special symbol and a special electric accessory control process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of the special symbol change waiting processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of the special symbol variation pattern setting process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of the variation pattern selection determination processing. (A) is an example of a variation pattern table selected when the game state is the normal state and the result of the special lottery is out of order. (B) is an example of a variation pattern table selected when the game state is the normal state and the result of the special lottery is a big hit. It is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the effect executed in the deviation variation pattern 20 and 24 to 29 in the variation pattern table of FIG. 140 (A). It is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the effect executed in the deviation variation pattern 1, 2, and 30 in the variation pattern table of FIG. 140 (A). It is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the effect executed in the deviation variation pattern 31 and the hit variation pattern 34 in the variation pattern table of FIG. 140 (A). It is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the effect executed in the deviation variation pattern 32 and the hit variation pattern 35 in the variation pattern table of FIG. 140 (A). (A) is an example of a variation pattern table selected when the game state is a time saving state and the result of the special lottery is out of order. (B) is an example of a variation pattern table selected when the game state is a time saving state and the result of the special lottery is a big hit. It is a perspective view of a slot machine. It is a perspective view of the slot machine with the front member open. It is a block diagram which shows the structure of various mechanical elements, electronic devices, operation members, etc. provided in a slot machine. It is a figure which shows the detail of the storage area provided by ROM, RAM and the like in this embodiment, and the ROM area. It is a figure which shows the detail of the RAM area in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the structure of the data stored in the area for calculating the accessory ratio. It is a figure which shows the detail of the parameter information setting area of this embodiment. It is a flowchart explaining the procedure of the system reset start process which is executed when a slot machine is reset. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a periodic process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of information signal N output processing.

The pachinko machine 1 according to the embodiment of the present invention will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. First, the overall configuration of the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 1 to 9. FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine according to an embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 2 is a right side view of the pachinko machine, FIG. 3 is a plan view of the pachinko machine, and FIG. 4 is a rear view of the pachinko machine. FIG. 5 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine viewed from the front, and FIG. 6 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine viewed from the back. FIG. 7 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine viewed from the front with the door frame 3 opened from the main body frame and the main body frame 4 opened from the outer frame 2. FIG. 8 is an exploded perspective view of the pachinko machine disassembled into the door frame 3, the game board 5, the main body frame 4, and the outer frame 2 and viewed from the front. FIG. 9 shows the pachinko machine as the door frame 3, the game board 5, It is an exploded perspective view which was disassembled into the main body frame 4 and the outer frame 2 and seen from the back.

The pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment includes a frame-shaped outer frame 2 installed in an island facility (not shown) of a game hall, a door frame 3 for opening and closing the front surface of the outer frame 2, and a door frame 3. The main body frame 4 which is supported so as to be openable and closable and is attached to the outer frame 2 so as to be openable and closable, and the main body frame 4 which is detachably attached from the front side and can be seen from the player side through the door frame 3 It includes a game board 5 having a game area 5a into which a game ball is hit.

As shown in FIGS. 8 and 9, the outer frame 2 of the pachinko machine 1 includes an upper frame member 10 and a lower frame member 20 which are vertically separated and extend to the left and right, and an upper frame member 10 and a lower frame member. The left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40, which connect both ends of the 20 and extend vertically, are provided. The upper frame member 10, the lower frame member 20, the left frame member 30, and the right frame member 40 are formed to have the same width in the front and rear. Further, the vertical lengths of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 are formed longer than the left and right lengths of the upper frame member 10 and the lower frame member 20.

Further, the outer frame 2 is attached to the curtain plate member 50 which connects the lower ends of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 and is attached to the front side of the lower frame member 20 and to the left end side of the upper frame member 10 in the front view. The outer frame side upper hinge member 60 and the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 attached to the upper left end side of the curtain plate member 50 and the left frame member 30 are provided. The main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 are attached so as to be openable and closable by the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 and the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 of the outer frame 2.

The door frame 3 of the pachinko machine 1 has a frame-shaped door frame base unit 100 having a square outer shape in front view and having a through hole 111 penetrating the front and rear, and a game attached to the lower part of the front surface of the door frame base unit 100. A plate unit 200 having an upper plate 201 and a lower plate 202 capable of storing balls, a top unit 350 attached to the upper front surface of the door frame base unit 100, and a left side attached to the front left portion of the door frame base unit 100. The unit 400, the right side unit 450 attached to the front right part of the door frame base unit 100, and the game ball attached to the lower right part of the front surface of the door frame base unit 100 through the plate unit 200 and stored in the upper plate 201. A handle unit 500 that can be operated by the player to drive the door into the game area of the game board 5, and a plate unit 200 that receives a game ball that is attached to the lower part of the rear surface of the door frame base unit 100 and fails to hit into the game area. A foul cover unit 520 that discharges to the lower plate 202, a ball feed unit 540 that is attached to the lower part of the rear surface of the door frame base unit 100 and for sending the game ball of the upper plate 201 to the ball launcher 680, and a door frame base unit 100. It includes a glass unit 560 that is attached to the rear surface and closes the through hole 111, and a security cover 580 that covers the lower part of the rear surface of the glass unit 560.

The main body frame 4 of the pachinko machine 1 has a frame-shaped main body frame base 600 and a main body frame base 600 that can be partially inserted into the frame of the outer frame 2 and can support the outer periphery of the game board 5. It is attached to both the upper and lower ends on the left side of the front view and is rotatably attached to the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 and the outer frame side lower hinge member 70, respectively, and the door frame side upper hinge member 140 and the door frame of the door frame 3 are attached. The main body frame side upper hinge member 620 and the main body frame side lower hinge member 640 to which the lower side hinge member 150 is rotatably attached, the reinforcing frame 660 attached to the front left side surface of the main body frame base 600, and the main body frame base 600. A ball launcher 680 for hitting a game ball into the game area 5a of the game board 5 and an outer frame 2 and a main body frame 4 attached to the right side surface of the main body frame base when viewed from the front. , And the locking unit 700 that locks between the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4, and the reverse L that is attached to the rear side along the front view upper side and the left side of the main body frame base 600 and pays out the game ball to the player side. A character-shaped payout unit 800, a board unit 900 attached to the lower part of the rear surface of the main body frame base 600, and a game board 5 attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 600 so as to be openable and closable and attached to the main body frame base 600. It is provided with a back cover 980 that covers the rear side.

Inside the back cover 980, a main control unit 1300 that controls the progress of the game performed by the pachinko machine 1 is provided. The main control unit 1300 is provided with an accessory ratio indicator 1317. The accessory ratio display 1317 is composed of, for example, a 4-digit 7-segment LED. The accessory ratio display 1317 may be configured by the liquid crystal display device. The accessory ratio indicator 1317 may be provided not in the main control unit 1300 but in the payout control board unit 950.

Further, the liquid crystal display devices 1600, 3114, and 244 may display the accessory ratio without separately providing a display device for displaying the accessory ratio. In this case, if the accessory ratio is constantly displayed on any of the liquid crystal display devices 1600, 3114, and 244, the accessory ratio can be notified to the player, and the player may be able to confirm the condition of the pachinko machine.

As will be described later, the bonus ball ratio can be calculated by dividing the number of bonus balls acquired by the total number of balls acquired. For example, a pachinko machine with a high value of the bonus ratio (for example, 90%) will receive many prize balls depending on the jackpot. Since it has been obtained, it can be said that it is in good condition. On the other hand, a pachinko machine with a low value of the accessory ratio (for example, 10%) has few jackpot games and few prize balls during the jackpot, so it can be said that it is not in good condition. Therefore, the player can select the pachinko machine to play in consideration of the numerical value of the accessory ratio.

As a mode for notifying the player of the accessory ratio, the numerical value of the accessory ratio may be displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600. For example, when the accessory ratio is 70% or more, the numerical value is displayed in red and the frame lamp is lit or blinking in red, and when it is 69% to 30%, the numerical value is displayed in green and the frame lamp is lit or blinking in green. To do. The numerical value of the accessory ratio may be displayed in such a manner that it is not mistaken for a decorative pattern. For example, it may be displayed at a position that does not overlap with the display position of the decorative symbol when it does not fluctuate, or the size of the number indicating the accessory ratio may be smaller than that of the decorative symbol. The display mode may be divided into any number of stages.

Further, the player may be notified of the bonus ratio by changing the mode of the decorative symbol displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600 according to the numerical value of the bonus ratio. For example, when the accessory ratio is 70% or more, the decorative pattern is displayed in red and the frame lamp is lit or blinking in red. When the ratio is 69% to 30%, the decorative pattern is displayed in green and the frame lamp is lit in green. Or flashes. The display mode may be divided into any number of stages.

Further, it may be displayed on the liquid crystal display device 244 provided in the door frame 3. At that time, the above-mentioned display mode may be changed, or the display may be performed together with other information as well as the accessory ratio. Other information includes the number of big hits, the number of consecutive big hits (so-called number of consecutive chans), the number of balls held, and the remaining balance.

Further, not only the accessory ratio but also the continuous accessory ratio and the base value, which will be described later, may be displayed by changing the mode as described above. The display mode of the accessory ratio, the continuous accessory ratio, and the base value may be changed.

As shown in FIG. 13, the main control unit 1300 is enclosed in a transparent resin main control board box 1320 sealed with a structure that cannot be opened without breaking once closed, and is arranged on the printed circuit board. You can see the parts that have been made from the outside. Further, for example, when the back cover 980 is made of a transparent resin, the main control unit 1300 can be seen from the back side of the pachinko machine 1, and the accessory ratio indicator 1317 provided in the main control unit 1300 is pachinko. It can be seen from the back side of the machine 1. By enclosing the accessory ratio indicator 1317 in the main control board box 1320, it is possible to prevent unauthorized modification of the accessory ratio indicator 1317 to make the game machine 1 look low in gambling, and the game machine 1 is accurate. Can display gambling.

When the back cover 980 is made of opaque resin, pachinko can be made by making a hole in the back cover 980 at the position of the accessory ratio indicator 1317 or by making the position of the accessory ratio indicator 1317 transparent. The accessory ratio indicator 1317 may be viewed from the back side of the machine 1.

Further, even when the back cover 980 is made of a transparent resin, by forming the surface of the back cover 980 at the position of the accessory ratio indicator 1317 flat or by forming the back cover 980 thinly, the accessory ratio indicator is formed. The ratio display 1317 may be easily seen from the back side of the pachinko machine 1.

Below the back surface of the pachinko machine 1, there is provided a discharge port for collecting game balls that have flowed out of the game area 5a via the out ports 1111 and winning ports 2001, 2005, 2006, etc., and discharging them to the outside of the pachinko machine 1. ing. The game balls discharged from the discharge port are supplied to the ball tank 802 through the island facility. The pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment is provided with a discharge ball sensor 3060 that detects game balls discharged from the discharge port.

As shown in FIG. 13, the main control unit 1300 is provided with the accessory ratio display switch 1318. The main control board box 1320 is provided with a hole in which the accessory ratio display switch 1318 can be operated. It is preferable to indicate on the printed circuit board near the accessory ratio display switch 1318 or on the main control board box 1320 that the switch is for operating the accessory ratio display (printing, engraving, sticker, etc.). It is desirable that the accessory ratio display switch 1318 is provided near the accessory ratio indicator 1317, but even if it is not the main control unit 1300, if it is in a place where it is easy to operate, another board (for example, an effect) It may be provided on the control board 4700, the power supply device 4112), the housing 4100, or the front member 4200. It may be provided on the peripheral control unit 1500, the relay board provided separately from the main control unit 1300, the power supply board in the power supply board box 930 on the frame side, or the payout control board unit 950. Further, as will be described later, the accessory ratio display switch 1318 may also be used as a RAM clear switch. By providing the accessory ratio display switch 1318 at a position where the player cannot operate it, it is possible to prevent the player from erroneously operating it.

The payout unit 800 of the main body frame 4 is attached to the upper part of the inverted L-shaped payout unit base 801 attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 600 and the payout unit base 801 and extends to the left and right open upward. A ball tank 802 for storing game balls supplied from island equipment (not shown in a box shape) and a game ball attached to the payout unit base 801 under the ball tank 802, and the game balls in the ball tank 802 are viewed to the left in the front view. A tank rail 803 extending to the left and right to guide, a ball guiding unit 820 attached to the rear surface of the upper left side of the front view of the payout unit base 801 and guiding the game ball from the tank rail 803 downward in a serpentine manner, and a ball guiding unit 820. The game ball, which is detachably attached from the payout unit base 801 on the lower side and is guided by the ball guide unit 820, is instructed from the payout control board 951 (see FIG. 17) housed in the payout control board unit 950. Based on this, the payout device 830 and the game balls attached to the rear surface of the payout unit base 801 and paid out by the payout device 830 are guided downward, and the game balls are stored in the upper plate 201 of the plate unit 200. From the upper full tank path unit 850 that discharges the game ball from either the normal discharge port or the full tank discharge port according to the situation, and from the normal discharge port of the upper full tank path unit 850 attached to the lower end of the payout unit base 801. The released game ball is guided forward and guided from the front end to the through ball passage 526 of the door frame 3. The normal taxiway and the game ball released from the full tank discharge port are guided forward and the door frame 3 is guided from the front end. It is provided with a lower full tank path unit 860 having a full tank taxiway for guiding to the full tank receiver 530.

The board unit 900 of the main body frame 4 is a board unit base 910 attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 600 and a speaker for bass inside which is attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 600 on the left side of the front view of the board unit base 910. The speaker unit 920 having 921, the power supply board box 930 mounted on the right side of the front view on the rear side of the board unit base 910 and accommodating the power supply board inside, and the power supply board box 930 mounted on the rear side of the speaker unit 920 and inside. The interface control board box 940 in which the interface control board is housed, and the payout control board 951 which is mounted across the power supply board box 930 and the interface control board box 940 and controls the payout of game balls are housed therein. It includes a payout control board unit 950.

As shown in FIGS. 8 and 9, the game board 5 of the pachinko machine 1 divides the outer periphery of the game area 5a into which the game ball is hit, and the game ball launched from the ball launcher 680 is placed on the upper part of the game area 5a. A front component 1000 having an outer rail 1001 and an inner rail 1002 to guide the player, a flat plate-shaped game panel 1100 attached to the rear side of the front component 1000 and partitioning the rear end of the game area 5a, and a game panel 1100. It has a box-shaped board holder 1200 attached to the lower part of the rear side and opened upward, and a main control board 1310 attached to the rear side of the board holder 1200 to control the game of the pachinko machine 1. A table unit having a main control unit 1300 and a plurality of winning openings mounted in the game area 5a on the front side of the game panel 1100 and capable of receiving a game ball driven into the game area 5a (not shown). ), And a back unit 3000 attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 on the upper side of the board holder 1200.

In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the player rotates the handle lever 504 with the game balls stored in the upper plate 201, the ball launcher 680 plays the game with a strength corresponding to the rotation angle of the handle lever 504. The ball is driven into the game area 5a of the game board 5. Then, when the game balls driven into the game area 5a are received in a winning opening (not shown), a predetermined number of game balls are paid out to the upper plate 201 by the payout device 830 according to the received winning openings. .. Since the player's interest can be enhanced by paying out the game ball, the game ball in the upper plate 201 can be driven into the game area 5a, and the player can enjoy the game.

[2. Overall configuration of the game board]
Next, the overall configuration of the game board 5 of the pachinko machine 1 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 10 to 16. FIG. 10 is a front view of the game board. FIG. 11 is a perspective view of the game board viewed from the front right, FIG. 12 is a perspective view of the game board viewed from the front left, and FIG. 13 is a perspective view of the game board viewed from the back. Further, FIG. 14 is an exploded perspective view of the game board disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from the front, and FIG. 15 is an exploded perspective view of the game board disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from the rear. Further, FIG. 16 is a front view in which the front constituent members and the front unit of the game board are cut at substantially the center in the front-rear direction in the game area.

The game board 5 of the present embodiment has a game area 5a in which a game ball is hit by a player operating the handle lever 504 of the handle unit 500. Further, the game board 5 is attached to the rear side of the front component 1000, which divides the outer periphery of the game area 5a and has a substantially square outer shape in front view, and the rear end of the game area 5a. A plate-shaped game panel 1100 for partitioning, a board holder 1200 attached to the lower rear side of the game panel 1100, and a board holder 1200 attached to the rear surface of the board holder 1200, by driving a game ball into the game area 5a. It includes a main control unit 1300 having a main control board 1310 (see FIG. 17) that controls the game content. A plurality of obstacle nails that come into contact with the game ball are planted in a predetermined gauge arrangement in a portion of the front surface of the game panel 1100 that is within the game area 5a (not shown).

Further, the game board 5 displays a game status based on a control signal from the main control board 1310, and has a function display unit 1400 and a game panel visibly attached to the player side in the lower left corner of the front component 1000. Peripheral control unit 1500 mounted on the rear side of 1100, main liquid crystal display device 1600 arranged in the center of the game area 5a in front view and capable of displaying a predetermined effect image, and mounted on the front of the game panel 1100. The front unit 2000 and the back unit 3000 attached to the rear surface of the game panel 1100 are further provided. The main liquid crystal display device 1600 is attached to the rear surface of the back unit 3000, and the peripheral control unit 1500 is attached to the rear surface of the main liquid crystal display device 1600.

The game panel 1100 holds the transparent flat plate-shaped panel plate 1110 and the outer circumference of the panel plate 1110, which are formed to have an outer circumference slightly larger than the inner circumference of the frame-shaped front component 1000. It is provided with a frame-shaped panel holder 1120 that is attached to the rear side and to which the back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface.

The table unit 2000 has a plurality of general winning openings 2001 that are always open so that game balls driven into the game area 5a can be received, and the plurality of general winning openings 2001 are played at different positions in the game area 5a. The first starting port 2002, which is always open so that the ball can be received, the gate portion 2003, which is attached at a predetermined position in the game area 5a and detects the passage of the game ball, and the game ball passes through the gate portion 2003. The second starting port 2004, which enables the acceptance of game balls according to the result of the ordinary lottery, and the first special, which is drawn by accepting the game balls to the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004. It is provided with a first major winning opening 2005 and a second major winning opening 2006, which can accept game balls according to the lottery result or the second special lottery result. The second major winning opening 2006 is composed of two major winning openings, the second upper winning opening 2006a and the second lower winning opening 2006b, which are arranged in one flow path through which the game balls are distributed (Fig.). 16).

Further, the front unit 2000 is started with a start port unit 2100 which is mounted directly above the out port 1111 in the center of the game area 5a in the left-right direction and has a first start port 2002 and a first prize winning port 2005. It is mounted along the inner rail 1002 on the left side of the front view of the mouth unit 2100, and is mounted above the left end of the front view of the side unit lower 2200 having three general winning openings 2001 and the side unit lower 2200. A frame-shaped frame that is mounted on the side unit 2300 and approximately in the center of the game area 5a and has one general winning opening 2001, a gate portion 2003, a second starting opening 2004, and a second large winning opening 2006. It is equipped with a center accessory 2500.

The back unit 3000 is arranged in a box-shaped back box 3010 which is attached to the rear surface of the panel holder 1120 and has an open front and has a square opening 3010a in the rear wall, and a predetermined position in the back box 3010. A plurality of general winning opening sensors 3015 for detecting game balls received in the general winning opening 2001 of the cage front unit 2000, and a lock for detachably attaching the main liquid crystal display device 1600 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010. The mechanism 3020, the right ball passage unit 3030 for discharging the game ball, which is attached to the right end of the front view in the back box 3010 and has been received in the general winning opening 2001 and the second starting port 2004 of the center accessory 2500, A lower right ball passage unit that is installed near the front end of the lower right corner of the front view inside the back box 3010 and for discharging the game balls received in the second major winning opening 2006 and the second out opening 2543c of the center accessory 2500. It is equipped with 3035.

Further, the back unit 3000 is rotatably attached to the upper relay board 3040 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010, the upper relay board cover 3041 covering the rear side of the upper relay board 3040, and the rear surface of the back box 3010. The box-shaped effect drive board box 3042, the effect drive board 3043 housed in the effect drive board box 3042, the panel relay board 3044 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010, and the panel relay board 3044. A panel relay board cover 3045 that covers the rear side is provided.

Further, the back unit 3000 has a back left middle decorative unit 3050 attached upward from the center in the vertical direction on the left side side of the front view at the front end in the back box 3010, and a back unit below the opening 3010a in the back box 3010. The back bottom rear movable production unit 3100 mounted near the rear wall of the box 3010, the back top left movable production unit 3200 mounted above the opening 3010a in the back box 3010 and on the left side of the front view, and the back box. The back left movable effect unit 3300 mounted on the left side of the front view of the opening 3010a in the back box 3010, and the back top middle mounted from the center in the left-right direction to the right end of the front view above the opening 3010a in the back box 3010. It includes a movable effect unit 3400 and a back lower front movable effect unit 3500 attached in front of the back lower rear movable effect unit 3100 below the opening 3010 a in the back box 3010.

[2-1. Front component]
Next, the front component 1000 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 14 and 15. The front component 1000 has a substantially square outer shape when viewed from the front, and has a substantially circular inner shape penetrating in the front-rear direction, and the outer circumference of the game area 5a is divided by the inner circumference of the inner shape. The front component 1000 includes an outer rail 1001 that extends in an arc shape from the lower end to the left from the center in the left-right direction in the front view in an arc shape along the clockwise circumferential direction, passes through the upper end in the center in the left-right direction in the front view, and extends diagonally to the upper right. The game is played on the inner rail 1002, which is arranged inside the front component 1000 substantially along the outer rail 1001 and extends in an arc shape from the lower center in the left-right direction in the front view to the diagonally upper left side in the front view, and the right side in the front view of the lower end of the inner rail 1002. It includes an out-guide portion 1003, which is formed at the lowest position of the region 5a and is inclined so as to be lowered toward the rear.

Further, the front component 1000 has a lower right rail 1004 and a lower right rail 1004 that are linearly inclined so that the right end side is slightly higher from the right end of the out guide portion 1003 in the front view to the vicinity of the right side of the front component 1000. Right rail 1005 extending from the right end of the front component 1000 to the lower side of the upper end of the outer rail 1001 along the right side of the front component 1000, and the upper end curved inward of the front component 1000, and the upper end and outer rail of the right rail 1005. It is provided with an abutting portion 1006 that is connected to the upper end of the 1001 and is in contact with a game ball that has rolled along the outer rail 1001.

Further, the front component 1000 is rotatably supported by the upper end of the inner rail 1002, and extends upward from the upper end of the inner rail 1002 so as to close between the front component 1000 and the front view clock. A backflow prevention member urged by a spring (not shown) so as to be rotatable only with an open position that rotates in the circumferential direction and opens between the outer rail 1001 and returns to the closed position side. It is equipped with 1007.

A launch ball sensor 1020 for detecting a game ball driven into the game area 5a is provided on the back surface side of the game board 5 near the exits of the rails 1001 and 1002 (preferably immediately after passing through the backflow prevention member 1007). For example, the launch ball sensor 1020 is composed of a magnetic sensor, and when it detects a game ball that has passed through the backflow prevention member 1007 and has flowed into the game area 5a, it outputs a signal. The launch ball sensor 1020 may be provided at a position in the game area where the game ball always passes. By fixing the position of the launch ball sensor 1020 on the game board 5, the specifications can be standardized among a plurality of models, and the inspection at the manufacturing site and the inspection after installation in the hall become easy.

Further, the launch ball sensor 1020 provided upstream of the game area 5a such as near the exits of the rails 1001 and 1002 detects the out ball before the winning opening sensor detects the winning of the game ball. That is, since the game balls are detected in the order of the out balls and the prize balls, the base value can be calculated accurately without detecting the prize balls caused by the game balls that are not counted as the out balls.

[2-2. Game panel]
Next, the game panel 1100 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 14 and 15. The game panel 1100 holds a flat plate-shaped panel plate 1110 whose outer circumference is slightly larger than the inner circumference of the frame-shaped front component 1000 and which is made of a transparent synthetic resin, and the outer circumference of the panel plate 1110. It is provided with a frame-shaped panel holder 1120 which is attached to the rear side of the front component 1000 and to which the back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface. The panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 is formed with an out port 1111 penetrating back and forth at the lowest position in the game area 5a. Further, the panel plate 1110 is formed with a plurality of openings 1112 that penetrate the panel plate 1110 in the front-rear direction and for mounting the table unit 2000.

The panel holder 1120 of the game panel 1100 holds the panel plate 1110 detachably from the rear side. Further, the panel holder 1120 is formed with a plurality of mounting holes and positioning holes for mounting the back unit 3000 on the rear surface.

When the game panel 1100 is attached to the rear side of the front component 1000, the out port 1111 of the panel plate 1110 is opened on the rear side of the out guide portion 1003 of the front component 1000. As a result, the game ball that has flowed down to the lower end of the game area 5a is guided to the rear out port 1111 by the out guide unit 1003, and is discharged to the rear side of the game panel 1100 through the out port 1111.

[2-3. Board holder]
Next, the substrate holder 1200 will be described with reference to FIGS. 11 to 15. The substrate holder 1200 is formed in a horizontally long box shape with the upper side and the front side open, and the bottom surface is inclined so as to be lowered toward the center in the left-right direction. When assembled on the game board 5, the board holder 1200 can cover the lower part of the back unit 3000 attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 from below. As a result, all the game balls discharged to the rear side of the game panel 1100 through the out port 1111 and the game balls discharged downward from the front unit 2000 and the back unit 3000 can be received and formed on the bottom surface. It can be discharged downward from the discharged unit 1201 (see FIG. 14).

[2-4. Main control board unit]
Next, the main control unit 1300 will be described with reference to FIGS. 11 to 15 and 17. The main control unit 1300 is detachably attached to the rear surface of the board holder 1200. The main control unit 1300 includes a main control board 1310 that controls game contents, payout of game balls, and the like, and a main control board box 1320 that houses the main control board 1310 and is attached to the board holder 1200. ..

The main control board box 1320 is provided with a plurality of sealing mechanisms, and when the main control board box 1320 is closed by using one sealing mechanism, the sealing mechanism is destroyed in order to open the main control board box 1320. It is necessary to leave a trace of opening and closing of the main control board box 1320. Therefore, by looking at the traces of opening and closing, it is possible to detect unauthorized opening and closing of the main control board box 1320, and the deterrence against illegal acts on the main control board 1310 is enhanced.

[2-5. Function display unit]
Next, the function display unit 1400 will be described with reference to FIGS. 10 to 12. As shown in the figure, the function display unit 1400 is attached to the lower left corner of the front component 1000 on the outside of the game area 5a. This function display unit 1400 can be visually recognized from the front (player side) through the through hole 111 of the door frame 3 in a state where the game board 5 is assembled in the pachinko machine 1. (see FIG. 1). The function display unit 1400 uses a plurality of LEDs based on control signals from the main control board 1310 to display a game state (game status), a normal lottery result, a special lottery result, and the like.

Although detailed illustration is omitted, the function display unit 1400 has a status indicator consisting of one LED for displaying the game status and two LEDs based on the result of a normal lottery drawn by the passage of the game ball to the gate unit 2003. A normal symbol display that displays these two LEDs in a lighting mode according to the normal lottery result after the normal symbol is variablely displayed by controlling blinking, and a variable display of the normal symbol related to the passage of the game ball to the gate portion 2003. Of these, a normal hold indicator consisting of two LEDs that displays the number of holds, which is the number of fluctuation displays for which the start condition of the change display has not yet been satisfied, and the acceptance of game balls into the first start port 2002 (starting prize). By controlling the blinking of eight LEDs based on the result of the first special lottery drawn by (occurrence), the first special symbol is displayed in a variable manner, and then these eight LEDs are displayed in a lighting mode according to the result of the first special lottery. Among the fluctuation displays of the first special symbol and the first special symbol related to the acceptance of the game ball to the first starting port 2002, the number of pending numbers, which is the number of fluctuation displays for which the start condition of the fluctuation display has not yet been satisfied. Eight LEDs blink based on the first special hold number indicator consisting of two LEDs to display and the second special lottery result drawn by accepting the game ball to the second starting port 2004 (occurrence of starting prize). A second special symbol display that displays these eight LEDs in a lighting mode according to the result of the second special lottery after variable display of the second special symbol by control, and acceptance of a game ball into the second starting port 2004. The second special hold number indicator consisting of two LEDs that display the number of holds, which is the number of change displays for which the start condition of the change display has not yet been satisfied, among the change displays of the second special symbol related to When the lottery result or the second special lottery result is "big hit" etc., a round indicator consisting of two LEDs that displays the number of repetitions (number of rounds) of the opening and closing pattern of the first big winning opening 2005 and the second big winning opening 2006. And, mainly equipped. A part of the display (for example, the first special symbol display) of the function display unit 1400 may be composed of 7-segment LEDs.

In this function display unit 1400, the number of holds, symbols, and the like can be displayed by appropriately turning on, turning off, blinking, and the like the provided LEDs.

[2-6. Peripheral control unit]
Next, the peripheral control unit 1500 will be described with reference to FIGS. 13 and 15. The peripheral control unit 1500 is attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000. The peripheral control unit 1500 includes a peripheral control board 1510 (see FIG. 17) that controls an effect presented to the player based on a control signal from the main control board 1310, and a peripheral control board that houses the peripheral control board 1510. It is equipped with a box 1520. The peripheral control board 1510 includes a peripheral control unit 1511 for controlling light emission effect, sound effect, movable effect, etc., and a liquid crystal display control unit 1512 for controlling the effect image (FIG. 17). reference).

[2-7. Main liquid crystal display device]
Next, the main liquid crystal display device 1600 will be described with reference to FIGS. 10 to 16. The main liquid crystal display device 1600 is arranged in the center of the game area 5a in the front view, and is attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 via the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000. More specifically, the main liquid crystal display device 1600 is detachably attached to the rear surface at the substantially center of the rear wall of the back box 3010. The main liquid crystal display device 1600 can be visually recognized from the front side (player side) through the frame of the frame-shaped center accessory 2500 in a state where the game board 5 is assembled. The main liquid crystal display device 1600 is a full-color display device backed by a white LED, and can display a still image or a moving image.

As shown in FIGS. 14 and 15, the main liquid crystal display device 1600 includes two left fixing pieces 1601 projecting outward from the left side surface in front view and a right fixing piece projecting outward from the right side surface in front view. It is equipped with 1602. The main liquid crystal display device 1600 has two fixing grooves 3010c opened on the left inner peripheral surface of the front view in the frame-shaped liquid crystal mounting portion of the back box 3010, which will be described later, with the liquid crystal screen facing forward. After inserting the two left fixing pieces 1601 diagonally from the rear of the box 3010, move the right fixing piece 1602 side forward, insert the right fixing piece 1602 into the opening of the lock mechanism 3020, and lower the lock mechanism 3020. It is attached to the back box 3010 by sliding it to.

[2-8. Overall configuration of table unit]
Next, the table unit 2000 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 10 to 12 and 14 to 16. The front unit 2000 of the game board 5 is attached to the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 from the front, the front end protrudes forward from the front surface of the panel plate 1110, and the rear end penetrates the opening 1112. It protrudes rearward from the rear surface of the panel plate 1110. The table unit 2000 of the present embodiment has a plurality of general winning openings 2001 that are always open and can accept game balls driven into the game area 5a, and the plurality of general winning openings 2001 are within the game area 5a. The first start port 2002, which is always open so that the game ball can be received at different positions, the gate portion 2003, which is installed at a predetermined position in the game area 5a and detects the passage of the game ball, and the game ball is a gate. A lottery is made by accepting game balls into the second starting port 2004 and the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004, which enables the acceptance of game balls according to the result of the ordinary lottery drawn by passing through the section 2003. The first special lottery result or the second special lottery result is provided, and the first special winning opening 2005 and the second special winning opening 2006 are provided so that the game balls can be accepted at either of them.

Three (four in this case) general winning openings 2001 are arranged in the lower part of the game area 5a, and the remaining one is arranged in the vicinity of the upper right of the front view in the game area 5a. The first starting port 2002 is arranged at the center in the left-right direction in the game area 5a and directly above the out port 1111. The gate portion 2003 is arranged in the game area 5a at the upper right of the front view and substantially directly below the abutment portion 1006. The second starting port 2004 is arranged on the right side of the front view from directly below the gate portion 2003. Of the plurality of general winning openings 2001 described above, the general winning openings 2001 arranged near the upper right of the front view in the game area 5a are arranged directly above the second starting opening 2004. The first big winning opening 2005 is arranged between the first starting opening 2002 and the out opening 1111. The second major winning opening 2006 is arranged on the right side of the front view of the first starting opening 2002 and above the first winning opening 2005.

As shown in FIG. 16, the second major winning opening 2006 in the table unit 2000 includes the second upper winning opening 2006a and the second lower winning opening 2006b arranged along one flow path through which the game balls circulate. It is composed of. In the second major winning opening 2006, the second upper winning opening 2006a is arranged near the lower right of the front view in the game area 5a, and the second lower winning opening 2006b is the front view of the second upper winning opening 2006a. It is located below on the left side.

Further, the front unit 2000 is started with a start port unit 2100 which is mounted directly above the out port 1111 in the center of the game area 5a in the left-right direction and has a first start port 2002 and a first prize winning port 2005. It is mounted along the inner rail 1002 on the left side of the front view of the mouth unit 2100, and is mounted above the left end of the front view of the side unit lower 2200 having three general winning openings 2001 and the side unit lower 2200. A frame-shaped frame that is mounted on the side unit 2300 and approximately in the center of the game area 5a and has one general winning opening 2001, a gate portion 2003, a second starting opening 2004, and a second large winning opening 2006. It is equipped with a center accessory 2500.

[2-8a. Starting port unit]
Next, the start port unit 2100 of the table unit 2000 will be described. The start port unit 2100 is arranged in the game area 5a near the lower end portion in the center in the left-right direction and directly above the out port 1111, and is attached to the panel plate 1110 from the front. The starting port unit 2100 has a first starting port 2002 and a first winning opening 2005.

The starting port unit 2100 is a flat plate-shaped unit base 2101 having a first large winning opening 2005 that is attached to the front surface of the panel plate 1110 and has a rectangular shape extending to the left and right and penetrates back and forth, and the first unit base 2101. The ball receiving portion 2102, which protrudes forward from the upper part of the center in the left-right direction to form the first starting port 2002, and the first starting port, which is attached to the rear side of the unit base 2101, above the large winning opening 2005. The ball guiding unit 2103 that guides the game ball received in 2002 downward, the first starting port sensor 2104 that is attached to the ball guiding unit 2103 and detects the game ball received in the first starting port 2002, and the first It includes a first attacker unit 2110 attached to the rear surface of the unit base 2101 so as to close the big winning opening 2005.

The first attacker unit 2110 of the starting port unit 2100 is attached to the rear surface of the unit base 2101 so as to close the first winning opening 2005 from the rear, and the front end is opened forward with approximately the same size as the first winning opening 2005. The box-shaped unit case 2111 and the first prize opening 2005 can be opened and closed. The first prize opening door is a horizontally long rectangular and flat plate with the lower side rotatably supported at the front end of the unit case 2111. The member 2112, the first attacker solenoid 2113 installed in the unit case 2111 and driving the opening and closing of the door member 2112, and the first large winning opening 2005 installed in the unit case 2111. The first big winning opening sensor 2114 that detects the game ball, the first starting opening sensor 2104, the first attacker solenoid, and the first big winning opening sensor 2114 and the main control board 1310 that are mounted on the upper surface of the unit case 2111. It is provided with a start port unit relay board 2115 that relays the connection with the device, and a start port unit decoration board (not shown) that is attached to the lower part of the unit case 2111 and is used to illuminate the first prize opening 2005. ing.

The ball receiving portion 2102 forming the first starting port 2002 is opened upward with a size capable of receiving only one game ball at a time. The first large winning opening 2005 penetrating the unit base 2101 opens forward in a size capable of accepting a plurality of game balls (for example, 4 to 6) at a time.

In the starting port unit 2100, the first starting port 2002 formed by the ball receiving portion 2102 opens upward, and the game ball received in the first starting port 2002 is unit-based by the ball guiding unit 2103. It can be guided downward on the rear side of the 2101, detected by the first start port sensor 2104, and then discharged downward through the first attacker unit 2110. In the present embodiment, two first start port sensors 2104 are provided, and on the main control board 1310, when the two first start port sensors 2104 detect a game ball within a predetermined time range, the first start port sensor 2104 is provided. It is determined that the game ball was accepted in 2002. Thereby, it is possible to detect an illegal act due to an illegal insertion of a tool into the first starting port 2002.

In the starting port unit 2100, by attaching the first attacker unit 2110 to the rear surface of the unit base 2101, the first large prize opening door member 2112 of the first attacker unit 2110 is opened to the unit base 2101. It is inserted into the mouth 2005 from the rear and closes the first prize opening 2005. The first prize-winning door member 2112 is rotatably attached to the left and right ends of the lower side by the unit case 2111 in an upright state with the first prize-winning door 2005 closed, and the upper side is forward and By rotating the door so as to move downward, the first prize opening 2005 can be changed from the closed state to the open state.

The first large winning opening door member 2112 of the first attacker unit 2110 stands upright in a normal state (a state in which the first attacker solenoid 2113 is not energized) and closes the first large winning opening 2005. Then, when the first attacker solenoid 2113 is energized according to the gaming state, the first large winning opening door member 2112 rotates so that the upper side moves forward and downward, and the upper side moves slightly above the lower side. It will be in the positioned state. That is, the first grand prize opening door member 2112 is in a state of being inclined so as to be higher from the lower side of the first grand prize opening 2005 toward the front.

In this state, when the game ball flows down in front of the first prize opening door 2005 and comes into contact with the first prize opening door member 2112, the distribution direction of the game ball is from below due to the inclination of the first prize opening door member 2112. It changes to the rear and is accepted by the first prize opening 2005 and enters the unit case 2111. Then, the game ball received in the first prize opening 2005 is discharged downward from the lower surface of the unit case 2111 after being detected by the first prize opening sensor 2114.

[3. Control configuration]
Next, a control configuration for performing various controls of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 17 is a block diagram schematically showing a control configuration of a pachinko machine. As shown in the figure, the main control configuration of the pachinko machine 1 is composed of a main control board 1310 and a peripheral control board 1510 attached to the game board 5, and a payout control board 951 attached to the main body frame 4. Each control is shared. The main control board 1310 controls the game operation (progress of the game). The peripheral control board 1510 includes a peripheral control unit 1511 that controls various effect devices during a game based on commands from the main control board 1310, and a main liquid crystal display device 1600 and a precision liquid crystal display device based on commands from the peripheral control unit 1511. It is provided with a liquid crystal display control unit 1512 that controls the display of the effect image on the display device 244 or the like. The payout control board 951 includes a payout control unit 952 that controls payout of the game ball and the like, and a launch control unit 953 that controls the launch of the game ball by the rotation operation of the handle lever 504.

[3-1. Main control board]
The main control board 1310 that controls the progress of the game includes a main control MPU 1311 that is a microprocessor in which a ROM 1313 that stores various processing programs and various commands, a RAM 1312 that temporarily stores data, and the like are built, and an input / output device (I). Main control I / O port 1314 as (/ O device), main control input circuit 1315 to which detection signals from various detection switches are input, main control solenoid drive circuit 1316 to drive various solenoids, and main control. It is provided with a RAM clear switch for completely erasing the information stored in the RAM built in the MPU 1311. In addition to the built-in ROM and RAM, the main control MPU 1311 also has a built-in watchdog timer for monitoring its operation (system) and a function for preventing fraud.

The main control MPU 1311 of the main control board 1310 has a first start port sensor 2104 that detects a game ball received in the first start port 2002, and a second start port sensor that detects a game ball received in the second start port 2004. 2551, the general winning opening sensor 3015 that detects the game ball received in the general winning opening 2001, the gate sensor 2547 that detects the game ball that has passed through the gate unit 2003, and detects the game ball received in the first major winning opening 2005. The first large winning opening sensor 2114, the second upper winning opening 2006a as the second major winning opening 2006, and the second upper winning opening sensor 2554 and the second upper winning opening sensor 2554 that detect the game ball received in the second lower grand winning opening 2006b. Detection signals from the second lower winning opening sensor 2557, the ejection ball sensor 3060, the launch ball sensor 1020, the magnetic detection sensor that detects illegal magnetism in the game area 5a, etc. are transmitted via the main control I / O port 1314, respectively. Is entered.

The main control MPU 1311 outputs a control signal from the main control I / O port 1314 to the main control solenoid drive circuit based on these detection signals, so that the start port solenoid 2550, the first attacker solenoid 2113, and the second upper attacker A drive signal is output to the solenoid 2553 and the second lower attacker solenoid 2556, and the first special symbol display, the second special symbol display, and the first special symbol memory of the function display unit 1400 are output from the main control I / O port 1314. A drive signal is output to a display, a second special symbol storage display, a normal symbol display, a normal symbol storage display, a game status display, a round display, and the like.

In the present embodiment, the first start port sensor 2104, the second start port sensor 2551, the gate sensor 2547, the first large winning opening sensor 2114, the second upper winning opening sensor 2554, and the second lower winning opening A non-contact type electromagnetic proximity switch is used for the sensor 2557, while a contact type ON / OFF operation type mechanical switch is used for the general winning opening sensor 3015. This is because the game ball frequently enters the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004 and frequently passes through the gate portion 2003, so that the first start port sensor 2104 and the second start port sensor 2551, And the detection of the game ball by the gate sensor 2547 also occurs frequently. Therefore, the proximity switch having high durability and long life is used for the first start port sensor 2104, the second start port sensor 2551, and the gate sensor 2547. In addition, when an advantageous gaming state (“big hit” game, etc.) that is advantageous to the player occurs, the first big winning opening 2005 and the second big winning opening 2006 are opened (or expanded), and the game ball is frequently played. In order to enter the ball, the detection of the game ball by the first large winning opening sensor 2114, the second upper winning opening sensor 2554, and the second lower large winning opening sensor 2557 also occurs frequently. For this reason, the first grand prize opening sensor 2114, the second upper winning opening sensor 2554, and the second lower winning opening sensor 2557 also use proximity switches with high durability and long life. On the other hand, in the general winning opening 2001 where the game ball does not enter frequently, the detection by the general winning opening sensor 3015 does not occur frequently. Therefore, the general winning opening sensor 3015 uses a mechanical switch having a shorter life than the proximity switch.

Further, the main control MPU 1311 transmits various information related to the game (game information) and various commands related to payout to the payout control board 951, and receives various commands related to the state of the pachinko machine 1 from the payout control board 951. Or something. Further, the main control MPU 1311 sends various commands related to the control of the game effect executed by the main liquid crystal display device 1600 and the like and various commands related to the state of the pachinko machine 1 to the peripheral control board 1510 via the main control I / O port 1314. It may be transmitted to the peripheral control unit 1511. When the main control MPU 1311 receives various commands related to the state of the pachinko machine 1 from the payout control board 951, these various commands are shaped and transmitted to the peripheral control unit 1511.

Various voltages are supplied to the main control board 1310 from the power supply board in the power supply board box 930. The power supply board that supplies various voltages to the main control board 1310 is an electric double layer capacitor (hereinafter, simply referred to as "capacitor") as a backup power source for supplying power to the main control board 1310 for a predetermined time even when the power supply is cut off. To do.) With this capacitor, the main control MPU 1311 can store various information in the RAM 1312 in the power off processing even when the power is cut off. When the RAM clear switch of the main control board 1310 is operated when the power is turned on, the various stored information is completely erased (cleared) from the RAM 1312. The operation signal (detection signal) of the RAM clear switch is also output to the payout control board 951.

Further, the main control board 1310 is provided with a power failure monitoring circuit. This power failure monitoring circuit monitors a decrease in various voltages supplied from the power supply board, and outputs a power failure warning signal as a power failure warning when those voltages are equal to or lower than the power failure warning voltage. This power failure warning signal is input to the main control MPU 1311 via the main control I / O port 1314, and is also output to the payout control board 951 and the like.

The accessory ratio indicator 1317 is attached to the main control board 1310 at a position visible from the back surface side of the pachinko machine 1. The accessory ratio display 1317 displays the accessory ratio calculated by the main control MPU 1311.

Further, the main control board 1310 is provided with the accessory ratio display switch 1318. The accessory ratio display switch 1318 may be composed of a push button switch that performs a momentary operation, but may be a switch of another type. When the accessory ratio display switch 1318 is operated, the accessory ratio is displayed on the accessory ratio display 1317. The accessory ratio display 1317 may always display the accessory ratio, and the display content may be switched by operating the accessory ratio display switch 1318.

FIG. 18 is a diagram showing a configuration in the main control MPU 1311.

The main control MPU 1311 includes CPU 13111, RAM 1312, ROM 1313, random number generation circuit 13112, parallel input port 13113, serial communication circuit 13114, timer circuit 13115, interrupt controller 13116, external bus interface 13117, clock circuit 13118, collation block 13119, and unique. It has information 13120, arithmetic circuit 13121, and reset circuit 13122.

The CPU 13111 executes the program stored in the ROM 1313. The RAM 1312 stores data required when the program is executed.

The main control MPU 1311 is provided with one or more random number generation circuits 13112. The random number generation circuit 13112 provides a random number for determining the lottery result of the result of the variable display game (first special lottery result, second special lottery result) and the effect content of the variable display game. The random number generation circuit 13112 is, for example, a so-called hard random number generation means that outputs a random number updated at the timing of the clock period (or a signal obtained by dividing the clock period) supplied to the main control MPU 1311. The hard random number generated by the random number generation circuit 13112 is used for a lottery for winning a special symbol, a lottery for a winning symbol in a special symbol variation display game, and a lottery for winning a normal symbol.

The parallel input port 13113 is a port to which detection signals from various detection switches are input via the main control input circuit 1315.

The serial communication circuit 13114 transmits and receives various commands related to the control of the game effect and various commands related to the state of the pachinko machine 1 to and from the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 via the main control I / O port 1314. Further, the serial communication circuit 13114 transmits and receives various information related to the game (game information) and various commands related to the payout of the game ball to and from the payout control board 951 via the main control I / O port 1314. Further, the serial communication circuit 13114 transmits data for displaying the accessory ratio to the accessory ratio display 1317. The detailed configuration of the serial communication circuit 13114 will be described later with reference to FIG.

The timer circuit 13115 is a timer for timer interrupts and various time controls. The interrupt controller 13116 controls various interrupts (general interrupts, NMIs that cannot be masked by software) to the CPU 13111. That is, when the interrupt controller 13116 detects an interrupt, it refers to the vector table defined for each type of interrupt and jumps to the address set in the vector table.

The external bus interface 13117 is an interface for connecting the internal bus of the main control MPU 1311 to an external device. I / O request (IORQ), read (RD), write (WR), 16-bit address (A0 to A15), and 8-bit data (D0 to D7) can be input and output from the external bus interface 13117.

The clock circuit 13118 generates the internal clock of the main control MPU 1311 from the input external clock signal (for example, 32 MHz). Further, the clock circuit 13118 divides the input clock signal by a set number and outputs the clock signal to the outside from the CLKO terminal. For example, the clock signal supplied to the driver circuit 13171 (see FIG. 28) of the accessory ratio display 1317 may be output.

The collation block 13119 is a functional block that collates whether the ROM 1313 has been tampered with by using a predetermined code. The unique information 13120 is an ID unique to the main control MPU 1311 and is written in a non-rewritable manner when the chip is manufactured.

The arithmetic circuit 13121 provides an arithmetic function that does not depend on the program recorded in the ROM 1313. This arithmetic function is fixedly written at the time of manufacturing the chip.

The reset circuit 13122 has a non-designated running prohibition circuit, a watchdog timer, and a user reset function. When the CPU 13111 accesses an address other than the predetermined address of the ROM 1313, the non-designated travel prohibition circuit presumes that the access is due to an invalid program and resets the operation of the main control MPU 1311. The watchdog timer outputs a timeout signal when a predetermined timer time has elapsed, and resets the operation of the main control MPU 1311. The user reset function resets the operation of the main control MPU 1311 by the reset signal input to the SRST terminal.

FIG. 19 is a block diagram showing a detailed configuration of the arithmetic circuit 13121.

The calculation circuit 13121 provides a calculation function that does not depend on a program for the calculation result, and has a multiplication circuit 131211 and a division circuit 131215.

The multiplication circuit 131211 is an arithmetic circuit that multiplies two values of a predetermined number of bits (for example, 16 bits) and outputs a product of 32 bits, and converts an input value (multiplier, multiplicand) into a product by a multiplication function. It functions as an output conversion circuit.

The CPU 13111 of the main control MPU 1311 stores a multiplier and a multiplicand of 16 bits or less in the multiplication input register A131212 and the multiplication input register B131213. The multiplication circuit 131211 reads the values stored in the two 16-bit multiplication input registers 131212 and 131213 at predetermined timings, and stores the result of multiplying the two values in the multiplication result register 131214. The CPU 13111 acquires the multiplication result from the multiplication result register 131214. The process from writing the value to the multiplication input registers 131212 and 131213 to storing the calculation result in the multiplication result register 131214 is configured to be completed in a predetermined time (for example, one clock), and the CPU 13111 is configured to complete the multiplication input register 131212. , 131213, and after a predetermined number of clocks have elapsed, the multiplication result can be obtained by referring to the multiplication result register 131214.

The division circuit 131215 is an arithmetic circuit that outputs a 32-bit quotient and a 32-bit remainder by dividing a divisor of a predetermined number of bits (for example, 32 bits) by a divisor of a predetermined number of bits (for example, 32 bits). It functions as a conversion circuit that converts input values (divisors and divisors) into quotients and remainders by a function and outputs them.

The CPU 13111 of the main control MPU 1311 stores a division number of 32 bits or less in the division input register A131216, and stores a division of 32 bits or less in the division input register B131217. When the division circuit 131215 detects that a value is stored in both the two 32-bit division input registers 131216 and 131217, the division circuit 131215 reads the stored value at a predetermined timing and divides the divisor by the divisor to obtain the quotient. The division result register A131218 stores the remainder, and the division result register B131219 stores the remainder. Further, when the division circuit 131215 reads the value stored in the division input registers 131216 and 131217, the read value may be erased and the register may be cleared. Further, the division circuit 131215 may read the values stored in the division input registers 131216 and 131217 at the timing when the start instruction is input, and store the division result in the division result registers 131218 and 131219. In this case, the values stored in the division input registers 131216 and 131217 do not have to be erased at the read timing. Further, the division input registers 131216 and 131217 may be able to overwrite the value even if the value is already stored (without clearing the stored value).

The CPU 13111 acquires the division result from the division result registers 131218 and 131219. From writing the value to the division input registers 131216 and 131217 to storing the operation result in the division result registers 131218 and 131219, the process is configured to be completed in a predetermined time (for example, 32 clocks), and the CPU 13111 is configured to complete the division input. The values are stored in the registers 131216 and 131217, and after the predetermined number of clocks has elapsed, the quotient and the remainder can be obtained by referring to the division result registers 131218 and 131219, respectively.

In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, as will be described later, a division process is required to calculate the base value, and the division executed by the CPU 13111 by the CPU 13111 is executed by a plurality of multiplications and subtractions, so that a considerable amount of time is required. This is the case. Therefore, it is difficult to execute the base calculation process for each timer interrupt process, and it is difficult to display the base value without delay. On the other hand, by performing the division process using the arithmetic circuit 13121, the time required for calculating the base value can be shortened, and the base value can be calculated multiple times in one timer interrupt process (see FIGS. 75 and 80). .. Further, since the CPU 13111 is not occupied for the division process from the writing of the value to the division input registers 131216 and 131217 of the arithmetic circuit 13121 to the reading of the arithmetic result from the division result register A131218, other processing can be executed. Base calculation processing during timer interrupt processing can be executed efficiently.

FIG. 20 is a diagram showing the configuration of the serial communication circuit 13114.

The serial communication circuit 13114 has four data transmission / reception circuits, and each data transmission / reception circuit transmits / receives data for one channel to / from a predetermined device. Note that FIG. 20 illustrates only the data transmission circuit, and the description of the data reception circuit (for example, one channel is implemented) will be omitted.

In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, as described above, the serial communication circuit 13114 has channel 0 used for communication with the peripheral control board 1510, channel 1 used for communication with the payout control board 951, and an accessory ratio. Three channels of channel 2 used for communication with the driver circuit 13171 of the display 1317 are used, and channel 3 is unused.

The serial communication circuit 13114 includes a data register 3141, a transmission data register 3142, a parity generation circuit 3143, a transmission shift register 3144, a command status register 3145, a communication setting register 3146, a transmission trigger setting level register 3147, a baud rate register 3148, and a baud rate generation circuit. It has 3149.

The data input from the CPU 13111 is stored in the data register 3141 and then stored in the transmission data register 3142. The transmission data register 3142 is composed of a FIFO having a predetermined capacity (for example, 64 bytes). The transmission data register 3142 adds an error detection code generated by the parity generation circuit 3143 for each data transmission unit to the data to be transmitted, and stores the error detection code in the transmission shift register 3144.

The baud rate generation circuit 3149 generates a transmission clock signal for transmitting data at a rate set in the baud rate register 3148 from the clock signal supplied from the clock circuit 13118. Then, the transmission shift register 3144 transmits data according to the transmission clock signal.

The command status register 3145 is a register that is referred to for confirming the transmission status.

The communication setting register 3146 stores commands for controlling the transmission of data. The transmission trigger setting level register 3147 stores a threshold value for controlling the amount of data in which the FIFO of the transmission data register 3142 generates an interrupt. The baud rate register 3148 stores a baud rate setting for defining a data transmission rate. The communication setting register 3146, the transmission trigger setting level register 3147, and the baud rate register 3148 are set for each of the four channels as initial settings in step S28 of FIG.

Hereinafter, these settings will be described in detail. The communication format of each channel is set in the communication setting register. Specifically, the presence / absence of use of FIFO (FIFO mode, normal mode), the number of stop bit bits, and parity (whether parity is used, even parity, or odd parity) are set. For example, in channel 0 used for communication with the peripheral control board 1510 and channel 1 used for communication with the payout control board 951, the FIFO mode, stop bit = 1 bit, and 1 ××× 1010B meaning even parity. Is set, and in the channel 2 used for communication with the driver circuit 13171 of the accessory ratio display 1317, the FIFO mode, the stop bit = 1 bit, and 1 ××× 1000B meaning that parity is not used are set.

In the FIFO mode, data is transmitted using the FIFO of the transmit data register 3142. Further, since the gaming machine is in a noisy environment, it is desirable to set the parity when transmitting data to the outside of the main control board 1310 at high speed.

Since the accessory ratio indicator 1317 is mounted on the main control board 1310, the influence of noise is small as compared with communication with other boards via communication wires. Further, since the amount of data to be transmitted / received is small, the communication speed may be low, and there is little need to use parity. In addition, along the pattern of transmitting a signal between the driver circuit 13171 of the accessory ratio display 1317 and the main control MPU 1311 (for example, the left / right and / or thickness direction of the signal line provided on the surface or inner layer of the printed circuit board). A ground pattern is provided on the layer adjacent to the ground pattern, and the noise superimposed on the signal transmission pattern can be reduced by the shielding effect of the ground pattern.

The transmission trigger setting level register 3147 determines the amount of data that the FIFO of the transmission data register 3142 generates an interrupt. Specifically, when the amount of transmission data stored in the FIFO of the transmission data register 3142 is smaller than the set number of bytes, a predetermined bit of the status register corresponding to each channel is set. By determining the relevant bit in the status register, it is possible to confirm whether or not there is a free space in the FIFO of the transmission data register 3142, and it is possible to determine the transmission timing of the data stored in the FIFO of the transmission data register 3142.

The bit in the status register can be used to determine whether the transmit FIFO has an abnormality. For example, even if data is not written to the FIFA of the transmission data register 3142 for a predetermined period, if the bit of the status register is not set, there is no free space in the FIFA of the transmission data register 3142, so that the transmission data register 3142 It may be determined that no data has been transmitted from the FIFA, and error processing (for example, error notification) may be executed.

The baud rate register 3148 determines the data transmission rate. For example, 19200 bps is set for channel 0 used for communication with the peripheral control board 1510, 1200 bps is set for channel 1 used for communication with the payout control board 951, and the driver circuit 13171 of the accessory ratio indicator 1317 is set. 1200 bps is set for the channel 2 used for communication with.

In this way, the transmission rate is changed according to the data transmitted in each channel. This is because the game ball is rolling inside the game machine, and the electronic circuit of the game machine is in an environment susceptible to noise. Therefore, the data is transmitted to the payout control board 951 at a low speed so that the data for controlling the ball ejection directly related to the profit given to the player is surely transmitted. On the other hand, the peripheral control board 1510 transmits data at a high rate because the amount of data to be transmitted is large and has nothing to do with the exit of the ball. Further, the peripheral control board 1510 verifies whether the received command is abnormal, and when it is determined that the command is abnormal, the peripheral control board 1510 is not operated or abnormal processing (for example, communication error notification) is executed, and the command is executed. Request to resend. Then, when it is determined that the retransmitted command is normal, the state of the peripheral control board 1510 is restored by using the normal command. Therefore, in the communication with the peripheral control board 1510, data can be transmitted at a high rate. Further, if the communication rate with the peripheral control board 1510 is lowered, the player can recognize the delay from the winning of the starting port to the start of the fluctuation of the symbol, which may reduce the interest.

Communication with the driver circuit 13171 of the accessory ratio display 1317 can be performed at a high rate (19200 bps, which is the data transmission rate with the peripheral control board 1510) or at a low rate (1200 bps, which is the data transmission rate with the payout control board 951). Good. Further, communication with the driver circuit 13171 of the accessory ratio display 1317 is performed at a high rate (19200 bps, which is the data transmission rate with the peripheral control board 1510) and a low rate (1200 bps, which is the data transmission rate with the payout control board 951). A rate between and may be adopted. This is because, when the data transmission rate is increased, there is a possibility that other circuits may malfunction due to switching noise of the transistor of the driver circuit 13171 of the accessory ratio display 1317. On the other hand, even if an abnormality occurs in the transmitted data due to noise, the same data is retransmitted for each timer interrupt unless the transmitted data is updated, and if the retransmitted command is normal, the display content of the accessory ratio indicator 1317. Is returned to normal, so it is not necessary to make the transmission rate extremely slow.

The command status register 3145 is a register that is referred to for confirming the transmission status. For example, each bit is defined as follows.
Bit 7: A flag indicating SnTC transmission completion, 0 indicating transmission in progress, and 1 indicating transmission completion. Bit 6: In SnTDBE normal mode (communication mode that does not use FIFO), it is a flag indicating transmission data emptyness, 0 indicates that it has not been transferred to the transmission shift register, and 1 indicates that it has been transferred to the transmission shift register. That is, when the data is transferred from the transmission data register 3142 to the transmission shift register 3144 and the transmission data is not stored in the transmission data register 3142, the data is set.

In the SnTFL FIFO mode, it is a flag indicating the transmission FIFO trigger level. 0 is the amount of transmission data stored in the FIFO of the transmission data register 3142 is equal to or higher than the trigger level, and 1 is stored in the FIFO of the transmission data register 3142. Indicates that the amount of transmitted data is less than the trigger level. That is, it is set when the amount of transmission data stored in the FIFO of the transmission data register 3142 is less than the number of bytes set in the transmission trigger level setting register. Therefore, at the time of communication in the FIFO mode, after confirming that the bit is 1, data is written to the FIFO of the transmission data register 3142.
Bits 5 to 2: Unused (fixed to 0)
Bit 1: A bit for clearing the SnTCL transmission buffer and break code transmission, emptying the transmission data, or setting the transmission FIFO trigger level (SnTFL), which is written from the outside. For example, when forcibly clearing the contents of the buffer, 1 is set in the relevant bit. More specifically, it is used when a command is written to the FIFO, but the transmission of the written command is stopped due to some reason (for example, an abnormality occurs). Even if bit 1 is set, the data in the transmission shift register is not cleared.

With the configuration described above, the serial communication circuit 13114 is capable of synchronous communication (asynchronous communication), but outputs a clock signal for synchronous communication (not shown). In this case, the clock signal supplied to the communication partner (driver circuit 13171 of the accessory ratio display 1317) is output from the serial communication circuit 13114 instead of the clock circuit 13118. Each transmission / reception circuit of the serial communication circuit 13114 may be capable of synchronous communication by setting at least one channel, and a serial communication circuit for pacing synchronization and a serial communication circuit for synchronous communication may be separately provided.

Further, although not shown, the serial communication circuit 13114 outputs a signal (LOAD) indicating a data acquisition timing used during synchronous communication.

[3-2. Payout control board]
Returning to FIG. 17, the description of the control configuration of the pachinko machine will be continued. Although detailed illustration of the payout control board 951 for controlling the payout of the game ball is omitted, the payout control unit 952 that performs various controls related to the payout, the launch control by the launch solenoid 682, and the ball by the ball feed solenoid 551 are performed. A launch control unit 953 that performs feed control, an error LED display that displays the status of the pachinko machine 1, an error release switch for canceling the error displayed on the error LED display, a ball tank 802, and a tank rail. 803, a ball guidance unit 820, and a ball removing switch for discharging the game ball in the payout device 830 to the outside of the pachinko machine 1 and starting the ball removing operation are provided.

[3-2a. Payout control unit]
Although detailed illustration is omitted, the payout control unit 952 that performs various controls related to payout on the payout control board 951 is a micro that contains a ROM for storing various processing programs and various commands, a RAM for temporarily storing data, and the like. A payout control MPU that is a processor, a payout control I / O port as an I / O device, an external WDT (external watchdog timer) for monitoring whether or not the payout control MPU is operating normally, and a payout. It includes a payout motor drive circuit for outputting a drive signal to the payout motor 834 of the device 830, and a payout control input circuit for inputting detection signals from various detection switches related to payout. In addition to the built-in ROM and RAM, the payout control MPU also has a built-in function to prevent fraud.

The payout control MPU of the payout control unit 952 receives various information (game information) related to the game from the main control board 1310 and various commands related to the payout in a serial manner via the payout control I / O port, or the main control board 1310. The operation signal (detection signal) of the RAM clear switch from is input via the payout control I / O port, the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 535 is input, and the ball burnout detection sensor 827 is paid out. The detection signals from the detection sensor 842 and the blade rotation detection sensor 840 are input.

The detection signals from the ball-out detection sensor 827, the payout detection sensor 842, and the blade rotation detection sensor 840 of the payout device 830 are input to the payout control input circuit and input to the payout control MPU via the payout control I / O port. To.

Further, the detection signals from the door frame opening switch for detecting the opening of the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4 and the main body frame opening switch for detecting the opening of the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 are input to the payout control input circuit. It is input to the payout control MPU via the payout control I / O port.

Further, the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 535 of the foul cover unit 520 is input to the payout control input circuit, and is input to the payout control MPU via the payout control I / O port.

The payout control MPU outputs a drive signal for driving the payout motor 834 to the payout motor 834 via the payout control I / O, and outputs a signal for displaying the status of the pachinko machine 1 on the error LED display. , Output to the error LED display via the payout control I / O port, or send a command to indicate the status of the pachinko machine 1 to the main control board 1310 via the payout control I / O port in a serial manner. Alternatively, the number of game balls actually paid out is output to the external terminal board 784 via the payout control I / O port. The external terminal plate 784 is connected to a hall computer installed on the game hall side. This hall computer monitors the game of the player by grasping the number of game balls paid out by the pachinko machine 1 and the game information of the pachinko machine 1. Of the signals output from the external terminal board 784, the signal generated by the main control board 1310 is output from the external terminal board 784 via the payout control board 951 from the main control board 1310. The signal generated by the main control board 1310 may be output from the external terminal board 784 without passing through the payout control board 951.

The error LED display is a segment display, and displays alphanumeric characters, figures, and the like to display the status of the pachinko machine 1. The contents displayed and notified by the error LED display include the following. For example, when the figure "-" is displayed, it is notified that it is "normal", and when the number "0" is displayed, it means that it is "connection abnormality" (specifically, with the main control board 1310). Notifies that an abnormality has occurred in the electrical connection between the payout control board 951 and the board, and when the number "1" is displayed, it means that the ball is out (specifically, the ball is out). Based on the detection signal from the detection sensor 827, it notifies that there is no game ball in the payout device 830, and when the number "2" is displayed, it means that it is a "ball" (specifically, the blade). Based on the detection signal from the rotation detection sensor 840, the number "3" is displayed to notify that the payout blade and the game ball are engaged with each other in the payout passage of the payout device 830 to make it difficult to rotate. If there is, a "count switch error" is notified (specifically, a problem has occurred in the payout detection sensor 842 based on the detection signal from the payout detection sensor 842), and the number "5" is displayed. When it is, it notifies that it is a "retry error" (specifically, it means that the number of retries of the payout operation has reached a preset upper limit value), and when the number "6" is displayed, it is "full tank". (Specifically, the game ball stored in the foul cover unit 520 is full based on the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 535), and the number "7" is displayed. When it is, it notifies that it is "CR not connected" (the electrical connection is disconnected in any of the payout control board 951 to the CR unit), and the number "9" is displayed. Occasionally, it notifies that it is "in stock" (specifically, the number of game balls that have not been paid out has reached a predetermined number).

The ball lending request signal for the game ball from the ball lending button and the return request signal for the prepaid card from the return button are input to the CR unit. The CR unit serially transmits a signal specifying the number of game balls to be rented according to the ball lending request signal to the payout control board 951, and this signal is received by the payout control I / O port and input to the payout control MPU. Will be done. In addition, the CR unit updates the remaining amount of the inserted prepaid card according to the number of rented game balls, and outputs a signal for displaying the remaining amount on the display unit, and this signal is displayed on the display unit. It is entered and displayed.

[3-2b. Launch control unit]
The launch control unit 953, which performs launch control by the launch solenoid 682 and ball feed control by the ball feed solenoid 551, is not shown in detail, but is a launch control input in which detection signals from various detection switches related to launch are input. A circuit, an oscillation circuit that outputs a clock signal at regular time intervals, a launch timing control circuit that outputs a launch reference pulse for launching a game ball toward the game region 5a based on this clock signal, and this launch reference pulse. A launch solenoid drive circuit that outputs a drive signal to the launch solenoid 682 based on the above, and a ball feed solenoid drive circuit that outputs a drive signal to the ball feed solenoid 551 based on the launch reference pulse are provided. Based on the clock signal from the oscillation circuit, the launch timing control circuit generates a launch reference pulse so that 100 game balls are launched toward the game region 5a per minute and outputs the launch reference pulse to the launch solenoid drive circuit. A ball feed reference pulse obtained by multiplying the launch reference pulse by a predetermined number is generated and output to the ball feed solenoid drive circuit.

In relation to the handle unit 500, a contact detection sensor 509 that detects whether or not the palm or finger is touching the handle lever 504, and a stop that detects whether or not the launch of the game ball is forcibly stopped by the player's will. The detection signal from the button is input to the launch timing control circuit after being input to the launch control input circuit. When the CR unit and the CR unit connection terminal plate are electrically connected, they are input to the launch control input circuit as a CR connection signal and input to the launch timing control circuit. A signal from the handle operation sensor 507 that electrically adjusts the strength of launching the game ball toward the game area 5a according to the rotation position of the handle lever 504 is input to the firing solenoid drive circuit.

In this launch solenoid drive circuit, based on the signal from the handle operation sensor 507, the launch reference pulse inputs the drive current for launching the game ball toward the game area 5a with the launch strength corresponding to the rotation position of the handle lever 504. When this is done, the output is output to the firing solenoid 682. On the other hand, the ball feed solenoid drive circuit outputs a constant current to the ball feed solenoid 551 when the ball feed reference pulse is input, so that the game ball stored in the upper plate 201 of the plate unit 200 is balled. One ball is received in the feed unit 540, and when the input of the ball feed reference pulse is completed, the received game ball is sent to the ball launcher 680 side by stopping the output of the constant current. In this way, the drive current output from the launch solenoid drive circuit to the launch solenoid 682 is variably controlled, while the drive current output from the ball feed solenoid drive circuit to the ball feed solenoid 551 is controlled to be constant. ing.

The power supply board that supplies various voltages to the payout control board 951 includes a capacitor as a backup power source for supplying power to the main control board 1310 for a predetermined time even when the power supply is cut off. With this capacitor, the payout control MPU can store various information in the RAM of the payout control board 951 in the power off processing even when the power is cut off. When the RAM clear switch of the main control board 1310 is operated when the power is turned on, the various stored information is completely erased (cleared) from the RAM of the payout control board 951.

[3-3. Peripheral control board]
As shown in FIG. 17, the peripheral control board 1510 includes a peripheral control unit 1511 that performs effect control based on a command from the main control board 1310, and a main liquid crystal display device 1600 based on control data from the peripheral control unit 1511. , A liquid crystal display control unit 1512 that controls drawing of the sub liquid crystal display device 3114 and the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244.

[3-3a. Peripheral control unit]
Although detailed illustration is omitted, the peripheral control unit 1511 that performs the effect control on the peripheral control board 1510 has a peripheral control MPU as a microprocessor, a peripheral control ROM that stores various processing programs and various commands, and high-quality sound performance. It is provided with a sound source IC for performing the above and a sound ROM in which sound information such as music and sound effects referred to by the sound source IC is stored.

The peripheral control MPU has a plurality of parallel I / O ports, serial I / O ports, etc. built-in, and when various commands are received from the main control board 1310, each decorative board of the game board 5 is based on these various commands. The game board side light emission data for outputting a lighting signal, blinking signal, or gradation lighting signal to the provided color LED or the like is transmitted from the serial I / O port for the lamp drive board to the effect drive board 3043, or the game board. The game board side drive data for outputting the drive signal to the drive motor for operating the various effect units provided in 5 is transmitted from the serial I / O port for the game board decorative drive board to the effect drive board 3043, or the door. Door-side drive data for outputting drive signals to electrical drive sources such as the vibration exciter 242 provided in the frame 3 and the lower right drive motor 272 of the door, and the collar provided on each decorative substrate of the door frame 3. Door-side light emission data for outputting a lighting signal, blinking signal, or gradation lighting signal to an LED or the like, and door-side drive light emission data composed of the frame decoration drive board serial I / O port to the door frame 3 side Control data (display command) indicating the screen to be displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600 or the precision liquid crystal display device 244 can be transmitted from the serial I / O port for the liquid crystal control unit to the liquid crystal display control unit 1512. In addition, a control signal (sound command) for extracting sound information from the sound ROM is output to the sound source IC.

The detection signals from the various position detection sensors for detecting the positions of the various effect units provided on the game board 5 are input to the peripheral control MPU via the effect drive board 3043 attached to the rear surface of the back box. .. Further, the detection signals from the touch panel 246 of the effect operation unit 220 provided on the door frame 3 and the effect button pressing sensor 258 are input to the peripheral control MPU.

Further, in the peripheral control MPU, a signal (operation signal) indicating that the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 is operating normally is input from the liquid crystal display control unit 1512, and the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 is based on this operation signal. The operation is being monitored.

The sound source IC extracts sound information from the sound ROM based on the control data (sound command) from the peripheral control MPU, and music and music according to various effects from the speaker 921 and the like provided on the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4 and the like. Control so that sound effects etc. flow. The volume can be adjusted by rotating the volume protruding rearward from the peripheral control board box 1520 in which the peripheral control board 1510 is housed. In the present embodiment, an acoustic signal as sound information (for example, a 2ch stereo signal, a 4ch stereo signal, a 2.1ch surround signal, or a sound signal 921 for bass of the main body frame 4 and a plurality of speakers on the door frame 3 side is used. By sending 4.1ch surround signal, etc.), it is possible to present a more realistic sound effect (sound effect) than before.

In addition to the built-in WDT (watchdog timer) built into the peripheral control MPU, the peripheral control unit 1511 also includes an external WDT (watchdog timer) (not shown). In combination with WDT, he diagnoses whether his system is out of control.

The display command output from the peripheral control MPU to the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 is performed by the serial input / output port, and in the present embodiment, the bit rate (the size of data that can be transmitted per unit time) is 19.2 km (19.2 km). k) BPS (bits per second, hereinafter referred to as "bps") is set. On the other hand, a plurality of commands different from the initial data, the door frame side lighting / blinking command, the game board side lighting / blinking command, the movable body drive command, and the display command output from the peripheral control MPU to the effect drive board 3043 attached to the rear surface of the back box. In this embodiment, 250 kbps is set as the bit rate.

The effect drive board 3043 outputs a lighting signal or a blinking signal based on the received door frame side lighting / blinking command to the LED of each decorative board provided in the door frame 3, or receives a game board side lighting / blinking command. A lighting signal or a blinking signal based on the above is output to the LED of each decorative board provided on the game board 5.

Further, the effect drive board 3043 transmits a drive signal based on the received drive command to the vibration device 242 provided in the door frame 3, the lower right drive motor 272 of the door, each drive motor provided in the game board 5, and the like. Output to.

[3-3b. Various control processes of the peripheral control unit]
First, the peripheral control unit power-on processing will be described with reference to FIG. When the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 1, the peripheral control MPU (not shown) of the peripheral control unit 1511 shown in FIG. 17 performs the peripheral control unit power-on processing as shown in FIG. 60. When the peripheral control unit power-on processing is started, the effect control program performs the initial setting processing under the control of the peripheral control MPU (step S1000). In this initial setting process, the effect control program performs a process of initializing the peripheral control MPU itself, a process of determining a hot start / cold start, a process of setting a wait timer after reset, and the like. The peripheral control MPU first performs a process of initializing itself, and the time required for the process of initializing the peripheral control MPU is on the order of microseconds (μs), and the peripheral control MPU is initialized in an extremely short time. be able to. As a result, the peripheral control MPU is in a state in which interrupt permission is set, so that, for example, in the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing described later, commands and pachinko related to control of the game effect output from the main control board 1310. It is in a state where various commands such as commands related to the state of the machine 1 can be received.

Following step S1000, the effect control program performs the current time information acquisition process (step S1002). In this current time information acquisition process, calendar information for specifying the date and time information for specifying the hour, minute, and second are acquired from the RTC control unit, and the calendar information storage unit is stored in the peripheral control RAM as the current calendar information. At the same time, it is set in the time information storage unit as the current time information.

Following step S1002, the effect control program sets the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG to a value of 0 (step S1006). This V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is a flag for determining whether or not to execute the peripheral control unit steady processing described later, and has a value of 1 when the peripheral control unit steady processing is executed, and the peripheral control unit steady processing. Is set to a value of 0 when is not executed. The V-blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is executed when a V-blank signal for notifying that the screen data from the peripheral control MPU can be accepted is input, which will be described later. The value 1 is set in the interrupt processing. In this step S1006, the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is initialized once by setting the value 0 in the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG.

Following step S1006, the effect control program determines whether or not the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG has a value of 1 (step S1008). When the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is not a value 1 (value 0), the process returns to step S1008 again to repeatedly determine whether or not the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG has a value 1. By repeating such a determination, the state waits until the peripheral control unit steady processing is executed.

When the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG has a value of 1 in step S1008, that is, when the peripheral control unit steady-state processing is executed, the value 1 is first set in the steady-state processing flag SP-FLG (step S1009). The steady-state processing flag SP-FLG is set to a value of 1 when the peripheral control unit steady-state processing is being executed, and to a value of 0 when the peripheral control unit steady-state processing is completed.

Following step S1009, the effect control program performs a 1 ms interrupt timer activation process (step S1010). In this 1 ms interrupt timer activation process, the 1 ms interrupt timer for executing the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process, which will be described later, is activated, and the number of times the 1 ms interrupt timer is activated and the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed. 1ms timer interrupt execution count STN is set to a value of 1 to initialize the 1ms timer interrupt execution count STN. The 1ms timer interrupt execution count STN is updated by the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing.

Following step S1010, the effect control program performs lamp data output processing (step S1012). In this lamp data output process, the effect control program performs DMA serial continuous transmission to the lamp drive board 4170 shown in FIG. 119. Here, the peripheral control DMA controller of the peripheral control MPU is used to continuously transmit the serial I / O port for the lamp drive board.

Following step S1012, the effect control program performs the effect operation unit monitoring process (step S1014). In this effect operation unit monitoring process, in the effect operation unit information acquisition process in the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process described later, the operation button 220C is operated based on the detection signals from various detection switches 258 provided in the effect operation unit 220. Based on the various information obtained from the above, the presence or absence of the operation of the operation button 220C is monitored, and it is appropriately determined whether or not the operation state of the operation button 220C is reflected in the game production.

Following step S1014, the effect control program performs display data output processing (step S1016). In this display data output process, the sound source built-in VDP displays the drawing data for one screen (one frame) generated on the built-in VRAM of the sound source built-in VDP in the display data creation process described later by the game board side decorative board 3053 and the door frame side. Output to the decorative substrate 233. As a result, various screens are drawn on the decorative board 3053 on the game board side and the decorative board 233 on the door frame side.

Following step S1016, the effect control program performs sound data output processing (step S1018). In this sound data output process, the effect control program outputs sound data such as music and sound effects set in the sound source built-in VDP in the sound data creation process described later to the speaker 921, and notifies in addition to the music and sound effects. Sound data of sound and notification sound is output to speaker 921.

Following step S1018, the effect control program performs scheduler update processing (step S1020). In this scheduler update process, the effect control program updates various schedule data set in the peripheral control RAM. For example, in the scheduler update process, among the screen data arranged in the time series constituting the screen generation schedule data, the number of screen data from the first screen data is to be output to the sound source built-in VDP. Update the pointer.

Further, in the scheduler update process, in order to instruct which light emission data from the first light emission data to be the light emission mode of various LEDs among the light emission data arranged in the time series constituting the schedule data for generating the light emission mode. , Update the pointer.

In the scheduler update process, the first sound among the sound data such as music and sound effects, and the sound command data for instructing the sound data of the notification sound and the notification sound, which are arranged in the time series constituting the schedule data for sound generation. The pointer is updated to indicate the number of sound command data to be output to the sound source built-in VDP from the command data.

In the scheduler update process, the output target is the drive data from the first drive data among the drive data of the electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids arranged in the time series constituting the electrical drive source schedule data. Update the pointer to indicate if you want to.

Following step S1020, the effect control program performs reception command analysis processing (step S1022). In this reception command analysis process, the effect control program is information transmitted from the game board side decorative board 3053 and various commands transmitted from the main control board 1310, and is a peripheral control unit command reception interrupt process (command) described later. The various commands received by the receiving means) are analyzed (command analysis means).

Following step S1022, the effect control program performs warning processing (step S1024). In this warning process, further, when the command analyzed by the received command analysis process in step S1022 as described above includes various commands classified into predetermined notification displays, the effect control program issues various abnormality notifications. The peripheral control ROM of the peripheral control unit 1511 can display the screen generation schedule data, the light emission mode generation schedule data, the sound generation schedule data, the electrical drive source schedule data, etc., which are set in the abnormal display mode for execution. Alternatively, it is extracted from the peripheral control RAM and set in the peripheral control RAM. In the warning process, when a plurality of abnormalities occur at the same time, the abnormality notification is performed in descending order of priority registered in advance, and the abnormality is automatically resolved and the remaining abnormality notification is automatically transitioned to. It is designed to do. This allows multiple anomalies to be monitored simultaneously without losing information that another anomaly has occurred and one anomaly has occurred after one anomaly has occurred but before the anomaly has been resolved. Can be done.

Furthermore, in this warning process, after a predetermined time has elapsed from the time when the power is turned on, the commands analyzed by the effect control program in the received command analysis process (step S1022) described above are classified into various commands, for example, status displays. In the case of the error release navigation command (second error release command), by controlling the mode different from the normal effect mode associated with the effect operation, for example, the game board side decorative board 3053 (effect device), the door frame side. A decorative substrate 233 (effect device) and a lamp (effect device) are used to visually warn the outside, and a speaker is used to audibly warn the outside (error notification means). In this way, when a malicious player attempts to input an error release navigation command to the main control board 1310 by operating the operation switch of the payout control board 951 even though the player is in the gaming state, Since the pachinko machine 1 is configured to give a warning to the outside, fraudulent acts on the main control board 1310 that may affect the progress of the game are suppressed.

Next, following step S1024 described above, the effect control program performs RCT acquisition information update processing (step S1026). In this RTC acquisition information update process, the effect control program is stored in the calendar information stored in the calendar information storage unit and the time information storage unit acquired in the current time information acquisition process in step S1002 and set in the peripheral control RAM. Update the time information. By this RCT acquisition information update process, the hour, minute, and second, which is the time information stored in the time information storage unit, is updated, and the year and month, which is the calendar information stored in the calendar information storage unit based on the updated time information. The day is updated.

Following step S1026, the effect control program performs a lamp data creation process (step S1028). In this lamp data creation process, the effect control program updates the pointer in the scheduler update process in step S1020, and the pointer indicates the light emission data arranged in time series that constitutes the schedule data for generating the light emission mode. Peripheral control of the game board side light emission data SL-DAT for outputting a lighting signal, a blinking signal, or a gradation lighting signal to a plurality of LEDs of various decorative boards provided on the game board 5 based on the light emission data to be generated. It is created by extracting from the peripheral control ROM or peripheral control RAM of unit 1511, set in the peripheral control RAM, and lighting signals, blinking signals, or gradation lighting to a plurality of LEDs of various decorative boards provided on the door frame 3. The door-side light emission data STL-DAT for outputting a signal is extracted from the peripheral control ROM or peripheral control RAM of the peripheral control unit 1511, created, and set in the peripheral control RAM.

Following step S1028, the effect control program performs display data creation processing (step S1030). In this display data creation process, the effect control program updates the pointer in the scheduler update process of step S1020, and among the screen data arranged in time series that constitutes the screen generation schedule data, the screen data indicated by the pointer. Is extracted from the peripheral control ROM or peripheral control RAM of the peripheral control unit 1511 and output to the sound source built-in VDP. When screen data is input from the peripheral control MPU, the sound source built-in VDP extracts character data from the liquid crystal and sound control ROM 1512b based on the input screen data to create sprite data, and creates sprite data on the game board side decorative board 3053. And the drawing data for one screen (one frame) to be displayed on the door frame side decorative board 233 is generated on the built-in VRAM.

Following step S1030, the effect control program performs sound data creation processing (step S1032). In this sound data creation process, the effect control program updates the pointer in the scheduler update process of step S1020, and the pointer indicates the sound command data arranged in time series that constitutes the sound generation schedule data. The sound command data is extracted from the peripheral control ROM or peripheral control RAM of the peripheral control unit 1511 and output to the sound source built-in VDP. When sound command data is input from the peripheral control MPU, the sound source built-in VDP extracts sound data such as music and sound effects stored in the liquid crystal and sound control ROM and controls the built-in sound source to control the sound command. Sound data such as music and sound effects are incorporated according to the track number specified in the data, and the output channel to be used is set according to the output channel number.

Following step S1032, the effect control program performs backup processing (step S1034). In this backup process, the effect control program copies the contents stored in the peripheral control MPU and the external peripheral control RAM to the backup first area and the backup second area, respectively, and backs them up. The contents stored in the peripheral control MPU and the external peripheral control SRAM are copied to the backup first area and the backup second area, respectively, and backed up.

Following step S1034, the WDT clear process is performed (step S1036). In this WDT clear processing, a clear signal is output to the peripheral control built-in WDT1511af and the peripheral control external WDT1511e so that the peripheral control MPU is not reset.

Following step S1036, the effect control program sets the value 0 in the steady processing flag SP-FLG as the execution of the peripheral control unit steady processing is completed (step S1038), returns to step S1006 again, and returns to the V blank signal detection flag VB. The value 0 is set in −FLG for initialization, and the determination in step S1008 is repeated until the value 1 is set in the V blank signal detection flag VB—FLG in the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing described later. That is, in step S1008, it waits until the value 1 is set in the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG, and when it is determined in step S1008 that the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG has a value 1, steps S1009 to step S1009. The process of S1038 is performed, and the process returns to step S1006 again. As described above, when it is determined in step S1008 that the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG has a value of 1, the processes of steps S1009 to S1038 are performed. The processing of steps S1009 to S1038 is referred to as "peripheral control unit steady processing".

This peripheral control unit steady processing starts from the effect control program first setting a value 1 in the steady processing flag SP-FLG assuming that the peripheral control unit steady processing is being executed in step S1009, and 1 ms in step S1010. The interrupt timer start processing is performed, each processing of step S1012, step S1014, ..., And step S1036 is performed, and finally in step S1038, the value 0 is set to the steady processing flag SP-FLG as the execution of the peripheral control unit steady processing is completed. If you set, it will be completed. The peripheral control unit steady-state processing is executed when the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG has a value of 1 in step S1008. As described above, this V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is executed when a V blank signal indicating that the screen data from the peripheral control MPU can be accepted is input from the sound source built-in VDP. The value 1 is set in the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing described later. In the present embodiment, as described above, the frame frequencies (the number of screen updates per second) of the game board side decorative board 3053 and the door frame side decorative board 233 are set to approximately 30 fps per second, and thus a V blank signal. The interval at which is input is about 33.3 ms (= 1000 ms ÷ 30 fps). That is, the peripheral control unit steady processing is repeatedly executed about every 33.3 ms.

Next, the V-blank signal indicating that the screen data from the peripheral control MPU of the peripheral control unit 1511 shown in FIG. 61 can be accepted was input from the sound source built-in VDP of the liquid crystal display control unit 1512. The peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing executed with the above as an opportunity will be described. When the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing is started, the peripheral control MPU of the peripheral control unit 1511 determines whether the steady-state processing flag SP-FLG has a value of 0, as shown in FIG. 61 (step). S1045). As described above, the steady-state processing flag SP-FLG has a value of 1 when the peripheral control unit steady-state processing in steps S1009 to S1038 in the peripheral control unit power-on processing in FIG. 60 is being executed, and the peripheral control unit steady-state. The value is set to 0 when the processing is completed.

When the steady processing flag SP-FLG is not a value 0 (value 1) in step S1045, that is, when the peripheral control unit steady processing is being executed, this routine is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when the steady processing flag SP-FLG is 0 in step S1045, that is, when the execution of the peripheral control unit steady processing is completed, the value 1 is set in the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG (step S1050). Exit this routine. As described above, this V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is a flag for determining whether or not to execute the peripheral control unit steady processing, and has a value of 1 when the peripheral control unit steady processing is executed, and peripheral control. The value is set to 0 when the steady processing is not executed.

Next, the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing that is repeatedly executed every time the 1ms interrupt timer is generated by the activation of the 1ms interrupt timer in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady processing of the peripheral control unit power-on processing of FIG. 60 will be described. .. When the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing is started, the peripheral control MPU of the peripheral control unit 1511 determines whether or not the 1ms timer interrupt execution count STN is smaller than 33 times as shown in FIG. 62 (step). S1100). As described above, the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN is determined by the 1 ms interrupt timer activation process in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady process of the peripheral control unit power-on processing in FIG. A peripheral control unit 1ms timer A counter that counts the number of times interrupt processing is executed. In the present embodiment, as described above, the frame frequencies (the number of screen updates per second) of the game board side decorative board 3053 and the door frame side decorative board 233 are set to approximately 30 fps per second, and thus a V blank signal. The interval at which is input is about 33.3 ms (= 1000 ms ÷ 30 fps). That is, since the peripheral control unit steady processing is repeatedly executed about every 33.3 ms, after the 1 ms interrupt timer is started in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady process, the next peripheral control unit steady process is performed. Is executed, the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing is executed only 32 times. Specifically, when the 1 ms interrupt timer is activated in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady processing, the first 1 ms timer interrupt is generated first, the second, ..., And the 32nd 1 ms timer interrupt is sequentially performed. It will occur.

When the 1ms timer interrupt execution count STN is not smaller than 33 times in step S1100, that is, when the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt occurs and the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing is started, this routine is terminated as it is. When the occurrence of the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt happens to precede the generation of the next V blank signal, in the present embodiment, the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing has the peripheral control unit V as the priority of the interrupt processing. Although it is set higher than the blank interrupt processing, the start of the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing by the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt is forcibly canceled. In other words, in the present embodiment, since the V blank signal is a signal that controls the entire system of the peripheral control board 1510, when the occurrence of the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt happens to precede the generation of the next V blank signal, , The start of the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing by the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt is forcibly canceled in order to execute the peripheral control unit V blank interrupt processing. Then, after the 1ms interrupt timer is restarted in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady processing due to the generation of the V blank signal, the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing due to the generation of the first 1ms timer interrupt is newly started. ing.

On the other hand, when the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN is smaller than 33 in step S1100, a value 1 is added (incremented, step S1102) to the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN. By adding the value 1 to the 1ms timer interrupt execution count STN, the 1ms interrupt timer is activated in the 1ms interrupt timer activation processing of step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady processing of the peripheral control unit power-on processing in FIG. 60. The number of times the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing, which is this routine, is executed is increased by one time.

Following step S1102, a motor and solenoid drive process is performed (step S1104). In this motor and solenoid drive processing, a pointer among the drive data of the electric drive sources such as the motor and the solenoid arranged in time series constituting the electric drive source schedule data set in the peripheral control MPU and the peripheral control RAM. Drives electric drive sources such as various motors and solenoids according to the drive data instructed by, updates the pointer to the next drive data specified in time series, and executes this motor and solenoid drive process each time. Update the pointer.

Following step S1104, the movable body information acquisition process is performed (step S1106). In this movable body information acquisition process, history information of detection signals from various detection switches (for example, in-situ history information) is determined by determining whether or not detection signals from various detection switches provided on the game board 5 are input. , Movable position history information, etc.) and set it in the peripheral control RAM. From the history information of the detection signals from the various detection switches set in the peripheral control RAM, it is possible to acquire the original position, the movable position, and the like of the various movable bodies provided on the game board 5.

Following step S1106, the effect operation unit information acquisition process is performed (step S1108). In this effect operation unit information acquisition process, history information of detection signals from various detection switches (for example, operation) is determined by determining whether or not detection signals from various detection switches provided in the effect operation unit 220 are input. (Operation history information of button 220C, etc.) is created and set in the peripheral control RAM. Whether or not the operation button 220C is operated can be acquired from the history information of the detection signals from various detection switches set in the peripheral control RAM.

Following step S1108, drawing state information acquisition processing is performed (step S1110). In this drawing state information acquisition process, history information of the LOCKN signal output from the door frame side effect receiver IC of the door frame side decorative substrate 233 is created and set in the peripheral control RAM. As for the LOCKN signal, as described above, the drawing data received by the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 of the door frame side decorative board 233 from the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 is abnormal data. When it is judged, it is a signal to be output to convey that fact.

Following step S1110, a backup process is performed (step S1112), and this routine is terminated. In this backup process, the contents stored in the peripheral control RAM are copied to the backup first area and the backup second area, respectively, and backed up, and the contents stored in the peripheral control SRAM are backed up. Copy and back up in 1 area and 2nd backup area respectively.

As described above, in the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process, various processes related to the effect of steps S1104 to S1108 described above are executed as the progress of the effect within the period of 1 ms. On the other hand, in the peripheral control unit steady processing in the peripheral control unit power-on processing of FIG. 60, various processes related to the production of steps S1012 to S1032 described above are executed as the progress of the production within a period of about 33.3 ms. doing. In the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing, when the 1ms timer interrupt execution count STN is not smaller than the value 33 in step S1100, that is, when the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt occurs and the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing is started. Since this routine is terminated as it is, even if the occurrence of the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt happens to precede the generation of the next V blank signal, the peripheral control unit due to this 33rd 1ms timer interrupt Peripheral control by forcibly canceling the start of the 1 ms timer interrupt process, restarting the 1 ms interrupt timer in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady process due to the generation of the V blank signal, and then newly generating the 1 ms timer interrupt. Part 1ms timer interrupt processing is started. That is, the consistency between the progress state of the effect by the peripheral control unit steady processing and the progress state of the effect by the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process, which is the timer interrupt control, is not broken. Therefore, the progress state of the production can be surely matched.

Further, as described above, the interval at which the V blank signal is output varies slightly depending on the liquid crystal size of the decorative board 3053 on the game board side and the decorative board 233 on the door frame side, and the peripheral control MPU and the VDP with a built-in sound source are mounted. Even in the production lot of the peripheral control board 1510, the interval at which the V blank signal is output may change slightly. In the present embodiment, since the V blank signal is a signal that controls the entire system of the peripheral control board 1510, if the occurrence of the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt happens to precede the generation of the next V blank signal, peripheral control is performed. In order to execute the part V blank interrupt processing, the start of the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing by the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt is forcibly canceled. That is, in the present embodiment, even if the interval at which the V blank signal is output changes slightly, the start of the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing by the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt is forcibly canceled. It is possible to absorb the time lag due to a slight change in the interval at which the V blank signal is output.

[3-4. Liquid crystal display control unit]
Next, the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 that controls the drawing of the main liquid crystal display device 1600, the sub liquid crystal display device 3114, and the precision liquid crystal display device 244 on the peripheral control board 1510 is not shown in detail, but is used as a microprocessor. A display control MPU, a display control ROM that stores various processing programs, various commands, and various data, a VDP (abbreviation for Video Display Processor) that displays and controls the main liquid crystal display device 1600 and the precision liquid crystal display device 244, and a main liquid crystal display. An image ROM that stores various data on the screen displayed on the display device 1600, the sub liquid crystal display device 3114, and the precision liquid crystal display device 244, and an image RAM in which various data stored in the image ROM are transferred and copied. And have.

This display control MPU has a built-in parallel I / O port, serial I / O port, etc., and controls VDP based on control data (display command) from the peripheral control unit 1511 to control the main liquid crystal display device 1600. Drawing control is performed on the sub liquid crystal display device 3114 and the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244. When the display control MPU is operating normally, the display control MPU outputs an operation signal to that effect to the peripheral control unit 1511. Further, the display control MPU performs interrupt processing when an executing signal is input from VDP and the output of the executing signal is stopped every 16 ms.

The display control ROM includes various programs for generating a screen to be drawn on the main liquid crystal display device 1600, the sub liquid crystal display device 3114, and the precision liquid crystal display device 244, as well as control data (display command) from the peripheral control unit 1511. It stores a plurality of schedule data corresponding to the above, control data (display command) and corresponding non-resident area transfer schedule data. The schedule data is configured by arranging screen data that defines the screen configuration in chronological order, and defines the order of screens to be drawn on the main liquid crystal display device 1600, the sub liquid crystal display device 3114, and the precision liquid crystal display device 244. Has been done. The non-resident area transfer schedule data is configured by arranging the non-resident area transfer data that defines the order of various data stored in the image ROM to the non-resident area of the image RAM in chronological order. The non-resident area transfer data is various types of screen data drawn on the main liquid crystal display device 1600, the sub liquid crystal display device 3114, and the precision liquid crystal display device 244 according to the progress of the schedule data from the image ROM to the non-resident area of the image RAM in advance. The order in which data is transferred is specified.

The display control MPU extracts the first screen data of the schedule data corresponding to the control data (display command) from the peripheral control unit 1511 from the display control ROM, outputs it to the VDP, and then outputs the screen data following the first screen data. It is extracted from the display control ROM and output to VDP. In this way, the display control MPU extracts the screen data arranged in time series in the schedule data from the display control ROM one by one from the first screen data and outputs the screen data to the VDP.

When the screen data output from the display control MPU is input, the VDP extracts sprite data from the image RAM based on the input screen data, and extracts the sprite data from the main liquid crystal display device 1600, the sub liquid crystal display device 3114, and the upper plate. Drawing data to be displayed on the liquid crystal display device 244 is generated, and the generated drawing data is output to the main liquid crystal display device 1600, the sub liquid crystal display device 3114, and the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244. Further, when the main liquid crystal display device 1600, the sub liquid crystal display device 3114, and the precision liquid crystal display device 244 do not accept the screen data from the display control MPU, the VDP outputs an executing signal to that effect to the display control MPU. To do. The line buffer method is adopted for VDP. This "line buffer method" means that one line of drawing data for drawing the left and right directions of the main liquid crystal display device 1600, the sub liquid crystal display device 3114, and the precision liquid crystal display device 244 is held in the line buffer, and the line buffer is used. This is a method of outputting the held drawing data for one line to the main liquid crystal display device 1600, the sub liquid crystal display device 3114, and the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244.

An extremely large amount of sprite data is stored in the image ROM, and its capacity is large. When the capacity of the image ROM increases, that is, when the number of sprites drawn on the main liquid crystal display device 1600, the sub liquid crystal display device 3114, and the precision liquid crystal display device 244 increases, the access speed of the image ROM cannot be ignored, and the main liquid crystal This will affect the speed of drawing on the display device 1600, the sub liquid crystal display device 3114, and the precision liquid crystal display device 244. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the sprite data stored in the image ROM is transferred and copied to the image RAM having a high access speed, and the sprite data is extracted from the image RAM. The sprite data is basic data that is data before the sprite is expanded in the bitmap format, and is stored in the image ROM in a compressed state.

Here, the "sprite" will be described. The "sprite" is an image displayed as a unit on the main liquid crystal display device 1600 and the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244. For example, when various people (characters) are displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600, the sub liquid crystal display device 3114, and the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244, the data for drawing each person is called a "sprite". As a result, when displaying a plurality of people on the main liquid crystal display device 1600, the sub liquid crystal display device 3114, and the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244, a plurality of sprites are used. In addition to people, houses, mountains, roads, etc. that make up the background are also sprites, and the entire background can be a single sprite. These sprites are arranged on the screen and have a vertical relationship when the sprites overlap each other (hereinafter, referred to as “sprite superposition order”), and the main liquid crystal display device 1600 and the sub liquid crystal display device are set. It is drawn on the 3114 or the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244.

The sprite is composed of a plurality of rectangular areas having 64 pixels in each of the vertical and horizontal directions. The data for drawing this rectangular area is called a "sprite character". In the case of a small sprite, it can be expressed using one sprite character, and in the case of a relatively large sprite such as a person, for example, a total of 6 sprite characters arranged in a width of 2 x a height of 3 can be used. Can be expressed. In the case of a larger sprite such as a background, it can be expressed by using a larger number of sprite characters. In this way, the number and arrangement of sprite characters can be arbitrarily specified for each sprite.

The main liquid crystal display device 1600, the sub liquid crystal display device 3114, and the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244 sequentially set the display state for each pixel in one direction along the pixels from the left to the right when viewed from the front. And a sub-scan that repeats the main scan in the direction intersecting the one direction. When the drawing data for one line output from the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 is input to the main liquid crystal display device 1600, the sub liquid crystal display device 3114, and the precision liquid crystal display device 244, the main liquid crystal display device 1600, When viewed from the front of the sub-liquid crystal display device 3114 and the precision liquid crystal display device 244, the output is sequentially output to pixels for one line from left to right. When the output for one line is completed, the main liquid crystal display device 1600, the sub liquid crystal display device 3114, and the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244 shift to the line directly below as a sub scan, and similarly, the drawing data for the next line is input. Then, based on the drawing data for the next line, one line is sequentially displayed from left to right when viewed from the front of the main liquid crystal display device 1600, the sub liquid crystal display device 3114, and the precision liquid crystal display device 244 as the main scan. Output to each minute pixel.

[4. Game content]
Next, the content of the game played by the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 10, 16, 16, and 17. In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the player rotates the handle lever 504 of the handle unit 500 arranged in the lower right corner of the front surface of the door frame 3, and the game ball stored in the upper plate 201 of the plate unit 200. However, the game is driven into the upper part of the game area 5a through the space between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 on the game board 5, and the game by the game ball is started. The game ball driven into the upper part in the game area 5a flows down either the left side or the right side of the center accessory 2500 depending on the driving strength. The driving strength of the game ball can be adjusted by the amount of rotation of the handle lever 504, and the stronger the ball can be driven by rotating it in the clockwise direction, the maximum of 100 game balls per minute can be continuously driven. That is, the game ball can be hit at intervals of 0.6 seconds.

Further, in the game area 5a, a plurality of obstacle nails (not shown) are planted in front of the game panel 1100 (panel plate 1110) in a predetermined gauge arrangement at appropriate positions, and the game ball becomes an obstacle nail. By abutting, the flow speed of the game ball is suppressed, and various movements are given to the game ball so that the movement can be enjoyed. Further, in the game area 5a, in addition to the obstacle nail, a windmill (not shown) that rotates due to the contact of the game ball is provided at an appropriate position.

When the game ball driven into the upper part of the center accessory 2500 enters the left side of the front view from the highest portion of the outer peripheral surface of the front peripheral wall portion 2512 of the center accessory 2500, a plurality of obstacle nails (not shown) are not shown. The area on the left side of the center accessory 2500 will flow down while contacting the center. Then, when the game ball flowing down the area on the left side of the center accessory 2500 enters the warp entrance 2520 opened on the outer peripheral surface of the front peripheral wall portion 2512 of the center accessory 2500, the center accessory 2500 passes through the warp passage 2521. It is supplied to the stage 2530 from the warp outlet 2522, which is open in the frame of 2500, through the guideway 2523.

The game ball supplied from the warp outlet 2522 to the stage 2530 rolls on the stage 2530 and moves back and forth from side to side to the central guide portion 2531 in the center in the left-right direction or the side guide portions 2532 on the left and right sides thereof. It is emitted backward from any of the above. When the game ball is released into the game area 5a from the central guidance portion 2531 of the stage 2530, the game released from the central guidance portion 2531 because the central guidance portion 2531 is located directly above the first starting port 2002. The ball is likely to be accepted into the first starting port 2002. When the game balls are received in the first starting port 2002, a predetermined number (for example, three) of game balls are paid out to the upper plate 201 from the payout device 830 via the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951. ..

When the game ball rolling on the stage 2530 is released from the side guide portion 2532 into the game area 5a, it flows down toward the start port unit 2100. The game ball released from the stage 2530 of the center accessory 2500 into the game area 5a may be accepted by the first start port 2002 of the start port unit 2100, the first grand prize opening 2005 in the open state, or the like.

By the way, when the game ball that has flowed down to the left side of the center accessory 2500 does not enter the warp entrance 2520, it is moved to the center side in the left-right direction by the shelf portion 2302 of the side unit upper 2300, and the general winning opening of the side unit lower 2200. There is a possibility that it will be accepted in 2001, the first starting port 2002, and the like. Then, when the game balls are received in the general winning opening 2001, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out to the upper plate 201 from the payout device 830 via the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951. ..

On the other hand, in the game area 5a, the game ball driven into the upper part of the center accessory 2500 enters (is driven) to the right side of the highest portion of the outer peripheral surface of the front peripheral wall portion 2512 of the center accessory 2500. ), And enter the upper right distribution space 2541 of the right-handed game area 2540. Although not shown, a plurality of obstacle nails are planted in the upper right distribution space 2541, and the game ball comes into contact with the obstacle nails and circulates while changing the flow direction thereof. In the upper right distribution space 3541, a gate portion 2003 is provided at the upper part, and a general winning opening 2001 and a second starting port 2004 which is normally closed by a second starting port door member 2549 are provided at the lower part.

The game ball that has flowed down in the upper right distribution space 2541 enters the lower right distribution space 2543 through the right flow passage 2542 on the downstream side thereof. The game ball that has entered the lower right distribution space 2543 has the second upper prize opening 2006a and the second lower prize opening 2006b that are lined up side by side as the second prize opening 2006. The upper surface of the door member 2552 and the second lower prize opening door member 2555 passes through the second attacker passage 2543a forming the bottom surface, and from the left end of the lower discharge plate portion 2559 on the left side of the front view into the game area 5a. It is released. The downstream end (discharge plate portion 2559) of the second attacker passage 2543a is opened so that the game ball faces the first prize opening 2005 of the starting port unit 2100, and when the first prize opening 2005 is open. When the game ball is released from the second attacker passage 2543a into the game area 5a, the game ball is accepted into the first prize opening 2005 with a high probability.

The game ball circulating in the right flow passage 2542 and the lower right distribution space 2543 flows down while the increase in the distribution speed is suppressed by the plurality of deceleration ribs 2546. In rare cases, in the lower right distribution space 2543, the game ball that has entered the discharge passage 2543b that branches near the upstream end of the second attacker passage 2543a may enter the game area 5a. It is discharged to the outside of the game board 5 from the second out port 2543c without being returned to the inside.

When a game ball that hits right and enters the upper right distribution space 2541 passes through the gate unit 2003 and is detected by the gate sensor 2547, it is an ordinary random number updated in a predetermined numerical range on the main control board 1310. An ordinary lottery is performed by acquiring one ordinary random number from among them and collating the acquired ordinary random number with a predetermined ordinary hit determination table. If the result of this normal lottery is "normal hit" when the time reduction control described later is not executed, the second start port door member 2549 rotates only once in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front, and the second start port. With 2004 in the open state, the game ball can be accepted into the second starting port 2004 for a predetermined time (0.5 seconds in this example). On the other hand, when the time reduction control is executed, a lottery is performed in the ordinary lottery to determine whether the "ordinary hit" is "first ordinary hit", "second ordinary hit", or "third ordinary hit". Then, when the normal lottery result of the normal lottery is any of "first normal hit", "second normal hit", and "third normal hit" when the time reduction control is executed, the second start door member 2549 Front view After rotating in the counterclockwise direction to open the second starting port 2004, the game ball can be accepted into the second starting port 2004 for a predetermined period, and then viewed from the front. The opening / closing control is performed a predetermined number of times (5 in this example) to make it impossible to accept the game ball into the second starting port 2004 by rotating in the counterclockwise direction to close the second starting port 2004. Repeat over (times). In addition, when the normal lottery result of the normal lottery is "first normal hit", the second starting port 2004 is in a state where the game ball can be accepted, and the period of each of the five times is "0.3 seconds". , "0.28 seconds", "0.3 seconds", "0.28 seconds", "0.3 seconds", and when the normal lottery result of the normal lottery is "second normal hit" "0.3 seconds", "0.28 seconds", "1.1 seconds", "0.28 seconds" as the period of each of the five times that the second starting port 2004 is in a state where the game ball can be accepted. , "0.3 seconds", and when the normal lottery result of the normal lottery is "third normal hit", the second starting port 2004 is in a state where the game ball can be accepted. The period is "0.3 seconds", "0.28 seconds", "0.3 seconds", "0.28 seconds", "1.1 seconds", "second normal hit" and "third normal". The "hit" is more advantageous to the player than the "first normal hit" (it is easier to accept the game ball into the second starting port 2004). When the game balls are received in the second starting port 2004, a predetermined number (for example, three) of game balls are paid out to the upper plate 201 from the payout device 830 via the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951. To.

In the present embodiment, in the variation display of the normal symbol performed by the normal symbol display of the function display unit 1400 based on the passage of the game ball through the gate portion 2003, the normal symbol is displayed after the variation display of the normal symbol is started. A certain amount of time is set until the stop is displayed (until the result of the normal lottery is suggested) (for example, 0.01 to 60 seconds, also referred to as the normal fluctuation time). At the second starting port 2004, the second starting port door member 2549 rotates to be in the open state after the lapse of the normal fluctuation time. During the execution of the time reduction control described later, the control that normally shortens the fluctuation time is executed as compared with the normal state (the state in which the time reduction control is not executed). Further, the opening time for rotating the second starting port door member 2549 to open the second starting port 2004 may be changed according to the gaming state, for example, time saving control is executed. If not, the opening time of the second starting port 2004 may be changed to a longer time than when the time saving control is executed.

In addition, a new game ball is placed in the gate section between the time when the game ball passes through the gate section 2003 and the time when the normal symbol that is variablely displayed on the normal symbol display is stopped and displayed (until the normal lottery result is suggested). After passing through 2003, it is not possible to newly start the variable display of the normal symbol on the normal symbol display, so the variable display of the normal symbol is started until the variable display of the previous normal symbol is completed (of the normal lottery result). I try to put it on hold (until the suggestion is finished). Specifically, the ordinary random numbers acquired by the main control board 1310 based on the detection of the game ball passing through the gate portion 2003 by the gate sensor 2547 are stored, and the variation display of the ordinary symbol can be started. The start of variable display of normal symbols is suspended until. The number of ordinary random numbers that can be stored in the main control board 1310 is limited to four, and if the number of ordinary random numbers is more than four, even if the game ball passes through the gate portion 2003, it is discarded without being retained. .. As a result, the increase in the burden on the game hall side is suppressed by accumulating the hold.

In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the game ball received in the first starting port 2002 is detected by the first starting port sensor 2104, the pachinko machine 1 is updated within a predetermined numerical range on the main control board 1310. By acquiring one first special random number from one special random number and collating the acquired first special random number with a predetermined jackpot determination table, an advantageous gaming state advantageous to the player (for example, "big hit"). , "Small hit", etc.), the first special lottery result will be drawn. Then, based on the lottery first special lottery result, the eight LEDs of the first special symbol display are controlled to blink for a predetermined fluctuation time (for example, 0.1 to 360 seconds), and then the first special lottery result. The first special lottery result is suggested to the player by displaying the lighting mode according to the above (displaying the stop symbol according to the first special lottery result after the first special symbol is variablely displayed). In addition, "missing", "small hit", "2R big hit", "8R big hit", "10R big hit" are included in the first special lottery result that is drawn when the game ball is accepted at the first starting port 2002. Yes, by collating the acquired first special random number with the jackpot judgment table, it is determined which of these is, and after the jackpot game, it is normal (low probability state: in this example, there is a probability of about 1/395). Probability improvement control (high probability state (also called probabilistic state): in this example, the jackpot is won with a probability of about 1/44) that improves the probability of winning the jackpot (winning probability) than (winning the jackpot). Whether or not to execute (probability variation big hit or not) and whether or not to execute time saving control (time saving state) that shortens the fluctuation time than usual when at least the first special lottery result is out of order (whether or not it is a time saving big hit) The time reduction control period (number of time reductions: special symbol (number of fluctuations of the first special striking symbol and the second special symbol)) is also determined. The winning probability of "small hit" is always constant regardless of the gaming state (about 1/300 in this example).

Further, when the game ball received in the second starting port 2004 is detected by the second starting port sensor 2551, one of the second special random numbers updated in the numerical range predetermined in the main control board 1310 is selected. By acquiring the second special random number of the above and collating the acquired second special random number with a predetermined jackpot determination table, an advantageous gaming state advantageous to the player (for example, "big hit", "small hit", etc. ) Is generated by the second special lottery result. Then, based on the result of the second special lottery, the eight LEDs of the second special symbol display are controlled to blink for a predetermined fluctuation time (for example, 0.1 to 360 seconds), and then the second special lottery result is obtained. The result of the second special lottery is suggested to the player by displaying the lighting mode according to the above (displaying the stop symbol according to the result of the second special lottery after displaying the second special symbol in a variable manner). In addition, the second special lottery result that is drawn when the game ball is accepted in the second starting port 2004 includes "missing", "2R jackpot", "4R jackpot", "5R jackpot", "6R jackpot", and so on. There are "7R jackpot", "8R jackpot", and "16R jackpot", and by collating the acquired second special random number with the jackpot judgment table, it is determined which of these is, and further, it is normal after the jackpot game ( Low probability state: Probability improvement control that improves the probability of winning a big hit (winning probability) rather than the probability of winning a big hit with a probability of about 1/395 in this example (high probability state (also called probability variation state): this example Then, whether or not to execute (whether or not the jackpot is won with a probability of about 1/44) (whether or not it is a probability variation jackpot), and at least when the second special lottery result is out of order, the time reduction control that shortens the fluctuation time than usual It is also determined whether or not (time reduction state) is executed (whether or not it is a time reduction jackpot) and the period during which time reduction control is executed (time reduction number: special symbol (number of fluctuations of the first special striking symbol and the second special symbol)). It is supposed to be done.

When the special lottery result (first special lottery result and second special lottery result) drawn by accepting the game ball to the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004 is a special lottery result that causes an advantageous gaming state. , After the lapse of a predetermined fluctuation time, the eight LEDs of the special symbol display (first special symbol display, second special symbol display) are displayed in a lighting mode according to the special lottery result, and then the first prize opening Either 2005 or the second prize opening 2006 is in a state where the game ball can be accepted in a predetermined opening / closing pattern. When a game ball is received in the first prize opening 2005 or the second prize opening 2006 when the first prize opening 2005 or the second prize opening 2006 is open, the payout device is provided by the main control board 1310 and the payout board. A predetermined number of game balls from 830 (for example, 11 when a game ball is accepted in the first prize opening 2005, or 15 when a game ball is received in the second prize opening 2006). Is paid out to the upper plate 201. Therefore, when the 1st Grand Prize 2005 and the 2nd Grand Prize 2006 allow the game balls to be accepted, by allowing the 1st Grand Prize 2005 and the 2nd Grand Prize 2006 to accept the game balls, many games can be played. The ball can be paid out and the player can be entertained.

When the special lottery result is "small hit" or "2R big hit", the first big winning opening 2005 will play the game ball for a predetermined short time (for example, between 0.2 seconds and 0.6 seconds). The opening / closing pattern of closing after becoming an acceptable open state is repeated a plurality of times (for example, twice). On the other hand, if the special lottery result is "4R jackpot", "5R jackpot", "6R jackpot", "7R jackpot", "8R jackpot", "10R jackpot", "16R jackpot", the first jackpot A predetermined time (for example, about 30 seconds) has passed after the 2005 or the second prize opening 2006 is in an open state where the game ball can be accepted, or the first prize opening 2005 is predetermined. When either the number of game balls (for example, 7) is accepted or the predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls is accepted for the second prize opening 2006, either condition is satisfied. , The opening / closing pattern (one opening / closing pattern is referred to as one round) that makes the game ball unacceptable is repeated a predetermined number of times (a predetermined number of rounds). For example, 4 rounds for a "4R jackpot", 5 rounds for a "5R jackpot", and 16 rounds for a "16R jackpot" are repeated to generate an advantageous gaming state advantageous to the player. In addition, the opening / closing pattern executed when the special lottery result is "small hit" or "2R big hit" (the first big winning opening 2005 is for a predetermined short time (for example, between 0.2 seconds and 0.6 seconds)). In the open / closed pattern in which the game ball is closed after it is in an open state in which the game ball can be accepted), it is practically difficult to insert the game ball into the first prize opening 2005. On the other hand, the opening / closing pattern executed when the special lottery result is "4R jackpot", "5R jackpot", "6R jackpot", "7R jackpot", "8R jackpot", "10R jackpot", "16R jackpot" (A predetermined time (for example, about 30 seconds) has elapsed after the first prize opening 2005 or the second prize opening 2006 is in an open state where the game ball can be accepted, or the first prize opening 2005 Either a predetermined number (for example, 7) of game balls will be accepted, or a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls will be accepted for the second prize opening 2006. When the above conditions are satisfied, it is easy to insert the game ball into the first prize opening 2005 or the second prize opening 2006 in the opening / closing pattern) in which the game ball is in an unacceptable closed state. If the special lottery result is "4R big hit", "5R big hit", "6R big hit", "7R big hit", "8R big hit", "10R big hit", "16R big hit", the above first big prize A predetermined time (for example, about 30 seconds) elapses after the mouth 2005 or the second prize opening 2006 is opened so that the game ball can be accepted, or the first prize opening 2005 is predetermined. Either the number of game balls (for example, 7) is accepted, or the predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls is accepted for the second prize opening 2006. Then, the number of rounds in which the opening / closing pattern that makes the game ball unacceptable is executed may be the actual special lottery result, and the number (for example,) predetermined to the first large winning opening 2005 as the special lottery result. , 7) or a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls will be accepted in the second prize opening 2006, if any of the conditions is satisfied, the game balls will be accepted. An opening / closing pattern that makes the closed state unacceptable and an opening / closing pattern that is executed when the special lottery result is "small hit" or "2R big hit" (the first big winning opening 2005 is a predetermined short time (for example, 0.2 seconds) For ~ 0.6 seconds), a device may be provided to execute a plurality of rounds including an opening / closing pattern) in which the game ball is opened and then closed. For example, as a result of the special lottery, a "8R jackpot with a real 4R" is provided, and a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 7) are accepted in the first prize opening 2005, or the second prize opening. When a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls is accepted in 2006, or if any of the conditions is satisfied, the opening / closing pattern for closing the game balls in an unacceptable closed state is repeated four times, and then the game balls are closed. Opening and closing pattern executed when the special lottery result is "small hit" or "2R big hit" (for a predetermined short time (for example, between 0.2 seconds and 0.6 seconds) in the first big winning opening 2005) The opening / closing pattern (opening / closing pattern) in which the game ball is opened and then closed may be repeated four times.

By the way, in the present embodiment, the second major winning opening 2006 is composed of the second upper winning opening 2006a and the second lower winning opening 2006b arranged side by side, and the second major winning opening 2006 is used. In the case of "big hit", for example, in the first round (1st round), the second upper prize opening 2006a opens to allow the game ball to be accepted, and the game ball is closed due to the satisfaction of the conditions for making it unacceptable, and then accepted. Until (during the interval), the second lower prize opening 2006b is opened to start the next round (2R) in which the game ball can be accepted, and when the second lower prize opening 2006b becomes unacceptable, Since the interval period has passed in the meantime, the second upper prize opening 2006a is opened again so that the game ball can be accepted. Then, the second upper prize opening 2006a and the second lower prize opening 2006b are alternately opened and closed until a predetermined number of rounds are exhausted. As a result, in the second attacker passage 2543a, either the second upper prize opening 2006a or the second lower prize opening 2006b is in a state where the game ball can be accepted during the "big hit". If you hit right with and distribute the game ball in the second attacker passage 2543a, the game ball will surely be accepted in the second big prize opening 2006, and the player will be entertained by eliminating the missing game ball. Can be done.

Further, in the present embodiment, in some of the above-mentioned plurality of types of jackpots, whether or not the above-mentioned time saving control is executed after the end of the jackpot game is different depending on the game state at the time of winning the jackpot. For example, in the non-time saving state (the state in which the time saving control is not executed), when the first special lottery result is an 8R normal jackpot that does not execute the probability improvement control after the jackpot game, the time saving control is not executed after the jackpot game. On the other hand, when the first special lottery result is the 8R normal jackpot in the time saving state (the state in which the time saving control is executed), the time saving control is executed after the big hit game. Further, in the non-time saving state (the state in which the time saving control is not executed), when the second special lottery result is a 2R normal big hit that does not execute the probability improvement control after the big hit game, the time saving control is not executed after the big hit game. On the other hand, when the second special lottery result is a 2R normal jackpot in the time saving state (the state in which the time saving control is executed), the time saving control is executed after the big hit game. In addition, in the low probability non-time saving state (the state in which both the probability improvement control and the time saving control are not executed: also referred to as the normal state), the probability improvement control is executed after the big hit game with the first special lottery result and the second special lottery result. In the case of a 2R probability variation jackpot, the time saving control is not executed after the jackpot game. On the other hand, the probability improvement control is executed or the time saving control is executed, that is, the first special lottery result and the second special lottery result execute the probability improvement control after the big hit game in a state other than the normal state. In the case of a big hit, the time saving control is executed after the big hit game.

In the present embodiment, the variation display of the first special symbol executed by the first special symbol display by the acceptance of the game ball to the first starting port 2002 and the acceptance of the game ball to the second starting port 2004 are performed. (Ii) The variable display of the second special symbol executed by the special symbol display is not executed at the same time, and only one of them is executed. Therefore, until the first special symbol, which is variablely displayed on the first special symbol display due to the acceptance of the game ball into the first starting port 2002, is stopped and displayed (until the first special lottery result is suggested) and the first. (Ii) The first start is performed until the second special symbol, which is variablely displayed on the second special symbol display due to the acceptance of the game ball into the start port 2004, is stopped and displayed (until the second special lottery result is suggested). When a new game ball is accepted in the opening 2002 or the second starting port 2004, the first special symbol display or the second special symbol display newly starts the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol. Because it is not possible, the variable display of the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) is started until the variable display of the previous special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) is completed (first special lottery). (Until the result and the suggestion of the second special lottery result are completed), it is put on hold. Specifically, the first special random number acquired by the main control board 1310 based on the detection of the game ball received by the first start port 2002 by the first start port sensor 2104, and the second start port sensor 2551. The second special random number acquired on the main control board 1310 based on the detection of the game ball received by the second starting port 2004 and the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) are stored. The start of the variable display of the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) is suspended until the variable display of the special symbol) can be started. The number of reserved first special random numbers and second special random numbers that can be stored in the main control board 1310 is limited to four, respectively, and for more than that, games are played in the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004. Even if the ball is accepted, it is not held and is discarded. As a result, the increase in the burden on the game hall side is suppressed by accumulating the hold. Further, the first special random number and the second special random number stored in the main control board 1310 are digested with priority given to the second special random number. That is, regardless of the timing of accepting the game ball to the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004, if the second special random number is stored and the start of the variation display of the second special symbol is suspended, the first special The variable display of the second special symbol is prioritized over the symbol.

The suggestion of the special lottery result is performed by the function display unit 1400 (first special symbol display, second special symbol display) and the main liquid crystal display device 1600 (sub liquid crystal display device 3114 may also be used). In the function display unit 1400, the special lottery result is suggested by being directly controlled by the main control board 1310. The suggestion of the special lottery result in the function display unit 1400 is that the above eight LEDs constituting the special symbol display (first special symbol display, second special symbol display) are repeatedly turned on and off for a predetermined time. It blinks, then stops in a predetermined lighting mode, and the combination of LEDs lit at the time of this stop suggests a special lottery result.

On the other hand, in the main liquid crystal display device 1600, the peripheral control board 1510 indirectly controls the control signals (variation pattern command, determination result notification command, etc.) from the main control board 1310, and the special lottery result is obtained by the effect image. Suggestions are made. Specifically, in the main liquid crystal display device 1600, a series of decorative symbol rows consisting of a plurality of different symbols are displayed in a plurality of rows (for example, three rows of a left decorative symbol, a middle decorative symbol, and a right decorative symbol). The variable display of the decorative symbol sequence is started, and then the display is stopped in sequence (in this example, the left decorative symbol → the right decorative symbol → the middle decorative symbol is stopped and displayed), and finally all the decorative symbol rows are stopped. When it is displayed, the lottery result of the special random numbers (first special random number, second special random number) extracted by the combination of the stopped and displayed symbols is suggested to the player side. That is, a plurality of decorative symbol rows change according to the special lottery result (first special lottery result, second special lottery result) based on the special random number (first special random number, second special random number) acquired when the start prize occurs. After being displayed, the effect image that is stopped and displayed is displayed so as to suggest the special lottery result (first special lottery result, second special lottery result). The decorative symbol displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600 is larger than the first special symbol that is variablely displayed on the first special symbol display and the second special symbol that is variablely displayed on the second special symbol display. Since it is large and easy to see, the player generally pays attention to the decorative pattern displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600.

The time suggesting the special lottery result in the function display unit 1400 (LED blinking time (fluctuation time)) and the time suggesting the special lottery result in the main liquid crystal display device 1600 (the symbol sequence fluctuates and the confirmed image is confirmed. Is different from the time until is displayed), and the function display unit 1400 is set to a shorter time.

Further, in the peripheral control board 1510, in addition to the display of the effect image for suggesting the special lottery result by the main liquid crystal display device 1600, the decorative body of the center accessory 2500, the back left, according to the lottery special lottery result. The middle decoration unit 3050, the back bottom rear movable production unit 3100, the back top left movable production unit 3200, the back left movable production unit 3300, the back top middle movable production unit 3400, the back bottom front movable production unit 3500, etc. are appropriately used. , Light emission effect, movable effect, display effect, etc. can be performed, and the player can be entertained by various effects, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's interest in the game.

[5. Various control processes on the main control board]
Next, the processing executed by the main control board 1310 according to the progress of the game of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described. Specifically, the system / user reset process executed when the power of the game machine is turned on and the timer interrupt process executed at a predetermined cycle (4 ms in this embodiment) by the timer started by the system / user reset process. explain.

[5-1. Initialization process]
21 and 22 are flowcharts showing a procedure of initialization processing of the main control board according to the embodiment of the present invention.

When the power is turned on to the pachinko gaming machine 1, the main control MPU 1311 of the main control board 1310 executes the main control program to perform the initialization process. When the initialization process is started, the main control MPU 1311 first sets the protection of the RAM 1312 built in the main control MPU 1311 to write permission so that the RAM 1312 can be written (step S10). Specifically, "00H" indicating write permission is output to the RAM protect register.

Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 activates the built-in watchdog timer (step S12). Specifically, first, "03H" indicating the mode setting is written in the watchdog timer control register, and further, "03H" indicating the activation of the watchdog timer is written. Further, the watchdog timer is cleared and reset (step S14).

Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the predetermined wait time has elapsed (step S16). Since the voltage does not rise immediately after the power of the game machine 1 is turned on until it reaches the predetermined voltage, if the voltage becomes smaller than the power failure warning voltage between the time the power is turned on and the voltage rises to the predetermined voltage, the power failure monitoring circuit A power failure warning signal is input from. In the wait process, a predetermined monitoring wait value is set, and the watchdog timer is activated while waiting for the process for a predetermined time (for example, 200 milliseconds).

If the predetermined wait time has elapsed, the time required for the sub-board (peripheral control board 1510, etc.) to start has elapsed, so it is determined whether the RAM clear switch is operated (step S18). .. When the RAM clear switch is operated, the data in the area other than the work area for calculating the accessory ratio (area 13128 for calculating the accessory ratio) among the data backed up in the work area of the built-in RAM 1312 is deleted (step S30). ), Proceed to step S24. On the other hand, when the RAM clear switch is not operated, the data backed up in the built-in RAM 1312 is not erased, and it is determined whether or not the power failure flag is set (step S20). The power failure flag is a flag that is set when the power supply of the game machine 1 is cut off after a normal process such as a power failure (see step S56 in FIG. 22).

As a result, if the power failure flag is not set, the data in the work area of the built-in RAM 1312 may not be correct, so the data backed up in the work area (other than the accessory ratio calculation area 13128) is deleted (step). S30), the process proceeds to step S24. On the other hand, if the power failure flag is set, the power failure flag is cleared, and the checksum calculated from the data backed up in the work area of the built-in RAM 1312 using the checksum calculated at the time of the previous power failure and the checksum in step S48. The stored checksum is compared (verified) (step S22).

As a result, if the checksum calculated from the backup data and the checksum stored in step S48 do not match, the data in the work area of the built-in RAM 1312 may not be correct, so the data backed up in the work area ( Eliminate (other than the accessory ratio calculation area 13128) (step S30), and proceed to step S24. On the other hand, if the checksum calculated from the backup data and the checksum stored in step S48 match, the data in the work area of the built-in RAM 1312 is correct, so the data backed up in the work area is not erased, and step S24 Proceed to.

Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the work area for calculating the accessory ratio (area 13128 for calculating the accessory ratio) is normal by using the check code (step S24). If it is determined to be abnormal, the data in the work area for calculating the accessory ratio may not be correct, so the data stored in the work area for calculating the accessory ratio is deleted (step S26).

When one or more backup areas are provided in the accessory ratio calculation area 13128, the main area is first determined by using the check code, and when the main area is determined to be abnormal, the backup area 1 is used. It is preferable to duplicate the data in the backup area, which is determined in the order of 2, 2 and N, and which is first determined to be normal, in the main area. After that, the data in the backup area may be erased or left as it is. If it is determined that the main area is normal, the data in the backup area may be deleted or left as it is.

Regarding the accessory ratio calculation area, the data in the accessory ratio calculation area 13128 may be deleted at predetermined time intervals, separately from the determination result of the check code when the power is turned on. In addition, for each predetermined operating amount (for example, for each predetermined number of launched balls, for each predetermined number of winning balls, for each predetermined number of special symbol variation display games, for each jackpot of a predetermined number of special symbol variation display games, etc.) The data in the ratio calculation area 13128 may be deleted.

As described above, in the pachinko machine of the present embodiment, the data backed up in the work area of the built-in RAM 1312 is different for each data type (game control data 13132 and accessory ratio calculation / display data 13136). Erase with conditions. That is, by operating the RAM clear switch, the backed up game control data 13132 is erased, but the backed up accessory ratio calculation / display data 13136 is not erased. If the bonus ratio calculation / display data 13136 can be erased by operating the RAM clear switch, the bonus ratio calculated by the game machine 1 can be erased at an arbitrary timing. Therefore, the backed up accessory ratio calculation / display data 13136 is not deleted by the operation of the RAM clear switch, and the deletion of the accessory ratio calculation / display data 13136 by the operation of the staff of the game hall is prevented. , It is possible to prevent the concealment of the state where the accessory ratio is abnormal. Therefore, it is possible to easily detect a game machine modified to have a high or low accessory ratio.

The main control MPU 1311 executes the initial setting for setting in various setting registers of the main control MPU 1311 (CPU 13111) when the power recovery setting or the RAM initialization process of the RAM work area is executed (step S28). In the initial setting of the main control MPU 1311, first, the CTC (Counter / Timer Circuit) is initially set to allow interrupts. Furthermore, the serial communication port and the test signal output port are initially set. Start the hardware random number generation circuit. Then, the serial communication circuit 13114 used for communication with the peripheral control board 1510, the payout control board 951 and the accessory ratio display 1317 is set. Further, after the operation of the serial communication circuit 13114 is started, the driver circuit 13171 of the accessory ratio display 1317 is initially set.

Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 executes a process of setting a power-on command for transmission to the peripheral control board 1510 (step S32). In the power-on command creation process, the game information is read from the game backup information, and various commands corresponding to the game information are stored in a predetermined storage area of the main control built-in RAM 1312. To generate the power-on command, the power-on state reference command is set as the reference command data, and the command addition data corresponding to the generated command is added.

The power-on commands include the power-on state buffer command and the special symbol / electric accessory operation number command. The power-on state buffer command is a command for notifying the game state when returning after the power is turned off, and notifies the winning probability of the special lottery and the operation mode of the ordinary electric accessory. On the other hand, the special symbol / electric accessory operation number command notifies the execution status of the variable display of the special symbol.

After that, the main control MPU 1311 permits execution of interrupt processing including timer interrupt processing (step S34). The initial setting of the game machine 1 is completed by the process from the power-on of the game machine 1 to step S34 (initial setting means).

Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 acquires the power failure warning signal (step S36) and determines whether or not the power failure warning signal is ON (step S38). When the power failure warning signal is not ON (the result of step S38 is "No"), that is, the random number update process is executed (step S40). In the random number update process of step S46, a random number other than the random number for determining the winning is mainly updated in the special lottery or the ordinary lottery. The random number update process for determining the winning in the special lottery or the normal lottery is executed by the timer interrupt process described later. The processes from step S36 to step S40 are executed until the power failure warning signal is detected, and these processes are set as the main process on the main control side (normal means after initial setting).

On the other hand, when the power failure warning signal is detected (the result of step S38 is "Yes"), the main control MPU 1311 executes the power cutoff process (power cutoff setting means). In the power outage process, a process of backing up the data for returning to the state before the power failure occurs is executed. Specifically, first, the execution of interrupt processing is prohibited (step S42). As a result, the timer interrupt process described later is not performed, writing to the main control built-in RAM 1312 can be prevented, and rewriting of game information can be protected. Further, the main control MPU 1311 clears the output ports and stops the operation of the device controlled by the output from each port (step S44). Specifically, the power failure clear signal OFF bit data is set in the solenoid, power failure clear, and ACK output port. It is not necessary to clear all the output ports. For example, the output ports for controlling a solenoid or a motor that consumes a large amount of power may be cleared. By clearing these output ports, the power consumption of the time until the main board side power off processing is completed can be reduced, and the main board side power off processing can be surely ended.

Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 calculates a checksum for determining whether or not the data stored in the work area to be backed up is normally held (step S46). Further, the checksum calculation result is stored in the checksum area of the RAM 1312 (step S48). This checksum is used to determine if the data backed up in the work area is normal.

Subsequently, a check code (for example, a checksum) is calculated from the data in the work area for calculating the accessory ratio (area 13128 for calculating the accessory ratio) (step S50). If the check code is a fixed value, it is not necessary to calculate the check code in step S50. The check code may be calculated and stored each time the data is updated by the accessory ratio calculation / display process instead of the process when the main board power is turned off.

Subsequently, the calculated check code (or a predetermined value used as the check code) is stored in a predetermined area of the accessory ratio calculation area 13128 (step S52).

Subsequently, the data in the main area of the accessory ratio calculation work (accessory ratio calculation area 13128) is duplicated in each backup area (step S54). At this time, the calculated check code is also duplicated. The backup may be executed as appropriate (for example, each time the data is updated) by the accessory ratio calculation / display process instead of the process when the main board side power is turned off.

In this way, by storing the data used for calculating the accessory ratio in the backup area together with the calculated (or predetermined value) check code, the data for calculating the accessory ratio is retained even when the power is turned off. , It is possible to calculate the accessory ratio in long-term operation.

Further, a value indicating that the backup was normally performed is stored in the backup flag area as a power failure flag (step S56). As a result, the storage of the game backup information is completed. Finally, the write of the RAM 1312 is prohibited by outputting "01H" indicating write prohibition to the RAM protect register (step S58), and the process waits until the power is restored from the power failure (infinite loop).

[5-2. Timer interrupt processing]
Next, timer interrupt processing will be described. The timer interrupt process is repeatedly performed every interrupt cycle (4 ms in this embodiment) set in the initialization process shown in FIGS. 21 and 22. FIG. 23 is a flowchart showing an example of timer interrupt processing.

When the timer interrupt processing is started, the main control MPU 1311 first sets the RBS (register bank selection flag) of the program status word to 1 and switches the register by executing the main control program (step S70). The main control board 1310 in the present embodiment has a bank 0 and a bank 1, and is switched and used each time the timer interrupt process is executed.

Next, the main control MPU 1311 executes the switch input process (step S74). In the switch input process, various signals input to the input terminals of the various input ports of the main control MPU 1311 are read and stored as input information in the input information storage area of the main control built-in RAM 1312. Specifically, detection signals from various sensors that detect game balls that have entered a winning opening such as a general winning opening, detection signals from a magnetic detection switch 3024 that detects fraudulent activity using a magnet, and prize ball control processing. The payer ACK signal and the like from the payout control board 951 that conveys that the payout control board 951 has normally received the prize ball command transmitted in the above are read and stored in the input information storage area as input information. Further, in the switch input process, the detection signals from the discharge ball sensor 3060 and the launch ball sensor 1020 are read to count the number of out balls.

Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 performs a timer update process (step S76). In the timer update process, for example, the time during which the special symbol display 1185 is lit according to the variable display pattern determined by the special symbol and the special electric accessory control process described later, and the normal symbol and the ordinary electric accessory control process determined by the ordinary electric accessory control process. In addition to the time when the normal symbol display 1189 lights up according to the symbol variation display pattern, there is a payer ACK signal indicating that the payout control board 951 has normally received various commands transmitted by the main control board 1310 (main control MPU 1311). When determining whether or not an input has been made, time management such as the ACK signal input determination time set as the determination condition is performed. Specifically, when the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display pattern or the normal symbol fluctuation display pattern is 5 seconds, the timer interrupt cycle is set to 4 ms, so that the fluctuation time is subtracted by 4 ms each time the timer subtraction process is performed. Then, when the subtraction result becomes a value of 0, the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display pattern or the normal symbol fluctuation display pattern is accurately measured.

Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 executes the random number update process 1 (step S78). In the random number update process 1, the big hit determination random number, the big hit symbol random number, and the small hit symbol random number are updated. In addition to these random numbers, the random number for determining the initial value for the big hit symbol and the small hit, which are updated by the non-winning random number update process in step S50 in the system / user reset process (main process on the main control side) shown in the figure. The random number for determining the initial value for the symbol is also updated.

Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 executes the prize ball control process (step S80). In the prize ball control process, input information is read from the input information storage area, the number of game balls (prize balls) to be paid out based on the read input information is calculated, and the number is written to the main control built-in RAM 1312. Further, based on the calculation result of the number of prize balls, a prize ball command for paying out the game balls can be created, and a self-check for checking the connection state between the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951 can be performed. Create commands. The main control MPU 1311 transmits the created prize ball command and self-check command to the payout control board 951 as main payment serial data.

Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 determines the current game state, adds the number of prize balls paid out as the game value to the area corresponding to the current game state, and adds the area 13128 for calculating the accessory ratio of the main control built-in RAM 1312. (See FIG. 26) is updated (step S81). The process of step S81 can be skipped when there is no prize ball to be paid out in step S80, and the load on the game machine 1 can be reduced.

Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 executes the frame command reception process (step S82). The payout control board 951 transmits various 1-byte (8-bit) commands (for example, a frame state 1 command, an error release navigation command, and a frame state 2 command) classified into status displays by the payout control program. On the other hand, as will be described later, the payout control program outputs an error occurrence command when an error occurs in the payout operation, or outputs an error release notification command based on the detection signal of the operation switch. In the frame command reception process, when various commands are normally received as payer serial data, information for transmitting that fact to the payout control board 951 is stored as output information in the output information storage area of the main control built-in RAM 1312. Further, the main control MPU 1311 formats the command normally received as the payer serial data into a 2-byte (16-bit) command (for example, a frame status display command, an error release notification command, etc.), and transmits the above-mentioned transmission information. Store in the information storage area. Further, in the prize ball discharge processing, the number of prize balls discharged is recorded in the storage area (see FIG. 27) determined by the game state of the accessory ratio calculation area 13128.

The accessory ratio calculation area update process (step S81) may be executed in any order as long as it is after the prize ball control process (step S80) and before the accessory ratio calculation / display process (step S89). ..

Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 executes the fraud detection process (step S84). In the fraud detection process, the abnormal state related to the prize ball is confirmed. For example, when the input information is read from the above-mentioned input information storage area and it is detected by the count switch that the game ball has entered the big winning openings 2005 and 2006 when the game is not in the big hit game state, the main control program Creates a winning abnormality display command that is classified as a notification display as an abnormal state, and stores it as transmission information in the transmission information storage area described above.

Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 executes the special symbol and the special electric accessory control process (step S86). In the special symbol and special electric accessory control process, it is determined whether or not the big hit random number value matches the hit determination value stored in advance in the main control built-in ROM. Further, it is determined whether or not to shift to the probability fluctuation state based on the jackpot symbol random value. Then, when the probability variation transition condition is satisfied, the process shifts to the probability variation state, and when the probability variation transition condition is not satisfied, the game state shifts to a game state other than the probability variation state. Here, the "probability fluctuation state" refers to a state in which the winning probability of the special lottery described above is set relatively higher than in the normal gaming state (low probability state) (high probability state).

Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 executes the normal symbol and the normal electric accessory control process (step S88). In the normal symbol and the normal electric accessory control process, the input information is read from the above-mentioned input information storage area, and it is determined whether or not the detection signal from the gate switch 2352 has been input to the input terminal. When the detection signal is input to the input terminal, a random number for determining normal symbol hit is extracted, and it is determined whether or not it matches the normal symbol hit judgment value stored in advance in the main control built-in ROM ("" "Ordinary lottery"). Then, it is determined whether or not to open / close the second start door member 2549 according to the lottery result by the ordinary lottery. When the opening / closing operation is performed by this determination, the second starting door member 2549 is opened (or expanded), so that the game ball can be accepted in the starting winning opening 2004, which is advantageous for the player. Move to the game state.

Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether or not the accessory ratio display switch 1318 is operated, and if the accessory ratio display switch 1318 is operated, the accessory ratio calculation / display process (FIGS. 24 and 25). Is called, and the bonus ratio is calculated with reference to the number of prize balls stored in the bonus ratio calculation area 13128. Then, the calculated bonus ratio is displayed on the bonus ratio display 1317 (step S89). In this way, by calling the bonus ratio calculation / display process in the timer interrupt process and calculating the bonus ratio, the bonus ratio (gambling of the game machine 1) based on the latest data can be confirmed.

If the main body frame release switch (not shown) detects that the main body frame 4 has been released from the outer frame 2, regardless of whether the accessory ratio display switch 1318 is operated, the accessory ratio is displayed. You may. Further, when the accessory ratio display switch 1318 is operated while the main body frame release switch (not shown) detects that the main body frame 4 has been released from the outer frame 2, the accessory ratio is displayed on the accessory ratio display 1317. It may be displayed. Since the accessory ratio display switch 1318 is provided on the back side of the game board, if the accessory ratio display switch 1318 is displayed, the main body frame 4 is normally open and the progress of the game is stopped. doing. In this way, if the bonus ratio is calculated at the timing when the progress of the game is stopped, the CPU resource can be reduced without consuming CPU resources by division or subtraction for calculating the bonus ratio during the game.

Details of the accessory ratio calculation / display process will be described later in FIGS. 24 and 25. Further, a specific example of the display method of the accessory ratio will be described later. When the bonus ratio display switch 1318 is operated, all kinds of values (feature ratio, continuous bonus ratio, cumulative total, total cumulative total) may be calculated, but the bonus ratio display switch 1318 Only the displayed value may be calculated for each operation. Further, the bonus ratio is calculated regardless of whether the bonus ratio display switch 1318 is operated, and if the bonus ratio display switch 1318 is operated, the calculated bonus ratio is displayed on the bonus ratio display 1317. It may be displayed.

Even when the pachinko machine 1 detects fraud and stops the game, the accessory ratio calculation area update process (step S81) and the accessory ratio calculation / display process (step S89) are executed. By executing these processes regardless of whether or not fraud is detected, the accessory ratio can be confirmed even during fraud notification.

Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 executes the output data setting process (step S90). In the output data setting process, various signals are output from the output terminals of the various output ports of the main control MPU 1311. For example, when various commands from the payout control board 951 are normally received from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the main control MPU 1311 based on the output information, the main payout ACK signal is output to the payout control board 951 or a big hit game. When in this state, a drive signal may be output to the attacker solenoids (first attacker solenoid 2113, second upper attacker solenoid 2553, second lower attacker solenoid 2556) that open and close the opening / closing member 2107 of the winning openings 2005 and 2006. In addition to outputting a drive signal to the start port solenoid 2550 that opens and closes the start port (second start port door member 2549), information output signal during probability fluctuation, special symbol display information output signal, normal symbol display information output Various information (game information) signals related to the game, such as signals, time saving and medium information output information, and start opening winning information output signals, are output to the payout control board 951.

Further, in the output data setting process, a signal corresponding to the number of out balls counted in the switch input process (step S74) is output from the external terminal board 784. For example, a pulse signal having a predetermined length may be output from the external terminal plate 784 for each predetermined number of out balls (10 or the like).

Further, in the output data setting process, a test signal for output to the inspection device connected to the game machine 1 is set. The test signal includes, for example, a signal indicating a game state, a normal symbol, and a signal indicating a stop symbol of a special symbol (information signal output means).

Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 executes the peripheral control board command transmission process (step S92). In the peripheral control board command transmission process, transmission information such as commands and data is read from the transmission information storage area described above, and the transmission information is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 as main peripheral serial data. Various commands created by timer interrupt processing, which is this routine, are stored in the transmission information. One packet of the main peripheral serial data is composed of 3 bytes. Specifically, the main peripheral serial data has a status indicating the type of command having a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits), a mode indicating a variation of an effect having a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits), and a status. It is composed of a sum value obtained by regarding the mode as a numerical value and the sum of the sum values, and this sum value is created at the time of transmission.

Finally, the main control MPU 1311 sets a predetermined value (18H) in the watchdog timer clear register WCL (step S96). By setting a predetermined value in the watchdog timer clear register WCL, the watchdog timer clear register WCL is set to clear. Finally, the main control MPU 1311 switches (returns) the register bank. When the above processing is completed, the timer interrupt processing is terminated and the process returns to the processing before the interrupt.

In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the main control MPU 1311 executes the calculation processing of the bonus ratio and the continuous bonus ratio in the timer interrupt processing, and the payout control MPU of the payout control unit 952 performs the bonus ratio and the continuous bonus. The calculation process of the object ratio may be executed. In this case, a command for displaying the accessory ratio or the continuous accessory ratio may be transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510, or the payout control unit 952 may send a command to the peripheral control unit 1511. You may send a command to display the accessory ratio or the continuous accessory ratio.

[5-3. Character ratio calculation / display processing]
24 and 25 are flowcharts showing an example of the accessory ratio calculation / display process. The main control MPU 1311 executes the accessory ratio calculation / display process. The peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 may execute the accessory ratio calculation / display process. When the peripheral control unit 1511 calculates the accessory ratio, the calculated accessory ratio may be displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600. For example, when the calculated bonus ratio is within (or outside) a predetermined range, the effect in the game may be changed. Specifically, when the accessory ratio exceeds a predetermined threshold value (threshold value smaller than the reference value), the advance notice effect may be changed to perform a notice effect that is more interesting than the normal advance notice effect.

First, a check code is calculated from the main area of the accessory ratio calculation area 13128 of the RAM 1312 of the main control MPU 1311 (step S140), and the calculated check code is the check code stored in the accessory ratio calculation area 13128. It is determined whether they match (step S142). If the calculated check code and the check code stored in the accessory ratio calculation area 13128 match, the data in the main area is normal, so the accessory ratio calculation process is executed and the combination is obtained from the data in the main area. The object ratio and the continuous accessory ratio are calculated and stored in the accessory ratio calculation area 13128 (step S156). Specifically, the bonus ratio is calculated by dividing the number of acquired balls by the total number of acquired balls, and the continuous bonus ratio is calculated by dividing the number of consecutive acquired balls by the total number of acquired balls. The fractional part (value after the decimal point) of the calculated bonus ratio and continuous bonus ratio may be rounded down or rounded off. Then, the process proceeds to step S160.

In step S156, the updated value may be duplicated in the backup area each time the accessory ratio and / or the continuous accessory ratio of the accessory ratio calculation area 13128 is updated.

If the number of bits in which the number of acquired balls is stored is large and the number of bits that can be calculated by the main control MPU 1311 is insufficient, the lower bits of the number of acquired balls are omitted and the bonus ratio is calculated. May be calculated. For example, if the storage area for the number of acquired balls is 32 bits, a numerical value from 0 to 4,294,967,295 can be stored. However, when the main control MPU is an 8-bit processor and can perform 8-bit or 16-bit arithmetic, 16 bits below the most significant bit having a value of 1 are extracted from the acquired spheres stored in 32-bit and the arithmetic is performed. It is preferable to store it in a register (16 bits) and divide it. When the number of acquired balls is equal to or less than the maximum number of bits that can be used in the calculation (32767, which is the maximum value of 16 bits), the lower 16 bits may be taken out and used in the calculation.

Further, if the total number of acquired balls is divided by 100 (rounded down to the nearest whole number) and used as the number to be divided (the number to be divided) to calculate the accessory ratio, the calculation with a decimal number can be avoided.

Further, the upper limit of the accessory ratio is set to 99, and when the calculation result of the accessory ratio is 100 or more, it may be 99.

On the other hand, if the calculated check code and the check code stored in the accessory ratio calculation area 13128 do not match, the data in the main area is abnormal, and the accessory ratio is calculated from the data in the backup area 1. Try. Specifically, a check code is calculated from the backup area 1 of the accessory ratio calculation area 13128 (step S144), and the calculated check code matches the check code stored in the accessory ratio calculation area 13128. It is determined whether or not (step S146). If the calculated check code and the check code stored in the accessory ratio calculation area 13128 match, the data in the backup area 1 is normal, and the data in the backup area 1 is duplicated in the main area (step S148). ), The bonus ratio calculation process is executed, and the bonus ratio and the continuous bonus ratio are calculated from the data in the main area (step S156). Then, the process proceeds to step S160.

On the other hand, if the calculated check code and the check code stored in the accessory ratio calculation area 13128 do not match, the data in the backup area 1 is abnormal, and the accessory ratio is calculated from the data in the backup area 2. Try. Specifically, a check code is calculated from the backup area 2 of the accessory ratio calculation area 13128 (step S150), and the calculated check code matches the check code stored in the accessory ratio calculation area 13128. It is determined whether or not (step S152). If the calculated check code and the check code stored in the accessory ratio calculation area 13128 match, the data in the backup area 1 is normal, and the data in the backup area 2 is duplicated in the main area (step S154). ), The accessory ratio calculation process is executed, the data in the main area is read out, and the accessory ratio and the continuous accessory ratio are calculated (step S156). Then, the process proceeds to step S160.

If there is another backup area, it is similarly determined whether the data in the backup area is normal, and the accessory ratio and the continuous accessory ratio are calculated from the data in the normal backup area.

If the data in the main area and all the backup areas is abnormal, the work area for calculating the accessory ratio (area 13128 for calculating the accessory ratio) is initialized and the abnormality is notified (step S158).

Subsequently, a check code is calculated from the main area (step S160), and the calculated check code is stored in the accessory ratio calculation area 13128 (step S162). The check code is calculated in the accessory ratio calculation / display process in the RAM 1312 in the initialization process because the power failure flag and checksum are not calculated when the main board side power is turned off in the middle of the process. The backed up data is initialized, but if the check code is calculated and stored regularly in the accessory ratio calculation / display process, even if the power of the pachinko machine is turned on again, the accessory ratio calculation work area This is because the data in (the accessory ratio calculation area 13128) can be left without being erased.

Subsequently, 1 is added to the backup area distribution counter value to update (step S164), and it is determined whether the backup area distribution counter value is odd (step S166). If the backup area distribution counter value is odd, the data in the main area is duplicated in the backup area 1 (step S168). On the other hand, if the backup area distribution counter value is an even number, the data in the main area is duplicated in the backup area 2 (step S170). By allocating the copy destination of the data in the main area by the backup area distribution counter value and writing the data to only a part of the backup areas, it is possible to prevent an abnormal value from being written to a plurality of backup areas.

When 3 or more backup areas are provided, the backup area for writing data may be distributed by the remainder obtained by dividing the backup area distribution counter value by the number of backup areas.

Subsequently, the calculated accessory ratio is displayed on the accessory ratio display 1317 (step S172). Specifically, using the calculated type of accessory ratio and the calculated value, the data to be displayed in each digit of the accessory ratio indicator 1317 is acquired by referring to the conversion table (not shown). The acquired data is sent to the driver circuit 13171 of the accessory ratio display 1317. For example, if the type of the bonus ratio is the bonus ratio (cumulative), A7 is displayed in the first two digits, and if the calculated bonus ratio is 66%, 66 is displayed in the last two digits.

The bonus ratio calculation process (step S156) of the bonus ratio calculation / display process reads the data of the number of acquired balls from the bonus ratio calculation area 13128 (that is, the bonus ratio calculation work area shown in FIG. 27). , Data cannot be written in the storage area related to the number of acquired balls in the accessory ratio calculation area 13128. That is, as will be described later, when the processes of steps S156 and S172 are configured by the common program module, the common program module does not have the authority to write data to the storage area related to the number of acquired balls in the accessory ratio calculation area 13128. Data can be written in the storage area of the calculated bonus ratio and the continuous bonus ratio.

As explained above, since the data for calculating the accessory ratio is duplicated in the backup area in the accessory ratio calculation / display process, it is useful when normal power failure processing is not executed due to an abnormal reset or the like. The data for calculating the object ratio can be protected.

Since the processes of steps S156 and S172 are common regardless of the type of game machine, it is preferable to configure one or a plurality of common program modules. In this case, the process of determining whether the check code of the main area and the check code of the backup area are correct may be configured on the non-common side separately from the common program module. This is because the data check and backup methods differ depending on the model. However, if the data check and backup methods are standardized among the models, they may be placed in the common program module.

[6. Storage area configuration]
Subsequently, the arrangement of the program and the data stored in the ROM 1313 will be described. FIG. 26A is a diagram showing an example of arrangement of programs (codes) and data stored in ROM 1313 built in the main control MPU 1311 of the main control board 1310.

The ROM 1313 contains the game control code 13131, the game control data 13132, the debug (inspection function) code 13133, the debug (inspection function) data 13134, the accessory ratio calculation / display code 13135, and the accessory ratio calculation / display. An area for storing data 13136 is included. The ROM 1313 of the present embodiment includes a game control area (first storage area) for storing programs and data related to the game machine 1 such as the game control code 13131 and the game control data 13132, and a debug (inspection function) code 13133. And debug (inspection function) area (second storage area) for storing programs and data used for the purpose of outputting signals necessary for debugging (inspection function) of game machine 1 such as debug (inspection function) data 13134. And, the accessory ratio calculation area (third storage area) that stores programs used for the purpose of calculating the accessory ratio, such as the accessory ratio calculation / display code 13135 and the accessory ratio calculation / display data 13136. Is assigned.

A free area of 16 bytes or more is provided between the final address of the game control data 13132 and the start address of the debug (inspection function) code 13133, and when displayed in the dump list format, the game control area It can be easily distinguished from the debug (inspection function) area. Similarly, a free area of 16 bytes or more is provided between the final address of the debug (inspection function) code 13133 and the start address of the accessory ratio calculation / display code 13135, and is displayed in a dump list format. In this case, the debug (inspection function) area and the accessory ratio calculation area can be easily distinguished. The value stored in the free area may be a fixed value which is the same value, and may be set to a value different from the value set in the game area and the debug area or a value having a low frequency. In this way, when displayed in the dump list format, the game control area, the debug (inspection function) area, and the accessory ratio calculation area can be easily distinguished.

Further, even if the debug (inspection function) area and the accessory ratio calculation area are not separated and the accessory ratio calculation / display code 13135 and the accessory ratio calculation / display data 13136 are stored in a part of the debug area. Good. That is, it suffices that the game control area and other areas are clearly distinguished. By clearly distinguishing the game control area from other areas in this way, the accessory ratio calculation area (the accessory ratio calculation / display code 13135 and the accessory), which is a process that is not directly related to the control of the progress of the game. The ratio calculation / display data 13136) is arranged separately from the game control area to avoid the risk that a defect (bug or the like) of the accessory ratio calculation / display code 13135 affects the game control.

In the debug (inspection function) area, target programs and data that are not directly related to the game are stored. For example, various functions used only when debugging the game machine 1 other than the game control of the game machine 1. The code for outputting the inspection signal is stored. These debug (inspection function) codes are programs for outputting debug (inspection function) signals. In addition, a program for calculating the bonus ratio, which is not directly related to the progress of the game, is stored in the bonus ratio calculation area.

Further, the game control code 13131 is executed by the main control MPU 1311. Further, the game control code 13131 can be appropriately read and written to the RAM 1312, but the game control area 13126 used in the game control code 13131 can only be read from the debug (inspection function) code. It is configured to be executable and is configured so that writing to the area cannot be executed. As described above, the game control area 13126 constitutes a game area that can be accessed only from the game control code 13131. The process based on the debug (inspection function) code can be unilaterally called and executed while the game control code 13131 is being executed, but the game control code 13131 can be called from the debug (inspection function) code. It is configured so that it cannot be called and executed. As a result, the independence of the debug (inspection function) code 13133 can be enhanced, so that even if the game control code 13131 is changed, the change of the debug (inspection function) code 13133 can be minimized. ..

Further, the accessory ratio calculation / display code 13135 is called from the game control code 13131 (for example, step S89 of the timer interrupt process) and executed by the main control MPU 1311. The bonus ratio calculated by the bonus ratio calculation / display code is stored in the bonus ratio calculation area 13128 of the RAM 1312. As shown in the figure, the accessory ratio calculation area 13128 is provided separately from the game control area 13126 (outside the game area). In this way, by designing the accessory ratio calculation / display code 13135 separately from the game control code 13131 and storing it in a different area, the inspection of the accessory ratio calculation / display code 13135 and the game control code 13131 Can be performed separately from the inspection of the game machine 1, and the labor of the inspection of the game machine 1 can be reduced. Further, the accessory ratio calculation / display code 13135 can be commonly used by a plurality of models regardless of the model.

FIG. 26B is a diagram showing details of the accessory ratio calculation area 13128. The accessory ratio calculation area 13128 may be provided with a backup area 1 and a backup area 2 in which a copy of the data stored in the main area is stored, in addition to the main area in which the calculation result of the accessory ratio is stored. .. The backup area may be one or more. A check code is added to each area to detect data errors. The check code may be a checksum of data in each area or a predetermined value. The check code is set in the initialization process when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, is set every time the data in the main area is updated in the accessory ratio calculation / display process, or is the process when the main control side is turned off (Fig. It may be set in step S50 to step S54) of 22. In particular, when the check code is a fixed value, the check code is initialized when it is determined to be normal in the initialization process or when the data is erased, and the fixed value is set in the main control side power cutoff process (step S50 in FIG. 20). You may set it. The check code may also be used as a power failure flag. That is, if a predetermined value is set in the check code of the main area, it may be determined that the power failure flag is set. Further, if a predetermined value is set in the power failure flag, it may be determined that the check code of each area is a correct value (that is, the data of each area is normal).

When it is determined that the main area is abnormal, it may be determined whether the backup area is normal, and the data of the backup area determined to be normal may be duplicated in the main area (step of FIG. 21). S24). Further, in the process of power off on the main control side, the value of the main area may be duplicated in each backup area (step S54 in FIG. 22). Further, in the accessory ratio calculation / display process, each time the value in the main area is updated, the updated data may be duplicated in the backup area (steps S168 and S170 in FIG. 25).

An unused space is provided between the main area and the backup area 1 and between the backup area 1 and the backup area 2. By providing an unused space between each area, the address of each area can be separated, and each area can be distinguished by the upper digit of the address.

FIG. 27 is a diagram showing a specific structure of a work area for storing each data in the accessory ratio calculation area 13128. The data of the number of acquired balls in the accessory ratio calculation area 13128 is written in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 23) timed by the main control MPU 1311, and the accessory ratio calculation process (step of FIG. 24) of the accessory ratio calculation / display process. It is read in S156). In this way, the bonus ratio calculation / display process reads the acquired ball number data from the bonus ratio calculation area 13128, and the timer interrupt process (game control program) reads the acquired ball number data in the bonus ratio calculation area 13128. By writing, the game control program and the program that executes the character ratio calculation / display processing can be completely separated, and the program for the character ratio calculation / display processing can be shared even for game machines with different specifications. ..

In the bonus ratio calculation process (step S156 in FIG. 24) of the bonus ratio calculation / display process, the calculated bonus ratio and the continuous bonus ratio are converted into the bonus ratio and the continuous bonus in the bonus ratio calculation area 13128. Write to the ratio storage area. The calculated accessory ratio and continuous accessory ratio data are read out in the accessory ratio display process (step S170 in FIG. 25) of the accessory ratio calculation / display process when displaying the accessory ratio. The game control program does not access the storage area of the bonus ratio and the continuous bonus ratio of the bonus ratio calculation area 13128.

FIG. 27 (A) shows the structure of the work area in the simplest way. In the structure of the work area shown in FIG. 27 (A), the number of winning balls, the number of continuous winning balls, the total number of winning balls, the winning ratio, and the continuous winning ratio are stored. The number of winning balls is the number of prize balls obtained by winning a prize in a moving accessory (for example, the large winning openings 2005 and 2006 when the opening is open, and the second starting opening 2004 when the second starting opening door member 2549 is open). is there. The number of consecutive winning balls is the number of winning balls by winning a winning character while the character is continuously operating (for example, the winning opening is open during the big hit consecutive chan). The total number of balls won is the total number of prize balls paid out to the player. The bonus ratio can be calculated by dividing the number of winning balls by the total number of winning balls. The continuous bonus ratio can be calculated by dividing the number of consecutive winning balls by the total number of winning balls. The number of winning balls, the number of consecutive winning balls, and the total number of winning balls are updated in step S81 of the timer interrupt processing, and the bonus ratio and the continuous winning ball ratio are calculated in step S91 of the timer interrupt processing. It is stored.

In the structure of the work area shown in FIG. 27 (A), the number of winning balls, the number of continuous winning balls, and the total number of winning balls correspond to the total cumulative total of FIG. 27 (B) described later, and are 3 or 3 respectively. It is a 4-byte storage area and can store numbers up to 16777215 or 42949672795 in decimal. Since these data are not erased unless an abnormality occurs in the data, a large storage area is prepared so that the data can be stored for a long period of time. Further, the accessory ratio and the continuous accessory ratio are storage areas of 1 byte, and can store numerical values up to 255 in decimal numbers.

FIG. 27B shows the structure of a work area using a ring buffer. In the structure of the work area shown in FIG. 27 (B), the number of winning balls, the number of other winning balls, the number of continuous winning balls, the total number of winning balls, the winning ratio, and the continuous winning ratio are stored. Further, the storage area of each data is composed of a ring buffer having n storage areas for every predetermined number of prize balls (for example, n = 10 storage areas for every 6000 prize balls), and the total acquisition balls. When the number reaches a predetermined number (6000), the write pointer of all the data moves, and the storage area where the data is updated changes. Then, after the data for a predetermined number of prize balls is stored in the nth storage area, the write pointer moves to the first storage area and stores the data in the first storage area. In addition, when the data other than the total number of acquired balls (the number of acquired balls, the number of launched balls, the number of winning balls, the number of special symbol variation display games, the number of jackpots of special symbol variation display games, etc.) becomes a predetermined number, You may move the write pointer.

The write pointer and read pointer of the ring buffer are common to all data, and the write pointers of all the data strings move for each predetermined number of prize balls. In addition, as the write pointer moves, the read pointer also moves. The read pointer points to the storage area immediately before the write pointer. This is because the bonus ratio is calculated using the latest data of 6000 prize balls.

The cumulative total of each data is the cumulative value of the data stored in the n storage areas of the ring buffer, and the cumulative value of the bonus ratio and the continuous bonus ratio is the value calculated from the cumulative value of each data. When the ring buffer goes around and is cleared in one storage area of the ring buffer to write new data, the cumulative value is calculated excluding the data in the cleared area. The total cumulative value of each data is the cumulative value of the data collected in the past, and the total cumulative value of the bonus ratio and the continuous bonus ratio calculated from the cumulative value is the value calculated from the total cumulative value of each data. Therefore, even if the ring buffer makes a round and is cleared in one storage area of the ring buffer for writing new data, the total cumulative value including the data in the cleared area is calculated.

Among the structures of the work areas shown in FIG. 27 (B), the number of winning balls, the number of continuous winning balls, the winning ratio, and the continuous winning ratio are the same as those described in FIG. 27 (A). The number of other winning balls is the number of winning balls by winning a prize in a prize opening other than the accessory (a winning opening that does not open and close, for example, a general winning opening 2001). The total number of acquired balls is the total number of prize balls paid out to the player, and when this value reaches a predetermined number, the write pointer moves. For the number of winning balls, the number of other winning balls, the number of continuous winning balls, and the total number of winning balls, the data in the storage area where the write pointer is located is updated in step S81 of the timer interrupt process, and the bonus ratio and the continuous winning combination are obtained. The object ratio is calculated and stored in step S91 of the timer interrupt process.

FIG. 27C shows the structure of a work area using a ring buffer. With the structure of the work area shown in FIG. 27 (C), more detailed data than that shown in FIG. 27 (B) can be acquired, and the number of normal electric accessory acquisition balls, the number of special electric accessory acquisition balls, and the number of starting port acquisition balls , Others The number of winning opening winning balls, the number of continuous winning balls, the total number of winning balls, the winning ratio and the continuous winning ratio are stored. Further, the storage area of each data is composed of a ring buffer having n storage areas for every predetermined number of prize balls (for example, 10 storage areas for every 6000 prize balls), and the total number of acquired balls is When the number reaches a predetermined number (6000), the write pointer moves and the storage area where the data is updated changes. Then, after the data for a predetermined number of prize balls is stored in the nth storage area, the write pointer moves to the first storage area and stores the data in the first storage area. In addition, when the data other than the total number of acquired balls (the number of acquired special electric accessory balls, the number of launched balls, the number of winning balls, the number of special symbol fluctuation display games, the number of jackpots of special symbol fluctuation display games, etc.) becomes a predetermined number. You may move the write pointer to.

The cumulative total of each data is the cumulative value of the data stored in the n storage areas of the ring buffer, and the cumulative value of the bonus ratio and the continuous bonus ratio is the value calculated from the cumulative value of each data. When the ring buffer goes around and is cleared in one storage area of the ring buffer to write new data, the cumulative value is calculated excluding the data in the cleared area. The total cumulative value of each data is the cumulative value of the data collected in the past, and the cumulative value of the bonus ratio and the continuous bonus ratio is the value calculated from the cumulative value of each data, and the ring buffer goes around. Even if the data is cleared in one storage area of the ring buffer to write new data, the total cumulative value including the data in the cleared area is calculated.

Among the structures of the work areas shown in FIGS. 27 (B) and 27 (C), the number of winning balls in the ring buffer, the number of other winning balls, the number of continuous winning balls, the total number of winning balls, and the normal electric bonus winning balls. The number, the number of balls acquired by the special electric accessory, the number of balls acquired by the starting port, and the number of balls acquired by the other winning openings are each in a 2-byte storage area, and a numerical value up to 65535 can be stored in decimal. Number of winning balls, other winning balls, continuous winning balls, total winning balls, normal electric bonus winning balls, special electric bonus winning balls, starting opening winning balls and other winning opening winning balls The cumulative number is a storage area of 3 bytes each, and numbers up to 16777215 can be stored in decimal numbers. Since the cumulative total is the total of the data for 6000 prize balls x n (60,000 prize balls when n = 10), a large storage area is prepared. Number of winning balls, other winning balls, continuous winning balls, total winning balls, bonus ratio, continuous bonus ratio, normal electric bonus winning balls, special electric bonus winning balls, starting port The total number of acquired balls and the total number of other winning balls won is a storage area of 3 or 4 bytes, respectively, and can store numerical values up to 16777215 or 42949672795 in decimal numbers. Since the total cumulative total is not erased unless an abnormality occurs in the data, a larger storage area is prepared so that the data can be stored for a long period of time. Further, the cumulative total and the cumulative total of the bonus ratio and the continuous bonus ratio are storage areas of 1 byte each, and can store numerical values up to 255 in decimal numbers.

Among the structures of the work areas shown in FIG. 27 (C), the total number of acquired balls, the accessory ratio, and the continuous accessory ratio are the same as those described in FIG. 27 (B). The number of other winning balls is the number of winning balls by winning a prize other than the character (the winning opening that does not open and close). The number of balls acquired by the ordinary electric accessory is the prize ball acquired by winning a prize in the ordinary electric accessory (the second starting port 2004 in which the second starting door member 2549 is open) that is operating according to the result of the lottery by the ordinary symbol. It is a number. The number of balls acquired for the special electric accessory is the number of prize balls obtained by winning a prize in the special electric accessory (for example, the opening large winning openings 2005, 2006) that is operating according to the result of the lottery with the special symbol. The number of winning balls at the starting port is the number of winning balls obtained by winning a prize at the starting winning opening (first starting opening 2002). The number of other prize balls won is the number of prize balls obtained by winning a prize in a prize opening (general winning opening 2001) that does not trigger a lottery of a special symbol, not as a character (does not operate). The number of normal electric accessory acquisition balls, the number of special electric accessory acquisition balls, the number of starting port acquisition balls, the number of other winning opening acquisition balls, the number of continuous accessory acquisition balls, and the total number of acquisition balls are determined in step S81 of the timer interrupt process. The data in the storage area where the write pointer is located is updated, and the accessory ratio and the continuous accessory ratio are calculated and stored in step S91 of the timer interrupt process.

In the data structure shown in FIG. 27 (A), when it is determined that the stored value is abnormal, the data in the accessory ratio calculation area 13128 is deleted in step S116 of the initialization process. The data is not erased at the opportunity of. Therefore, the data in the accessory ratio calculation area 13128 may be deleted every predetermined period (for example, one day, one week, January, etc.). Similarly, the total cumulative total of FIGS. 25 (B) and 25 (C) may be deleted at predetermined intervals.

In addition, the data of the accessory ratio calculation area 13128 and the calculated accessory ratio are abnormal values (for example, the accessory ratio exceeds 100%, and the calculation result of the accessory ratio has changed significantly from the previous calculated value. , The number of acquired balls for the accessory> the total number of acquired balls, etc.), the abnormal value may be deleted. Not only the abnormal value but also all the data of the accessory ratio calculation area 13128 may be deleted. Further, when the data of the accessory ratio calculation area 13128 or the calculated accessory ratio is an abnormal value, it may be notified that the accessory ratio is abnormal. Further, the data in the backup area may be inspected using the check code, the data in the normal backup area may be duplicated in the main area, and then the accessory ratio may be calculated again.

[7. Composition of accessory ratio display]
FIG. 28 is a diagram showing the configuration of the accessory ratio display 1317.

The accessory ratio display 1317 is composed of a driver circuit 13171 and a plurality of 7-segment LEDs 13172. For example, the 7-segment LED 13172 is composed of 4 digits.

The driver circuit 13171 and the 7-segment LED 13172 may be housed together in one package, but both may be housed in different packages.

The driver circuit 13171 and the main control MPU 1311 are connected by three signal lines (DATA, LOAD, CLOCK).

The DATA line transfers data to be displayed on the accessory ratio display 1317 and a signal for setting the operating state of the accessory ratio indicator 1317, and is connected to the serial communication circuit 13114 of the main control MPU 1311. The LOAD line transfers a signal indicating the data acquisition timing and is connected to the serial communication circuit 13114 of the main control MPU 1311. The CLOCK line transfers a clock signal that defines the operation cycle of the driver circuit 13171 and is connected to the serial communication circuit 13114 of the main control MPU 1311.

The driver circuit 13171 and the 7-segment LED 13172 are connected by four digit selection signal lines IDIG-0 to IDIG-3 and eight segment lighting signal lines ISEG-a to ISEG-Dp. The segment lighting signal lines ISEG-a to ISEG-Dp transmit signals for lighting each LED element (7-segment and decimal point) of the 7-segment LED 13172. The digit selection signal lines IDIG-0 to IDIG-3 transmit a control signal indicating which digit of the 7-segment LED13172 the signal transmitted by the segment lighting signal lines ISEG-a to ISEG-Dp is. The direction of the signal (current) shown differs depending on whether the 7-segment LED 13172 is an anode common type or a cathode common type, but an example of the anode common type is shown.

A resistor 13174 that determines the current value to be passed through each LED element of the 7-segment LED 13172 is connected to the R-EXT terminal of the driver circuit 13171. By changing the resistance value of the resistor 13174, the emission brightness of each LED element of the 7-segment LED 13172 can be changed.

FIG. 29 is a diagram showing a configuration of a driver circuit 13171 of the accessory ratio display 1317.

The driver circuit 13171 includes a 16-bit shift register 3171, a 16-bit data latch 3172, an 8-bit data latch 3173A to D, an 8 × 4 data selector 3174, a decoder 3175, a 2 × 8 data selector 3176, a constant current driver 3178, and a driver 3179. It has a latch selector load pulse distributor 3180, a Digit-Limit control unit 3181, a duty ratio control unit 3182, a data selector control unit 3183, a standby mode control unit 3184, and an oscillator 3185.

The 16-bit shift register 3171 takes in the serial data input to the DATA IN terminal, holds 16-bit data, and sends it to the 16-bit data latch 3172 as parallel data. The 4 bits of D15 (MSB) to D12 are data for selecting the operation mode of the driver circuit 13171 (see FIG. 35), and the 4 bits of D11 to D8 are data for selecting the register corresponding to the operation mode. (See FIG. 33), and D7 to D0 (LSB) are the detailed setting data.

The 16-bit data latch 3172 latches data at the timing of the LOAD signal, and controls D15 to D8 in each control unit (latch selector / load pulse distributor 3180, Digit-Limit control unit 3181, duty ratio control unit 3182, data selector control). It sends to unit 3183, standby mode control unit 3184), and sends D7 to D0 to 8-bit data latches 3173A to D.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 30, the 16-bit shift register 3171 takes in the serial data input to the DATA IN terminal at the rising timing of the CLOCK signal and shifts the data. The 16-bit data latch 3172 acquires 16-bit data as parallel data from the 16-bit shift register 3171 at the rising timing of the LOAD signal, and latches the data. Then, D15 to D8 are sent to each control unit (latch selector / load pulse distributor 3180, Digit-Limit control unit 3181, duty ratio control unit 3182, data selector control unit 3183, standby mode control unit 3184). Further, the 16-bit data latch 3172 sends D7 to D0 of the latched data to the 8-bit data latches 3173A to D at the falling timing of the LOAD signal.

The LOAD signal is also input to the latch selector load pulse distributor 3180. The latch selector load pulse distributor 3180 acquires D15 to D8 and selects an 8-bit data latch 3173 for storing display data (8 bits of D7 to D0). Specifically, as shown in the load register selection table (see FIG. 33), if D15 to D8 are 00100010B, the latch selector load pulse distributor 3180 has data register 0, that is, 8-bit of Digit-A. It sends a signal to select the 8-bit data latch 3173 so that the data latch 3173A stores the data.

The 8-bit data latch 3173 is provided as many as the number of 7-segment LEDs 13172 (the number of display digits), and according to the selection signal from the latch selector load pulse distributor 3180, data to be displayed on each 7-segment LED is captured. Hold. The 8-bit data latch 3173 sends the held data to the 8 × 4 data selector 3174.

The 8x4 data selector 3174 selects the data sent from each of the 8-bit data latches 3173A to D at a predetermined display timing of each digit, and sends the data to the decoder 3175 and the 2x8 data selector 3176.

The decoder 3175 uses the character generator decoding table (see FIG. 34) to convert the input data into characters to be displayed on the 7-segment LED 13172, and generates data for lighting each segment. The generated data is input to the 2 × 8 data selector 3176.

The 2x8 data selector 3176 refers to the decoding settings and selects data from the decoder 3175 if it is set to a mode that uses a decoder, and 8x if it is set to a mode that does not use a decoder. 4 Select the data from the data selector 3174. The selected data is input to the constant current driver 3178.

The constant current driver 3178 uses the data from the 2 × 8 data selector 3176 to output current signals for lighting each segment from the data output terminals OUTa to OUTDp. As described above, the current output from the constant current driver 3178 is controlled by the resistance value of the resistor connected to the R-EXT terminal.

The driver 3179 receives a sink current of the current output from the constant current driver 3178 to light each segment of the 7-segment LED 13172. The driver 3179 controls the current suction timing of the terminals DIG-0 to DIG-3 to determine which 7-segment LED (digit) is to be displayed.

The Digit-Limit control unit 3181 controls the number of display digits of the 7-segment LED 13172 controlled by the driver circuit 13171. That is, the driver circuit 13171 can control the number of lit digits from 1 to 4 by setting from the outside. Specifically, by inputting data in which D15 to D8 are set to 00100001B and D7 to D0 are set to XXX0011B, all four digits are used in the digit register (DIGITREGISTER) of the Digit-Limit control unit 3181. Is written. Note that x indicates that either H or L data may be used, and whether the input data is H or L does not affect the truth table.

The duty ratio control unit 3182 controls the duty ratio when lighting the 7-segment LED 13172. That is, the driver circuit 13171 can control the duty ratio by setting from the outside, and controls the brightness at which the 7-segment LED 13172 lights up. The duty ratio control unit 3182 controls the duty ratio by controlling the pulse width of at least one of the timing signals sent to the constant current driver 3178 and the driver 3179. Specifically, D15 to D8 are set to 00100000B, and by inputting arbitrary data to D3 to D0, the duty register (DUTY REGISTER) of the duty ratio control unit 3182 has 16 steps of duty of 0/16 to 15/16. The ratio setting is written.

The data selector control unit 3183 controls the decoder settings. That is, the driver circuit 13171 controls whether or not to use the decoder 3175 by setting from the outside. Specifically, by inputting data in which D15 to D8 are set to 00100001B and D7 to D0 are set to 0001 ×××× B, the setting for using the decoder is written in the decode register, and D7 to D0 are set to 0000 ××. By inputting the data set to XXB, the setting of NO DECODER that does not use the decoder is written. The data selector control unit 3183 controls the 2 × 8 data selector 3176 to select data from the decoder 3175 when the decoder is set to be used, and 2 when the decoder is not used. The × 8 data selector 3176 controls to select data from the 8 × 4 data selector 3174.

The standby mode control unit 3184 controls the standby mode setting and the data clear setting. That is, the driver circuit 13171 can shift to the standby mode by setting from the outside. Specifically, the standby mode can be set by inputting data in which D15 to D12 are set to 0100B and D3 to D0 are set to 0000B. In the standby mode, the setting at that time is maintained as it is, the current output to the 7-segment LED 13172 is cut off, and the power consumption of the driver circuit 13171 is suppressed.

Further, the driver circuit 13171 can clear all the data held inside by setting from the outside. Specifically, by inputting data in which D15 to D12 are set to 0100B and D3 to D0 are set to 0001B, all the data held in the registers and latches are cleared and initialized.

Oscillator 3185 produces the clock used in driver circuit 13171.

FIG. 31 is a diagram showing a mounting example of the main control board 1310. In this figure, the configuration on the main control board box 1320 is shown by a solid line, and the configuration on the main control board 1310 is shown by a dotted line.

FIG. 31A shows the main control board box 1320 of mounting example 1. The main control board box 1320 is made of a transparent resin that houses the main control board 1310 in a structure that cannot be opened without breaking once closed, and the model number of the main control board 1310 is displayed on the surface thereof. (Seal sticking, engraving, printing, etc.) and opening sticker are stuck. The opening seal is a seal that records the history of opening the seal of the main control board 1310.

The mounting example 1 shown in FIG. 31 (B) shows a state in which the main control board 1310 is housed in the main control board box 1320 shown in (A). In the first mounting example, the main control MPU 1311 is mounted on the main control board 1310. The main control MPU 1311 may be mounted so that the longitudinal direction of the main control board 1310 and the longitudinal direction of the main control MPU 1311 are in the same direction.

The main control board 1310 is enclosed in the main control board box 1320 to form the main control unit 1300. The main control MPU 1311 is arranged at a position where it can be confirmed from the outside that no improper modification has been made. Further, the main control MPU 1311 is arranged so that it can be easily confirmed from the outside that no improper modification has been made by not arranging parts around the main control MPU 1311.

The accessory ratio indicator 1317 is arranged at a position visible from the outside on the main control board 1310. The direction of the numbers displayed on the accessory ratio display 1317 may be the same as the model number display of the main control MPU 1311 or the model number display of the 1320 on the main control board box. Further, it is preferable that the components are mounted so that the longitudinal direction of the accessory ratio indicator 1317, the longitudinal direction of the main control board 1310, and the longitudinal direction of the main control MPU 1311 are the same. When the main control board 1310 is mounted on the game machine in a horizontally long direction, the longitudinal direction of the accessory ratio indicator 1317 and the longitudinal direction of the main control MPU 1311 and the longitudinal direction of the main control board 1310 are in the same direction. It is preferable to mount the accessory ratio display 1317 and the main control MPU 1311 so as to be. When the main control board 1310 is mounted on the game machine in a vertically long direction, the longitudinal direction of the accessory ratio indicator 1317, the longitudinal direction of the main control MPU 1311, and the longitudinal direction of the main control board 1310 are 90 degrees. It is advisable to mount the accessory ratio display 1317 and the main control MPU 1311 so as to face each other.

Further, the connectors CN1 and CN2 for drawing out the signal line from the main control board 1310 are end portions (upper length in the figure) along the long side of the main control board 1310 in the direction of being aligned with the accessory ratio display 1317. It is the upper end along the side, but it may be mounted at the lower end along the lower long side or the end along the left and right sides). That is, it is desirable that the connectors CN1 and CN2 are arranged at positions where the wiring (harness) connected to the connectors CN1 and CN2 overlaps with the accessory ratio indicator 1317 and does not interfere with the visibility of the accessory ratio indicator 1317. ..

Further, the model number display of the main control board box 1320 and the opening sticker attached to the main control board box 1320 are attached at positions that do not overlap with either the main control MPU or the accessory ratio indicator 1317.

By mounting the accessory ratio indicator 1317 in this way, the model number display of the accessory ratio indicator 1317 and the main control MPU 1311 is displayed in the correct orientation, improving their visibility and improving the visibility in the manufacturing process and the amusement park. Even in the inspection after installation, it is possible to confirm the ratio of accessories and the presence or absence of modification of the main control MPU 1311 without taking an unreasonable posture.

In another mounting example shown in FIG. 31 (C), the model number display of the main control MPU 1311 and the numerical display of the accessory ratio display 1317 are mounted so as to be in the same direction, but circuits other than the main control MPU 1311 The direction of the model number display of the module (for example, IC) is different from the direction of the model number display of the main control MPU 1311 and the number display direction of the accessory ratio display 1317. Further, the circuit modules other than the main control MPU 1311 may be arranged at a position overlapping the model number display of the main control board box 1320 and the opening seal attached to the main control board box 1320. This is because the circuit modules other than the main control MPU 1311 are less important when inspecting for unauthorized modification, and therefore it is of little significance to make the orientations arranged on the main control board 1310 the same.

FIG. 32 is a diagram showing the positional relationship between the main control MPU 1311 and the accessory ratio indicator 1317.

As shown in FIG. 32 (A), the signal line 13173 between the driver circuit 13171 of the accessory ratio display 1317 and the 7-segment LED 13172 may become unstable due to the influence of noise. Therefore, it is desirable that the driver circuit 13171 and the 7-segment LED 13172 are arranged as close to each other as possible.

For example, as shown in the figure, the distance between the driver circuit 13171 and the 7-segment LED 13172 (the length L2 of the wiring 13173) is the distance between the main control MPU 1311 and the driver circuit 13171 of the accessory ratio display 1317 (the length of the wiring 13101). Arrange so that it is shorter than L1). That is, L1 is larger than L2.

Further, as described above, no parts are arranged around the main control MPU 1311 in order to easily confirm from the outside that no inappropriate modification has been made, as shown by the dotted line. Therefore, the wiring length L1 becomes a certain length, but L2 is made as short as possible.

The driver circuit 13171 and the 7-segment LED 13172 may be housed in one package or another package, and in either case, L1 is mounted so as to be larger than L2.

32 (B) is a diagram showing the positional relationship between the main control MPU 1311 and the accessory ratio display 1317 in another mounting example, and FIG. 32 (C) is a diagram showing the positional relationship between the main control MPU 1311 and the accessory ratio display 1317, and FIG. 32 (C) shows the mounting example shown in FIG. 32 (B). It is sectional drawing of the printed circuit board.

As shown in FIG. 32 (B), ground patterns 13102 are provided on both sides of the signal line 13101 between the main control MPU 1311 and the driver circuit 13171 of the accessory ratio indicator 1317. Further, in the printed circuit board, a prohibited area 13106 in which no signal pattern is provided is provided on the back surface and the inner layer of the signal line 13101. A ground pattern 13107 or a power supply pattern as a guard pattern may be provided on at least one of the back surface and the inner layer of the printed circuit board in the prohibited area 13106.

Explaining the arrangement of other signal lines in this implementation example, for example, the signal line 13103 that supplies the clock signal from the oscillator to the main control MPU 1311 avoids the prohibited area 13106 (that is, the signal line 13103 and the signal line 13101 are arranged. Arranged (so that they do not intersect). Further, the signal line 13104 connected to the main control MPU 1311 may be arranged so as to pass through the back surface or the inner layer through the through hole 13105. Also in this case, the signal line 13104 is arranged so as to avoid the prohibited area 13106 (that is, the signal line 13104 and the signal line 13101 do not intersect).

From the viewpoint of preventing unauthorized modification, the main control board 1310 is generally composed of a two-layer board having a pattern on the front surface and the back surface and having no inner layer. It can also be applied to a multilayer substrate having an inner layer (4 layers, 6 layers, etc.).

FIG. 33 is a diagram showing a load register selection table of the driver circuit 13171.

The load register selection table is a table for determining a register for storing data input to the driver circuit 13171.

The driver circuit 13171 of this embodiment has seven registers. The duty register is used by the duty ratio control unit 3182, and the duty ratio for lighting the 7-segment LED 13172 is set. For example, when D15 to D8 are 00100000B, the data set in D7 to D0 is the data for setting the duty ratio and is written in the duty register of the duty ratio control unit 3182.

The decode register is used by the data selector control unit 3183 or the Digit-Limit control unit 3181, and the use of the decoder 3175, that is, the presence / absence of decoding and the number of display digits are set. The decode register and the digit number register may be configured as one register. For example, when D15 to D8 are 00100001B, the data set in D7 to D0 is data for setting the presence or absence of decoding or data for setting the number of display digits, and is decoded by the data selector control unit 3183. It is written to the register or the digit register of the Digit-Limit control unit 3181.

The data register is used by the 8-bit data latches 3173A to D, and the data to be displayed in each digit of the 7-segment LED 13172 is set. For example, when D15 to D8 are 00100010B to 00100101B, the data set in D7 to D0 is the data for lighting the 7-segment LED, and is written to the data register in the 8-bit data latches 3173A to D.

The duty ratio, the presence / absence of decoding, and the number of display digits set in the registers described above do not need to be set each time the accessory ratio is displayed, and may be set once. Therefore, the initial setting is performed in step S28 of FIG. Is set as. If the initial setting is set only once, the setting may be changed due to the influence of noise or the like after the initial setting. Therefore, a switching button is pressed every time a predetermined condition (for example, opening of the main body frame 4 is detected) is detected. It may be reset every time (is pressed). As a result, even if the setting is switched due to noise, the correct display can always be performed.

FIG. 34 is a diagram showing a character generator decoding table. The character generator decode table is used by the decoder 3175 to convert the input data into character data to be displayed on the 7-segment LED 13172. By using the character generator decoding table, characters such as numbers and some alphabets can be displayed without considering the font. Further, when displaying numbers, since D5 to D0 match the displayed numbers, the calculation result can be input to the driver circuit 13171 and displayed on the 7-segment LED 13172 without conversion.

The lighting of the decimal point of each digit of the 7-segment LED 13172 is controlled by D6.

FIG. 35 is a state transition diagram of the driver circuit 13171, and FIG. 36 is a diagram showing a display example of the accessory ratio indicator 1317.

The driver circuit 13171 of this embodiment has five states: initial state, data input state, LED lighting state (0000), LED lighting state (lighting according to input data), and LED lighting state (all lighting). Is being prepared.

In order to control these five states, there are blank, normal operation, register write, full lighting, and standby mode setting instructions. The blank instruction cuts off the output of the constant current driver 3178 and the output of the driver 3179. The normal operation command displays the 7-segment LED 13172 after the completion of each setting. If a normal operation command is input without setting the display data, the 7-segment LED13172 displays the number 0 in all digits. The register write instruction sets the number of digits used, sets the duty ratio, sets whether the decoder is used or not, and inputs display data. Select the register to write data in D11 to D8, and input the contents to be set in the register in D7 to D0 (see FIG. 33). The all-lighting instruction turns on the output of the constant current driver 3178 on the data side and lights all the segments of the 7-segment LED 13172. The standby instruction is divided into two according to the parameters, and there are a standby instruction that transitions to the standby state and a clear instruction that transitions to the initial state. The standby instruction maintains the setting at that time, stops the operation of the constant current driver 3178 and the driver 3179, cuts off the current output to the 7-segment LED 13172, and suppresses the power consumption of the driver circuit 13171. In addition, the clear instruction clears and initializes all the data held in the register or latch, and the display turns off.

Since the blank instruction is also a kind of display instruction, in the present specification, the "display" includes any of the states of the 7-segment LED being fully lit, some segments being lit, and all being extinguished.

A display example in each of the above-described states will be described with reference to FIG. 36.

When the power of the game machine is turned on, the initial setting of the driver circuit 13171 is not completed or the display data is not set, so that the initial state (ALL BLANK) is set. As shown in FIG. 36 (A), the 7-segment LED 13172 All segments of are turned off and are not lit. Further, since the accessory ratio display 1317 cannot be visually recognized when the main body frame 4 is closed and the game is possible, it is preferable to set the standby mode and turn off the 7-segment LED 13172 to reduce the power consumption of the game machine.

Then, after the control data is set in the various control registers in the driver circuit 13171 and the initial setting is completed, the display data is input, and the 7-segment LED 13172 displays a predetermined display. As shown in FIG. 36B, this predetermined display may display “−” in all digits or light all segments. It is preferable that the normal operation of the accessory ratio indicator 1317 can be confirmed by this predetermined display.

Further, when the main body frame 4 is opened, it is advisable to display a predetermined value on all the digits so that it can be confirmed that the accessory ratio display 1317 is operating normally. For example, as shown in FIG. 36B, "-" may be displayed in all digits, or all segments may be lit.

Then, when the accessory ratio display switch 1318 is operated and the display data is input to the driver circuit 13171, the LED lighting state (lighting according to the input data) is set. Specifically, the accessory ratio is displayed, the code indicating the display content is displayed in the left two digits of the 7-segment LED13172, and the numerical value of the accessory ratio is displayed in the right two digits. In the example shown in FIG. 36 (C), "y175" is displayed, indicating that the accessory ratio 1 is 75%. If the displayed accessory ratio is an abnormal value outside the specified range, it is preferable to display it so that it can be identified. For example, all digits (or numbers) are blinked and displayed, and the decimal point is lit or blinked.

Further, when the accessory ratio display switch 1318 is operated and the display data is input to the driver circuit 13171, the display content of the 7-segment LED 13172 is changed. That is, another kind of accessory ratio is displayed. In this case as well, the code indicating the display content is displayed in the left two digits, and the numerical value of the accessory ratio is displayed in the right two digits. In the example shown in FIG. 36 (D), "y263" is displayed, indicating that the accessory ratio 2 is 63%. In this case as well, it is preferable to display so as to be able to identify that the displayed accessory ratio is an abnormal value outside the specified range, as described above. A more specific display example of the accessory ratio will be described later with reference to FIG. 37.

Then, when the main body frame 4 is closed, a predetermined display for confirming the normal operation of the accessory ratio indicator 1317 is performed (FIG. 36 (E)), and after a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed, the 7-segment LED 13172 is turned on. It is recommended to turn off the lights to reduce the power consumption of the game machine. This bonus ratio non-display state is the same mode as after the initial setting is completed, but may be a different mode, as long as it is distinguishable from the bonus ratio display.

FIG. 36 (E) is a display example in which the accessory ratio display 1317 and the main control MPU 1311 have an abnormality and the accessory ratio cannot be displayed. The decimal point may be lit or blinking, or may be displayed differently for each digit. Further, the abnormal display may be in a mode different from that shown in the drawing, and may be in a mode that can be distinguished from the normal accessory ratio display in order to indicate that the accessory ratio display cannot be performed.

Further, when the all lighting command is input in any of the states, all the segments of the 7-segment LED 13172 are lit. Further, when a blank instruction or a standby instruction is input in any of the states, all the segments of the 7-segment LED 13172 are turned off while retaining the data. Further, when a data clear command is input in any of the states, all the data held in the register or the latch is cleared, all the segments of the 7-segment LED13172 are turned on, and the initial state is returned.

[8. Display of character ratio]
Next, a method of calculating and displaying the accessory ratio will be described.

As described above, the accessory ratio is displayed on the accessory ratio indicator 1317 provided on the main control board 1310. As described above, the accessory ratio display 1317 is composed of, for example, a 4-digit 7-segment LED and a liquid crystal display device, displays the value of the accessory ratio in the last 2 digits, and the type of the numerical value in the first 2 digits. Is displayed.

Further, the accessory ratio display 1317 may be configured by a 2-digit 7-segment LED. In this case, the numerical value of the accessory ratio and the type of the numerical value may be displayed alternately.

The display mode of the numerical value of the accessory ratio may be displayed in a different display mode depending on the comparison result between the accessory ratio and the predetermined reference value. For example, when the accessory ratio exceeds a predetermined reference value, the numerical value is blinked or the color is changed (normally green, when the reference is exceeded, red, etc.) is displayed. By changing the display mode according to the comparison result with the reference value, it is possible to easily recognize that the accessory ratio is abnormal.

The accessory ratio indicator 1317 may be composed of one or a plurality of LED lamps. When the accessory ratio display 1317 is composed of one LED lamp, the comparison result between the accessory ratio and the predetermined reference value is displayed in different modes. For example, if the accessory ratio is smaller than the reference value, it is displayed in green, and if the accessory ratio is larger than the reference value, it is displayed in red. If the accessory ratio is smaller than the reference value, it lights up, and if the accessory ratio is larger than the reference threshold, it blinks.

When the accessory ratio display 1317 is composed of a plurality of (for example, 10) LED lamps, the accessory ratio is displayed with one LED lamp as 10%. For example, if the accessory ratio is 70% or more and less than 80%, seven LEDs are turned on. In this case, different display modes (display colors) may be displayed depending on the display content (proporty ratio or continuous bonus ratio, latest data display or medium-term data display, etc.).

If the total number of acquired balls is less than 6000, the collection period of the prize ball data is short and the value of the accessory ratio may not have converged. Therefore, the display is displayed in a different display mode (display color, blinking, etc.). You may. It is desirable that the display mode when the total number of acquired balls is less than the threshold value is different from the display mode when the total number of acquired balls exceeds the above-mentioned reference value.

The accessory ratio display 1317 may switch between the latest data display, the medium-term data display, and the long-term data display. The latest data display is the accessory ratio calculated by using the previous counter value currently being written in the ring counter shown in FIGS. 27 (B) and 27 (C). The medium-term data display is the accessory ratio calculated using the cumulative total in the ring counter shown in FIGS. 27 (B) and 27 (C). The long-term data display is a bonus ratio calculated using the total cumulative total in the ring counter shown in FIGS. 27 (B) and 27 (C).

The accessory ratio display 1317 may also be used by the function display unit 1400. The function display unit 1400 normally displays the game status based on the control signal from the main control board 1310, but when the main body frame release switch (not shown) detects that the main body frame 4 has been released from the outer frame 2, the main body frame 4 has been released. The control board 1310 switches the display so that the function display unit 1400 displays the accessory ratio. The display of the function display unit 1400 is switched by opening the main body frame 4, but it is preferable that the progress of the game continues. By continuing the progress of the game, when the main body frame 4 is closed, the display of the accessory ratio can be quickly switched to the display of the game state. For example, if the main body frame 4 is opened during the special symbol fluctuation display game, the accessory ratio is displayed, but if the main body frame 4 is closed before the fluctuation time elapses, the fluctuation display for the remaining time can be performed. it can. Since the special symbol displayed on the function display unit 1400 is synchronized with the decorative symbol displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600, the decorative symbol is stopped at the timing when the special symbol variation display of the function display unit 1400 is stopped. Therefore, even if the function display unit 1400 displays the accessory ratio, it can be configured so as not to give a sense of discomfort to the player.

The accessory ratio display 1317 may display a value other than the accessory ratio. For example, the number of prizes won or the number of prize balls paid out for each type of prize opening per unit time may be displayed. The unit time may be switched and displayed by operating the accessory ratio display switch 1318, such as 1 minute, 10 minutes, 1 hour, and 10 hours.

The accessory ratio display 1317 may display the base. The base is the normal ball output rate excluding the special prize (during the big hit), and can be calculated by the number of safe balls divided by the number of out balls. The number of launch balls (the number of out balls) is detected by the launch ball sensor 1020. As described above, the launch ball sensor 1020 is provided near the exits (backflow prevention member 1007) of the rails 1001 and 1002 that guide the game ball from the ball launcher to the game area 5a (see FIGS. 10 and 16). Further, the number of out balls may be detected by the discharge ball sensor 3060. As described above, the discharge ball sensor 3060 is provided at the discharge port for discharging the game ball discharged from the game area 5a to the outside of the pachinko machine 1 (see FIG. 4). Further, an out-port passing ball sensor 1021 (see FIG. 53) for detecting a game ball passing through the out-port 1111 provided in the lower part of the game area 5a is provided, and the number of game balls detected by the out-port passing ball sensor 1021 is determined. The number of out balls may be detected by the total of the number of game balls detected by the start opening sensors 2104 and 2551 and the number of game balls detected by the various winning opening sensors 3015, 2114, 2554 and 2557. Further, a launch supply ball sensor (not shown) that detects a game ball supplied to the ball launcher 680, and a game ball launched from the ball launcher 680 but not reaching the game area 5a (so-called foul ball). A foul ball sensor (not shown) is provided to detect, and the number of foul balls is subtracted from the number of game balls supplied to the ball launcher 680 detected by the launch supply ball sensor to obtain the number of out balls (number of launch balls). It may be detected.

The number of out balls may be counted by any of the methods described above. That is, among the illustrated sensors, it is sufficient if either the discharge ball sensor 3060 or the launch ball sensor 1020 is provided.

In addition, the number of safe balls is equal to the number of prize balls paid out. In addition, the base may be defined as the ball output rate for each game state (during normal game, during electric power support, during probability fluctuation, during time reduction), and calculated by the number of safe balls divided by the number of out balls for each game state. .. By displaying the base on the accessory ratio display 1317, it is possible to check the deviation of the ball ejection performance from the design value during operation on the spot for each game machine. In addition, since the ball ejection performance can be confirmed without using a hall controller, it becomes easy to inspect each game machine at the time of on-site inspection of the game hall.

The accessory ratio display 1317 provides information on other prizes and prize balls in the base (the number of prizes in the general prize opening 2001 and the number of prize balls due to the prize, the number of prizes in the starting prize opening 2002 and the number of prize balls due to the prize). , The number of prizes in the big prize openings 2005 and 2006, the number of prize balls due to the prize, etc.) may be displayed.

The accessory ratio display 1317 may always display the accessory ratio, or may display the accessory ratio by operating the accessory ratio display switch 1318. For example, when the accessory ratio display switch 1318, which is a push button switch, is pressed, the accessory ratio display is started, displayed for a predetermined time, and then turned off. If the accessory ratio display switch 1318 is operated while the main body frame release switch (not shown) detects that the main body frame 4 has been released from the outer frame 2, the accessory ratio is displayed on the accessory ratio display 1317. You may. That is, even if the accessory ratio display switch 1318 is operated unless the main body frame is open, the accessory ratio display 1317 does not display the accessory ratio.

Further, the display content may be changed for each operation of the accessory ratio display switch 1318. For example, as shown in FIG. 37, when the accessory ratio display switch 1318 is operated once, A7, which means the accessory ratio (cumulative), is displayed in the first two digits, and a predetermined number (for example, 60,000) of prize balls is displayed. The bonus ratio to is displayed in the last two digits. When the accessory ratio display switch 1318 is operated once again, the display of the first two digits switches to A6, which means the continuous accessory ratio (cumulative), and the continuous accessory ratio to a predetermined number (for example, 60,000) of prize balls. May be displayed in the last two digits (FIG. 37 (B)). Furthermore, when the accessory ratio display switch 1318 is operated once, y7, which means the accessory ratio (6000 prize balls), is displayed in the first two digits, and the accessory ratio based on the latest data is displayed in the last two digits (latest data). Display) (Fig. 37 (C)). When the bonus ratio display switch 1318 is operated once again, the first two-digit display switches to y6, which means the bonus ratio (cumulative), and the bonus ratio to a predetermined number (for example, 60,000) of prize balls is lowered. It may be displayed in two digits (medium-term data display) (FIG. 37 (D)).

The accessory ratio display switch 1318 may not be provided as an independent switch, but may also be used as a RAM clear switch provided on the main control board 1310 or the peripheral control board 1510. That is, the switch functions as a RAM clear switch when operated when the power is turned on, and functions as a bonus ratio display switch 1318 when operated during the operation of the game machine 1. By consolidating the functions of the RAM clear switch and the accessory ratio display switch 1318 into one switch, the number of switches operated by the staff in the amusement park becomes one, and erroneous operations by inexperienced staff can be reduced.

As described above, according to the present embodiment, it is possible to accurately calculate the accessory ratio of the operating gaming machine, and to confirm the gambling of the operating gaming machine.

In addition, the data of the number of prize balls is accumulated as the data for calculating / displaying the prize ball 13136, and when the check code is abnormal, the data for calculating / displaying the prize ratio 13136 is deleted, so that the wrong character ratio is displayed. Can be avoided.

In addition, since the accessory ratio calculation / display data 13136 is deleted under a condition different from the deletion condition of the data related to the progress of the game backed up in the RAM 1312 of the main control MPU 1311, the accurate prize ball number data is retained. , You can calculate the exact prize ratio.

In addition, since the accessory ratio calculation / display data 13136 is not deleted by operating the RAM clear switch, the accessory ratio calculation / display data 13136 is not accidentally deleted by the operation of the staff in the game hall. Since the data for calculating and displaying the object ratio is not erased by the operation of the RAM clear switch, the data is not erased by the erroneous operation of the staff of the game hall. In addition, since the game hall cannot intentionally delete the data for calculating and displaying the accessory ratio, the reliability of the displayed accessory ratio is improved, and it is possible to prevent concealment of the state where the accessory ratio is high.

[9. View base]
[9-1. Basic configuration of a game machine that displays the base]
Up to this point, an example of a pachinko machine that calculates and displays the accessory ratio has been described. Next, an example of a pachinko machine that calculates and displays a base value will be described. In this embodiment, the pachinko machine that calculates and displays the base value will be described exclusively, but the accessory ratio may be calculated and displayed together with the base value.

In the pachinko machine described below, as described above, when a game ball wins a prize at the starting winning opening (first starting opening 2002, second starting opening 2004), a lottery is performed by random numbers and a special symbol variation display game is executed. To do. The fluctuation pattern (variation time) of the special symbol fluctuation display game is a fluctuation pattern of a relatively short time (normal fluctuation pattern of about 10 seconds, shortened fluctuation pattern of about 2 to 5 seconds that is easily selected when the number of holds is large). There are also relatively long time fluctuation patterns (fluctuation patterns such as super reach exceeding 1 minute). When calculating the base value with a pachinko machine, the notification of the base value is less urgent than the notification of the error, so that the notification can be made at the timing when the special symbol variation display game is switched to the next variation display game. However, if the variable display time is long, the number of out balls (number of launched balls) and the number of prize balls (paid balls) are met when the predetermined conditions are met without waiting for the end of one special symbol variable display game. It is better to calculate the base value and update the display when the number) changes). Therefore, in the pachinko machine of the present embodiment, when a predetermined condition is satisfied during the game (for example, even in the special symbol variation display game) (for example, the number of out balls (number of launch balls) or the number of prize balls (number of payout balls)). ) Changes), the base value is calculated and displayed. Next, a specific configuration of a pachinko machine that performs such an operation will be described.

FIG. 38 is a block diagram showing a configuration around the main control board 1310 of the pachinko machine 1 that calculates and displays the base value.

The pachinko machine 1 shown in FIG. 38 has substantially the same configuration as the pachinko machine 1 shown in FIG. 17, but the configuration represented by reference numeral 1317 is not a bonus ratio display but a base display. The base display 1317 of the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment may use, for example, a 4-digit 7-segment LED as shown in FIGS. 4 and 28, and may have another number of digits (for example, 2 digits). A 7-segment LED may be used.

The pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment acquires data on the number of prize balls and the number of out balls in the area update process (step S81) for calculating the accessory ratio of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 23) executed by the main control MPU 1311. In the accessory ratio calculation / display process (step S89), the base value is calculated and displayed. In the following description, the “accessory ratio calculation area update process” in step S81 of FIG. 23 is read as “base calculation area update process”, and the “accessory ratio calculation / display process” in step S89 is “base”. The explanation will be replaced with "calculation / display processing". Further, the "character ratio calculation area 13128" shown in FIG. 26 is read as "base calculation area 13128", and the "character ratio calculation / display code 13135" is read as "base calculation / display code 13135". The description will be described by replacing "data for calculating / displaying the accessory ratio 13136" with "data for calculating / displaying 13136".

FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing an example of the base calculation area update process (step S81). The base calculation area update process determines the current game state, adds the number of prize balls paid out as the game value to the area corresponding to the current game state, and updates the base calculation area 13128 of the main control built-in RAM 1312. To do. In particular, in the base calculation area update process shown in FIG. 39, the total number of prize balls is calculated using the number of prize balls calculated in the prize ball control process (step S80) in order to calculate the base value each time for each timer interrupt cycle. Is directly updated (step S814), and the total number of out balls is directly updated using the number of out balls (step S822).

First, it is determined whether the gaming state is in the special prize (step S810). The fact that the game state is in the special prize means that the big prize openings 2005 and 2006 are open, and it is during the time when the player can win many prize balls, but even if the opening and ending times of the big hit game are included. Good. When the big winning openings 2005 and 2006 repeat opening and closing in one big hit, the time between the closing of the big winning opening and the next opening (closing interval) may be included. That is, during the special prize in step S810, it means that the condition device is operating, for example, from the determination of the jackpot symbol of the special symbol variation display game to the end of the ending. In addition, it may include all the time during the right-handed instruction.

Further, in the starting winning openings 2002 and 2004, the special prize may include the time saving, the probability change (ST), and the electric power support. Further, in a gaming state other than during time reduction, probabilistic change (ST), and electric power support, a predetermined time after opening and closing of the starting winning opening 2004 (for example, a ball winning the starting winning opening is detected as an out ball. The special prize may include up to a few seconds required.

The electrically operated accessory provided in the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment can be divided into two types from the viewpoint of calculating the base value. As described above, the special prizes related to the big prize openings 2005 and 2006 in the game machine of this embodiment are during the operation of the condition device (for example, from the determination of the big hit symbol of the special symbol variation display game to the end of the ending). Since the base value is calculated by the number of prize balls and out balls other than during the special prize, the normal (so-called big hit) prizes to the big prize openings 2005 and 2006 are not used to calculate the base value. On the other hand, in the starting winning opening 2004 (so-called electric tulip) having an opening / closing member, winning balls and prize balls other than during the special prize (low probability time or non-time saving time) are used for calculating the base value. In other words, among the electrically operated accessories, some of the accessories (large prize openings 2005, 2006) are calculated based on the number of winning balls and the number of winning balls regardless of the playing state (whether or not they are in the special prize). Not used, other characters (starting winning opening 2004) switch whether to use the number of winning balls and the number of winning balls in the calculation of the base value according to the game state (whether or not the special prize is in progress). Will be done. Not using the number of winning balls and the number of prize balls in the calculation of the base value means that the paid out prize balls are not counted in (the number of prize balls other than the special prize which is the division number in the calculation of the base value). Even if a winning signal is input, it also includes not creating edge information for paying out the winning ball by the winning signal.

Further, the big winning openings 2005 and 2006 may be opened (as a so-called small hit) even when the condition device does not operate. In general, small hits occur during a short time, and since it is open for a short time, it is unlikely that a game ball will win a prize, so it does not affect the calculation of the base value. However, a small hit may be generated except during the special prize (normal time), and the game ball may be opened only during the time when the possibility of winning the prize is high. In this case, the winning balls and the winning balls to the large winning openings 2005 and 2006 in the small hits generated other than during the special prize may be used in the calculation of the base value. In this way, the expected value (design value) of the base value can be changed by controlling the probability of occurrence of a small hit other than during the special prize. That is, it is possible to provide a pachinko machine that can flexibly respond to the standard of the base value, and it is possible to improve the degree of freedom in design.

If the game state is during the special prize, since the prize ball is not related to the calculation of the base value, the base calculation area update process is terminated without updating the number of prize balls and the number of out balls. On the other hand, if the gaming state is not during the special prize, the number of prize balls calculated based on the input information in the prize ball control process (step S80) is acquired (step S811). The number of prize balls acquired in the base calculation area update process may be the number of prize balls determined to be paid out. Further, the number of prize balls corresponding to the created payout command may be used. Further, the number of prize balls corresponding to the sent payout command may be used. Further, the number of prize balls corresponding to the payout command in which the main control board 1310 transmits the payout command to the payout control board 951 and the receipt confirmation (ACK) is received from the payout control board 951 may be used. Further, the number of prize balls (number of paid prize balls) may be used, in which the main control board 1310 transmits a payout command to the payout control board 951 and the payout control board 951 reports that the payout is completed. This variation will be described with reference to FIGS. 41-44.

Then, the acquired number of prize balls is added to the total number of prize balls to update the total number of prize balls (step S814). It should be noted that it may be determined whether or not there is a prize ball, and if there is no prize ball, the process of updating the total number of prize balls may be skipped. In addition, although the game balls have won in the starting winning openings 2002 and 2004, the holding is the upper limit, and even if the winning in the starting winning opening is not suspended, the winning balls will be paid out, so the total number of winning balls will be updated. To. Further, in a game state in which a prize ball is not generated even if a game ball is won in the winning opening (for example, when a specific error occurs), the prize ball due to the winning is not generated and the number of prize balls to be acquired is large. Since it is 0, the total number of prize balls is not updated. The total number of prize balls is recorded in the total number of prize balls storage area (see FIG. 52) provided in the base calculation area 13128 of the main control built-in RAM 1312. That is, in the base calculation area update process shown in FIG. 39, the total number of prize balls used for calculating the base value is updated each time the number of prize balls is calculated.

After that, the number of out balls is acquired (step S818), and the total number of out balls is updated so as to add the acquired number of out balls to the total number of out balls (step S822). As described above, the number of out balls is detected by the launch ball sensor 1020, the discharge ball sensor 3060, etc., and the switch input process in step S74 reads the detection signals of these sensors and out if there is a sensor detection signal. Acquire the number of balls = 1. The total number of out balls is recorded in the total number of out balls storage area (see FIG. 52) provided in the base calculation area 13128 of the main control built-in RAM 1312. That is, in the base calculation area update process shown in FIG. 39, the total number of out balls used for calculating the base value is updated each time an out ball is detected. In this way, the base calculation process is executed for each timer interrupt process, the total number of out balls is updated, and the base value is calculated and displayed by the base calculation display process (FIG. 40), so that the base value is displayed without delay. You can judge whether the base is normal or abnormal without delay.

In addition, as in steps S815 to S817 of the base calculation area update process (FIG. 46) described later, it is determined whether or not there is an abnormality in the number of prize balls, and if there is an abnormality in the number of prize balls, an abnormality notification command is generated. , The prize ball abnormality notification timer may be reset. Further, as in steps S824 to S825, it is determined whether the prize ball abnormality notification timer has timed up, and when the prize ball abnormality notification timer has timed up, a prize ball abnormality notification stop command is generated to notify the prize ball abnormality. May be stopped.

In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the main control MPU 1311 executes the calculation process of the base value in the timer interrupt process, but the payout control MPU of the payout control unit 952 may execute the calculation process of the base value. In this case, the main control board 1310 may transmit a command for notifying the base to the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510, or the payout control unit 952 may send a command for notifying the peripheral control unit 1511 of the base. May be sent.

Further, even if information on both the winning and the out balls to the winning opening is acquired in one timer interrupt process, the number of prize balls is changed to the total number of prize balls (or the number of prize balls buffer in the embodiment described later). Add and add the number of out balls to the total number of out balls (or the out ball number buffer in the embodiment described later). Further, even if information on winning a plurality of winning openings is acquired in one timer interrupt process, the total number of prize balls due to the plurality of winnings is the total number of prize balls (or the number of prize balls buffer in the embodiment described later). ). Therefore, the base value can be calculated and displayed accurately. For example, if a prize is detected in the winning opening sensor of the winning opening with 5 prize balls and the winning opening sensor of the winning opening with 3 winning balls, a total of 8 prize balls are used as the total number of winning balls. (Or, add to the prize ball count buffer).

Further, the number of prize balls may be added to the total number of prize balls (or the number of prize balls buffer) only when the launch of the game balls is detected. That is, only the number of prize balls related to the prize detected within a predetermined time from the detection of the launch ball sensor 1020 may be added to the total number of prize balls (or the number of prize balls buffer). Further, the operation of the launch control unit 953 or the ball launcher 680 is detected, and while the launch control unit 953 or the ball launcher 680 is operating (furthermore, the launch control unit 953 or the ball launcher 680 stops operating). Only the number of prize balls related to the winning detected within a predetermined time (for example, after 5 seconds) may be added to the total number of prize balls or the number of prize balls buffer. Further, when the player is operating the firing handle, the number of prize balls may be added to the total number of prize balls (or the number of prize balls buffer). That is, only the number of prize balls related to the prize detected within a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) from the time when it is detected that the palm or finger is touching the contact detection sensor 509 of the handle unit 500 is the total number of prize balls ( Alternatively, it may be added to the prize ball number buffer). In this way, it is possible to prevent the prize ball from being reflected in the base value due to an abnormality or cheating that detects the prize ball when the game ball is not fired, and it is possible to prevent an inaccurate display of the base value. Further, when the contact detection sensor 509 is used, it is not necessary to newly provide a sensor for detecting the launch of the game ball, so that an increase in the cost of the pachinko machine 1 can be suppressed.

In the base calculation area update process shown in FIG. 39, the base is calculated by excluding the number of prize balls and the number of out balls during the special prize, but the number of prize balls due to winning the general winning opening and the starting winning opening is counted even during the special prize. Then, the base value may be calculated by excluding the number of balls that have won the big prize opening and counting the number of out balls.

FIG. 40 is a flowchart showing an example of the base calculation / display process (step S89). In the base calculation / display process shown in FIG. 40, the base value is calculated every time (every timer interrupt cycle).

First, it is determined whether the total number of out balls is 0 (step S902). If the total number of out balls is 0, the base value cannot be calculated, so the base calculation / display process is terminated without calculating the base value. On the other hand, if the total number of out balls is not 0, the base value is calculated by dividing the total number of out balls by the total number of out balls (step S903). When the total number of prize balls is 0, 0 is calculated as the base value, but the base value does not have to be calculated. Furthermore, when an abnormal base value is calculated (for example, when the total number of prize balls is larger than the total number of outs and a value of 1 (100%) or more is calculated as the base value), the base value is not calculated. May be good. When the base value is expressed as a percentage, the base value is calculated by multiplying the total number of prize balls ÷ the total number of out balls by 100. Specifically, the total number of prize balls is multiplied by a predetermined number (for example, 100) and stored in the division input register A131216, and the total number of out balls is stored in the division input register B131217.

The predetermined number to be multiplied by the total number of prize balls stored in the division input register A131216 controls the number of digits of the calculated base value. For example, if this predetermined number is 100, the base value is calculated to the 1st place in 100%, and the decimal number or less is not calculated. If this predetermined number is 10000, the base value is calculated in parts per hundred to two decimal places. That is, if the quotient output from the arithmetic circuit is divided by 100, the base value of a fraction of two decimal places can be calculated.

Then, after 32 clocks have elapsed, the quotient is read from the division result register A131218 and used as the base value. During the wait time of 32 clocks from writing data to the division input registers 131216 and 131217 to reading data from the division result register A131218, the main control MPU 1311 waits for other processing even if it waits without performing processing. May be done. For example, a random number for determining a big hit may be updated between writing data to the division input registers 131216 and 131217 and reading data from the division result register A131218. More specifically, since the hard random number generated by the random number generation circuit 13112 is updated at the timing of the clock cycle (or the signal obtained by dividing the clock cycle) supplied to the main control MPU 1311, the wait time Hard random numbers are also updated.

That is, in the gaming machine of the present embodiment, even while the arithmetic circuit 13121 is executing the base arithmetic processing, other processing related to the game can be executed in parallel. Other processes related to the game include at least a process of updating a random number for determining a win. Further, during the calculation (division) process in the calculation circuit 13121, the random numbers that affect the result of the game are updated one or more times.

Further, when the total number of out balls is 0, even if the base value is calculated, the return value from the calculation circuit 13121 results in an error, so that the base value need not be stored in the base calculation area 13128. In this case, the base value displayed on the base display 1317 is not updated.

After that, a base notification command is generated (step S908), and the base is notified to the player and the hall employee. The base notification command may simply notify the base value or notify an abnormality of the base value. The abnormality of the base value is, for example, when the calculated base value becomes larger or smaller than the design value (normal value) beyond a predetermined allowable range. It should be noted that the degree of abnormality may be determined in a plurality of stages according to the degree of deviation of the base value by providing a allowable range in a plurality of stages.

There are various methods for base notification, and one of the methods described below or a combination of two or more may be used. For example, the base display (7-segment LED) 1317, the liquid crystal display device 1600, 3114, 244, or the like may notify the base value at all times or at a predetermined timing. By notifying the player of the base value, the player may be able to confirm the condition of the pachinko machine. At that time, the display mode described in the accessory ratio may be applied to the base value. When notifying the base value, the calculated base value is displayed as a percentage notation on the above-mentioned display or display device. The value after the decimal point may be rounded down, rounded off, or rounded up. On a display device capable of displaying an image such as a liquid crystal display device 1600, 3114, 244, the value is displayed to the first decimal place and displayed in more detail. You may.

When displaying the base value on the base display 1317 composed of the 7-segment LED, the main control MPU 1311 inputs the display data to a predetermined register provided in the driver circuit 13171 of the base display 1317. That is, the main control MPU 1311 generates display data set in the register of the driver circuit 13171 as a base notification command. More specifically, as shown in FIGS. 33 and 34, the main control MPU 1311 specifies the digit for displaying the numerical value in D15 to D8 in the "data n setting", and the display content is specified in D7 to D0. Is generated and written to the shift register 3171.

When displaying a base value on the liquid crystal display devices 1600, 3114, and 244, a predetermined reference value (for example, 50%) may be provided for the base value, and if the reference value is exceeded, the display mode may be changed. .. For example, the numerical value is blinked or the color is changed (normally green, when the standard is exceeded, red, etc.) is displayed. Further, the display mode of the base value may be changed in a plurality of steps. Specifically, the displayed base values are 30% or more, 25% or more and less than 30%, 20% or more and less than 25%, 15% or more and less than 20%, 10% or more and less than 15%, and less than 10%. It may be divided into a plurality of stages and displayed with different emission colors such as white, blue, and yellow at each stage. In addition, self-deprecating comments may be displayed at each stage when the base value is low, such as "I'm feeling good", "I'm feeling down", "I'm not bad", "It's amazing in a sense". If the base value exceeds the reference value, the pachinko machine is operating differently than expected, and there is a possibility that fraud has been performed. For this reason, it is desirable to display in a manner that indicates a warning such as red. Further, the display mode may be the same as or similar to the weak error that does not stop the progress of the game. Here, the same means that at least one of the display, the lamp, and the sound is the same.

In addition, various lamps, liquid crystal display devices, sounds, and the like may notify the range of the base value (whether the base value is high or low, abnormal value or normal value, etc.). Further, when the base cannot be calculated (Yes in step S902) and there is no base value calculated in the past, a base notification command for displaying the base notification failure on the liquid crystal display device may be generated. By transmitting the notification command to the generated sub-board, the state of the base can be notified by the effect device controlled by the sub-board, so that a wider variety of notifications can be made than the main board, and the load on the main board can be increased. Can be reduced. Further, by notifying that the base display is not possible when nothing is displayed on the base display 1317, it is possible to distinguish between the failure of the base display 1317 and the absence of the base value to be displayed. Further, by displaying the abnormality of the base value on the liquid crystal display device, it is possible to know the abnormality of the base value without looking at the back surface side of the game board provided with the base display 1317.

The function display unit 1400 may also serve as the base display 1317. In this case, a specific LED lamp (or 7-segment LED) of the function display unit 1400 may be used for constant notification. Further, it may be notified at a predetermined timing (for example, when the main body frame 4 is opened, while the special symbol variation display game is not being executed, the timing at which the special symbol variation display game ends).

The base information may be output from the external terminal board 784 to the hall computer installed in the amusement park. In this case, as in the base calculation / display processing (FIGS. 47, 49, etc.) described later, when the base information is output at a predetermined timing (for each predetermined number of prize balls and for each predetermined number of out balls). Good.

The base information output from the external terminal board 784 may be a binary signal (high, low) indicating whether the calculated base value is high or low with respect to a predetermined threshold value. Further, a signal having a length indicating an outline of the calculated base value may be output (for example, a pulse having a base value of 30% or more and less than 40% is a pulse of 30 milliseconds). Further, a number of continuous pulses indicating an outline of the calculated base value may be output (for example, three continuous pulses when the base value is 30% or more and less than 40%).

Even if the base value is not updated, the base notification command may be generated, and if the base value is not updated, the base notification command may not be generated. The display of the base value continues even if the base notification command is not generated.

Further, as will be described later in FIG. 56 and the like, it is determined whether the calculated base value is abnormal, a base notification command for notifying the abnormality of the base value is generated, and the player or the hall employee is notified of the abnormality of the base. It may be notified.

Further, it may be determined whether to notify the player of the base according to the game state (game situation). This is because if the base value is constantly notified to the player, the player's attention to the production of the special symbol variation display game, which is the original pleasure of the pachinko machine, may be distracted, and the player's consciousness may be dispersed. Is.

In addition, the effect of the special symbol variation display game being executed or executed in the future may be changed based on the calculated base value. For example, it is preferable to prepare a plurality of display selection tables and select an effect from display selection tables (see FIGS. 64 to 68) that differ depending on the base value.

In addition, the base value may exceed or fall below a predetermined threshold value (for example, 30%) during the special symbol variation display game. Therefore, when the threshold value is exceeded or falls during the special symbol variation display game, the effect of the special symbol variation display game may be changed. The effect may be changed in the same manner or the effect may be changed in different ways depending on whether the base value rises above a predetermined threshold value or falls.

FIG. 41 is a diagram showing an example of the update timing of the number of prize balls and the calculation timing of the base value. As shown in FIG. 23, in this embodiment, the number of prize balls is updated in the base calculation area update process in step S81, and the base value is calculated in the base ratio calculation / display process in step S89.

Therefore, the main control MPU 1311 detects the winning of the game ball in the switch input process (step S74), calculates the number of prize balls determined for each winning opening in the prize ball control process (step S80), and calculates the base. The prize ball number buffer is updated in the area update process (step S81). After that, the base value is updated in the base ratio calculation / display process (step S89), and the payout command is transmitted to the payout control board 951 in the output data setting process (step S90).

When the payout control board 951 stores the received payout command in the memory, the payout control board 951 transmits a payout command reception confirmation to the main control board 1310. Then, when the payout control board 951 pays out the prize balls according to the payout command, the payout control board 951 notifies the main control board 1310 of the completion of the ball payout. Of the number of prize balls calculated in the prize ball control process (step S80), the number of unpaid prize balls is backed up by the main control board 1310 or the payout control board 951. When backing up the number of unpaid prize balls on the payout control board 951, the payout control board 951 needs to send a payout command reception confirmation to the main control board 1310, but it is necessary to notify the main control board 1310 of the completion of ball payout. Absent. On the other hand, when backing up the number of unpaid prize balls on the main control board 1310, the payout control board 951 needs to notify the main control board 1310 of the completion of ball payout, but sends a payout command reception confirmation to the main control board 1310. There is no need.

In the pachinko machine according to the embodiment described above, the base value is calculated without delay during the game, and the state of the game machine can be known in real time. Therefore, the abnormality of the game machine can be detected at an early stage. For example, when it is determined that the base is abnormal when the base value is lower or higher than the predetermined threshold value, the base value is calculated multiple times during one special symbol variation display game, and the base value moves up and down across the predetermined threshold value and becomes abnormal. Even if it is determined to be, the game is not stopped, and the calculation process of the base value is continuously executed regardless of the determination of abnormality. For example, there are short-term games such as normal fluctuations and long-term games such as reach fluctuations in special symbol fluctuation display games, and the base value is calculated from the start to the end of one special symbol fluctuation display game. When the conditions to be performed are satisfied multiple times, the base value should be calculated each time, and the base value should be updated and displayed each time. This is because if the calculation of the base value during the special symbol variation display game is restricted (for example, the base value is calculated and updated only once at the end of the variation display), the change of the base value is long depending on the calculation timing of the base value. This is because the hall may be inconvenienced because the information necessary for the hall operation is not output at an appropriate timing without noticing the time.

In addition, if the launched game ball has not won a prize in the starting prize opening or the general winning opening, the base value will decrease. In this state, the player is losing money, so for example, an additional effect (for example, an effect related to a win that is not related to a change in the base value, or an effect related to a change in the base value) appears in addition to the effect performed on the liquid crystal. A notice effect with a high expectation of a big hit (a notice effect with a high expectation such as the next notice effect among the effects not related to the change of the base value, or a change of the base value is accompanied by the addition of a specific effect) Of the specific effects that appear, a notice effect with a high degree of expectation (for example, the base value is displayed in a rainbow display) may be performed. As a result, the player can reduce the discomfort felt by not winning the starting opening and the general winning opening, and can motivate the player to continue the game.

On the other hand, if many of the launched game balls win the starting prize opening or the general winning opening (if more than the average number of past prizes are won), the base value will increase. In this state, even if the result of the big hit lottery is wrong, the player is paid out more game balls than usual, so that the player's disappointment is reduced. The production of the variable display game may be changed to a production with a low degree of expectation.

[9-2. Variations in the update timing of the number of prize balls and the calculation timing of the base value]
Next, variations of the update timing of the number of prize balls and the calculation timing of the base value will be described with reference to FIGS. 42 to 44. The outline of the update timing of the number of prize balls and the calculation timing of the base value in each variation is as follows.
・ Fig. 41: Calculation of the number of prize balls → Update the number of prize balls → Calculation of the base value → Send the payout command ・ Fig. 42: Calculate the number of prize balls → Update the number of prize balls → Send the payout command → Calculate the base value ・ Fig. 43: Calculate the number of prize balls → Send payout command → Update prize balls → Calculate base value ・ Figure 44: Calculate prize balls → Send payout command → Confirm command reception → Update prize balls → Calculate base value ・ Figure 45: Calculate prize balls → Send payout command → Notification of completion of payout → Update of number of prize balls → Calculation of base value The variations of FIGS. 41 to 44 are described later in addition to the base calculation area update process and the base calculation / display process shown in FIG. 40. It can be applied to any of the base calculation area update processing and the base calculation / display processing.

In the procedure shown in FIG. 42, unlike the timer interrupt processing procedure shown in FIG. 23, the base calculation area update process (step S81) is executed at the indicated position, and the base ratio is calculated after the output data setting process (step S90). -The display process (step S89) is executed.

That is, the main control MPU 1311 detects the winning of the game ball in the switch input process (step S74), calculates the number of prize balls determined for each winning opening in the prize ball control process (step S80), and determines the base calculation area. In the update process (step S81), the total number of prize balls (or the number of prize balls buffer in the embodiment described later) is updated. After that, the payout command is transmitted to the payout control board 951 in the output data setting process (step S90), and the base value is updated in the base ratio calculation / display process (step S89).

When the payout control board 951 stores the received payout command in the memory, the payout control board 951 transmits a payout command reception confirmation to the main control board 1310. Then, when the payout control board 951 pays out the prize balls according to the payout command, the payout control board 951 notifies the main control board 1310 of the completion of the ball payout. As described above, depending on whether the number of unpaid prize balls among the number of prize balls calculated in the prize ball control process (step S80) is backed up by the main control board 1310 or the payout control board 951, the payout command reception confirmation or Either of the ball payout completion may be omitted.

In the procedure shown in FIG. 43, unlike the timer interrupt processing procedure shown in FIG. 23, after the output data setting process (step S90), the base calculation area update process (step S81) and the base ratio calculation / display process (step S89) To execute.

That is, the main control MPU 1311 detects the winning of the game ball in the switch input process (step S74), calculates the number of prize balls determined for each winning opening in the prize ball control process (step S80), and outputs data setting process. In (step S90), a payout command is transmitted to the payout control board 951. After that, in the base calculation area update process (step S81), the total number of prize balls (or the prize ball number buffer in the embodiment described later) is updated with the number of prize balls corresponding to the transmitted payout command, and the base ratio is calculated. The base value is updated in the display process (step S89). The prize ball number buffer may be updated with the number of prize balls corresponding to the created payout command (even if the payout command has not been transmitted) instead of the number of prize balls corresponding to the transmitted payout command.

When the payout control board 951 stores the received payout command in the memory, the payout control board 951 transmits a payout command reception confirmation to the main control board 1310. Then, when the payout control board 951 pays out the prize balls according to the payout command, the payout control board 951 notifies the main control board 1310 of the completion of the ball payout. As described above, depending on whether the number of unpaid prize balls among the number of prize balls calculated in the prize ball control process (step S80) is backed up by the main control board 1310 or the payout control board 951, the payout command reception confirmation or Either of the ball payout completion may be omitted.

Since the timing at which the main control MPU 1311 receives the command reception confirmation and the ball payout completion notification from the payout control board 951 depends on the processing speed of the payout control board 951 and the operating speed of the payout device 830, the base calculation area update process ( The order with step S81) and the base ratio calculation / display process (step S89) does not matter.

In the procedure shown in FIG. 44, unlike the timer interrupt processing procedure shown in FIG. 23, after receiving the payout command reception confirmation from the payout control board 951, the base calculation area update process (step S81) and the base ratio calculation / display process (Step S89) is executed.

That is, the main control MPU 1311 detects the winning of the game ball in the switch input process (step S74), calculates the number of prize balls determined for each winning opening in the prize ball control process (step S80), and outputs data setting process. In (step S90), a payout command is transmitted to the payout control board 951.

When the payout control board 951 stores the received payout command in the memory, the payout control board 951 transmits a payout command reception confirmation to the main control board 1310.

When the main control MPU 1311 receives the payout command reception confirmation from the payout control board 951, in the base calculation area update process (step S81), the total number of prize balls (the number of prize balls corresponding to the payout command for which the command reception confirmation is received) Alternatively, in the embodiment described later, the prize ball number buffer) is updated, and the base value is updated in the base ratio calculation / display process (step S89).

Then, when the payout control board 951 pays out the prize balls according to the payout command, the payout control board 951 notifies the main control board 1310 of the completion of the ball payout. In the procedure shown in FIG. 44, since the data of the number of unpaid prize balls is not lost when a power failure occurs, the data of the number of unpaid prize balls is backed up by the payout control board 951. Therefore, it is necessary to confirm the command reception from the payout control board 951 to the main control board 1310, but the ball payout completion notification may be omitted.

In the procedure shown in FIG. 45, unlike the timer interrupt processing procedure shown in FIG. 23, after receiving the ball payout completion notification from the payout control board 951, the base calculation area update process (step S81) and the base ratio calculation / display process (Step S89) is executed.

That is, the main control MPU 1311 detects the winning of the game ball in the switch input process (step S74), calculates the number of prize balls determined for each winning opening in the prize ball control process (step S80), and outputs data setting process. In (step S90), a payout command is transmitted to the payout control board 951.

When the payout control board 951 stores the received payout command in the memory, the payout control board 951 transmits a payout command reception confirmation to the main control board 1310. Then, when the payout control board 951 pays out the prize balls according to the payout command, the payout control board 951 notifies the main control board 1310 of the completion of the ball payout.

When the main control MPU 1311 receives the ball payout completion notification from the payout control board 951, in the base calculation area update process (step S81), the total number of prize balls (or, in the embodiment described later) is the number of prize balls for which the payout is completed. The prize ball number buffer) is updated, and the base value is updated in the base ratio calculation / display process (step S89).

In the procedure shown in FIG. 44, the data of the number of unpaid prize balls is backed up by the main control board 1310 so that the data of the number of unpaid prize balls is not lost when a power failure occurs. Therefore, although it is necessary to notify the completion of ball payout from the payout control board 951 to the main control board 1310, the command reception confirmation may be omitted.

As described above, the pachinko machine of the present embodiment updates the number of prize balls and the number of out balls, which are parameters used for calculating the base value, when a predetermined condition is satisfied. For example, in the process shown in FIGS. 41 and 42, when the winning opening sensor detects the winning of the game ball in the switch input process (step S74), the number of winning balls is updated. Further, in the process shown in FIG. 43, the number of prize balls is updated when the payout command is transmitted. Further, in the process shown in FIG. 44, the number of prize balls is updated when the receipt of the payout command is confirmed. Further, in the process shown in FIG. 45, the number of prize balls is updated when the payout of the prize balls is completed.

In the pachinko machine of this embodiment, there is a possibility that the number of prize balls during the special prize cannot be accurately counted due to the difference between the timing of determining whether the game state is in the special prize and the timing of updating the number of prize balls. In particular, the problem becomes greater when the time from winning the winning opening to updating the number of winning balls is long. Therefore, a flag is attached to the prize during the special prize, and the flag is inherited in the number of prize balls, the payout command, the reception confirmation, and the payout completion notification due to the prize. Then, using the flag, it is determined at each stage whether or not the prize ball is a special prize. In this way, even if it takes a long time from winning the winning opening to updating the number of prize balls, the number of prize balls in the special prize can be accurately counted and updated.

Further, in the pachinko machine of the present embodiment, the number of prize balls and the number of out balls are updated at these triggers, and the base value is calculated and displayed. That is, since the base value can be known by the game machine alone, the time required for nail adjustment in the manufacturing process and the inspection process can be shortened, and the game machine can be manufactured efficiently.

Further, in the pachinko machine of the present embodiment, when the pachinko machine is out of balls and the prize balls cannot be paid out, the main control board 1310 or the payout control board 951 holds the number of unpaid balls.

When the main control board 1310 holds the number of unpaid balls, when the winning opening sensor detects the winning of the game ball in the switch input process (step S74), the number of winning balls corresponding to the winning opening in which the winning is detected is not yet obtained. Add to the number of payout balls. A predetermined upper limit may be set for the number of unpaid balls, but the upper limit may not be set. In this case, it is advisable to update the prize ball number buffer or the total prize ball number for calculating the base value each time the number of prize balls to be paid out is calculated. Further, the number of prize balls may be updated after the payout command is transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the payout control board 951.

On the other hand, when the payout control board 951 holds the number of unpaid balls, when the winning opening sensor detects the winning of the game ball in the switch input process (step S74), the number of winning balls corresponding to the winning opening in which the winning is detected. Is transmitted to the payout control board 951. Even if the pachinko machine is out of balls and the prize balls cannot be paid out, the payout command is transmitted and the number of unpaid balls is held by the payout control board 951. In this case, it is advisable to update the prize ball number buffer or the total prize ball number for calculating the base value each time the payout command is transmitted.

Further, when the payout control board 951 receives the payout command, the number of prize balls for calculating the base value may be updated. A predetermined upper limit may be set for the number of prize balls, but the upper limit may not be set. In addition, the number of prize balls for calculating the base value may be updated each time the prize balls are actually paid out. The payout control board 951 transmits the number of prize balls for calculating the base value to the main control board 1310, and the main control board 1310 calculates the base value using the received number of prize balls.

Further, as will be described later in FIG. 47, the prize ball number buffer value and the threshold value Th1 are not compared, and every predetermined number of times (for example, 10 times) of winning, or every predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds). , Steps S891 and S892 may be executed.

As explained above, the number of prize balls for calculating the base value can be updated at various timings, but when the number of prize balls is updated, the base value is calculated without delay and the base display 1317 is displayed in real time. The base value may be calculated and displayed at a predetermined timing (for example, every minute).

[9-3. Timing of updating the number of prize balls and calculating the base value]
Next, variations of the base calculation area update process (step S81) and the base calculation display process (step S89) will be described with reference to FIGS. 46 to 51. The outline of the calculation timing of the base value in each variation is as follows.
-Fig. 39 and Fig. 40: Calculate the base value for each timer interrupt cycle-Fig. 46 and Fig. 47: Calculate the base value for each predetermined number of prize balls-Fig. 48 and Fig. 49: Calculate the base value for each predetermined number of out-balls Calculation ・ Fig. 50 and Fig. 51: The base value is updated when either the number of prize balls or the number of out balls reaches a predetermined number.

FIG. 46 is a flowchart showing another example of the base calculation area update process (step S81). In the base calculation area update process shown in FIG. 46, the number of prize balls is recorded in the prize ball number buffer in order to calculate the base value at the timing when the number of prize balls satisfies a predetermined condition (step S813). In FIG. 46, the same step number as the above-described base calculation area update process (FIG. 39) is assigned the same step number, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, it is determined whether the gaming state is in the special prize (step S810). The same criteria as those described with reference to FIG. 39 can be used as the criteria for determining whether or not the prize is being awarded. If the game state is during the special prize, the prize ball is not related to the calculation of the base value, so the process proceeds to step S824 without updating the number of prize balls and the number of out balls. On the other hand, if the gaming state is not during the special prize, the number of prize balls calculated based on the input information in the prize ball control process (step S80) is acquired (step S811).

Then, it is determined whether there are prize balls, that is, whether the number of acquired prize balls is 1 or more (step S812). As a result, if there are no prize balls, the process proceeds to step S818 without updating the number of prize balls. On the other hand, if there are prize balls, the acquired number of prize balls is added to the prize ball number buffer (step S813). Each time the prize ball number is added to the prize ball number buffer, the prize ball number may be output from the external terminal plate 784 to the hall computer installed in the amusement park, and the prize ball number described later becomes a predetermined threshold Th1 or more. In some cases, the threshold Th1 may be output from the external terminal board 784 to the hall computer. Here, the prize ball number buffer is an area provided in the main control built-in RAM 1312 for calculating the base value, and the number of prize balls paid out by the game machine 1 is temporarily stored.

Then, it is determined whether or not the number of prize balls is abnormal (step S815). For example, an abnormality in the number of prize balls corresponds to winning 10 or more prizes per minute in consideration of the number of prize balls at a predetermined time other than during the special prize (for example, the number of prize balls in the general prize opening and the starting winning opening). For example, when a prize ball) has been obtained. It should be noted that the degree of abnormality may be determined in a plurality of stages according to the degree of deviation from the reference value of the number of prize balls by providing a permissible range in a plurality of stages. If the number of prize balls is abnormal, the number of prize balls acquired in step S813 does not have to be added to the number of prize balls buffer, and the number of prize balls added to the number of prize balls buffer in step S813 is subtracted. May be good.

As a result, if there is an abnormality in the number of prize balls, an abnormality notification command is generated (step S816), and the player or the hall employee is notified that the prize balls are abnormal. There are various methods for notifying the abnormality, and one of the methods described below or a combination of two or more may be used. For example, an abnormality in the number of prize balls may be notified by various lamps, liquid crystal display devices 1600, 3114, 244, sound, or the like. Further, an abnormality in the number of prize balls may be output from the external terminal plate 784 to the hall computer installed in the amusement park. Further, it is not necessary to use the number of prize balls determined to be abnormal in the calculation of the base value. In this case, the prize ball may be paid out to the player. Further, when the number of prize balls is determined to be abnormal and the notification is performed by the above-mentioned notification means (sound, lamp, LED, liquid crystal display device, information output from the external terminal plate 784, etc.), the number of prize balls determined to be abnormal is determined. It may be used to calculate the base value. Further, the game may be temporarily stopped. Specifically, the main control board 1310 initializes all the data of the main control built-in RAM 1312 and initializes all the data of the RAM of the peripheral control unit 1511 even if the RAM clear switch is not operated. Then, in the initial state, the game is started from the operation check. As another method of stopping the game, the game is temporarily stopped (for example, the variable display of the special symbol is stopped), and then the error notification is stopped, the game returns to the original state, and the game is restarted. Therefore, the power failure monitoring circuit outputs a power failure detection signal even if the power failure monitoring circuit does not detect a decrease in the power supply voltage, and the main control MPU 1311 backs up all the data of the main control built-in RAM 1312 to stop the game. Then, after the error notification is completed, the data of the main control built-in RAM 1312 is restored from the backup area, and the game is restarted. At this time, since the peripheral control unit 1511 waits for a command from the main control board 1310 as it is, the interrupted game is restarted by restarting the operation of the main control board 1310. However, 100 game balls (that is, out balls) are fired in the game area 5a, and all the game balls may win in the general winning opening or the starting winning opening, so that the number of winning balls is abnormal. It is desirable that the mode of notification is a gentle mode (for example, a lower volume or a lower amount of light than a normal error notification), which is less urgent than a normal error (magnetic sensor error, etc.). Also, the display time may be the same as a normal error or may be shorter. In some cases, the notification time may be set to 0 seconds and the notification may not be performed.

Then, the timer for notifying the prize ball abnormality is reset (step S817), and the counting of the prize ball abnormality notification time is started.

After that, the number of out balls is acquired (step S818), and the total number of out balls is updated so as to add the acquired number of out balls to the total number of out balls (step S822).

After that, it is determined whether the time-up of the prize ball abnormality notification timer activated in step S817 is determined (step S824). Then, when the time is up for the prize ball abnormality notification timer, a prize ball abnormality notification stop command is generated to stop the prize ball abnormality notification (step S825). In step S824, the end of the notification is determined by the time of the timer for notifying the prize ball abnormality for a predetermined time, but the end of the notification is determined so as to notify the prize ball abnormality by a predetermined number of launched balls. You may. In addition, the abnormality may be continuously notified until the hall employee confirms it.

In the base calculation area update process shown in FIG. 46, it was determined in step S985 whether the number of prize balls is abnormal, but after the number of out balls is acquired, the number of prize balls is abnormal in comparison with the number of out balls. (That is, whether the base value is abnormal) may be determined. For example, when the number of prize balls exceeding the number of out balls is counted in a predetermined time, or considering the number of prize balls of the general winning opening and the starting winning opening, the out balls win at a high ratio (for example, 50% or more). For example, if you are doing so.

FIG. 47 is a flowchart showing another example of the base calculation / display process (step S89). In the base calculation / display process shown in FIG. 47, the base value is updated when the number of prize balls satisfies a predetermined condition. In FIG. 47, the same step numbers are assigned to the same parts as the above-mentioned base calculation / display process (FIG. 40), and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, it is determined whether the number of prize balls stored in the prize ball number buffer is equal to or higher than a predetermined threshold value Th1 (step S890). Various methods can be used to determine whether the prize ball number buffer value is equal to or higher than a predetermined threshold value Th1. For example, the prize ball number buffer value and the threshold Th1 may be compared, or the value of a predetermined bit in the prize ball number storage area may be used for determination (specifically, the prize ball number storage area is 8 bits. If it is configured and the most significant bit is 1, it can be determined that the number of out balls is 128 or more). Further, in the base calculation area update process (FIG. 46), the determination result of comparing the number of prize balls and the threshold Th1 is recorded in a flag, and in the base calculation / display process (FIG. 47), the prize ball number buffer value is set by the flag. May be determined whether is equal to or higher than a predetermined threshold value Th1.

Then, if the prize ball number buffer value is smaller than the threshold value Th1, it is not the timing to calculate the base value, so the base calculation / display process is terminated.

On the other hand, if the prize ball number buffer value is the threshold Th1 or more, the threshold Th1 is added to the total prize ball number (step S891), and the threshold Th1 is subtracted from the prize ball number buffer (step S892). That is, if the number of prize balls counted from a predetermined starting point satisfies a predetermined condition (the number of prize balls stored in the prize ball number buffer is equal to or higher than the threshold Th1), the fractional portion of the number of prize balls is used. Remain (the fraction obtained by subtracting the threshold Th1 from the prize ball number buffer is left in the prize ball number buffer), store the other part in the memory (add the threshold Th1 to the total prize ball number), and use it for the calculation of the base value. Execute the process to be performed. Specifically, when the threshold Th1 is 100, the prize ball number buffer value is 99, and when 5 prize balls are generated by winning a prize in the general winning opening, the prize ball number buffer value is 104 pieces. However, 100 pieces are moved to the total number of prize balls and used for calculating the base value, and the remaining 4 pieces are left in the prize ball number buffer. In this case, the count of the four prize balls left in the prize ball number buffer is used in the calculation of the base value when the prize ball number buffer value becomes the threshold Th1 or more next time. Further, although the threshold value Th1 = 100 is described, other numerical values such as 1000 may be used. However, if a large threshold Th1 is set so that the base is not calculated even if a jackpot is obtained, the detection of fraud may be delayed, so the threshold Th1 is less than or equal to the number of prize balls paid out in one jackpot (multiple types). If there is a big hit (for example, 4 rounds and 8 rounds of big hits), it is better to set it to the minimum value or less of the number of prize balls of the big hit. Also, from the viewpoint of detecting fraud at an early stage, it is advisable to update the base value frequently. For example, it is preferable that the threshold value Th1 is 10 instead of 100 because the base value is updated frequently.

In addition, steps S891 and S892 may be executed every predetermined number of times (for example, 10 times) of winning without comparing the prize ball number buffer value and the threshold value Th1. Further, steps S891 and S892 may be executed every predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) without comparing the prize ball number buffer value and the threshold value Th1. This predetermined time may be measured by a timer operated by the main control MPU 1311, or may be measured by the output of an RTC (real-time clock).

After that, it is determined whether the total number of out balls is 0 (step S902). If the total number of out balls is 0, the base value cannot be calculated, so the base calculation / display process is terminated without calculating the base value. On the other hand, if the total number of out balls is not 0, the base value is calculated by dividing the total number of out balls by the total number of out balls (step S903). Specifically, the total number of prize balls is multiplied by a predetermined number (for example, 100) and stored in the division input register A131216, and the total number of out balls is stored in the division input register B131217. Then, after 32 clocks have elapsed, the quotient is read from the division result register A131218 and used as the base value. If the total number of out balls is 0, even if the base value is calculated, the return value from the arithmetic circuit 13121 will result in an error (or indefinite), so that it does not have to be stored in the base calculation area 13128. In this case, the base value displayed on the base display 1317 is not updated.

Further, when the total number of outliers is 0 or when the calculated base value becomes an abnormal value, the base value may not be calculated and the base calculation area 13128 may not be updated. For example, when the total number of out balls is less than or equal to the total number of prize balls, the base value is 100% or more, and the same number or more prize balls as the number of fired balls (out balls) are obtained, and the game is normally performed. Since it is not in the present state, it is not necessary to store the numerical value in the division input registers 131216 and 131217 and calculate the base value. Further, when the base value is calculated and the value read from the division result register A131218 is 100% or more, it is not necessary to update the base calculation area 13128 with the value read from the division result register A131218.

Further, the abnormality of the base value may be determined with 1500% as a threshold value. Since the upper limit of the theoretical base value of a pachinko machine with a maximum number of prize balls of 15 for the winning opening is 1500%, a base value exceeding 1500% is an impossible value, and the gaming machine is abnormal. It can be determined that there is. In this case as well, it is not necessary to calculate the base value, or it is not necessary to update the base calculation area 13128 with the value read from the division result register A131218.

Further, the threshold value for determining the abnormality of the base value may be another value. A normal value (for example, 30% to 50%) of the base value in the normal operation of the pachinko machine is determined, and if it is out of the range of the normal value, the base calculation area 13128 is set to the value read from the division result register A131218. It is not necessary to update the display of the base value without updating.

Although the case where the base value is not displayed has been described above, even if the calculated base value is an abnormal value, the abnormal base value may be displayed.

As will be described later in FIG. 52, the total number of prize balls and the total number of out balls are cumulative values since the pachinko machine 1 started operation, but the total number of prize balls and the total number of out balls are the same. It may be initialized at the timing (for example, for each predetermined number of prize balls and for each predetermined number of out balls).

After that, a base notification command is generated (step S908), and the base is notified to the player and the hall employee.

As described above, the pachinko machine of the present embodiment determines whether or not the number of prize balls is abnormal each time the number of prize balls is acquired, so that fraudulent activity can be detected at an early stage. This is because, in a normal game, a considerable number of game balls (for example, 50% of the number of launched balls) do not win a prize in the general winning openings 2001 and the starting winning openings 2002 and 2004 with a high probability. Therefore, the abnormality of winning a prize in the winning openings (general winning openings 2001 and starting winning openings 2002, 2004) that are always open is determined and notified.

Further, in the pachinko machine of the present embodiment, since the base value is calculated when the number of prize balls satisfies a predetermined condition, an accurate base value can be displayed at an appropriate timing.

In the examples shown in FIGS. 46 and 47, since the base value is calculated when the number of prize balls reaches a predetermined number, the amount of calculation required for calculating the base value (for example, compared to the case where the base value is calculated for each prize ball). The load of the main control MPU 1311) can be reduced. When a new base value is calculated, a base notification command for notifying the calculated base value is generated and the new base value is notified, but until then, the conventional base value is notified. Will be done.

FIG. 48 is a flowchart showing another example of the base calculation area update process (step S81). In the base calculation area update process shown in FIG. 48, the number of out balls is recorded in the out ball number buffer in order to calculate the base value at the timing when the number of out balls satisfies a predetermined condition (step S819). In FIG. 48, the same step numbers are assigned to the same parts as the above-described base calculation area update process, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, it is determined whether the gaming state is in the special prize (step S810). The same criteria as those described with reference to FIG. 39 can be used as the criteria for determining whether or not the prize is being awarded. Then, the number of prize balls other than during the special prize is acquired (step S811), and it is determined whether or not there is a prize ball (step S812). Then, if there are prize balls as a result of the determination in step S812, the acquired number of prize balls is added to the total number of prize balls (step S814). That is, in the base calculation area update process shown in FIG. 48, the total number of prize balls used for calculating the base value is updated each time the number of prize balls is calculated.

Then, it is determined whether or not the number of prize balls is abnormal (step S815), and if there is an abnormality in the number of prize balls, an abnormality notification command is generated (step S816) and the prize ball abnormality notification timer is reset (step S817). ).

After that, the number of out balls is acquired (step S818). The acquired number of out balls is added to the number of out balls buffer (step S819).

After that, it is determined whether the prize ball abnormality notification timer has timed up (step S824), and when the prize ball abnormality notification timer has timed up, a prize ball abnormality notification stop command is generated to stop the prize ball abnormality notification (step S824). Step S825).

Further, in the pachinko machine of this embodiment, the base value is calculated for each predetermined number of prize balls. Therefore, for example, when it is determined that the game ball wins a prize in the starting winning opening to generate a look-ahead effect, and the display mode of the hold display is displayed in a mode different from the usual mode (blinking display, red hold, etc.). , The player expects the special symbol variation display game corresponding to the pre-read hold to be a big hit, but the player is discouraged if the special symbol variation display game is lost. Even in such a case, if the base value is calculated for each predetermined number of prize balls as in the present embodiment, the disappointment of the player as described above can be reduced. This is because the calculation of the base value is delayed from the timing when the prize ball is generated, so that the base value increased by the prize ball due to winning the winning opening is notified. That is, even if it is determined that the look-ahead effect is executed at the time of winning the starting winning opening, even if the number of prize balls paid out at the time of winning the starting winning opening is added, the above-mentioned predetermined number (for example, threshold Th1 = 100). ) Is not reached, the base value is not updated. That is, the base value displayed to the player has not changed. However, since the prize ball was obtained, the base value should rise (only the lower numerical value changes due to the number of displayed digits, and the display may not change). Therefore, even if the above-mentioned look-ahead effect is out of order, the player thinks that the base value will rise later (that is, the condition is good), and the decline in interest can be suppressed. In other words, even if it is determined that the look-ahead effect is executed, the base value is not updated if the prize ball buffer value does not reach a predetermined number (threshold value Th1). Further, when it is determined that the look-ahead effect is executed and the prize ball buffer value reaches a predetermined number, the calculation of the base value may be delayed until the prize ball buffer value reaches the predetermined number next time. ..

It should be noted that the player may be able to select whether to delay the calculation of the base value or to calculate without delay. For example, at the start of the game, it can be selected by the operation button 220C. Further, the calculation timing of the base value may be determined by lottery. Further, when it is decided to perform the look-ahead effect, it is preferable to execute the effect capable of notifying the delay of the calculation of the base value. If the hold memory of the special symbol variation display game has reached the upper limit, the jackpot lottery will not be executed even if the start winning opening is won. Even in this case, since the prize balls are paid out in association with the winning of the starting prize opening, the number of the prize balls is counted and used for the calculation of the base value. In addition, at the time of a specific error, even if you win a prize in the starting prize opening or general winning opening, if it is treated as if there was no prize and the prize ball is not paid out, the number of prize balls will not be counted and it will be based depending on the prize. The value is not updated.

FIG. 49 is a flowchart showing another example of the base calculation / display process (step S89). In the base calculation / display process shown in FIG. 49, the base value is updated when the number of out balls satisfies a predetermined condition. In FIG. 49, the same step numbers are assigned to the same parts as the above-mentioned base calculation / display processing, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, it is determined whether the number of out balls stored in the out ball number buffer is equal to or higher than a predetermined threshold Th2 (step S895). Various methods can be used to determine whether the out-ball number buffer value is equal to or higher than a predetermined threshold Th2. For example, the number of out balls may be compared with the threshold value Th2, or the value of a predetermined bit in the storage area for the number of out balls may be used for determination (specifically, the storage area for the number of out balls is configured with 8 bits. , If the most significant bit becomes 1, it can be determined that the number of out balls is 128 or more). Further, in the base calculation area update process (FIG. 48), the determination result of comparing the number of out balls and the threshold Th2 is recorded in a flag, and in the base calculation / display process (FIG. 49), the number of out balls is determined by the flag. It may be determined whether or not the threshold value Th2 or more of.

If the out-ball number buffer value is smaller than the threshold Th2, it is not the timing to calculate the base value, so the base calculation / display process is terminated.

On the other hand, if the out-ball number buffer value is the threshold Th2 or more, the threshold Th2 is added to the total out-ball number (step S899), and the threshold Th2 is subtracted from the out-ball number buffer (step S900). In addition, steps S899 and S900 may be executed every predetermined time (for example, 1 minute) without comparing the out-ball number buffer value and the threshold value Th2.

After that, the base value is calculated by dividing the total number of prize balls by the total number of out balls (step S903). Specifically, the total number of prize balls is multiplied by a predetermined number (for example, 100) and stored in the division input register A131216, and the total number of out balls is stored in the division input register B131217. Then, after 32 clocks have elapsed, the quotient is read from the division result register A131218 and used as the base value. When the total number of out balls is 0, even if the base value is calculated, the return value from the calculation circuit 13121 results in an error, so that the base value need not be stored in the base calculation area 13128. In this case, the base value displayed on the base display 1317 is not updated.

The total number of prize balls and the total number of out balls are cumulative values since the pachinko machine 1 started operation, but the total number of prize balls and the total number of out balls are set at the same timing (for example, a predetermined prize). It may be initialized for each number of balls and for each predetermined number of out balls).

After that, a base notification command is generated (step S908), and the base is notified to the player and the hall employee. The base notification command may simply notify the base value, notify the base value by a specific effect, or notify an abnormality of the base value.

As described above, in the pachinko machine of this embodiment, the base value can be updated and displayed every time the number of out balls (number of launched balls) reaches a predetermined number. Therefore, the base value can be displayed at an appropriate timing. In addition, it is possible to provide a game machine in pursuit of fun.

In addition, the number of prize balls is added to the total number of prize balls each time a prize ball (winning detection, payout command transmission, payout command arrival, prize ball payout completion, etc.) is performed. This is because the base value may not be calculated correctly if it is confirmed whether a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, whether there is an out ball corresponding to the prize ball) when adding the number of prize balls. For example, even if the firing is not performed for a predetermined time (about 1 minute), the slinging state caused by the game ball being caught by the nail arranged in the game area is resolved, and the game ball is delayed in the winning opening. This is because there are cases where a prize is won. Therefore, it is desirable to update the number of prize balls regardless of the presence or absence of out balls.

When both the out-ball number and the out-ball number buffer value are smaller than the threshold Th2, it may be displayed that the out-ball number buffer value is a fraction smaller than the threshold Th2, or the out-ball number buffer value may be displayed.

In the examples shown in FIGS. 48 and 49, since the base value is calculated when the number of out balls reaches a predetermined number, it is required to calculate the base value rather than calculating the base value every time an out ball is detected. The amount of calculation (for example, the load of the main control MPU 1311) can be reduced. When a new base value is calculated, a base notification command for notifying the calculated base value is generated and the new base value is notified, but until then, the conventional base value is notified. Will be done.

FIG. 50 is a flowchart showing another example of the base calculation area update process (step S81). In the base calculation area update process shown in FIG. 50, the number of prize balls is recorded in the prize ball number buffer in order to calculate the base value at the timing when either the number of prize balls or the number of out balls satisfies a predetermined condition. , Record the number of out balls in the out ball buffer. In FIG. 50, the same step numbers are assigned to the same parts as the above-described base calculation area update process, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, it is determined whether the gaming state is in the special prize (step S810). The same criteria as those described with reference to FIG. 39 can be used as the criteria for determining whether or not the prize is being awarded. Then, the number of prize balls other than during the special prize is acquired (step S811), and it is determined whether or not there is a prize ball (step S812). Then, if there are prize balls, the acquired number of prize balls is added to the prize ball number buffer (step S813).

Then, it is determined whether or not the number of prize balls is abnormal (step S815), and if there is an abnormality in the number of prize balls, an abnormality notification command is generated (step S816) and the prize ball abnormality notification timer is reset (step S817). ).

After that, the number of out balls is acquired (step S818), and the acquired number of out balls is added to the out ball number buffer (step S819).

After that, it is determined whether the prize ball abnormality notification timer has timed up (step S824), and when the prize ball abnormality notification timer has timed up, a prize ball abnormality notification stop command is generated to stop the prize ball abnormality notification (step S824). Step S825).

FIG. 51 is a flowchart showing another example of the base calculation / display process (step S89). In the base calculation / display process shown in FIG. 51, the base value is updated at the timing when either the number of prize balls or the number of out balls satisfies a predetermined condition. In FIG. 51, the same step numbers are assigned to the same parts as the above-mentioned base calculation / display processing, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, it is determined whether the number of prize balls stored in the prize ball number buffer is equal to or higher than a predetermined threshold value Th1 (step S890). If the prize ball number buffer value is smaller than the threshold Th1, it is not the timing to update the total prize ball number, so the process proceeds to step S895. On the other hand, if the prize ball number buffer value is the threshold Th1 or more, the threshold Th1 is added to the total prize ball number (step S891), and the threshold Th1 is subtracted from the prize ball number buffer (step S892). Then, the out-ball number buffer value is added to the total out-ball number (step S893), and the out-ball number buffer is set to 0 (step S894). In addition, steps S891 to S894 may be executed every predetermined number of winnings or at predetermined time without comparing the prize ball number buffer value and the threshold value Th1.

After that, it is determined whether the number of out balls stored in the out ball number buffer is equal to or higher than a predetermined threshold Th2 (step S895). If the out-ball number buffer value is smaller than the threshold Th2, it is not the timing to update the total out-ball number, so the process proceeds to step S902. On the other hand, if the out-ball number buffer value is the threshold Th2 or more, the prize-ball number buffer value is added to the total prize-ball number (step S897), and the prize-ball number buffer is set to 0 (step S898). Then, the threshold Th2 is added to the total number of out balls (step S899), and the threshold Th2 is subtracted from the out ball number buffer (step S900).

After that, it is determined whether the total number of out balls is 0 (step S902). If the total number of out balls is 0, the base value cannot be calculated, so the base calculation / display process is terminated. On the other hand, if the total number of out balls is not 0, the base value is calculated by dividing the total number of out balls by the total number of out balls (step S903). Specifically, the total number of prize balls is multiplied by a predetermined number (for example, 100) and stored in the division input register A131216, and the total number of out balls is stored in the division input register B131217. Then, after 32 clocks have elapsed, the quotient is read from the division result register A131218 and used as the base value. When the total number of out balls is 0, even if the base value is calculated, the return value from the calculation circuit 13121 results in an error, so that the base value need not be stored in the base calculation area 13128. In this case, the base value displayed on the base display 1317 is not updated.

After that, a base notification command is generated (step S908), and the base is notified to the player and the hall employee. The base notification command may simply notify the base value or notify an abnormality of the base value. It should be noted that the base notification command may be generated every time the base value is calculated, the base value may be calculated, or the base notification command may not be generated.

In the base calculation / display process shown in FIG. 51, the base value is calculated every time even if the total number of prize balls and the total number of out balls are not updated. That is, if the total number of prize balls and the total number of out balls are not updated, the same value is calculated as the base value, and the base value maintains the same value. On the other hand, if the total number of prize balls or the total number of out balls is updated, the base value is updated to a different value.

FIG. 52 is a diagram showing a specific structure of a work area for storing each data in the base calculation area 13128.

The data of the total number of prize balls and the total number of out balls in the base calculation area 13128 are the base calculation area update process and the base calculation / display process (FIGS. 39, 46, 47, 48, and 48) executed by the main control MPU 1311. It is written in FIG. 49, FIG. 51, etc.) and read out in the base calculation / display process (FIG. 40, FIG. 47, FIG. 49, FIG. 51, etc.). Further, the data of the prize ball number buffer and the out ball number buffer of the base calculation area 13128 are written in the base calculation area update process (FIGS. 46, 48, 50, etc.) executed by the main control MPU 1311, and the base calculation is performed. -Read by display processing (FIG. 47, FIG. 49, FIG. 51, etc.). Therefore, the base calculation area update process and the base calculation / display process can be configured separately from the timer interrupt process (game control program), and the programs for the accessory ratio calculation / display process can be shared even for game machines with different specifications. it can.

FIG. 52 (A) shows an example of the structure of the work area in the simplest method. In the structure of the work area shown in FIG. 52 (A), the prize ball number buffer, the total prize ball number, the out ball number buffer, the winning ball number buffer, the specific winning ball number buffer, the total out ball number and the base are stored. The prize ball number buffer temporarily stores the number of prize balls paid out to the player other than during the special prize, and is based when the number of prize balls meets a predetermined condition (for example, for each predetermined number of prize balls). Is used to calculate. The total number of prize balls is the total number of prize balls paid out to the player other than during the special prize. The out ball number buffer is the number of game balls fired by the player other than during the special prize, and is used to calculate the base when the number of out balls meets a predetermined condition (for example, for each predetermined number of out balls). Be done. The winning ball number buffer temporarily stores the number of balls won in the general winning opening and the starting winning opening. The specific winning ball number buffer temporarily stores the number of balls won in a specific general winning opening or starting winning opening. The winning ball number buffer is used when counting the number of out balls based on the number of balls passing through the out port (FIGS. 55 and 56). The specific winning ball number buffer is used when the number of out balls is corrected by the number of winning balls to the specific general winning opening (FIGS. 71 and 72). The total number of out balls is the total number of game balls fired by the player except during the special prize. The base is calculated by multiplying the total number of prize balls by the total number of out balls × 100, and is a numerical value expressed as a percentage, which is calculated in step S903 of the base calculation / display process.

In the structure of the work area shown in FIG. 52 (A), the total number of prize balls and the total number of out balls correspond to each area of the total cumulative total of FIG. 52 (B) described later, and each has a storage area of 3 or 4 bytes. It is possible to store a numerical value up to 167727215 or 42949677295 in decimal. Since these data are not erased unless an abnormality occurs in the data, a large storage area is prepared so that the data can be stored for a long period of time. Further, the base is a 1-byte storage area corresponding to the total cumulative total of the base shown in FIG. 52B, which will be described later, and can store up to 255 numerical values in decimal numbers. A capacity that can record a decimal number of base values may be allocated.

FIG. 52B shows another example of the structure of the work area using the ring buffer. In the structure of the work area shown in FIG. 52B, the prize ball number buffer, the total prize ball number, the out ball number buffer, the prize ball number buffer, the specific prize ball number buffer, the total out ball number and the base are stored. Each data item is the same as the description in FIG. 52 (A). The storage area for the total number of prize balls and the total number of out balls is n storage areas (for example, every 6000 prize balls) for each predetermined number of prize balls (or for each predetermined number of out balls or for each predetermined time). It is composed of a ring buffer having n = 10 storage areas), and when the number of prize balls reaches a predetermined number (6000), the write pointer of all the data moves and the storage area where the data is updated changes. .. Then, after the data for a predetermined number of prize balls is stored in the nth storage area, the write pointer moves to the first storage area and stores the data in the first storage area. The write pointer may be moved when the number of data other than the number of prize balls (number of out balls, predetermined time, etc.) reaches a predetermined number.

The write pointer and read pointer of the ring buffer are common to all data, and the write pointers of all the data strings move for each predetermined number of prize balls. In addition, as the write pointer moves, the read pointer also moves. The read pointer points to the storage area immediately before the write pointer. This is because the base value is calculated using the latest data of 6000 prize balls.

The cumulative total of the total number of prize balls and the total number of out balls is the cumulative value of the data stored in the n storage areas of the ring buffer, and the cumulative value of the base is the total number of total prize balls and the total number of out balls. It is a value calculated from the value, and when the ring buffer goes around and one storage area of the ring buffer is cleared to write new data, the cumulative value is calculated excluding the data in the cleared area. It will be recalculated. The total cumulative value of each data is the cumulative value of all the data collected in the past, and the total cumulative value of the base calculated from the cumulative value is the value calculated from the total cumulative value of each data, and the ring buffer Even if one storage area of the ring buffer is cleared to write new data in one round, the total cumulative value including the original data of the cleared area is calculated.

In the structure of the work area shown in FIG. 52 (B), the total number of prize balls and the total number of out balls in the ring buffer are storage areas of 2 bytes each, and numerical values up to 65535 can be stored in decimal numbers. Since the cumulative total is the total of the data for 6000 prize balls x n (60,000 prize balls when n = 10), a large storage area is prepared. The cumulative total of the total number of prize balls and the total number of out balls is a storage area of 3 or 4 bytes, respectively, and can store a numerical value up to 167727215 or 42949677295 in decimal. Since the total cumulative total is not erased unless an abnormality occurs in the data, a larger storage area is prepared so that the data can be stored for a long period of time. In addition, the cumulative total of the base and the total cumulative total are storage areas of 1 byte each, and can store numerical values up to 255 in decimal numbers. A capacity that can record a decimal number of base values may be allocated.

In the data structure shown in FIG. 52 (A), the stored data is not deleted, so even if the data in the base calculation area 13128 is deleted every predetermined period (for example, one day, one week, one month, etc.). Good. Similarly, the total cumulative total of FIG. 52 (B) may be deleted at predetermined intervals.

Further, when the data in the base calculation area 13128 or the calculated base value is an abnormal value, the abnormal value may be deleted. Not only the abnormal value but also all the data in the base calculation area 13128 may be deleted. Further, it may be notified that the data of the base calculation area 13128 or the calculated base value is abnormal. Alternatively, the data in the backup area may be inspected using a check code, the data in the normal backup area may be duplicated in the main area, and then the base value may be calculated again.

[9-4. Display base value]
The base value calculated as described above may be continuously displayed while the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, but when the main body frame 4 is closed and the game is possible, the base display 1317 is visually recognized. Therefore, the 7-segment LED 13172 may be turned off to reduce the power consumption of the gaming machine. As a matter of course, even when the 7-segment LED 13172 is turned off, the base calculation area update process (step S81) and the base calculation / display process (step S89) are executed.

Further, the base display 1317 may always display the base value, or may display the base value by operating the display switch 1318. For example, when the display switch 1318, which is a push button switch, is pressed, the display of the base value is started, the display is displayed for a predetermined time, and then the display is turned off. If the display switch 1318 is operated while the main body frame release switch (not shown) detects that the main body frame 4 has been released from the outer frame 2, the base value may be displayed on the base display 1317. That is, even if the display switch 1318 is operated unless the main body frame 4 is open, the base display 1317 does not display the accessory ratio.

Further, when the main body frame 4 is opened, it is preferable to display a predetermined display on all digits so that it can be confirmed that the base display 1317 is operating normally. For example, as shown in FIG. 36B, "-" may be displayed in all digits, or all segments may be lit.

Then, when the main body frame 4 is closed, a predetermined display for confirming the normal operation of the base display 1317 is performed (FIG. 36 (E)), and after a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed, the 7-segment LED 13172 is turned off. , It is good to reduce the power consumption of the game machine. This base non-display state is the same mode as after the initial setting is completed (FIG. 36 (B)), but may be a different mode as long as it is distinguishable from the displayed base value.

The base display 1317 may also be used by the function display unit 1400. The function display unit 1400 normally displays the game status based on the control signal from the main control board 1310, but when the main body frame release switch (not shown) detects that the main body frame 4 has been released from the outer frame 2, the main body frame 4 has been released. The control board 1310 switches the display so that the function display unit 1400 displays the base value. Even if the display of the function display unit 1400 is switched by opening the main body frame 4, the progress of the game may be continued. By continuing the progress of the game, when the main body frame 4 is closed, the display of the base display can be quickly switched to the display of the game state. For example, if the main body frame 4 is opened during the special symbol fluctuation display game, the base value is displayed, but if the main body frame 4 is closed before the fluctuation time elapses, the fluctuation display for the remaining time can be performed. .. Since the special symbol displayed on the function display unit 1400 is synchronized with the decorative symbol displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600, the decorative symbol is stopped at the timing when the special symbol variation display of the function display unit 1400 is stopped. Therefore, even if the function display unit 1400 displays the base value, it can be configured so as not to give a sense of discomfort to the player.

Further, even when the main body frame 4 is closed, the calculated base value (in the above-described embodiment, the accessory ratio) may be displayed on the base display (accessory ratio indicator) 1317. In this way, since the base value (role ratio) can be confirmed without opening the main body frame 4, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the operation of the game machine. Further, it is not necessary to determine whether the main body frame 4 is open. Further, in the island facility where pachinko machines are installed on both sides, when the main body frame 4 of the pachinko machine on one side is opened, the back surface of the pachinko machine installed on the opposite side can be seen. In such a game machine, by opening the main body frame 4 of the pachinko machine on one side, the bases (role ratio) of the two pachinko machines installed back to back can be confirmed. Further, when the base value is displayed even when the main body frame 4 is closed, the base value is displayed in a form that can be recognized by the player (for example, on a display device for displaying the effect of the special symbol variation display game or a display device attached to the frame). Should be displayed. This is because the base value can be used as a barometer for expressing the condition of the pachinko machine and is worth seeing by the player. When the base value is calculated by the main control board 1310, a signal for displaying the base value may be transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510. When the payout control board 951 calculates the base value, a signal for displaying the base value may be transmitted from the payout control board 951 to the peripheral control board 1510. Further, a signal for displaying the base value may be transmitted via the relay board.

Further, in the pachinko machine of this embodiment, the light amount (luminance) of the base display 1317 is not changed even when the mode is shifted to the energy saving mode. This is because if the amount of light of the base display 1317 is reduced during the energy saving mode, it becomes difficult to confirm the base value by the base display 1317 when adjusting the pachinko machine other than the opening time.

Specifically, the game machine of this embodiment is in a standby state when a predetermined time elapses after the reserved memory of the special symbol variation display game is exhausted without the game ball winning in any of the winning openings. .. In the standby state, the peripheral control unit 1511 continuously outputs BGM that is output in so-called normal fluctuation. Further, when a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) elapses in the standby state, the demo state is entered. In the demo state, a video showing the motif of the game machine is played, and the game machine is explained. Further, when a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) elapses in the demo state, the mode shifts to the energy saving mode (note that it is not necessary to distinguish between the demo state and the energy saving mode). In the energy saving mode, the amount of light of the liquid crystal display devices 1600, 3114, 244 and various lamps controlled by the peripheral control unit 1511 is reduced in order to suppress power consumption. However, since the power consumption of the display devices (function display unit 1400 and base display 1317) controlled by the main control board 1310 is smaller than the power consumption of the entire pachinko machine, it is not necessary to reduce the amount of light of these display devices. May be good. Further, if the amount of light of the function display unit 1400 is not reduced, a player who intends to play on an empty platform can easily visually recognize the result of the previous lottery.

In addition, even if the game ball does not win in the start winning opening or the general winning opening, when the game ball is launched toward the game area and an out ball is detected, the displayed base value is recalculated and updated. there is a possibility. If the number of prize balls does not increase even if the number of out balls is increased after the game balls are launched, the calculated base value will decrease, but some players will burn with revenge.

By notifying such a player of the state of the game with the function display unit 1400 that also serves as the base display 1317, the interest of the game can be revived. That is, even if the mode is shifted to the demo mode or the energy saving mode, the player can maintain the display mode of the display on which the base value is displayed before shifting to the demo mode or the energy saving mode, or increase the light amount. It is good to be able to confirm the base value properly.

Although the maintenance or increase of the light intensity of the display on which the base value is displayed has been described in this way, even if the light intensity of the display on which the base value is displayed is decreased or turned off with an emphasis on the viewpoint of reducing energy consumption. Good. For example, during the energy saving mode, a predetermined operation (a launch stop button that forcibly stops firing, an effect operation button that changes the effect that appears, a RAM clear button that clears the contents of the RAM, and an electric power to the game machine When the operation of the operation means provided in the game machine such as the supply adjustment button for switching the supply / non-supply) is detected, it is preferable to reduce the amount of light of the display on which the base value is displayed. Furthermore, not only in the energy saving mode, but also when the above-mentioned predetermined operation is performed, the amount of light of both the lamp or the like that reduces the power consumption and the display that displays the base value is reduced or turned off during the energy saving mode. May be good.

When reducing or turning off the light amount of both the lamp and the display on which the base value is displayed, the light amount of the lamp etc. that reduces power consumption during the energy saving mode is reduced before the display on which the base value is displayed. It may be turned off or off. In this case, the amount of light from a lamp or the like having a large power consumption is reduced first, and the power consumption is greatly reduced. Further, the display on which the base value is displayed may be turned off or the light amount of the display on which the base value is displayed may be reduced or turned off before the lamp or the like. In this case, the gorgeousness of the game machine is maintained even in the energy saving mode. It works. Further, during the energy saving mode, the lamp or the like for reducing the power consumption and the display for displaying the base value may be reduced or turned off at the same time. In this case, the amount of power consumption reduction can be increased and the energy saving effect is high. .. In addition, before and after the time in these explanations (meaning "first" and "simultaneously") includes the order of the timing of internal processing and the order of appearance from the player.

Further, the display mode of the base value may be set in a plurality of stages, and the display mode of each stage may be changed. Specifically, the displayed base values are 30% or more, 25% or more and less than 30%, 20% or more and less than 25%, 15% or more and less than 20%, 10% or more and less than 15%, and less than 10%. Divide into multiple stages. The display for displaying the base value may be configured by a multi-color LED, and the emission color may be changed such as white, blue, and yellow at each stage. In addition, the display that displays the base value is composed of a liquid crystal display device, and the base value is low, such as "I like it", "I'm feeling down", "It's not bad", "It's amazing in a sense", etc. Sometimes you may want to display a self-deprecating comment. Further, the effect of adding a comment as described above to the main liquid crystal display device 1600 on which the decorative design is displayed may be executed without changing the display mode of the display device that displays the base value.

[9-5. Calculation of base value using the number of balls passing through the out port]
Next, further variations of the base calculation area update process (step S81) and the base calculation display process (step S89) will be described with reference to FIGS. 53 to 56. In the process described with reference to FIGS. 54 to 56, the number of out balls is calculated using the number of winning balls and the number of balls passing through the out port, and the base value is calculated. The outline of the calculation timing of the base value in each variation is as follows.
-Fig. 54 and Fig. 40: Calculate the base value for each timer interrupt cycle-Fig. 55 and Fig. 56: Calculate the base value for each predetermined number of prize balls and for each predetermined number of out balls. Although the description of the pattern for calculating the above and the pattern for calculating the base value for each predetermined number of out balls is omitted, it can be realized by combining FIGS. 54 to 56.

When the out ball is detected by the out port passing ball sensor 1021 provided near the out port 1111, there is a problem that the number of out balls cannot be accurately counted. This is because the game ball launched toward the game area 5a flows out from the game area 5a via the out opening 1111, the general winning opening 2001, the starting winning opening 2002, the large winning opening 2005, and 2006. Therefore, the out-port passing ball sensor 1021 cannot accurately count the number of game balls fired toward the game area 5a. Therefore, in the pachinko machine of the present embodiment, the number of out balls is accurately calculated using the number of winning balls and the number of balls passing through the out port, and the base value is accurately calculated.

FIG. 53 is a front view showing another example of the game board.

The game board of the pachinko machine of this embodiment has substantially the same structure as the game board shown in FIG. 10, but is provided at the lower part of the game area 5a, passes through the out port 1111 and flows out from the game area 5a (out). An out-mouth passing ball sensor 1021 that detects the number of passing balls) is provided. The out-port passing ball sensor 1021 may be installed at a position where the player can see through the out-port 1111. By installing the out-port passing ball sensor 1021 at a position where the player can see through the out-port 1111, it is possible to make the player aware that the out-balls are counted, that is, the base is calculated.

Further, the out-port passing ball sensor 1021 may be installed at a position not seen by the player, such as a gutter in which game balls flowing down from the game area 5a passing through the out-port 1111 are aligned. If it is installed in a position invisible to the player, it is not necessary to make the player aware of the counting of out balls. Further, by providing the out-port passing ball sensor 1021 on the back side of the out-port 1111, a sufficient place for arranging the liquid crystal display device and the accessory (movable body) can be secured, and the degree of freedom in designing the game board 5 is improved. it can. Further, in order to prevent double counting of the game balls, the rolling surface on which the game balls that have passed through the out-port passing ball sensor 1021 roll so that the game balls that have passed through the out-port passing ball sensor 1021 do not bounce off. It is good to make it sloped or curved.

FIG. 54 is a flowchart showing another example of the base calculation area update process (step S81). The base calculation area update process shown in FIG. 54 acquires the number of prize balls, the number of balls passing through the out port, and the number of winning balls in order to calculate the base value using the number of balls passing through the out port for each timer interrupt cycle. In FIG. 54, the same step numbers are assigned to the same parts as the above-described base calculation area update process, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, it is determined whether the gaming state is in the special prize (step S810). The same criteria as those described with reference to FIG. 39 can be used as the criteria for determining whether or not the prize is being awarded. Then, the number of prize balls other than during the special prize is acquired (step S811), and the acquired number of prize balls is added to the total number of prize balls (step S814). That is, in the base calculation area update process shown in FIG. 54, the total number of prize balls used for calculating the base value is updated each time the number of prize balls is calculated. It should be noted that it may be determined whether or not there is a prize ball, and if there is no prize ball, the process of updating the total number of prize balls may be skipped.

After that, the number of balls passing through the out port is acquired (step S818), and the number of winning balls is acquired (step S820). Then, the sum of the number of balls passing through the out port and the number of winning balls is added to the total number of out balls (step S822). That is, in the base calculation area update process shown in FIG. 54, the total number of out balls used for calculating the base value is updated each time an out ball or a winning ball is detected.

In addition, as in steps S815 to S817 of the base calculation area update process (FIG. 46) described above, it is determined whether or not there is an abnormality in the number of prize balls, and if there is an abnormality in the number of prize balls, an abnormality notification command is generated. , The prize ball abnormality notification timer may be reset. Further, as in steps S824 to S825 of FIG. 46, it is determined whether the prize ball abnormality notification timer has timed up, and when the prize ball abnormality notification timer has timed up, a prize ball abnormality notification stop command is generated and the prize is awarded. The ball abnormality notification may be stopped.

After recording the total number of prize balls and the total number of out balls in the base calculation area update process shown in FIG. 54, the base value can be calculated by the base calculation / display process shown in FIG. 40.

FIG. 55 is a flowchart showing another example of the base calculation area update process (step S81). In the base calculation area update process shown in FIG. 55, the number of prize balls is recorded in the prize ball number buffer in order to calculate the base value at the timing when either the number of prize balls or the number of out balls satisfies a predetermined condition. , The number of balls passing through the out port is recorded in the out ball number buffer, and the number of winning balls is recorded in the winning ball number buffer. In FIG. 55, the same step numbers are assigned to the same parts as the above-described base calculation area update process, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, it is determined whether the gaming state is in the special prize (step S810). The same criteria as those described with reference to FIG. 39 can be used as the criteria for determining whether or not the prize is being awarded. Then, the number of prize balls other than during the special prize is acquired (step S811), and it is determined whether or not there is a prize ball (step S812). Then, if there are prize balls, the acquired number of prize balls is added to the prize ball number buffer (step S813).

Then, it is determined whether or not the number of prize balls is abnormal (step S815), and if there is an abnormality in the number of prize balls, an abnormality notification command is generated (step S816) and the prize ball abnormality notification timer is reset (step S817). ).

After that, the number of balls passing through the out port is acquired (step S818), and the acquired number of balls passing through the out port is added to the number of out balls buffer (step S819). Then, the number of winning balls is acquired (step S820), and the acquired number of winning balls is added to the number of winning balls buffer (step S821).

After that, it is determined whether the prize ball abnormality notification timer has timed up (step S824), and when the prize ball abnormality notification timer has timed up, a prize ball abnormality notification stop command is generated to stop the prize ball abnormality notification (step S824). Step S825).

In the base calculation area update process shown in FIG. 54, the sum of the acquired number of balls passing through the out port and the number of winning balls is added to one storage area (total number of out balls), and the base calculation area update process shown in FIG. 55 is performed. Then, the acquired number of balls passing through the out port and the number of winning balls are added to another storage area (out ball number buffer, winning ball number buffer). In this way, the number of balls passing through the out port and the number of winning balls may be recorded in one storage area or in another storage area.

Further, in the base calculation area update process shown in FIG. 55, when the acquired number of balls passing through the out port and the number of winning balls are recorded in different storage areas, the number of out balls increases by 1 when the winning opening is won. The number of balls passing through the out port and the number of winning balls are counted at the same time (within one timer interrupt process), but the base value is calculated after updating both the out ball number buffer and the winning ball number buffer. At that time, if both the out ball number buffer and the winning ball number buffer cannot be updated within one timer interrupt process, whether to count the number of balls passing through the out port with priority or to count the number of winning balls with priority. It is better to determine in advance rather than determining by lottery as appropriate. At that time, if the process related to the prize ball is prioritized over other processes, the process of paying out the prize ball can be executed quickly, but it may be appropriately determined according to the specifications of the game machine.

FIG. 56 is a flowchart showing another example of the base calculation / display process (step S89). In the base calculation / display process shown in FIG. 56, the base value is updated at the timing when either the number of prize balls or the number of out balls satisfies a predetermined condition. In FIG. 56, the same step numbers are assigned to the same parts as the above-mentioned base calculation / display processing, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, it is determined whether the number of prize balls stored in the prize ball number buffer is equal to or higher than a predetermined threshold value Th1 (step S890). If the prize ball number buffer value is smaller than the threshold Th1, it is not the timing to update the total prize ball number, and the process proceeds to step S896. On the other hand, if the prize ball number buffer value is the threshold Th1 or more, the threshold Th1 is added to the total prize ball number (step S891), and the threshold Th1 is subtracted from the prize ball number buffer (step S892). Then, the out-ball number buffer value is added to the total out-ball number (step S893), and the out-ball number buffer is set to 0 (step S894). In addition, steps S891 to S894 may be executed every predetermined number of winnings or at predetermined time without comparing the prize ball number buffer value and the threshold value Th1.

After that, it is determined whether the sum of the number of balls passing through the out port stored in the out ball number buffer and the number of winning balls stored in the winning ball number buffer is equal to or greater than a predetermined threshold Th2 (step S896). ). The total of the number of balls passing through the out port and the number of winning balls is the number of game balls that have flowed into the game area, and is the number of out balls. As a result of the determination, if the calculated out-ball number is smaller than the threshold Th2, it is not the timing to update the total out-ball number, and the process proceeds to step S902. On the other hand, if the calculated out-ball number is the threshold Th2 or more, the prize-ball number buffer value is added to the total prize-ball number (step S897), and the prize-ball number buffer is set to 0 (step S898). Then, the threshold Th2 is added to the total number of out balls (step S899), the winning ball number buffer is set to 0, the winning ball number buffer value is added to the out ball number buffer, and the threshold Th2 is subtracted (step S901). .. In addition, steps S896 to S901 may be executed every predetermined number of winnings or at predetermined time without comparing the number of out balls (buffer value of the number of out balls + the buffer value of the number of winning balls) with the threshold value Th2.

After that, it is determined whether the total number of out balls is 0 (step S902). If the total number of out balls is 0, the base value cannot be calculated, so the base calculation / display process is terminated. On the other hand, if the total number of out balls is not 0, the base value is calculated by dividing the total number of out balls by the total number of out balls (step S903). Specifically, the total number of prize balls is multiplied by a predetermined number (for example, 100) and stored in the division input register A131216, and the total number of out balls is stored in the division input register B131217. Then, after 32 clocks have elapsed, the quotient is read from the division result register A131218 and used as the base value. When the total number of out balls is 0, even if the base value is calculated, the return value from the calculation circuit 13121 results in an error, so that the base value need not be stored in the base calculation area 13128. In this case, the base value displayed on the base display 1317 is not updated.

After that, a base notification command is generated (step S908), and the base is notified to the player and the hall employee.

In the base calculation / display process shown in FIG. 56, the base value is calculated every time even if the total number of prize balls and the total number of out balls are not updated. That is, if the total number of prize balls and the total number of out balls are not updated, the same value is calculated as the base value, and the base value maintains the same value. On the other hand, if the total number of prize balls or the total number of out balls is updated, the base value is updated to a different value.

As described above, in the pachinko machine of this embodiment, the number of winning balls is added to the number of balls passing through the out port to calculate the number of out balls. Therefore, the number of out balls is accurately counted and the base value is calculated accurately. it can. Further, by confirming the base value in the manufacturing process and the inspection process of the game machine, it is possible to confirm whether the winning opening switch, the base display 1317, and the process of calculating the base value are normal.

[9-6. Notification of base abnormality]
The process described above is for generating a command for notifying the calculated base value. Next, a process of determining an abnormality of the base value and notifying the abnormality will be described.
-Fig. 57: Calculates the base value for each timer interrupt cycle-Fig. 58: Calculates the base value for each predetermined number of prize balls and for each predetermined number of out-balls A pattern for calculating the base value for each predetermined number of prize balls, predetermined Although the description of the pattern for calculating the base value for each number of out balls is omitted, it can be realized by combining FIGS. 57 and 58.

FIG. 57 is a flowchart showing another example of the base calculation / display process (step S89). In the base calculation / display process shown in FIG. 57, the base value is calculated every time (every timer interrupt cycle).

First, it is determined whether the total number of out balls is 0 (step S902). If the total number of out balls is 0, the base value cannot be calculated, so the base calculation / display process is terminated without calculating the base value. On the other hand, if the total number of out balls is not 0, the base value is calculated by dividing the total number of out balls by the total number of out balls (step S903). Specifically, the total number of prize balls is multiplied by a predetermined number (for example, 100) and stored in the division input register A131216, and the total number of out balls is stored in the division input register B131217. Then, after 32 clocks have elapsed, the quotient is read from the division result register A131218 and used as the base value. When the total number of out balls is 0, even if the base value is calculated, the return value from the calculation circuit 13121 results in an error, so that the base value need not be stored in the base calculation area 13128. In this case, the base value displayed on the base display 1317 is not updated.

After that, it is determined whether the calculated base value is abnormal (step S907). The abnormality of the base value is, for example, when the calculated base value becomes larger or smaller than the design value (normal value) beyond a predetermined allowable range. It should be noted that the degree of abnormality may be determined in a plurality of stages according to the degree of deviation of the base value by providing a allowable range in a plurality of stages. Then, if the base value is abnormal, a base notification command is generated (step S908), and the base is notified to the player and the hall employee. On the other hand, if the base value is not abnormal, the base calculation / display process is terminated. As a method for notifying the abnormality of the base, the same method as the above-mentioned notification of the base can be adopted.

For example, one of the methods described below may be used, or two or more may be combined. Specifically, the base display (7-segment LED) 1317, the liquid crystal display device 1600, 3114, 244, or the like may be used to notify the abnormality of the base value. By notifying the player of the abnormality of the base value, the player may be able to confirm the abnormality of the pachinko machine. The calculated base value may be displayed as a percentage notation on the above-mentioned display or display device to notify an abnormality of the base value. The value after the decimal point may be rounded down, rounded off, or rounded up. On a display device capable of displaying an image such as a liquid crystal display device 1600, 3114, 244, the value is displayed to the first decimal place and displayed in more detail. You may.

Further, when the base value is displayed on the liquid crystal display devices 1600, 3114, and 244, if the base value is abnormal, the display mode may be changed. For example, the numerical value is blinked or the color is changed (normally green, abnormally red, etc.) and displayed. Further, the display mode of the base value may be changed in a plurality of steps. Specifically, the displayed base values are 30% or more, 25% or more and less than 30%, 20% or more and less than 25%, 15% or more and less than 20%, 10% or more and less than 15%, and less than 10%. It may be divided into a plurality of stages and displayed with different emission colors such as white, blue, and yellow at each stage.

In addition, various lamps, liquid crystal display devices, sounds, and the like may notify the range of the base value (whether the base value is high or low, abnormal value or normal value, etc.). The function display unit 1400 may notify an abnormality of the base value. Further, the information on the abnormality of the base may be output from the external terminal plate 784 to the hall computer installed in the amusement park.

In the base calculation / display process shown in FIG. 57, for example, as shown in FIGS. 50 and 55, the total number of prize balls and the total number of out balls are calculated at the timing when the number of prize balls and the number of out balls satisfy a predetermined condition. It may be used in combination with the base calculation area update process to be updated.

FIG. 58 is a flowchart showing another example of the base calculation / display process (step S89). In the base calculation / display process shown in FIG. 58, the base value is updated when either the number of prize balls or the number of out balls satisfies a predetermined condition. In FIG. 58, the same step numbers are assigned to the same parts as the above-mentioned base calculation / display processing, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, it is determined whether the number of prize balls stored in the prize ball number buffer is equal to or higher than a predetermined threshold value Th1 (step S890). If the prize ball number buffer value is smaller than the threshold Th1, it is not the timing to update the total prize ball number, so the process proceeds to step S895. On the other hand, if the prize ball number buffer value is the threshold Th1 or more, the threshold Th1 is added to the total prize ball number (step S891), and the threshold Th1 is subtracted from the prize ball number buffer (step S892). Then, the out-ball number buffer value is added to the total out-ball number (step S893), and the out-ball number buffer is set to 0 (step S894). In addition, steps S891 to S894 may be executed every predetermined number of winnings or at predetermined time without comparing the prize ball number buffer value and the threshold value Th1.

After that, it is determined whether the number of out balls stored in the out ball number buffer is equal to or higher than a predetermined threshold Th2 (step S895). If the out-ball number buffer value is smaller than the threshold Th2, it is not the timing to update the total out-ball number, so the process proceeds to step S902. On the other hand, if the out-ball number buffer value is the threshold Th2 or more, the prize-ball number buffer value is added to the total prize-ball number (step S897), and the prize-ball number buffer is set to 0 (step S898). Then, the threshold Th2 is added to the total number of out balls (step S899), and the threshold Th2 is subtracted from the out ball number buffer (step S900).

After that, it is determined whether the total number of out balls is 0 (step S902). If the total number of out balls is 0, the base value cannot be calculated, so the base calculation / display process is terminated. On the other hand, if the total number of out balls is not 0, the base value is calculated by dividing the total number of out balls by the total number of out balls (step S903). Specifically, the total number of prize balls is multiplied by a predetermined number (for example, 100) and stored in the division input register A131216, and the total number of out balls is stored in the division input register B131217. Then, after 32 clocks have elapsed, the quotient is read from the division result register A131218 and used as the base value. When the total number of out balls is 0, even if the base value is calculated, the return value from the calculation circuit 13121 results in an error, so that the base value need not be stored in the base calculation area 13128. In this case, the base value displayed on the base display 1317 is not updated.

After that, it is determined whether the calculated base value is abnormal (step S907). The abnormality of the base value is, for example, when the calculated base value becomes larger or smaller than the design value (normal value) beyond a predetermined allowable range. It should be noted that the degree of abnormality may be determined in a plurality of stages according to the degree of deviation of the base value by providing a allowable range in a plurality of stages. Then, if the base value is abnormal, a base notification command is generated (step S908), and the base is notified to the player and the hall employee. On the other hand, if the base value is not abnormal, the base calculation / display process is terminated.

In the base calculation / display process shown in FIG. 58, the base value is calculated every time even if the total number of prize balls and the total number of out balls are not updated. That is, if the total number of prize balls and the total number of out balls are not updated, the same value is calculated as the base value, and the base value maintains the same value. On the other hand, if the total number of prize balls or the total number of out balls is updated, the base value is updated to a different value.

In the base calculation / display process shown in FIG. 58, for example, as shown in FIGS. 39 and 54, the total number of prize balls and the total number of out balls are directly updated using the acquired number of prize balls and out balls. It may be used in combination with the base calculation area update process.

As described above, in the pachinko machine of this embodiment, when the calculated base value is abnormal, the abnormality is notified, so that the player can know the state of the gaming machine and the hall employee can know the state of the gaming machine. It is possible to know the possibility of unauthorized operation on the gaming machine. In addition, it is possible to detect and notify an abnormality of a game machine that cannot be detected by conventional error detection.

[9-7. Notification of changes in the base]
Next, an embodiment of a game machine that notifies a change in the calculated base value will be described.

The base value calculated by the pachinko machine naturally fluctuates. Since the base value represents the condition of the gaming machine, the player during the game is concerned about the change in the base value as well as the base value itself. Therefore, it is desired to notify the player of the change in the base value. When a display that serves as a guide for the top and bottom of the base value appears, the player can play the game with peace of mind.

FIG. 59 is a flowchart showing another example of the base calculation / display process (step S89). In the base calculation / display process shown in FIG. 59, the history of the calculated base value is recorded in order to compare the history of the current base value with the history of the past base value. In FIG. 59, the same step numbers are assigned to the same parts as the above-mentioned base calculation / display processing, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, it is determined whether the number of prize balls stored in the prize ball number buffer is equal to or higher than a predetermined threshold value Th1 (step S890). If the prize ball number buffer value is smaller than the threshold Th1, it is not the timing to update the total prize ball number, so the process proceeds to step S895. On the other hand, if the prize ball number buffer value is the threshold Th1 or more, the threshold Th1 is added to the total prize ball number (step S891), and the threshold Th1 is subtracted from the prize ball number buffer (step S892). Then, the out-ball number buffer value is added to the total out-ball number (step S893), and the out-ball number buffer is set to 0 (step S894). In addition, steps S891 to S894 may be executed every predetermined number of winnings or at predetermined time without comparing the prize ball number buffer value and the threshold value Th1.

After that, it is determined whether the number of out balls stored in the out ball number buffer is equal to or higher than a predetermined threshold Th2 (step S895). If the out-ball number buffer value is smaller than the threshold Th2, it is not the timing to update the total out-ball number, so the process proceeds to step S902. On the other hand, if the out-ball number buffer value is the threshold Th2 or more, the prize-ball number buffer value is added to the total prize-ball number (step S897), and the prize-ball number buffer is set to 0 (step S898). Then, the threshold Th2 is added to the total number of out balls (step S899), and the threshold Th2 is subtracted from the out ball number buffer (step S900).

After that, it is determined whether the total number of out balls is 0 (step S902). If the total number of out balls is 0, the base value cannot be calculated, so the base calculation / display process is terminated. On the other hand, if the total number of out balls is not 0, the base value is calculated by dividing the total number of out balls by the total number of out balls (step S903). Specifically, the total number of prize balls is multiplied by a predetermined number (for example, 100) and stored in the division input register A131216, and the total number of out balls is stored in the division input register B131217. Then, after 32 clocks have elapsed, the quotient is read from the division result register A131218 and used as the base value. When the total number of out balls is 0, even if the base value is calculated, the return value from the calculation circuit 13121 results in an error, so that the base value need not be stored in the base calculation area 13128. In this case, the base value displayed on the base display 1317 is not updated.

After that, it is determined whether or not the base value management timer has timed up (step S904). If the base value management timer has not timed up, it is not the timing to store the base value in the base history, so the base calculation / display process ends. On the other hand, if the base value management timer is timed up, the base value is stored in the base history (step S905), and the base value management timer is reset (step S906).

The base value management timer is a timer used to record a base value at predetermined time (for example, 10 minutes), and stores the current base value in the base history every time the base value management timer times up. The base history is stored in the base calculation area 13128. Only one base history may be stored in the base calculation area 13128, or a plurality of base histories may be stored in the base calculation area 13128. When a plurality of base histories are stored in the base calculation area 13128, a ring buffer may be configured in the base calculation area 13128, and for example, a predetermined time × 10 base values may be stored. Further, as shown in FIG. 52, a ring buffer of the total number of prize balls and the total number of out balls is configured in the base calculation area 13128, and for example, a predetermined time × n number of prize balls and the total number of out balls are stored. The base value may be calculated if necessary.

After that, a base notification command is generated (step S908), and the base is notified to the player and the hall employee.

FIG. 63 is a flowchart showing an example of the display selection process. The display selection process is called from the display data creation process (step S1030) of the peripheral control unit power-on process (FIG. 60).

First, the MPU of the peripheral control unit 1511 selects a specific base history (for example, the latest past base value) stored in the base calculation area 13128, and the selected base history value is smaller than the current base value. (Step S10301). As a result, if the selected base history value is smaller than the current base value, it is determined whether a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed from the start of the base value decrease by referring to the base decrease duration measurement timer. (Step S10302). Then, if a predetermined time has not elapsed from the start of lowering the base, the effect table during the lowering of the base is selected (step S10303). On the other hand, if a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of lowering the base, the effect table in which the lowering of the base is continuing is selected (step S10304).

On the other hand, if the selected base history value is not less than (equal to or greater than) the current base value, the base decrease duration measurement timer is reset (step S10305) and the display selection table during base increase is selected (step S10306). ).

In the display selection process described above, in step S10301, it is determined whether the current base value is smaller than the base history value, but the current base value and the base history value are compared to determine whether they are large, equal, or small. You may. The base value is generally a decimal value because it is calculated by division. Therefore, it is advisable to determine whether the base history value and the current base value are equal in consideration of a predetermined allowable range (for example, 3%).

64 to 68 are views showing an example of a display selection table. These display selection tables are used to select the effect of the special symbol variation display game by the random numbers selected when the start winning opening is won (or before the start of the special symbol variation display game). The display selection table 1 shown in FIGS. 64 to 66 is selected when the base value is rising or the base value does not change, and the display selection tables 2 and 3 shown in FIGS. 67 and 68 are selected while the base value is decreasing. Be selected. In particular, the display selection table 3 shown in FIG. 68 is selected after a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed from the start of the base value decreasing.

Each display selection table includes each item of effect number, effect content, fluctuation time, remarks, and distribution. The effect number is an identifier for uniquely identifying the effect selected in the display selection table. The content of the production is the name of the production. The fluctuation time is the time from the start to the end of the fluctuation of the special symbol due to the effect. The remarks are information that describes the outline of the production so that the designer can understand it. The distribution is the probability that the effect is selected, and is defined by the numerator with 65536 as the denominator.

The display selection table 1 (hit 1) shown in FIG. 64 is selected when the result of the big hit lottery is wrong and the base value is rising or does not change. Is selected when the result of the jackpot lottery is a normal jackpot that does not derive a probability change state, and the base value is rising or does not change. The display selection table 1 (win 2) shown in FIG. 66 is selected when the result of the jackpot lottery is a probability variation jackpot that derives a probability variation state, and the base value is rising or does not change.

The display selection table 2 shown in FIG. 67 is selected while the base value is decreasing. Further, the display selection table 3 shown in FIG. 68 is selected when the base value has decreased even after a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed since the base value began to decrease.

As shown in the figure, the display selection tables 2 and 3 include freeze effects 1 and 2, which are effects in which the symbols do not change, and the freeze effects are selected with high probability. The freeze effect is displayed when a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) has elapsed after the effect is determined.

If the base value has decreased even after a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed since the base value began to decrease, the effect is selected using the display selection table 3 to obtain the selected effect. You may switch.

Further, it may be determined whether to display a specific effect for notifying the change of the base value according to the game state (game situation). This is because if the player is constantly notified of changes in the base value, the player's attention to the production of the special symbol variation display game, which is the original pleasure of the pachinko machine, may be distracted, and the player's consciousness may be dispersed. Because there is.

For example, during the execution of the special symbol variation display game (game situation in which the result of the jackpot lottery is not shown), the production of the special symbol variation display game is executed with priority, and when it is not variable, the base value is increased. It is advisable to display a specific effect (an effect that serves as a guide for a change in the base value) when the time or descent occurs.

The specific effect may be displayed at a timing in which the special symbol variation display game is not executed for a predetermined time. This is because, if the specific effect is displayed immediately after the end of the special symbol variation display game, the player's feeling of tension continues and fatigue accumulates. If a game ball wins a prize at the start winning opening while the specific effect is displayed, the display of the specific effect is stopped and the effect of the special symbol variation display game is executed. This is because a big hit lottery is held and the special symbol variation display game is started when the winning prize is entered in the start winning opening, so it is better to have the player pay attention to the special symbol variation display game.

The specific effect may be displayed even in a situation where the number of prize balls does not reach a predetermined number (threshold Th1) or the number of out balls does not reach a predetermined number (threshold Th2). Further, the specific effect may be displayed according to the result of the lottery, but it may be executed without fail if the same conditions are satisfied.

Further, the specific effect may not be displayed when the base value rises, but may be displayed only when the base value falls. This is because when the player is notified of the increase in the base value, the player's expectation rises, and if the base value does not rise to the extent that the player expects, the gap with the expectation may disappoint the player. is there. On the other hand, when the player is notified of the decrease in the base value, some players increase their fighting spirit in order to increase the base value.

Further, in this embodiment, the display selection table is changed depending on whether the base value is decreasing or not (increasing, steady state), but the display is divided into three states of the base value decreasing, steady state, and increasing. A selection table may be defined to notify the player that the base is rising. In this case, it is advisable to determine whether the base value is steady (whether the base history value and the current base value are equal) in consideration of a predetermined allowable range (for example, 3%).

Further, the specific effect may be displayed during the special symbol variation display game. In this case, there is a higher possibility that the base value will decrease when it is displayed outside the special symbol variation display game than when it is displayed during the special symbol variation display game.

In addition, when the game ball does not win the starting winning opening and the special symbol variation display game is not played, the base value usually decreases. Further, if the special symbol variation display game is not played for a predetermined time, a demo screen is displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600.

FIG. 69 is a diagram showing an example of a display screen of the pachinko machine of this embodiment.

FIG. 69 (A) is a display example of the normal reach, in which the left symbol and the right symbol are stopped at 7, and the middle symbol is fluctuating. FIG. 69B is a display example of the special reach 1, in which the left symbol and the right symbol displayed on the upper left of the screen are stopped at 7, and the middle symbol is fluctuating. In the center of the screen, the player and the opponent are playing rock-paper-scissors, and the middle design is determined by the result of rock-paper-scissors. FIG. 69C is a display example of the special reach 2, in which the left symbol and the right symbol displayed in the upper left of the screen are stopped at 7, and the middle symbol is fluctuating. In the center of the screen, the player and the opponent are playing against each other, and the middle symbol is determined by the result of the battle.

FIG. 69 (D) is a display example of the freeze effect 1, in which the stopped decorative symbol is displayed in the center of the screen, and the base value is lowered at a position (for example, the lower right of the screen) that does not interfere with the recognition of the decorative symbol. Make a recognizable display. FIG. 69 (E) is a display example of the freeze effect 2, in which the stopped decorative symbol is displayed in the center of the screen, and the base value is lowered at a position (for example, the lower part of the screen) that does not interfere with the recognition of the decorative symbol. Display a recognizable continuation. In the freeze effect, the display indicating the decrease in the base value may be any position as long as it does not interfere with the recognition of the decorative pattern. Further, the display indicating the decrease in the base value may be displayed at a position overlapping the decorative pattern. For example, a display that pops up in the center of the display screen may be used.

Although the example of displaying the degree of change in the base value on the main liquid crystal display device 1600 has been described above, the lighting mode of the decorative lamp may be changed. Further, the change in the base value may be displayed numerically instead of the vertical tendency of the base value.

The change in the displayed base value is the total cumulative total of the base values calculated before the specified time, even in the comparison result between the base value calculated in the time interval before the specified time and the base value calculated in the current time interval. May be the result of comparison with the total cumulative total of the latest base values.

[9-8. Calculation of the base considering a specific general winning opening]
Next, a process of accurately calculating the base value in consideration of winning a specific general winning opening will be described.

In pachinko machines, the player aims to win a prize in a specific winning opening (for example, the open winning opening 2005, 2006) in which the game ball is likely to win during the jackpot. Adjust the firing strength. Even during a big hit, you can shoot a game ball at the same place as the so-called normal hit and aim for the big prize opening 2005, or you can strengthen the firing strength to the maximum, so-called right-handed hit to aim for the big prize opening 2006 There are variations. In such a variation, a game board may be designed so that a starting winning opening and a general winning opening are arranged downstream of the large winning opening to pick up a ball spilled from the large winning opening.

Here, the downstream (lower part) of the pachinko machine that hits right during a big hit will be described in detail. During the big hit, the player hits right in order to win the game ball in the open big prize opening. Most of the game balls launched toward the game area win the large winning opening 2006 that is open. As described above, in the pachinko machine of this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 10 and 16, the general winning opening 2001 is provided on the right side of the large winning opening 2005, and the right-handed game ball is open. When the big winning opening 2006 is not won, the general winning opening 2001 is won. That is, it can be said that the general winning opening 2001 on the right side of the large winning opening 2005 wins only when the right-handed game ball does not win the large winning opening 2006 that is open.

The base value is the number of prize balls paid out by winning the starting prize opening and the general winning opening when 100 game balls are launched toward the game area 5a (that is, for 100 out balls). In order to show the percentage of the number of prize balls paid out), the game balls that have flowed into the game area but are unlikely to win the starting opening and the general winning opening (there is a high possibility of winning the big winning opening) are launched. When counted as a number (number of out balls), it is expected that the actual base value will deviate when calculated as the base value.

Therefore, in this embodiment, the general winning opening 2001 on the right side of the large winning opening 2005 is defined as a specific general winning opening, and the number of balls won in the specific general winning opening during the special prize is excluded from the number of out balls. To calculate the base value.

The outline of the calculation timing of the base value in each variation of the game machine that calculates the base value in consideration of a specific general winning opening is as follows.
-Fig. 70 and Fig. 40: Calculate the base value for each timer interrupt cycle-Fig. 71 and Fig. 72: Calculate the base value for each predetermined number of prize balls and each predetermined number of out balls. Although the description of the pattern for calculating the above and the pattern for calculating the base value for each predetermined number of out balls is omitted, it can be realized by combining FIGS. 70 to 72.

FIG. 70 is a flowchart showing another example of the base calculation area update process (step S81). In the base calculation area update process shown in FIG. 70, the number of winning balls and the out are calculated in order to calculate the base value using the number of out balls corrected by the number of winning balls to a specific general winning opening for each timer interrupt cycle. Obtain the number of balls and the number of specific winning balls. In FIG. 70, the same step numbers are assigned to the same parts as the above-described base calculation area update process, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, it is determined whether the gaming state is in the special prize (step S810). The same criteria as those described with reference to FIG. 39 can be used as the criteria for determining whether or not the prize is being awarded. Then, the number of prize balls other than during the special prize is acquired (step S811), and the acquired number of prize balls is added to the total number of prize balls (step S814). That is, in the base calculation area update process shown in FIG. 70, the total number of prize balls used for calculating the base value is updated each time the number of prize balls is calculated. It should be noted that it may be determined whether or not there is a prize ball, and if there is no prize ball, the process of updating the total number of prize balls may be skipped.

After that, the number of out balls is acquired (step S818), and the number of winning balls to a specific general winning opening (specific winning number of balls) is acquired (step S820). Then, the value obtained by subtracting the specific winning ball number from the out ball number is added to the total out ball number (step S822). That is, in the base calculation area update process shown in FIG. 70, the total number of out balls used for calculating the base value is updated each time an out ball or a winning ball is detected.

In addition, as in steps S815 to S817 of the base calculation area update process (FIG. 46) described above, it is determined whether or not there is an abnormality in the number of prize balls, and if there is an abnormality in the number of prize balls, an abnormality notification command is generated. , The prize ball abnormality notification timer may be reset. Further, as in steps S824 to S825 of FIG. 46, it is determined whether the prize ball abnormality notification timer has timed up, and when the prize ball abnormality notification timer has timed up, a prize ball abnormality notification stop command is generated and the prize is awarded. The ball abnormality notification may be stopped.

After recording the total number of prize balls and the total number of out balls in the base calculation area update process shown in FIG. 70, the base value can be calculated by the base calculation / display process shown in FIG. 40.

FIG. 71 is a flowchart showing another example of the base calculation area update process (step S81). In the base calculation area update process shown in FIG. 71, the number of prize balls is recorded in the prize ball number buffer and the number of out balls is recorded in order to calculate the base value at the timing when the number of prize balls and the number of out balls satisfy a predetermined condition. Record the number in the out ball count buffer. In FIG. 71, the same step numbers are assigned to the same parts as the above-described base calculation area update process, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, it is determined whether the gaming state is in the special prize (step S810). The same criteria as those described with reference to FIG. 39 can be used as the criteria for determining whether or not the prize is being awarded. Then, the number of prize balls other than during the special prize is acquired (step S811), and it is determined whether or not there is a prize ball (step S812). Then, if there are prize balls, the acquired number of prize balls is added to the prize ball number buffer (step S813).

Then, it is determined whether or not the number of prize balls is abnormal (step S815), and if there is an abnormality in the number of prize balls, an abnormality notification command is generated (step S816) and the prize ball abnormality notification timer is reset (step S817). ).

After that, the number of out balls is acquired (step S818), and the acquired number of out balls is added to the out ball number buffer (step S819). Then, the number of winning balls is acquired, it is determined whether or not the winning opening related to the acquired number of winning balls is a specific general winning opening, and the number of winning balls to the specific general winning opening is acquired (step S820). Then, the acquired number of winning balls to the specific general winning opening is added to the specific winning ball number buffer (step S823).

After that, it is determined whether the prize ball abnormality notification timer has timed up (step S824), and when the prize ball abnormality notification timer has timed up, a prize ball abnormality notification stop command is generated to stop the prize ball abnormality notification (step S824). Step S825).

FIG. 72 is a flowchart showing another example of the base calculation / display process (step S89). In the base calculation / display process shown in FIG. 72, the base value is calculated in consideration of the specific number of winning balls recorded in the specific winning ball number buffer. In FIG. 72, the same step numbers are assigned to the same parts as the above-mentioned base calculation / display processing, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, it is determined whether the number of prize balls stored in the prize ball number buffer is equal to or higher than a predetermined threshold value Th1 (step S890). If the prize ball number buffer value is smaller than the threshold Th1, it is not the timing to update the total prize ball number, so the process proceeds to step S895. On the other hand, if the prize ball number buffer value is the threshold Th1 or more, the threshold Th1 is added to the total prize ball number (step S891), and the threshold Th1 is subtracted from the prize ball number buffer (step S892). Then, the out-ball number buffer value is added to the total out-ball number (step S893), and the out-ball number buffer is set to 0 (step S894). In addition, steps S891 to S894 may be executed every predetermined number of winnings or at predetermined time without comparing the prize ball number buffer value and the threshold value Th1.

After that, it is determined whether the sum of the number of balls passing through the out port stored in the out ball number buffer and the number of winning balls stored in the winning ball number buffer is equal to or greater than a predetermined threshold Th2 (step S895). ). The total of the number of balls passing through the out port and the number of winning balls is the number of game balls that have flowed into the game area, and is the number of out balls. As a result of the determination, if the calculated out-ball number is smaller than the threshold Th2, it is not the timing to update the total out-ball number, so the process proceeds to step S902. On the other hand, if the calculated out-ball number is the threshold Th2 or more, the prize-ball number buffer value is added to the total prize-ball number (step S897), and the prize-ball number buffer is set to 0 (step S898). Then, the specific winning ball number is subtracted from the total number of out balls and the threshold Th2 is added (step S899), the winning ball number buffer is set to 0, and the threshold Th2 is subtracted from the out ball number buffer (step S900).

After that, it is determined whether the total number of out balls is 0 (step S902). If the total number of out balls is 0, the base value cannot be calculated, so the base calculation / display process is terminated. On the other hand, if the total number of out balls is not 0, the base value is calculated by dividing the total number of out balls by the total number of out balls (step S903). Specifically, the total number of prize balls is multiplied by a predetermined number (for example, 100) and stored in the division input register A131216, and the total number of out balls is stored in the division input register B131217. Then, after 32 clocks have elapsed, the quotient is read from the division result register A131218 and used as the base value. When the total number of out balls is 0, even if the base value is calculated, the return value from the calculation circuit 13121 results in an error, so that the base value need not be stored in the base calculation area 13128. In this case, the base value displayed on the base display 1317 is not updated.

After that, it is determined whether the calculated base value is abnormal (step S907). The abnormality of the base value is, for example, when the calculated base value becomes larger or smaller than the design value (normal value) beyond a predetermined allowable range. It should be noted that the degree of abnormality may be determined in a plurality of stages according to the degree of deviation of the base value by providing a allowable range in a plurality of stages. Then, if the base value is abnormal, a base notification command is generated (step S908), and the base is notified to the player and the hall employee. On the other hand, if the base value is not abnormal, the base calculation / display process is terminated.

In the base calculation / display process shown in FIG. 72, the base value is calculated every time even if the total number of prize balls and the total number of out balls are not updated. That is, if the total number of prize balls and the total number of out balls are not updated, the same value is calculated as the base value, the base value is maintained at the same value, and if the total number of prize balls or the total number of out balls is updated, then The base value is updated to a different value. The base value may be calculated at the timing when one of the total number of prize balls and the total number of out balls is updated, or the base value may be calculated at the timing when both are updated.

Further, in the pachinko machine of the present embodiment, the base value is calculated excluding the game balls that have flowed into the game area but are unlikely to win the starting port and the general winning port, so that the deviation from the actual base value is large. A small base value can be calculated accurately.

Further, the case where the general winning opening 2001 is located downstream of the large winning opening 2006 in the pachinko machine that hits right during the big hit has been described, but the invention according to this embodiment aims at the big winning opening 2005 by hitting normally during the big hit. It can be applied to pachinko machines as well as gaming machines in which a starting port or a general winning opening is provided downstream of the large winning opening 2005.

Further, in the game area 5a, there are large winning openings 2005 and 2006 that do not normally accept game balls but can accept game balls according to the result of the big hit lottery. The prize balls from winning the grand prize openings 2005 and 2006 may be excluded from the calculation of the base value. In this case, the game ball wins the starting winning openings 2002 and 2004, the special symbol variation display game starts, and the big winning opening is from the time when the special symbol is confirmed until the big winning openings 2005 and 2006 are opened (big hit opening). The detected out-balls are excluded from the number of out-balls during the period from the closing of the mouths 2005 and 2006 to the start of the next special symbol variation display game (big hit ending). In this way, the number of prize balls and the number of out balls during the special prize can be counted without determining whether or not the special prize is being awarded in step S810 as shown in FIG. 39. When the big winning openings 2005 and 2006 repeat opening and closing in one big hit, the time between the closing of the big winning openings 2005 and 2006 and the next opening (closing interval) may be included in the special prize. That is, during the special prize, it means that the condition device is operating, for example, from the determination of the jackpot symbol of the special symbol variation display game to the end of the ending. In addition, it may include all the time during the right-handed instruction. Further, in the starting winning openings 2002 and 2004, the special prize may include the time saving, the probability change (ST), and the electric power support. Further, in a gaming state other than during time reduction, probabilistic change (ST), and electric power support, a predetermined time after opening and closing of the starting winning opening 2004 (for example, a ball winning the starting winning opening is detected as an out ball. The special prize may include up to a few seconds required.

Further, in the game area 5a, a second starting port 2004 is arranged, which normally does not accept the game ball, but can accept the game ball according to the lottery result of the normal symbol. The prize ball due to winning the second starting port 2004 may be excluded from the calculation of the base value. In this case, the game ball passes through the gate portion 2003, a lottery of the normal symbol is performed, the normal symbol variation display game starts, and from the time when the normal symbol is confirmed until it is opened (opening), the second start port 2004 The detected out-balls are excluded from the number of out-balls during the period from the closing of the game to the start of the next normal symbol variation display game (ending). When the second starting port 2004 repeats opening and closing depending on the lottery result of the normal symbol, the time between the closing of the second starting port 2004 and the next opening (closing interval) may be included in the special prize. In this way, not only during the time saving, but all the winnings to the second starting port 2004 can be excluded from the calculation of the base value.

By doing so, it is possible to accurately count the number of prize balls and the number of out balls other than during the special prize (big hit, shortened time, etc.) without determining whether or not the special prize is being awarded in step S810 as shown in FIG. 39.

In this way, the number of out balls and the number of prize balls while the player is hitting right can be accurately excluded, and the base value can be calculated accurately.

In addition, depending on the pachinko machine, it is recommended to play left-handed in a state where neither big hit nor short-time (so-called normal state) is played, and right-handed during big hit or short-time. In such a game machine, a general winning opening 2001 and a first starting opening 2002 for winning a left-handed hit, and a general winning opening 2001 and a second starting opening 2004 for winning a right-handed hit are provided. In such a game machine, the number of winning openings in the left side to the center of the game area 5a (the area where the game ball rolls when hitting left) and the right side of the game area 5a (the area where the game ball rolls when hitting right) The ball entry rate to each winning opening differs depending on the arrangement and the arrangement position of the nails. In other words, the base value when hitting left and the base value when hitting right are different.

The base value of the pachinko machine is set on the assumption that the player strikes left in the normal state. However, for the reason mentioned above, when the base value is different between left-handed and right-handed (for example, when the base value at right-handed in the normal state is designed to be lower than that at left-handed). , When the player hits right in the normal state, a low base value is calculated.

Hall considers that a pachinko machine with a low base value is abnormal and inspects it, or judges that it is a gaming machine with poor ball ejection performance. Even in pachinko machines that are judged to have poor ball ejection performance (lower than the expected base), the hall determines that the player is hitting left, so the starting winning opening that acts on the base when hitting left. And make adjustments to increase the winning rate of general winning openings. Then, adjust the abnormal nail to increase the base value. If you hit left with a game machine adjusted in this way, you can get a lot of prize balls even in the normal state. In other words, you can get a lot of lottery for a small amount. In other words, even if the base at the time of left-handed hit is not different from what the hole expected, the hole misunderstands and makes adjustments to increase the entry rate of the starting opening and the general winning opening that win at the time of left-handed hit. Since the hole may suffer a disadvantage due to the malicious intent of such a player, it is necessary to accurately calculate the base value when hitting left and the base value when hitting right.

By the way, in the pachinko machine that hits right in a short time, the second starting port 2004 that opens and closes depending on the game state and the gate portion 2003 for performing a normal symbol lottery for opening the second starting port 2004 are at the time of right hitting. It is placed in the area where the game ball rolls. In addition, when the game ball passes through the gate portion 2003 by hitting right in the normal state, even if the lottery of the normal symbol is performed, the probability of winning the normal symbol is extremely low so that the second starting port 2004 does not open, or it is normal. Even if the symbol lottery is won, the opening time of the second starting port 2004 is shortened, which makes it difficult to win a prize in the second starting port 2004 in the normal state.

Here, in order to increase the base value in a right-handed state in the normal state, the ball entry rate to the second starting port 2004 is increased. However, since the second starting port 2004 is generally set to be more advantageous than the first starting port 2002, increasing the ball entry rate to the second starting port 2004 puts pressure on the profit of the hall. Therefore, when counting the game balls that have passed through the gate portion 2003 in the normal state and calculating the base value, it is preferable to calculate the base value corrected by using the number of passing balls of the gate portion 2003.

Specifically, the number of game balls that have passed through the gate portion 2003 in the normal state is subtracted from the number of out balls (the number of game balls that are driven toward the game area 5a) as the number of specific winning balls. By reducing the number of out balls, a high base calculation value can be obtained. For example, when a considerable number of game balls pass through the gate portion 2003, an extremely high base value will be calculated. The degree of correction processing may be appropriately determined based on the design value (performance) of the game machine.

Further, when the passage of the gate portion 2003 is monitored and the game balls pass through the gate portion 2003 (when a predetermined number (for example, 3) of game balls pass through the gate portion 2003 without winning a prize at the starting port, etc.) After passing through the gate portion 2003 (or before and after), the number of out balls counted at a predetermined time or a predetermined number of shots may not be used in the calculation of the base value. In this way, the base value can be calculated more accurately. When the passage of the gate portion 2003 is detected, a display such as "Please return to left-handed" or a voice may be output without actively notifying the player that it is not reflected in the calculation result of the base value. Further, when the passage of the gate portion 2003 is detected, the hall may be notified that the ball is hit right. For example, a specific lamp may be turned on, the lighting mode may be changed, or the external terminal board 784 may output that the hall computer installed in the amusement park is hitting right.

As described above, by excluding the number of passing balls of the gate portion 2003 provided on the right side of the game area 5a (the area where the game ball rolls when hitting right) from the number of out balls, the player hits right in the normal state. The base value of time can be corrected to a large value. Therefore, it is possible to prevent fluctuations in the calculated value of the base depending on the player's game style.

[9-9. Initialization of base value]
Considering the role of the base value for checking the operating status of the pachinko machine 1, it is desirable that the calculated base value be maintained for a long period of time. Further, it is desirable that the calculated base value cannot be easily erased. Therefore, the base calculation / display data 13136 is deleted under a condition different from the deletion condition of the data related to the progress of the game backed up in the RAM 1312 of the main control MPU 1311. As a result, it is possible to retain accurate prize ball number data and calculate an accurate bonus ratio.

Specifically, the base calculation / display data 13136 is not erased by the operation of the RAM clear switch (first operation), but the backup power supply supplied to the main control MPU 1311 is cut off, and the power supply of the pachinko machine 1 is used. By the second operation of shutting off, all the data backed up in the RAM 1312 of the main control MPU 1311 can be erased. In the second operation, one switch for realizing this operation may be provided, or the employee of the amusement shop disconnects the connector of the backup power line supplied to the main control board 1310, and the pachinko machine 1 The power supply may be cut off.

In other words, two operations are prepared to erase the RAM 1312 of the main control MPU 1311. In the first operation, only the data related to the progress of the game is erased, but in the second operation, the calculated base value. And delete all data including data related to the progress of the game.

With this configuration, the base calculation / display data 13136 is not erased due to an erroneous operation by the staff of the amusement park, so that the reliability of the displayed accessory ratio is improved and the concealment of the high accessory ratio can be prevented. ..

[9-10. Base calculation considering winning abnormalities]
73 and 74 are flowcharts of the base calculation area update process in consideration of the winning abnormality.

In the pachinko machine 1, in addition to the abnormality in the number of prize balls determined in step S815 described above, an abnormality in winning may be detected. For example, when a prize is detected other than when the jackpot is derived in the special symbol variation display game 2005 or 2006, or when a win is derived in the normal symbol variation display game, the start winning slot is started. If a prize is detected other than during the opening of 2004, the prize is abnormal. That is, the abnormality in the number of prize balls determined in step S815 is an abnormal operation detected from the number of prize balls, and is mainly a case where a large number of prize balls are obtained in a predetermined time. On the other hand, the winning abnormality is an abnormal operation detected from the number of winning balls, and is mainly a case where a winning is not possible or a large number of winnings are detected at a predetermined time.

Since the winning ball related to this winning abnormality is counted as an out ball, it is desirable to correct this amount and calculate the base accurately. Therefore, in the base calculation area update process in consideration of the winning abnormality, the total number of out balls is corrected so as to reduce the number of winning balls related to the detected winning abnormality.

Normally, the big winning openings 2005 and 2006 and the starting winning opening 2004 are won only during the special prize, so the winning balls to these winning openings are not counted as out balls for calculating the base. There is no need to consider winning abnormalities.

FIG. 73 is a flowchart showing an example of the base calculation area update process (step S81). The base calculation area update process determines the current game state, adds the number of prize balls paid out as the game value to the area corresponding to the current game state, and updates the base calculation area 13128 of the main control built-in RAM 1312. To do. In particular, the base calculation area update process shown in FIG. 73 is the prize ball control process (step S80) in order to calculate the base value each time for each timer interrupt cycle, similarly to the base calculation area update process shown in FIG. 39. The total number of prize balls is directly updated using the number of prize balls calculated in (step S814), and the total number of out balls is directly updated using the number of out balls (step S822). In FIG. 73, the same step numbers are assigned to the same parts as the above-described base calculation area update process, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, it is determined whether the gaming state is in the special prize (step S810). The same criteria as those described with reference to FIG. 39 can be used as the criteria for determining whether or not the prize is being awarded.

If the game state is during the special prize, since the prize ball is not related to the calculation of the base value, the base calculation area update process is terminated without updating the number of prize balls and the number of out balls. On the other hand, if the gaming state is not during the special prize, the number of prize balls calculated based on the input information in the prize ball control process (step S80) is acquired (step S811). The number of prize balls acquired in the base calculation area update process may be the number of prize balls determined to be paid out. Further, the number of prize balls corresponding to the created payout command may be used. Further, the number of prize balls corresponding to the sent payout command may be used. Further, the number of prize balls corresponding to the payout command in which the main control board 1310 transmits the payout command to the payout control board 951 and the receipt confirmation (ACK) is received from the payout control board 951 may be used. Further, the number of prize balls (number of paid prize balls) may be used, in which the main control board 1310 transmits a payout command to the payout control board 951 and the payout control board 951 reports that the payout is completed. This variation has been described with reference to FIGS. 41-44.

Then, the acquired number of prize balls is added to the total number of prize balls to update the total number of prize balls (step S814). It should be noted that it may be determined whether or not there is a prize ball, and if there is no prize ball, the process of updating the total number of prize balls may be skipped. In addition, although the game balls have won in the starting winning openings 2002 and 2004, the holding is the upper limit, and even if the winning in the starting winning opening is not suspended, the winning balls will be paid out, so the total number of winning balls will be updated. To. Further, in a game state in which a prize ball is not generated even if a game ball is won in the winning opening (for example, when a specific error occurs), the prize ball due to the winning is not generated and the number of prize balls to be acquired is large. Since it is 0, the total number of prize balls is not updated. The total number of prize balls is recorded in the total number of prize balls storage area (see FIG. 52) provided in the base calculation area 13128 of the main control built-in RAM 1312. That is, in the base calculation area update process shown in FIG. 73, the total number of prize balls used for calculating the base value is updated each time the number of prize balls is calculated.

After that, the number of out balls is acquired (step S818). Then, it is determined whether or not the winning abnormality is detected (step S826). Then, the number of game balls corresponding to the winning prize determined to be abnormal is acquired (step S827). Specifically, as described above, when a prize is detected in the big prize openings 2005 and 2006 other than during the special prize (when the condition device is operating) caused by the derivation of the big hit in the special symbol variation display game. , If a prize is detected in the start winning opening 2004 even though it is not open due to the winning being derived in the normal symbol variation display game, it is determined that the winning is abnormal.

If one winning ball related to the winning abnormality is detected, it may be determined to be a winning abnormality, or if a predetermined number of winning balls related to the winning abnormality are detected, it may be determined to be a winning abnormality. Further, if a predetermined number of winning balls related to the winning abnormality are continuously detected, it may be determined as a winning abnormality, and if a predetermined number of winning balls related to the winning abnormality are detected within a predetermined time, it is determined as a winning abnormality. You may.

Then, the total number of out balls is updated so as to add the acquired number of out balls to the total number of out balls (step S822). As described above, the number of out balls is detected by the launch ball sensor 1020, the discharge ball sensor 3060, and the like, and the detection signals of these sensors are read and acquired by the switch input process in step S74. At this time, a value obtained by subtracting the number of winning balls due to abnormal winning from the acquired number of out balls may be added to the total number of out balls, or after adding the acquired number of out balls to the total number of out balls, the player wins a prize. The number of abnormally winning balls may be subtracted from the total number of out balls. The total number of out balls is recorded in the total number of out balls storage area (see FIG. 52) provided in the base calculation area 13128 of the main control built-in RAM 1312. That is, in the base calculation area update process shown in FIG. 73, the total number of out balls used for calculating the base value is updated each time an out ball is detected. In this way, the base calculation process is executed for each timer interrupt process, the total number of out balls is updated, and the base value is calculated and displayed by the base calculation display process (FIG. 40), so that the base value is displayed without delay. It is possible to judge whether the base value is normal or abnormal without delay.

In addition, as in steps S815 to S817 of the base calculation area update process (FIG. 74) described later, it is determined whether or not there is an abnormality in the number of prize balls, and if there is an abnormality in the number of prize balls, an abnormality notification command is generated. , The prize ball abnormality notification timer may be reset. Further, as in steps S824 to S825, it is determined whether the prize ball abnormality notification timer has timed up, and when the prize ball abnormality notification timer has timed up, a prize ball abnormality notification stop command is generated to notify the prize ball abnormality. May be stopped.

In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the main control MPU 1311 executes the calculation process of the base value in the timer interrupt process, but the payout control MPU of the payout control unit 952 may execute the calculation process of the base value. In this case, the main control board 1310 may transmit a command for notifying the base to the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510, or the payout control unit 952 may send a command for notifying the peripheral control unit 1511 of the base. May be sent.

Further, even if information on both the winning and the out balls to the winning opening is acquired in one timer interrupt process, the number of prize balls is changed to the total number of prize balls (or the number of prize balls buffer in the embodiment described later). Add and add the number of out balls to the total number of out balls (or the out ball number buffer in the embodiment described later). Further, even if information on winning a plurality of winning openings is acquired in one timer interrupt process, the total number of prize balls due to the plurality of winnings is the total number of prize balls (or the number of prize balls buffer in the embodiment described later). ). Therefore, the base value can be calculated and displayed accurately. For example, if a prize is detected in the winning opening sensor of the winning opening with 5 prize balls and the winning opening sensor of the winning opening with 3 winning balls, a total of 8 prize balls are used as the total number of winning balls. (Or, add to the prize ball count buffer).

Further, the number of prize balls may be added to the total number of prize balls (or the number of prize balls buffer) only when the launch of the game balls is detected. That is, only the number of prize balls related to the prize detected within a predetermined time from the detection of the launch ball sensor 1020 may be added to the total number of prize balls (or the number of prize balls buffer). Further, the operation of the launch control unit 953 or the ball launcher 680 is detected, and while the launch control unit 953 or the ball launcher 680 is operating (furthermore, the launch control unit 953 or the ball launcher 680 stops operating). Only the number of prize balls related to the winning detected within a predetermined time (for example, after 5 seconds) may be added to the total number of prize balls or the number of prize balls buffer. Further, the number of prize balls may be added to the total number of prize balls (or the number of prize balls buffer) only when the player is operating the firing handle. That is, only the number of prize balls related to the prize detected within a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) from the time when it is detected that the hand or finger is touching the contact detection sensor 509 of the handle unit 500 is the total number of prize balls ( Alternatively, it may be added to the prize ball number buffer). In this way, it is possible to prevent the prize ball from being reflected in the base value due to an abnormality or cheating that detects the prize ball when the game ball is not fired, and it is possible to prevent an inaccurate display of the base value. In this case, if the contact detection sensor 509 is used, it is not necessary to newly provide a sensor for detecting the launch of the game ball, so that an increase in the cost of the pachinko machine 1 can be suppressed.

FIG. 74 is a flowchart showing another example of the base calculation area update process (step S81). In the base calculation area update process shown in FIG. 74, the number of out balls is recorded in the out ball number buffer in order to calculate the base value at the timing when the number of out balls satisfies a predetermined condition (step S819). In FIG. 74, the same step numbers are assigned to the same parts as the above-described base calculation area update process, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, it is determined whether the gaming state is in the special prize (step S810). The same criteria as those described with reference to FIG. 39 can be used as the criteria for determining whether or not the prize is being awarded. Then, the number of prize balls other than during the special prize is acquired (step S811), and it is determined whether or not there is a prize ball (step S812). Then, if there is no prize ball as a result of the determination in step S812, the process proceeds to step S818 without updating the number of prize balls. On the other hand, if there are prize balls, it is determined whether the number of prize balls is abnormal (step S815), and if there is no abnormality in the number of prize balls, the acquired number of prize balls is added to the total number of prize balls (step S814). .. That is, in the base calculation area update process shown in FIG. 74, the total number of prize balls used for calculating the base value is updated each time the number of prize balls is calculated.

On the other hand, if there is an abnormality in the number of prize balls, an abnormality notification command is generated (step S816), and the prize ball abnormality notification timer is reset (step S817).

After that, the number of out balls is acquired (step S818). The acquired number of out balls is added to the number of out balls buffer (step S819). Then, it is determined whether or not the winning abnormality is detected (step S826), and the number of game balls corresponding to the winning winning determined to be abnormal is acquired (step S827).

After that, it is determined whether the prize ball abnormality notification timer has timed up (step S824), and when the prize ball abnormality notification timer has timed up, a prize ball abnormality notification stop command is generated to stop the prize ball abnormality notification (step S824). Step S825).

In the base calculation area update process shown in FIGS. 73 and 74, the out balls are corrected by the number of all winning balls related to the winning abnormality, but the out balls are corrected for the winning balls related to a specific type of winning abnormality, and the like. It is not necessary to correct the out ball for the winning ball that is affected by the specific type of winning abnormality. For example, depending on the type of winning ball related to the winning abnormality, the winning ball for the winning ball may or may not be paid out. Whether or not to pay out the prize ball for this winning abnormality should be determined for each winning opening. In this case, for a winning abnormality in which the winning ball is not paid out, the winning ball should not be counted as the total out ball and should not be used in the calculation of the base value. On the other hand, for a winning abnormality in which prize balls are paid out, the winning balls may be counted as total out balls, and the prize balls to be paid out may also be counted as the total number of prize balls and used in the calculation of the base value. Even if the prize balls are paid out abnormally, the prize balls are not counted as the total out balls, and the prize balls to be paid out are not counted as the total number of prize balls, and may not be used in the calculation of the base value.

For example, as a result of maintenance (clearing ball clogging, etc.) of a game machine failure, a hall employee may manually insert a game ball into the starting prize opening to compensate for the player to leave the ball so as not to damage it. In this case, a prize ball is paid out for winning a prize in the starting winning opening. The winning of the starting winning opening is detected as a winning abnormality, but the winning ball is paid out. When the prize ball is paid out in this way, it should be reflected in the base value, so it is better not to judge that the prize is abnormal. In this case, the prize balls are paid out at the winning openings (starting winning openings 2002, 2004) that are reflected in the calculation of the base value, the winning abnormality is not determined, and the winning balls at the other winning openings (large winning openings 2005, 2006). It is advisable to judge the winning abnormality without paying out. The number of prize balls to be paid out by winning is smaller than that of the winning openings that do not judge the winning abnormality (the starting winning opening is 3 prize balls, the large winning opening is 15 prize balls). .. For this reason, although the winning abnormality is determined at the large winning opening, even if the abnormal winning is not determined at the starting winning opening, it does not become a big security hole from the viewpoint of defense against fraudulent acts. In this way, by determining the winning abnormality, it is possible to prevent inconsistency between the out balls and the number of winning balls. In particular, by correcting the number of out balls by using the number of winning balls related to the winning abnormality that does not generate a winning ball, the number of winning balls and the out balls that cause the winning balls can be matched.

As described above, the winning abnormality can be determined by various winning openings, but a specific implementation example in the pachinko machine will be described.

First, the general winning opening 2001 may not determine the winning abnormality, and the winning opening other than the general winning opening 2001 (large winning opening 2005, 2006, starting winning opening 2002, 2004) may determine the winning abnormality. Since it is difficult to win multiple game balls at the same time, the general winning openings are the large winning openings 2005 and 2006 and the starting winning openings 2002, which are electric accessories that open and close while improving the security resistance of the game machine against fraudulent activities. The player can be compensated for the ball by entering the general winning openings 2001 (4 in total), which are provided more than (3 in total). Further, since the general winning opening 2001 can be easily identified by the employees of the hall, it is easy to operate the pachinko machine 1 for maintenance and ball ejection compensation. The reason why hall employees can easily identify the general winning opening 2001 is that the general winning opening 2001 is often arranged together (in separate areas) in the game area, and the electric accessory (large winning opening). This is because the decorative member (appearance) is different from that of 2005, 2006, starting winning openings 2002, 2004). Further, when the number of prize balls for one ball of the general prize opening is small, the security resistance of the game machine against fraudulent acts is improved. It should be noted that the winning abnormality may not be determined only by a specific general winning opening (for example, the left end), and the winning abnormality may be determined by another general winning opening.

In addition, the large winning openings 2005 and 2006 with a large number of prize balls do not determine the winning abnormality, and the winning openings other than the large winning openings 2005 and 2006 (general winning openings 2001 with a small number of winning balls, starting winning openings 2002 and 2004) are used. The winning abnormality may be determined. Since the number of prize balls for one prize is large in the large prize opening, the base value changes greatly even with a small number of prize balls. Therefore, it is convenient to easily inspect the change in the base value when inspecting the pachinko machine. It should be noted that the winning abnormality may not be determined only by a specific large winning opening (for example, the large winning opening 2005 where it is easy to obtain a game ball by hand), and the winning abnormality may be determined by another large winning opening (for example, 2006). ..

Further, the starting winning openings 2002 and 2004 may not determine the winning abnormality, and the winning openings other than the starting winning openings 2002 and 2004 (general winning openings 2001, large winning openings 2005 and 2006) may determine the winning abnormality. Since the number of winning balls for one winning opening is smaller than that of the large winning opening, the player can be compensated for the ball output while improving the security resistance of the game machine against Goto. It should be noted that the winning abnormality is not determined only by the specific starting winning opening (for example, the starting winning opening 2002 provided in the center of the game board is easy to understand the position), and the winning abnormality is determined by the other starting winning openings 2004. May be good.

Further, in the large winning opening and the starting winning opening, the opening / closing member of the winning opening is in a position where it can be visually recognized from the front of the pachinko machine, that is, the opening / closing member can be easily operated by the employees of the hall. If the opening / closing member of the winning opening is not visible from the front of the pachinko machine, that is, the opening / closing member is difficult for the employee of the hall to operate the opening / closing member, the winning abnormality may be determined. For example, a winning opening (so-called electric tulip) having a structure in which the opening / closing member is tilted at an oblique position so that the opening / closing member is vertically positioned in the closed state can be easily operated by a hall employee. On the other hand, in the closed state, the winning opening is blocked by a flat plate-shaped member, and when the flat plate-shaped member retracts to the back, the entrance to the winning opening is opened (so-called belochu). Is difficult to operate. In this way, the security level is relaxed only for the winning openings used to compensate the player for the ball, so that it is easy for the employees in the hall to understand and the security resistance of the game machine can be improved.

In addition, the detected winning abnormality may be notified. The method of notifying the winning abnormality may be the same as the method of notifying the winning ball number abnormality (for example, output of a security signal to an external terminal board, warning display on a display device such as a liquid crystal display, a game board or a frame. Decorative lamps are lit or blinking, sounds, sound effects, warning sounds, etc.), but it is better to notify the winning abnormality more slowly than the notification of other abnormalities. Specifically, the abnormal notification time is short, the characters that notify the abnormality are small, the lamp does not light during the abnormality notification, and the abnormality notification sound is made lower (suppressed) than the volume of the notification sound at the time of other abnormalities. ).

Further, in the notification of the winning abnormality, the abnormality is notified for a predetermined time after the winning abnormality is detected, and even if the winning abnormality is further detected during the predetermined time, the setting is first set without extending the predetermined time. It is advisable to end the notification or change the mode of notification at a predetermined time. In this way, when the winning abnormality occurs continuously for a predetermined time (for example, several minutes), it can be determined that the hall is maintaining the game machine, not the cheating by the player. Therefore, if the winning abnormality is notified only for a predetermined time and the notification is not continued after that, the work efficiency can be improved without interfering with the maintenance work of the game machine by the hall. Further, by changing the mode of notification after a predetermined time, it can be seen that the maintenance work of the game machine is not disturbed and the work is being performed correctly and continuously. Specifically, it is preferable to stop the notification by sound (or reduce the volume) while the notification by the display device or the lamp is continued.

In summary, the gaming machine of the present embodiment has a correction means for correcting the number of out balls according to the number of winning balls, and the correction means divides a plurality of winning openings into a plurality of types (starting winning opening, large winning opening). For the first type of winning openings, the number of out balls is corrected based on the winning balls detected other than when the predetermined conditions are met (during the special prize), and for the second type of winning openings, the predetermined number is specified. The number of out balls is not corrected based on the winning balls detected except when the condition of (during special prize) is satisfied. As a result, as described above, it is possible to prevent a deviation in the number of out balls when compensating the player due to maintenance of the game machine, and it is possible to accurately calculate the number of out balls. In addition, an abnormal base value may be calculated due to a malfunction of the game machine, and the base value can be adjusted as the adjustment (maintenance). This allows an accurate base value to be calculated and displayed.

Up to this point, the detection of winning abnormalities and the exceptional handling of detection of winning abnormalities (when not detected) have been described, but the game balls judged to be winning abnormalities are not the prize balls acquired in the game, but the pachinko machines. Since there is a high possibility that it will be used for maintenance (adjustment of the base value), it is desirable that the winning balls for which the winning abnormality is determined are not reflected in the number of out balls and should not be used for the calculation of the base value.

Further, the winning abnormality detected in the base calculation area update process shown in FIGS. 73 and 74 may be notified. For example, in the fraud detection process (step S84) of the timer interrupt process, the winning abnormality display command is created with the winning abnormality as an abnormal state, and is transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process (step S92). The notification of the winning abnormality may be performed when one winning ball related to the winning abnormality is detected, or may be performed when a predetermined number of winning balls related to the winning abnormality are detected. Further, if a predetermined number of winning balls related to the winning abnormality are continuously detected, the winning abnormality may be notified, or if a predetermined number of winning balls related to the winning abnormality are detected within a predetermined time, the winning abnormality may be notified. Notification may be performed.

Further, the notification of the winning abnormality may be terminated after a lapse of a predetermined time, or may be terminated when the winning opening is opened (the condition device is activated).

It is not necessary to notify the winning abnormality.

[9-11. Base value calculation processing that takes advantage of the characteristics of the arithmetic circuit]
In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, since the arithmetic circuit 13121 performs the division process for calculating the base value, the base value can be calculated without interfering with other processes than the CPU 13111 executing the division programmatically. The base calculation process described so far has not taken advantage of this characteristic.

That is, in relation to the calculation of the base value, in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 23) described above, in the switch input process (step S74), the detection signals from the discharge ball sensor 3060 and the launch ball sensor 1020 are read to obtain the number of out balls. Is counted, and the number of game balls (prize balls) to be paid out is calculated in the prize ball control process (step S80). After that, in the base calculation area update process (step S98), the number of prize balls and the number of out balls in the base calculation area 13128 are updated.

After that, in the base calculation / display process (step S89), the base value is calculated with reference to the number of prize balls and the number of out balls stored in the base calculation area 13128, and the calculated base value is displayed on the base display 1317. indicate.

Since the timer interrupt processing is executed at predetermined time intervals, the predetermined processing must be completed for each timer interrupt. Therefore, in the slow division processing by the program, the time-consuming processing is included in the timer interrupt processing. That is, it was difficult to include multiple base calculation processes in the timer interrupt process. On the other hand, by performing the division process using the arithmetic circuit 13121, the time required for calculating the base value can be shortened, the base value can be calculated a plurality of times in one timer interrupt process, and the base value can be displayed without delay.

Further, the CPU 13111 is not occupied for the division process from the writing of the value to the division input registers 131216 and 131217 of the arithmetic circuit 13121 to the reading of the arithmetic result from the division result register A131218. That is, the wait time of 32 clocks from the input timing of the divisor and the divisor to the output timing of the quotient can be effectively utilized, and other processing can be performed during this time. In other words, since the input timing of the divisor and the divisor and the output timing of the quotient are different, the degree of freedom of the base value calculation processing in the timer interrupt processing is improved.

FIG. 75 is a flowchart showing an example of timer interrupt processing utilizing the characteristics of the arithmetic circuit. Since the timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 75 is the same as the timer interrupt process (FIG. 23) described above except for the base calculation process (steps S97 and S98), the description of the same process will be omitted.

When the timer interrupt processing is started, the main control MPU 1311 first switches the register by executing the main control program (step S70).

Next, the main control MPU 1311 executes the switch input process (step S74). In the switch input process, various signals input to the input terminals of the various input ports of the main control MPU 1311 are read and stored as input information in the input information storage area of the main control built-in RAM 1312. Specifically, the number of out balls is read by reading the detection signal from the sensor that detects the winning ball, the detection signal from the switch that detects cheating, the discharge ball sensor 3060, and the detection signal from the launch ball sensor 1020. To count.

Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 executes the base calculation process 1 (step S97). In the base calculation process 1, the total number of out balls is updated using the number of out balls counted in step S74, and the base value is calculated. Details of the base calculation process 1 will be described later with reference to FIGS. 76 and 78.

Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 executes the timer update process (step S76) and the random number update process 1 (step S78).

Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 executes the prize ball control process (step S80). In the prize ball control process, input information is read from the input information storage area, the number of game balls (prize balls) to be paid out based on the read input information is calculated, and the number is written to the main control built-in RAM 1312. In addition, a prize ball command for paying out game balls is created based on the calculation result of the number of prize balls.

Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 executes the base calculation process 2 (step S98). In the base calculation process 2, the total number of prize balls is updated using the number of prize balls calculated in step S80, and the base value is calculated. Details of the base calculation process 2 will be described later with reference to FIGS. 77 and 79.

Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 has a frame command reception process (step S82), a fraud detection process (step S84), a special symbol and special electric accessory control process (step S86), and a normal symbol and an ordinary electric accessory. The control process (step S88) is executed. Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 executes the output data setting process (step S90) and the peripheral control board command transmission process (step S92). Finally, the main control MPU 1311 sets a predetermined value (18H) in the watchdog timer clear register WCL (step S96). By setting a predetermined value in the watchdog timer clear register WCL, the watchdog timer clear register WCL is set to clear. Finally, the main control MPU 1311 switches (returns) the register bank. When the above processing is completed, the timer interrupt processing is terminated and the process returns to the processing before the interrupt.

FIG. 76 is a flowchart showing an example of the base calculation process 1 (step S97).

First, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether the gaming state is in the special prize (step S9701). The same criteria as those described with reference to FIG. 39 can be used as the criteria for determining whether or not the prize is being awarded. Then, if the game state is during the special prize, since it is an out ball that is not related to the calculation of the base value, the base is not calculated and the base calculation process 1 is terminated. On the other hand, if the gaming state is not in the special prize, the total number of out balls detected in the switch input process (step S74) is acquired (step S9702), and the acquired number of out balls is added to the total number of out balls. The number of out balls is updated (step S9705). If the number of out balls cannot be acquired or the number of out balls acquired is 0, the base calculation process 1 may be terminated immediately. By doing so, the load of the main control MPU 1311 can be reduced without unnecessarily calculating the base value.

After that, it is determined whether the total number of out balls is 0 (step S9707). If the total number of out balls is 0, the base value cannot be calculated, so the base calculation process 1 is terminated without calculating the base value. On the other hand, if the total number of out balls is not 0, the value obtained by multiplying the total number of out balls by a predetermined number (for example, 100) is stored in the division input register A131216 of the arithmetic circuit 13121, and the total number of out balls is stored in the division input register B131217. Store (step S9708). Then, after a predetermined time (32 clocks) has elapsed, the calculation result (total number of prize balls ÷ total number of out balls) is read from the division result register A131218 and used as the base value (step S9709).

After that, in the same manner as in step S908 described above, a base notification command is generated (step S9710), and the base (base value or abnormality of the base value) is notified to the player or the hall employee. The base notification command is a display command for the peripheral control unit 1511 when the base value is notified by the display device (liquid crystal display device 1600, 3114, 244) or the speaker 921 controlled by the peripheral control unit 1511 or the liquid crystal display control unit 1512. And sound output commands. Further, when the base display 1317 or the function display unit 1400 controlled by the main control board 1310 is used for notification, since these display devices are composed of 7-segment LEDs and LED lamps, the base notification command is sent to the LED element. It is a drive signal. Specifically, when the 7-segment LED is driven by the driver, the drive signal including the character code set in the driver (character generator in the driver) is the base notification command. When the 7-segment LED is directly driven, the drive signal for lighting each LED element is the base notification command.

FIG. 77 is a flowchart showing an example of the base calculation process 2 (step S98).

First, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether the gaming state is in the special prize (step S9801). The same criteria as those described with reference to FIG. 39 can be used as the criteria for determining whether or not the prize is being awarded.

As a result, if the gaming state is in the special prize, the prize ball is not related to the calculation of the base value, so the base is not calculated and the base calculation process 2 is terminated. On the other hand, if the gaming state is not during the special prize, the number of prize balls calculated in the prize ball control process (step S80) is acquired (step S9802), and the acquired number of prize balls is added to the total number of prize balls. The total number of prize balls is updated (step S9809). If the number of prize balls cannot be obtained or the number of prize balls obtained is 0, the base calculation process 2 may be terminated immediately. By doing so, the load of the main control MPU 1311 can be reduced without unnecessarily calculating the base value.

After that, it is determined whether the total number of out balls is 0 (step S9810). If the total number of out balls is 0, the base value cannot be calculated. Therefore, the base value is not calculated and the base calculation process 2 is terminated. On the other hand, if the total number of out balls is not 0, the value obtained by multiplying the total number of out balls by a predetermined number (for example, 100) is stored in the division input register A131216 of the arithmetic circuit 13121, and the total number of out balls is stored in the division input register B131217. Store (step S9812). When the total number of prize balls is 0, 0 is calculated as the base value, but the base value does not have to be calculated. Further, when the total number of prize balls is larger than the total number of outs, a value of 1 (100%) or more is calculated as the base value, but the base value does not have to be calculated. Then, after a predetermined time (32 clocks) has elapsed, the calculation result (total number of prize balls ÷ total number of out balls) is read from the division result register A131218 and used as the base value (step S9813).

After that, a base notification command is generated (step S9814), and the base is notified to the player and the hall employee.

Since the base calculation process shown in FIGS. 76 and 77 is executed for each timer interrupt process, the base value can be calculated and displayed without delay. Note that the base calculation process 1 and the base calculation process 2 may not be executed for each timer interrupt process, but may be executed for each timer interrupt process for a predetermined time (for example, one minute having a cycle longer than the timer interrupt process). By not executing the base calculation display process for each timer interrupt process, the amount of calculation required for calculating the base value (for example, the load of the main control MPU 1311) can be reduced as compared with the case where the base value is calculated for each timer interrupt process.

Next, another example of the base calculation process (steps S97 and S98) will be described with reference to FIGS. 78 to 79. In the base calculation process shown in FIGS. 78 and 79, the base value is calculated for each predetermined number of out balls and for each predetermined number of prize balls.

FIG. 78 is a flowchart showing another example of the base calculation process 1 (step S97).

First, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether the gaming state is in the special prize (step S9701). The same criteria as those described with reference to FIG. 39 can be used as the criteria for determining whether or not the prize is being awarded. Then, if the game state is during the special prize, since it is an out ball that is not related to the calculation of the base value, the base is not calculated and the base calculation process 1 is terminated. On the other hand, if the gaming state is not in the special prize, the number of out balls detected in the switch input process (step S74) is acquired (step S9702), and the acquired number of out balls is added to the out ball number buffer. The number of balls buffer is updated (step S9703). If the number of out balls cannot be acquired or the number of out balls acquired is 0, the base calculation process 1 may be terminated immediately. By doing so, the load of the main control MPU 1311 can be reduced without unnecessarily calculating the base value.

After that, it is determined whether the number of out balls stored in the out ball number buffer is equal to or higher than a predetermined threshold Th2 (step S9704). Various methods can be used to determine whether the number of out balls is equal to or higher than a predetermined threshold Th2. For example, the out-ball number buffer value and the threshold Th2 may be compared, or the value of a predetermined bit in the out-ball number storage area may be used for determination (specifically, the out-ball number storage area is 8 bits. If it is configured and the most significant bit is 1, it can be determined that the number of out balls is 128 or more).

Then, if the out-ball number buffer value is smaller than the threshold value Th2, it is not the timing to calculate the base value, so the base calculation process 1 is terminated.

On the other hand, if the out-ball number buffer value is the threshold Th2 or more, the total out-ball number buffer value is updated so as to add the out-ball number buffer value to the total out-ball number (step S9705), and the out-ball number buffer is set to 0. Set (step S9706).

After that, it is determined whether the total number of out balls is 0 (step S9707). If the total number of out balls is 0, the base value cannot be calculated, so the base calculation process 1 is terminated without calculating the base value. On the other hand, if the total number of out balls is not 0, the value obtained by multiplying the total number of out balls by a predetermined number (for example, 100) is stored in the division input register A131216 of the arithmetic circuit 13121, and the total number of out balls is stored in the division input register B131217. Store (step S9708). Then, after a predetermined time (32 clocks) has elapsed, the calculation result (total number of prize balls ÷ total number of out balls) is read from the division result register A131218 and used as the base value (step S9709).

After that, a base notification command is generated (step S9710), and the base is notified to the player and the hall employee.

FIG. 79 is a flowchart showing another example of the base calculation process 2 (step S98).

First, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether the gaming state is in the special prize (step S9801). The same criteria as those described with reference to FIG. 39 can be used as the criteria for determining whether or not the prize is being awarded. Then, if the game state is during the special prize, the prize ball is not related to the calculation of the base value, so the base is not calculated and the base calculation process 2 is terminated. On the other hand, if the gaming state is not during the special prize, the number of prize balls calculated in the prize ball control process (step S80) is acquired (step S9802), and there are prize balls, that is, the acquired number of prize balls is 1 or more. (Step S9803). As a result, if there are no prize balls, the process proceeds to step S9808 without updating the number of prize balls. On the other hand, if there are prize balls, it is determined whether the number of prize balls is abnormal (step S9805), and if there is no abnormality in the number of prize balls, the acquired number of prize balls is added to the prize ball number buffer. The number of balls buffer is updated (step S9804).

On the other hand, if the number of prize balls is abnormal, an abnormality notification command is generated (step S9806) to notify the player and the hall employee that the prize balls are abnormal. There are various methods for notifying the abnormality, and one of the methods described below or a combination of two or more may be used. Specifically, various methods described in step S816 of FIG. 46 can be adopted.

An abnormality in the number of prize balls corresponds to, for example, a large number of prize balls (for example, 10 or more prizes per minute in consideration of the number of prize balls in the general prize opening and the starting prize opening) at a predetermined time other than during the special prize. For example, when a prize ball) has been obtained. It should be noted that the degree of abnormality may be determined in a plurality of stages according to the degree of deviation from the reference value of the number of prize balls by providing a permissible range in a plurality of stages.

Then, the timer for notifying the prize ball abnormality is reset (step S9807), and the counting of the prize ball abnormality notification time is started.

Then, it is determined whether the number of prize balls stored in the prize ball number buffer is equal to or higher than a predetermined threshold value Th1 (step S9808). Various methods can be used to determine whether the prize ball number buffer value is equal to or higher than a predetermined threshold value Th1. For example, the prize ball number buffer value and the threshold Th1 may be compared, or the value of a predetermined bit in the prize ball number storage area may be used for determination (specifically, the prize ball number storage area is 8 bits. If it is configured and the most significant bit is 1, it can be determined that the number of out balls is 128 or more).

Then, if the prize ball number buffer value is smaller than the threshold value Th1, it is not the timing to calculate the base value, so the base calculation process 2 is terminated without calculating the base.

On the other hand, if the prize ball number buffer value is the threshold Th1 or more, the total prize ball number is updated so as to add the prize ball number buffer value to the total prize ball number (step S9809), and the prize ball number buffer is set to 0. Set (step S9810).

Each time the prize ball number is added to the prize ball number buffer, the prize ball number may be output from the external terminal plate 784 to the hall computer installed in the amusement park, and the prize ball number described later becomes a predetermined threshold Th1 or more. In some cases, the threshold Th1 may be output from the external terminal board 784 to the hall computer. Here, the prize ball number buffer is an area provided in the main control built-in RAM 1312 for calculating the base value, and the number of prize balls paid out by the game machine 1 is temporarily stored.

After that, it is determined whether the total number of out balls is 0 (step S9811). If the total number of out balls is 0, the base value cannot be calculated. Therefore, the base value is not calculated and the base calculation process 2 is terminated. On the other hand, if the total number of out balls is not 0, the value obtained by multiplying the total number of out balls by a predetermined number (for example, 100) is stored in the division input register A131216 of the arithmetic circuit 13121, and the total number of out balls is stored in the division input register B131217. Store (step S9812). Then, after a predetermined time (32 clocks) has elapsed, the calculation result (total number of prize balls ÷ total number of out balls) is read from the division result register A131218 and used as the base value (step S9813).

After that, a base notification command is generated (step S9814), and the base is notified to the player and the hall employee.

After that, it is determined whether or not the prize ball abnormality notification timer started in step S9807 has timed up (step S9815). Then, when the time is up for the prize ball abnormality notification timer, a prize ball abnormality notification stop command is generated to stop the prize ball abnormality notification (step S9816). In step S9815, the end of the notification is determined by the time of the timer for notifying the prize ball abnormality for a predetermined time, but the end of the notification is determined so as to notify the prize ball abnormality by a predetermined number of launched balls. You may. In addition, the abnormality may be continuously notified until the hall employee confirms it.

FIG. 80 is a flowchart showing another example of timer interrupt processing. The timer interrupt processing shown in FIG. 80 is the same as the timer interrupt processing (FIGS. 23 and 75) described above except for the base calculation processing (steps S93 and S94) and the base display processing (step S95), and thus the same processing will be described. Is omitted.

When the timer interrupt processing is started, the main control MPU 1311 first switches the register by executing the main control program (step S70).

Next, the main control MPU 1311 executes the switch input process (step S74). In the switch input process, the detection signals from the discharge ball sensor 3060 and the launch ball sensor 1020 are read to count the number of out balls.

Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 executes the base calculation process 3 (step S93). In the base calculation process 3, the total number of out balls is updated using the number of out balls counted in step S74, and a parameter for calculating the base value is written in the calculation circuit 13121. Details of the base calculation process 3 will be described later with reference to FIGS. 81 and 84.

Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 executes the timer update process (step S76) and the random number update process 1 (step S78).

Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 executes the prize ball control process (step S80). In the prize ball control process, input information is read from the input information storage area, the number of game balls (prize balls) to be paid out based on the read input information is calculated, and the number is written to the main control built-in RAM 1312. In addition, a prize ball command for paying out game balls is created based on the calculation result of the number of prize balls.

Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 executes the base calculation process 4 (step S94). In the base calculation process 2, the total number of prize balls is updated using the number of prize balls counted in step S80, and the parameters for calculating the base value are written in the calculation circuit 13121. Details of the base calculation process 4 will be described later with reference to FIGS. 82 and 85.

Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 has a frame command reception process (step S82), a fraud detection process (step S84), a special symbol and special electric accessory control process (step S86), and a normal symbol and an ordinary electric accessory. The control process (step S88) is executed.

Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 executes a base display process that reads from the arithmetic circuit 13121 and generates a command for notifying the base (step S95).

Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 executes the output data setting process (step S90) and the peripheral control board command transmission process (step S92). Finally, the main control MPU 1311 sets a predetermined value (18H) in the watchdog timer clear register WCL (step S96). By setting a predetermined value in the watchdog timer clear register WCL, the watchdog timer clear register WCL is set to clear. Finally, the main control MPU 1311 switches (returns) the register bank. When the above processing is completed, the timer interrupt processing is terminated and the process returns to the processing before the interrupt.

FIG. 81 is a flowchart showing an example of the base calculation process 3 (step S93). The base calculation process 3 shown in FIG. 81 is obtained by removing steps S9709 and subsequent steps from the base calculation process 1 shown in FIG. 76.

First, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether the gaming state is in the special prize (step S9701). The same criteria as those described with reference to FIG. 39 can be used as the criteria for determining whether or not the prize is being awarded. Then, if the game state is during the special prize, since it is an out ball that is not related to the calculation of the base value, the base is not calculated and the base calculation process 1 is terminated. On the other hand, if the gaming state is not in the special prize, the total number of out balls detected in the switch input process (step S74) is acquired (step S9702), and the acquired number of out balls is added to the total number of out balls. The number of out balls is updated (step S9705). If the number of out balls cannot be acquired or the number of out balls acquired is 0, the base calculation process 3 may be terminated immediately. By doing so, the load of the main control MPU 1311 can be reduced without unnecessarily calculating the base value.

After that, it is determined whether the total number of out balls is 0 (step S9707). If the total number of out balls is 0, the base value cannot be calculated, so the base calculation process 3 is terminated without calculating the base value. On the other hand, if the total number of out balls is not 0, the total number of out balls is stored in the division input register B131217 of the arithmetic circuit 13121 (step S9708).

FIG. 82 is a flowchart showing an example of the base calculation process 4 (step S94). The base calculation process 4 shown in FIG. 82 is obtained by removing steps S9813 and subsequent steps from the base calculation process 2 shown in FIG. 77.

First, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether the gaming state is in the special prize (step S9801). The same criteria as those described with reference to FIG. 39 can be used as the criteria for determining whether or not the prize is being awarded. Then, if the game state is during the special prize, the prize ball is not related to the calculation of the base value, so the base is not calculated and the base calculation process 2 is terminated. On the other hand, if the gaming state is not during the special prize, the number of prize balls calculated in the prize ball control process (step S80) is acquired (step S9802), and the acquired number of prize balls is added to the total number of prize balls. The total number of prize balls is updated (step S9809). If the number of prize balls cannot be obtained or the number of prize balls obtained is 0, the base calculation process 1 may be terminated immediately. By doing so, the load of the main control MPU 1311 can be reduced without unnecessarily calculating the base value.

After that, it is determined whether the total number of out balls is 0 (step S9810). If the total number of out balls is 0, the base value cannot be calculated. Therefore, the base value is not calculated and the base calculation process 2 is terminated. On the other hand, if the total number of out balls is not 0, a value obtained by multiplying the total number of prize balls by a predetermined number (for example, 100) is stored in the division input register A131216 of the arithmetic circuit 13121 (step S9812).

In step S9708 of FIG. 81, the total number of out balls is not stored in the division input register B131217, and in step S9812 of FIG. 82, the value obtained by multiplying the total number of prize balls by a predetermined number (for example, 100) is divided input register A131216. The total number of out balls may be stored in the division input register B131217.

FIG. 83 is a flowchart showing an example of the base display process (step S95).

The main control MPU 1311 reads the calculation result (total number of prize balls ÷ total number of out balls) from the division result register A131218 and uses it as the base value (step S8901). After that, a base notification command is generated (step S8902), and the base is notified to the player and the hall employee.

Since the base calculation process shown in FIGS. 81 and 82 and the base display process shown in FIG. 83 are executed for each timer interrupt process, the base value can be calculated and displayed without delay. Note that the base calculation process 1 and the base calculation process 2 may not be executed for each timer interrupt process, but may be executed for each timer interrupt process for a predetermined time (for example, 1 minute).

Next, another example of the base calculation process (steps S97 and S98) will be described with reference to FIGS. 84 to 85. In the base calculation process shown in FIGS. 84 and 85, the base value is calculated for each predetermined number of out balls and for each predetermined number of prize balls.

FIG. 84 is a flowchart showing another example of the base calculation process 3 (step S93). The base calculation process 3 shown in FIG. 84 is obtained by removing steps S9709 and subsequent steps from the base calculation process 1 shown in FIG. 78.

First, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether the gaming state is in the special prize (step S9701). The same criteria as those described with reference to FIG. 39 can be used as the criteria for determining whether or not the prize is being awarded. Then, if the game state is during the special prize, since it is an out ball that is not related to the calculation of the base value, the base is not calculated and the base calculation process 1 is terminated. On the other hand, if the gaming state is not in the special prize, the number of out balls detected in the switch input process (step S74) is acquired (step S9702), and the acquired number of out balls is added to the out ball number buffer. The number of balls buffer is updated (step S9703). If the number of out balls cannot be acquired or the number of out balls acquired is 0, the base calculation process 3 may be terminated immediately. By doing so, the load of the main control MPU 1311 can be reduced without unnecessarily calculating the base value.

After that, it is determined whether the number of out balls stored in the out ball number buffer is equal to or higher than a predetermined threshold Th2 (step S9704). Various methods can be used to determine whether the number of out balls is equal to or higher than a predetermined threshold Th2. For example, the out-ball number buffer value and the threshold Th2 may be compared, or the value of a predetermined bit in the out-ball number storage area may be used for determination (specifically, the out-ball number storage area is 8 bits. If it is configured and the most significant bit is 1, it can be determined that the number of out balls is 128 or more).

Then, if the out-ball number buffer value is smaller than the threshold value Th2, it is not the timing to calculate the base value, so the base calculation process 1 is terminated.

On the other hand, if the out-ball number buffer value is the threshold Th2 or more, the total out-ball number buffer value is updated so as to add the out-ball number buffer value to the total out-ball number (step S9705), and the out-ball number buffer is set to 0. Set (step S9706).

After that, it is determined whether the total number of out balls is 0 (step S9707). If the total number of out balls is 0, the base value cannot be calculated, so the base calculation process 1 is terminated without calculating the base value. On the other hand, if the total number of out balls is not 0, the total number of out balls is stored in the division input register B131217 of the arithmetic circuit 13121 (step S9708).

FIG. 85 is a flowchart showing another example of the base calculation process 4 (step S94). The base calculation process 4 shown in FIG. 85 is obtained by removing steps S9813 and subsequent steps from the base calculation process 2 shown in FIG. 79.

First, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether the gaming state is in the special prize (step S9801). The same criteria as those described with reference to FIG. 39 can be used as the criteria for determining whether or not the prize is being awarded. Then, if the game state is during the special prize, the prize ball is not related to the calculation of the base value, so the base is not calculated and the base calculation process 2 is terminated. On the other hand, if the gaming state is not during the special prize, the number of prize balls calculated in the prize ball control process (step S80) is acquired (step S9802), and there are prize balls, that is, the acquired number of prize balls is 1 or more. (Step S9803). As a result, if there are no prize balls, the process proceeds to step S9808 without updating the number of prize balls. On the other hand, if there are prize balls, it is determined whether the number of prize balls is abnormal (step S9805), and if there is no abnormality in the number of prize balls, the acquired number of prize balls is added to the prize ball number buffer. The number of balls buffer is updated (step S9804).

On the other hand, if the number of prize balls is abnormal, an abnormality notification command is generated (step S9806) to notify the player and the hall employee that the prize balls are abnormal. There are various methods for notifying the abnormality, and one of the methods described below or a combination of two or more may be used. Specifically, various methods described in step S816 of FIG. 46 can be adopted.

An abnormality in the number of prize balls means that, for example, a large number of prize balls (for example, 10 or more prizes per minute considering the number of prize balls in the general prize opening and the starting prize opening) are obtained at a predetermined time other than during the special prize. For example, if it is. It should be noted that the degree of abnormality may be determined in a plurality of stages according to the degree of deviation from the reference value of the number of prize balls by providing a permissible range in a plurality of stages.

Then, the timer for notifying the prize ball abnormality is reset (step S9807), and the counting of the prize ball abnormality notification time is started.

Then, it is determined whether the number of prize balls stored in the prize ball number buffer is equal to or higher than a predetermined threshold value Th1 (step S9808). Various methods can be used to determine whether the prize ball number buffer value is equal to or higher than a predetermined threshold value Th1. For example, the prize ball number buffer value and the threshold Th1 may be compared, or the value of a predetermined bit in the prize ball number storage area may be used for determination (specifically, the prize ball number storage area is 8 bits. If it is configured and the most significant bit is 1, it can be determined that the number of out balls is 128 or more).

Then, if the prize ball number buffer value is smaller than the threshold value Th1, it is not the timing to calculate the base value, so the base calculation process 2 is terminated without calculating the base.

On the other hand, if the prize ball number buffer value is the threshold Th1 or more, the total prize ball number is updated so as to add the prize ball number buffer value to the total prize ball number (step S9809), and the prize ball number buffer is set to 0. Set (step S9810).

Each time the prize ball number is added to the prize ball number buffer, the prize ball number may be output from the external terminal plate 784 to the hall computer installed in the amusement park, and the prize ball number described later becomes a predetermined threshold Th1 or more. In some cases, the threshold Th1 may be output from the external terminal board 784 to the hall computer. Here, the prize ball number buffer is an area provided in the main control built-in RAM 1312 for calculating the base value, and the number of prize balls paid out by the game machine 1 is temporarily stored.

After that, it is determined whether the total number of out balls is 0 (step S9811). If the total number of out balls is 0, the base value cannot be calculated. Therefore, the base value is not calculated and the base calculation process 2 is terminated. On the other hand, if the total number of out balls is not 0, a value obtained by multiplying the total number of prize balls by a predetermined number (for example, 100) is stored in the division input register A131216 of the arithmetic circuit 13121 (step S9812).

In step S9708 of FIG. 84, the total number of out balls is not stored in the division input register B131217, and in step S9812 of FIG. 85, the value obtained by multiplying the total number of prize balls by a predetermined number (for example, 100) is the division input register A131216. The total number of out balls may be stored in the division input register B131217.

FIG. 86 is a flowchart showing another example of the base display process (step S95).

The main control MPU 1311 reads the calculation result (total number of prize balls ÷ total number of out balls) from the division result register A131218 and uses it as the base value (step S8901). After that, a base notification command is generated (step S8902), and the base is notified to the player and the hall employee.

After that, it is determined whether or not the prize ball abnormality notification timer started in step S9807 of the base calculation process 4 has timed up (step S8903). Then, when the time is up for the prize ball abnormality notification timer, a prize ball abnormality notification stop command is generated to stop the prize ball abnormality notification (step S8904). In step S8903, the end of the notification is determined by the time of the timer for notifying the prize ball abnormality for a predetermined time, but the end of the notification is determined so as to notify the prize ball abnormality by a predetermined number of shot balls. May be good. In addition, the abnormality may be continuously notified until the hall employee confirms it.

As shown in FIGS. 75 and 80, in the timer interrupt processing of this embodiment, the arithmetic circuit is used before the timer interrupt processing ends (before the timer interrupt cycle elapses and the next timer interrupt processing starts). The input values (divisors and divisors) to the arithmetic circuit 13121 are written at the timing when the division result can be read from the 13121. Specifically, the write timing of the input value (divisor, divisor) to the arithmetic circuit 13121 is the first half of the timer interrupt process, before the random number update process (step S78), or a special symbol or a normal symbol. It is better before the control process (steps S86, S88).

Further, it may be determined whether or not the process of calculating the base value is executed based on the number of game media (prize balls) given to the player. That is, from the viewpoint of the number of prize balls determined for each winning opening, it may be switched whether to use the number of prize balls or the number of out balls in the calculation of the base value. For example, the winning ball of the winning opening that gives the maximum winning ball to one winning ball does not have to be used in the calculation of the base value.

Specifically, the number of prize game media (prize balls paid out for one prize ball) to be given when the game medium defined for each prize opening provided in the game area wins is one, three. In the case of three types of five and five, the maximum number of five prize balls and the corresponding number of out balls need not be used in the calculation of the base value. This is because when a prize with a large number of prize balls is used to calculate the base value, the change in the calculated base value becomes large, and the lower digits of the calculated base value are rounded by processing means (rounding, rounding up, rounding down, etc.). Even if it is displayed, the displayed value may change frequently. In such a case, it becomes difficult to determine whether the pachinko machine is exhibiting a predetermined performance (for example, whether the set ball ejection rate is met) by the hole.

Further, it is not necessary to use the minimum number of prize balls and the corresponding number of out balls in the calculation of the base value. This is because the change in the base value due to a prize with a small number of prize balls is small, so even if the one prize ball is not used in the calculation of the base value, the lower digit of the base value calculated by the processing means is rounded. When displayed (rounded, rounded up, rounded down, etc.), the displayed base value may not change. Therefore, processing that does not contribute to the change in the display may be omitted.

Further, although the case where the number of prize balls is the maximum and the case where the number of prize balls is the minimum is described, it is not necessary to use the number of prize balls of the intermediate value between the maximum and the minimum in the calculation of the base value. In this case, since the maximum and minimum number of prize balls are used to calculate the base value, the number of prize balls and the number of out balls that represent the operation of the entire pachinko machine are shown by averaging the maximum and minimum, which is appropriate. The base value can be shown.

Although the pattern of the number of prize balls of three types has been described, the pattern of the number of prize balls of other types such as five types and seven types is not limited to the three types.

Furthermore, if the winning number of prize balls of a specific type (1 of the minimum value mentioned above, 3 of the intermediate value, 5 of the maximum value, etc.) is not used in the calculation of the base value, the winning will be awarded. All winnings in the gaming state when detected need not be used to calculate the base value. For example, if the winning of the winning opening that grants five prize balls is not used in the calculation of the base value, in the gaming state in which the winning of the winning opening is detected, the winning is achieved until the end of the gaming state. Do not use mouth or other prizes to calculate the base value. In addition, even after the start of the game state, the winning openings and other winning openings are not retroactively used in the calculation of the base value.

In addition, the winning when the gaming state when the winning is detected does not have to be used for the calculation of the base value, and the gaming state when the winning is detected shifts to another gaming state. It is not necessary to use the winning prizes up to to calculate the base value. This is because the pachinko machine is normal (for example, is it according to the set ball output rate) by not using the number of prize balls and the number of out balls in the game state in which the calculated base value changes greatly in the calculation of the base value? This is to eliminate the possibility of delaying the judgment of.

When the number of prize balls changes depending on the game state, the prize balls that are the maximum (or the minimum or the middle) for one prize ball need not be used in the calculation of the base value.

Next, a specific process will be described in which the number of prize balls and the number of out balls are not used in the calculation of the base value depending on the number of game media (prize balls) described above.

In the switch input process (step S74), when the detection signal from each winning opening sensor is input to the main control board 1310, it may be determined whether the main control MPU 1311 uses the winning in the calculation of the base value. .. Then, for prizes that are determined not to be used in the calculation of the base value, the total number of prize balls and the total number of out balls for calculating the base value may not be updated, or the calculation process of the base value may not be executed. To do. More specifically, for example, in the timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 75, in the base calculation process 1 (step S97), the number of winning balls to be excluded from the calculation of the base value is set to 0 and excluded from the number of out balls, and the base is calculated. In process 2 (step S98), the number of prize balls to be excluded from the calculation of the base value may be set to 0 and not added to the total number of prize balls. Further, when all the detected prizes are not used for the calculation of the base value, it is not necessary to execute the base calculation process 1 (step S97) and the base calculation process 2 (step S98) of FIG. 75.

Further, in the timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 80, in the base calculation process 3 (step S93), the number of winning balls to be excluded from the calculation of the base value is set to 0 and excluded from the number of out balls, and the base calculation process 4 (step S94). In, the number of prize balls to be excluded from the calculation of the base value should be set to 0 and not added to the total number of prize balls. Further, when all the detected prizes are not used for the calculation of the base value, the base calculation process 3 (step S93), the base calculation process 4 (step S94), and the base display process (step S95) of FIG. 80 are not executed. You may.

As a method of excluding the number of winning balls determined not to be used in the calculation of the base value from the number of out balls, the same method as the correction of out balls due to abnormal winning described with reference to FIGS. 73 and 74 may be adopted.

In this case, since it is determined from the number of winning balls whether the detected prize is used for calculating the base value, the base calculation process 1 (step S97), the base calculation process 2 (step S98), and the base calculation process 3 ( In step S93) and base calculation process 4 (step S94), it is not necessary to determine whether or not the prize is being awarded.

In this way, by excluding the number of out balls and the number of winning balls required for a predetermined winning from the calculation of the base value, the processing is executed without skipping, so that it is easy to check whether the processing is correctly executed especially in the development stage. Can be confirmed. Further, by not updating the base value without executing the process of calculating the base value, the process of the main control MPU 1311 is reduced, and other processes (lottery process, process of determining the fluctuation pattern, etc.) are accurately executed. it can.

That is, even if the maximum prize is given to the player among multiple prizes having different degrees of advantage, it is not used in the calculation of the base value, and the base value is displayed unchanged by the grant of the prize. The prize. Further, the calculated base value is displayed unchanged at least until the game state in which the maximum prize is given is completed.

[9-12. Another configuration of the game machine that displays the base]
FIG. 87 is a block diagram schematically showing a control configuration of the pachinko machine of this embodiment.

In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, unlike the control configuration of the pachinko machine shown in FIG. 17, a board-side discharge ball sensor 3060A is provided on the game board 5 as a discharge ball sensor 3060, and a frame-side discharge ball sensor 3060B is a main body frame. It is provided in 4. Either one of the panel-side discharge ball sensor 3060A and the frame-side discharge ball sensor 3060B may be provided, or both may be provided.

As described above, the board-side discharge ball sensor 3060A is an out-port passing ball sensor 1021 that detects a game ball passing through the out-port 1111 provided in the lower part of the game area 5a (see FIG. 53). The output signal of the panel-side discharge ball sensor 3060A is input to the main control board 1310 and input to the main control MPU 1311 as described later with reference to FIG. 92. In this case, the number of game balls detected by the out-port passing ball sensor 1021 and the number of game balls detected by the start port sensors 2104 and 2551, and the number of game balls detected by various winning port sensors 3015, 2114, 2554, and 2557. The total of the numbers is the number of out balls.

As described above, the frame-side discharge ball sensor 3060B is provided at the discharge port for discharging the game ball discharged from the game area 5a to the outside of the pachinko machine 1 (see FIG. 4). The output signal of the frame-side discharge ball sensor 3060B is input to the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 951 and the connector connecting the main body frame 4 and the game board 5.

When both the board-side discharge ball sensor 3060A and the frame-side discharge ball sensor 3060B are provided, the count result of the board-side discharge ball sensor 3060A and the count result of the frame-side discharge ball sensor 3060B are compared, and two count results are obtained. An error may be notified when a difference of more than a predetermined value occurs. Further, an error may be notified when a difference of a predetermined time or more occurs between the two counting results within a predetermined time.

In the pachinko machine of this embodiment, the display switch 1318 is not an indispensable configuration, and the display contents (provisional section display and fixed section display) of the base display 1317 can be switched at predetermined time intervals as described later. (See FIG. 99), the base value may be displayed or the display content may be switched by operating the display switch 1318.

The configuration other than the above is the same as the control configuration of the pachinko machine shown in FIG.

88 and 89 are views showing the arrangement of the frame-side discharge ball sensor 3060B.

FIG. 88 shows an example of a mechanism in which out balls are aligned in one row in a ball flow path 960 provided in the main body frame 4 on the back surface side of the game board, and one frame side discharge ball sensor 3060B counts out balls. .. The game ball that rolls in the game area 5a flows into the main body frame 4 on the back side of the game board 5 via the out opening 1111, the general winning opening 2001, the large winning opening 2005, and 2006. The main body frame 4 is provided with a ball flow path 960 that allows the discharged game balls to flow down to the right side of the front view and align them in one row. The frame-side ejection ball sensor 3060B counts the game balls arranged in one row.

FIG. 89 shows an example of a mechanism in which out balls arranged in a ball flow path 960 provided on the back surface of the game board are allowed to flow down by two rows and counted by a plurality of discharge ball sensors 3060. The game ball that rolls in the game area 5a flows into the main body frame 4 on the back side of the game board 5 via the out opening 1111, the general winning opening 2001, the starting winning opening 2002, 2004, and the large winning opening 2005, 2006. .. The main body frame 4 is provided with a ball flow path 960 in which the discharged game balls flow down from the left and right to the vicinity of the center and are aligned in two rows. Each of the two frame-side ejection ball sensors 3060B counts the game balls arranged in each row.

Although the frame-side discharge ball sensor 3060B is provided at the position shown in FIGS. 53, 88, and 89, it may be unitized together with the ball flow path 960 and detachably configured from the main body frame 4. Further, the frame-side discharge ball sensor 3060B may be configured to be detachable from the main body frame 4.

FIG. 90 is a diagram showing an example of connection between the discharge ball sensor and the main control board.

The output line of the board-side discharge ball sensor 3060A is connected to the connector 13101 provided on the main control board 1310 via the relay board, and the output signal of the board-side discharge ball sensor 3060A is input to the main control MPU 1311. The output line of the frame-side discharge ball sensor 3060B is connected to the connector 13102 provided on the main control board 1310, and the output signal of the frame-side discharge ball sensor 3060B is input to the main control MPU 1311.

The connector 13101 to which the output line of the panel side discharge ball sensor 3060A is connected is preferably provided on the upper side of the main control board 1310, and the connector 13102 to which the output line of the frame side discharge ball sensor 3060B is connected is the main control board 1310. It should be provided on the lower side.

The connector 13101 to which the output line of the board-side discharge ball sensor 3060A is connected and the connector 13102 to which the output line of the frame-side discharge ball sensor 3060B are connected are provided separately, but as shown by the broken line, the board-side discharge ball sensor The output line of the 3060A and the output line of the frame-side discharge ball sensor 3060B may be connected to one connector (for example, 13102).

The output line of the panel-side discharge ball sensor 3060A may be connected to the main control board 1310 without passing through the relay board. The output line of the frame-side discharge ball sensor 3060B may be directly connected to the main control board 1310. The output line of the frame-side discharge ball sensor 3060B may be connected to the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 951. The output line of the frame-side discharge ball sensor 3060B may be connected to the main control board 1310 via a relay board (not shown). After connecting the output line of the frame-side discharge ball sensor 3060B to the payout control board 951 or the relay board, it is connected to the main control board 1310 via a connector (for example, a floating connector) that connects the game board 5 and the main body frame 4. You may.

Further, the pachinko machine of this embodiment is provided with a plurality of magnetic detection sensors 1030. The output signal of the magnetic detection sensor 1030 is input to the main control MPU 1311 as described later with reference to FIG. 92.

FIG. 91 is a front view showing an example of the game board 5, and in particular, shows the arrangement of the magnetic detection sensor 1030 provided on the game board 5.

The magnetic detection sensor 1030 is a sensor that detects an illegal magnetism in the game area 5a, and is in the vicinity of a sensor that detects winning in various winning openings 2001, 2002, 2004, 2005, and 2006 (positions of stars in the figure). It is provided in. The detection range of the magnetic detection sensor 1030 is indicated by a broken line on the game board 5, and partially overlaps.

In the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, the magnetic detection sensor 1030 is also provided in the vicinity of the out port 1111. This is to prevent incorrect calculation of the base value. That is, when the player operates the discharge ball sensor 3060 by bringing the magnet close to the out port 1111, the number of out balls is counted more than the actual number and the base value is lowered. Therefore, in the amusement shop, maintenance work of the pachinko machine 1 may be performed so as to return the base value to a predetermined standard value. In a pachinko machine whose maintenance work is performed based on a base value different from the actual one, the number of balls released in the normal state increases, and the player can play in a more advantageous state than usual, and can obtain many balls. A magnetic detector 1030 is provided in the vicinity of the out port 1111 in order to calculate an accurate base value and prevent such an illegal payout of the ball. It is preferable to provide the magnetic detection sensor 1030 in a place other than the vicinity of the out port 1111 where the discharge ball sensor 3060 may malfunction due to magnetism.

As shown in the figure, the magnetic detection sensor 1030 provided near the out port 1111 should have a wider detection range than the other magnetic detection sensors 1030. This is because, as shown in FIG. 89, when the out-balls are detected by the plurality of discharge ball sensors 3060, the magnetism is detected within a sufficient range that can cover the plurality of discharge ball sensors 3060. Further, the magnetic detection range of the magnetic detection sensor 1030 provided near the out port 1111 may include another winning opening (for example, a large winning opening 2005 provided above the out opening 111).

FIG. 92 is a diagram showing the configuration of the main control input circuit 1315. The main control input circuit 1315 includes a discharge ball sensor 3060 and a winning port sensor (general winning port sensor 3015, first starting port sensor 2104, second starting port sensor 2551, first large winning port sensor 2114, second upper large winning port sensor). (Sensor 2554, second lower prize opening sensor 2557, etc.), receives the output signal of the magnetic detection sensor 1030, and inputs it to the main control MPU 1311.

The main control input circuit 1315 includes an interface circuit 1331 and a buffer circuit 1332. The interface circuit 1331 outputs signals input from various sensors after level conversion and shaping (for example, chattering removal). The buffer circuit 1332 outputs the input signal to the data bus at the timing instructed by the main control MPU 1311.

Specifically, the output signal from each sensor is input to any of the terminals A1 to A8 of the interface circuit 1331, and the signal level-converted or shaped by the interface circuit 1331 is output from the Y1 to Y8 terminals and buffered. It is input to any of the terminals A1 to A8 of the circuit 1332. The buffer circuit 1332 outputs the signals input to the Y1 to Y8 terminals to the data bus at the timing when the chip select signals CS4 and CS5 of the main control MPU 1311 are input. As a result, the detection result by each sensor is taken into the main control MPU 1311.

The interface circuit 1331 includes an abnormality detection circuit and a power supply monitoring circuit. The abnormality detection circuit of the interface circuit 1331 monitors the input of the A1 to A8 terminals, and the input signal to each terminal is at a level lower than a predetermined threshold (for example, 4V) or a predetermined threshold (for example, power supply voltage-). When the level becomes higher than 0.1V), a disconnection of the connection wire to the switch or a short circuit of the switch is detected, and when the input of any terminal exceeds the normal range defined by the predetermined threshold value, the abnormal signal E Is output, and a signal at a level at which each sensor is OFF is output from the Y1 to Y8 terminals regardless of the input signals of the A1 to A8 terminals. The power supply monitoring circuit of the interface circuit 1331 monitors the power supply voltage VS, and when the power supply voltage becomes a level lower than a predetermined threshold value (for example, 12V-20%) and detects an abnormality in the power supply, an abnormality signal E is output. At the same time, a signal at a level at which each sensor is OFF is output from the Y1 to Y8 terminals regardless of the input signals of the A1 to A8 terminals. That is, even if an ON level signal is input from the sensor, the output of the interface circuit for the input is OFF level. Therefore, the main control MPU 1311 does not determine that the signal output from the sensor is valid (the output of the sensor is invalid). As a result, the main control MPU 1311 does not need to determine whether or not to execute the processing of the input signal depending on whether or not the power supply of the switch is reduced, the processing load can be reduced, and the output signals of Y1 to Y8 can be output. Regardless of the state of the input signals A1 to 8, each sensor can output a signal at a level of OFF.

As will be described later, when the main control MPU 1311 detects an abnormal signal, it does not calculate the base value (see FIG. 105). Signals from sensors used to calculate the base value (number of ejected balls, number of prize balls) and signals from sensors not used to calculate the base value (gate sensor 2547, etc.) are input to the interface circuit 1331. .. The interface circuit 1331 outputs an abnormal signal when any of the input signals becomes abnormal. Therefore, even if an abnormality is detected in the sensor that is not related to the base calculation, the base calculation is not executed and the display content of the base display 1317 is maintained and does not change.

That is, the main control input circuit 1315 monitors the signal from the sensor used for calculating the base value and the signal from the sensor not used for calculating the base value, and when any of the signals becomes abnormal, Output an abnormal signal to stop the base calculation.

93, 94, and 95 are diagrams showing a mounting example of the main control board 1310. FIG. 93 (A) shows an example in which the function display unit 1400 and the base display 1317 are connected to different driver circuits 1334, and FIG. 93 (B) shows an example in which the function display unit 1400 and the base display 1317 are one. An example of being connected to the driver circuit 1334 is shown. FIG. 94 shows the arrangement of the main control MPU 1311, the base display 1317, and the main control board 1310. 95 (A) is a front view of the main control board 1310 housed in the main control board box 1320, FIG. 95 (B) is a bottom view, and FIG. 95 (C) is a right side view.

As shown in FIGS. 93 (A) and 93 (B), the main control I / O port 1314 includes a latch circuit 1333 and a driver circuit 1334.

In the example shown in FIG. 93A, the display data of the function display unit 1400 and the display data of the base display 1317 are output from the main control MPU 1311 and taken into different latch circuits 1333. Then, display data is output from the different driver circuits 1334 to the function display unit 1400 and the base display 1317.

In the example shown in FIG. 93 (B), the display data of the function display unit 1400 and the display data of the base display 1317 are output from the main control MPU 1311 and incorporated into one latch circuit 1333. Then, the display data is output from one driver circuit 1334 to the function display unit 1400 and the base display 1317.

In the examples shown in FIGS. 93A and 93B, a reset signal from the reset circuit 1335 and a clock signal from the clock oscillator 1336 are input to the main control MPU 1311. It is preferable that the signal line from which the display data of the function display unit 1400 and the base display 1317 is output from the main control MPU 1311 does not intersect with the signal line of the reset signal or the clock signal.

The connector 13101 is a connector to which the output line of the panel-side discharge ball sensor 3060A is connected, and may be provided on the upper side of the main control board 1310. Not only the output line from the panel side discharge ball sensor 3060A but also the output lines from other winning opening sensors 3015, 2104 and the like and the magnetic detection sensor 1030 are connected to the connector 13101. The connector 13102 is a connector to which the output line of the frame-side discharge ball sensor 3060B is connected, and may be provided under the main control board 1310. The signal from the discharge ball sensor 3060 input to the connectors 13101 and 13102 is input to the main control MPU 1311 via the interface circuit 1331 and the buffer circuit 1332.

FIG. 94 is a diagram showing the arrangement of the components arranged between the main control MPU 1311 and the base display 1317 on the main control board 1310. FIG. 94 is a view showing the printed circuit board constituting the main control board 1310 from the back surface side. The solid line is the pattern on the back surface side, the broken line is the pattern on the component side, and the dotted line is the component mounted on the component surface of the printed circuit board. Is shown. The illustration of the ground pattern and the power supply pattern is omitted.

The data lines (D1 to D8) output from the main control MPU 1311 are input to the latch 2 (1333), and the segment on the cathode side of each digit of the 7-segment LED of the base display 1317 via the driver 2 (1334). Connected to the terminal.

Further, a part of the data lines (D1 to D4) output from the main control MPU 1311 is input to the latch 1 (1333), and each digit of the 7-segment LED of the base display 1317 via the driver 1 (1334). It is connected to the common terminal on the anode side of.

A chip select signal for controlling the operation timing of the latch circuit 1333 is output from the main control MPU 1311. Specifically, the latch circuit 2 (1333) is the timing at which the chip select signal CS2 of the main control MPU 1311 is input. Then, the data for controlling the blinking of each segment is taken in from the data lines (D1 to D8). Further, the latch circuit 1 (1333) takes in data for controlling the blinking of each digit from the data lines (D1 to D4) at the timing when the chip select signal CS3 of the main control MPU 1311 is input.

A reset signal from the reset circuit 1335 and a clock signal from the clock oscillator 1336 are input to the main control MPU 1311. Further, the reset signal is input from the reset circuit 1335 to each latch circuit 1333, and the latch circuit 1333 clears the latched data by the reset signal.

The data lines (D1 to D8) between the main control MPU 1311 and the base display 1317 are arranged so as not to intersect with the signal lines of the reset signal and the clock signal. Similarly, although not shown, the data lines (D1 to D8) between the main control MPU 1311 and the function display unit 1400 are arranged so as not to intersect with the signal lines of the reset signal and the clock signal.

This is because in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the base display 1317 is controlled by dynamic lighting, so that a pulse signal is transmitted in the data line between the main control MPU 1311 and the base display 1317, and the main control MPU 1311 and The level changes frequently on the data line to and from the base indicator 1317. In particular, a large current required to drive the LED element flows between the driver circuit 1334 and the base display 1317. Therefore, the data line between the main control MPU 1311 and the base display 1317 (particularly between the driver circuit 1334 and the base display 1317) causes noise. Then, when the data line between the main control MPU 1311 and the base display 1317 intersects with the signal line of the reset signal or the clock signal, noise is placed on the signal line of the reset signal or the clock signal, causing the pachinko machine 1 to malfunction. there's a possibility that. The intersection of the signal lines can also occur at the intersection of the wiring patterns on the front surface and the back surface of the printed circuit board, or the intersection of the wiring patterns of the inner layer and the front surface layer (front surface, back surface).

Specifically, by inputting a reset signal to the main control MPU 1311 at a timing that cannot occur originally, the main control MPU 1311 may be reset during the game, the game may be stopped, or the game state may be erased. .. If the game state is erased at a timing that cannot occur originally, the normal power failure process is not executed and the game is reset. Therefore, the data stored in the RAM 1312 is cleared, the jackpot ends, or the variable display game is played. It ends in the middle, or the hold of the special symbol variation display game or the normal symbol variation display game is deleted.

The main control board box 1320 is partially low in height and high in other parts depending on the height of the parts attached to the main control board 1310 and the interference with other members when assembled. It has become. For example, as shown in FIG. 95, since the main control MPU 1311 has a high height, the height of the main control board box 1320 is high at the place where the main control MPU 1311 is mounted, and the place where the main control MPU 1311 is mounted. In the area on the left side of the main control board box 1320, the height of the main control board box 1320 is high, and components such as a relatively tall electrolytic capacitor are mounted. On the other hand, the height of the main control board box 1320 is low in the area on the right side of the place where the main control MPU 1311 is mounted, and parts such as a short IC are mounted (tall parts cannot be arranged). The height of the main control board box 1320 is high, and the area where a high component can be mounted is indicated by hatching. Further, in the area where the connectors 13101 and 13102 are attached, the main control board box 1320 is formed at a height equal to or less than the surface on which the mating connector is inserted / removed (preferably the same height as the board surface). It is advisable not to hinder the insertion and removal of the cable (connector) connected to the board of.

In this way, by partially changing the height of the main control board box 1320 according to the height of the parts mounted on the board, it is possible to suppress the goto action of attaching an illegal part (circuit) on the main control board. it can.

In FIG. 95, the base display 1317 is arranged in the upper right part of the main control board 1310, but even if the main body frame 4 is opened by a predetermined angle for the convenience of maintenance, the display content is based at a position where it is difficult for the player to see. The display 1317 may be arranged. For example, if the player can visually recognize the display content of the base display 1317 when the main body frame 4 is opened by a predetermined angle for maintenance during business hours (to confirm the presence or absence of a game ball in the replenishment tank), the player In many cases, the player does not correctly understand how to read the display of the base display 1317. Therefore, the player may be asked to explain the display contents of the base display 1317 in order to prevent such complexity. In addition, it is preferable to arrange the base display 1317 at a position where it is difficult for the player to visually recognize the displayed contents. Further, by arranging the base display 1317 in this way, it is possible to suppress inquiries from the player. That is, the base display 1317 displays the base value for the operation of 52,000 out balls at the maximum, but since it is different from the base value in the short-time game by the player, a complaint about the ball output rate may occur. There is. By arranging the base display 1317 in this way, complaints from the player can be suppressed. The above is the same for the above-mentioned accessory ratio indicator 1317, and it is preferable to arrange the accessory ratio indicator 1317 at a position where it is difficult for the player to visually recognize the displayed contents.

As shown in the figure, since the base display (7-segment LED) 1317 has a low height, it is mounted in a region where the height of the main control board box 1320 is low.

FIG. 96 is a diagram showing the configuration of the main control I / O port 1314, and as shown in FIG. 93 (A), an example in which the function display unit 1400 and the base display 1317 are connected to different driver circuits 1334. It is a circuit diagram. In this embodiment, an example in which the function display unit 1400 and the base display 1317 are composed of a light emitting diode (LED) will be described, but the function display unit 1400 and the base display 1317 may be composed of a lamp (bulb) or another light emitting element. The main control I / O port 1314 is arranged between the main control MPU 1311 and the base display 1317 and the function display unit 1400, and outputs the display data output from the main control MPU 1311 to the base display 1317 and the function display unit 1400. To do.

As mentioned above, the main control I / O port 1314 includes a latch circuit 1333 and a driver circuit 1334.

The latch circuit 1333 takes in the input data at the timing of the clock signal, holds it until the next clock signal or clear signal is input, and outputs the data. The driver circuit 1334 operates a switching transistor according to the input signal, and outputs a power supply voltage (+ 12V) input to the VCS terminal of the driver circuit 1334, respectively.

Specifically, the latch circuit 1333 takes in the bus data input to the D1 to D8 terminals at the rising timing of the clock signal CK, and outputs the bus data from the Q1 to Q8 terminals to the driver circuit 1334, respectively. The driver circuit 1334 operates the switching transistor according to the signal input to the I1 to I8 terminals, and changes the voltage of the O1 to O8 terminals, respectively. The outputs O1 to O8 of the driver circuit 1334 are connected to the segment terminals of the 7-segment LEDs constituting the base display 1317 and the 7-segment LEDs of the function display unit 1400.

For example, in order to light the 7-segment LED (7seg1) of the first digit of the base display 1317, the driver 2 (1334) sends the bus data D1 to D8 captured in the latch 2 (1333) at the rising timing of the CS1. Output as segment data (LOW when lit). Further, the drive timing of the 7-segment LED of the base display 1317 is determined by the timing of the voltage applied to the common terminal. That is, at the rising timing of CS0, the driver 1 (1334) outputs the bus data D1 to D4 captured in the latch 1 (1333) as common data (HIGH when driven). Specifically, if the bus data D1 is HIGH at the rising timing of CS0, COM1 output from the driver 1 (1334) becomes HIGH, and the first-digit 7-segment LED (7seg1) of the base display 1317 is set. Driven.

Further, in order to light the 7-segment LED of the function display unit 1400, the bus data D1 to D8 taken into the latch 3 (1333) is transferred by the driver 3 (1334) at the rising timing of the CS2, and the segment data (when lit is LOW). ) Is output. Further, the drive timing of the 7-segment LED of the function display unit 1400 is determined by the timing of the voltage applied to the common terminal (LED-C1). That is, at the rising timing of CS3, the driver 4 (1334) outputs the bus data D1 to D4 taken into the latch 4 (1333) as common data (HIGH when driven). Specifically, if the bus data D1 is HIGH at the rising timing of CS3, the O1 terminal of the driver 4 (1334) becomes HIGH, and the 7-segment LED (LED-C1) of the function display unit 1400 is driven.

In this embodiment, since the 7-segment LED of both the base display 1317 and the function display unit 1400 is an anode common type, a current flows from the driver 1 to the driver 2 in the 7-segment LED. Therefore, the outputs of the drivers 1 and 4 when the segment is lit are VCS (+ 12V), and the outputs of the drivers 2 and 3 are GND (0V).

The latches 1 and 4 (1333) on the common side output the data input from the data bus to the Q1 to Q8 terminals as they are, but the latches 1 and 4 (1333) have a decoder function and the data bus. A signal may be output from any of the terminals Q1 to Q8 according to the binary data obtained from.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 93A and 96, the signal output timing when the function display unit 1400 and the base display 1317 are connected to different driver circuits 1334 will be described.

The segment data sent from the driver 2 (1334) to the base display 1317 and the common data sent from the driver 1 (1334) to the base display 1317 are output in the same timer interrupt processing. Further, the segment data sent from the driver 3 (1334) to the function display unit 1400 and the common data sent from the driver 4 (1334) to the function display unit 1400 are also output in the same timer interrupt processing. That is, since both the common data and the segment data are sent to the base display 1317 and the function display unit 1400 by different signal lines, both the display data to the base display 1317 and the display data to the function display unit 1400 can be displayed. Output in one timer interrupt process.

Then, in the next timer interrupt process, common data for selecting the next digit (LED group) is output, and segment data for controlling the lighting of each LED is output at the same timing as the output of the common data.

The display data on the base display 1317 and the display data on the function display unit 1400 are generated by another process in the timer interrupt process, and are output at different timings in the timer interrupt process. That is, the main control MPU 1311 generates and outputs display data to the base display 1317 by executing the base calculation / display code 13135 outside the game control area. On the other hand, the main control MPU 1311 generates and outputs display data to the function display unit 1400 by executing the game control code 13131 in the game control area. These data will be generated by another program (code) and output at different timings.

Next, a modified example of the signal output timing when the function display unit 1400 and the base display 1317 are connected to different driver circuits 1334 will be described.

The segment data sent from the driver 2 (1334) to the base display 1317 and the common data sent from the driver 1 (1334) to the base display 1317 are output in the same timer interrupt processing. Similarly, the segment data sent from the driver 3 (1334) to the function display unit 1400 and the common data sent from the driver 4 (1334) to the function display unit 1400 are output in the same timer interrupt processing. The timer interrupt process for outputting the data to be sent to the base display 1317 may be executed at a timing different from the timer interrupt process for outputting the data to be sent to the function display unit 1400, and may be subsequently executed.

The process of outputting signals to the function display unit 1400 and the base display 1317 is executed according to the programs (game control code 13131, base calculation / display code 13135) stored in different areas of the RAM 1312, but they are the same. In order to prevent the common signal from being transmitted at the timing, it is preferable to use the control data common to the two codes and control so that the transmission timing of the common signal does not overlap. For example, a common counter that is commonly used by the game control code 13131 and the base calculation / display code 13135 is provided. For example, when the common counter is 0 to 3, a common signal is output to the function display unit 1400, and the common counter is used. Is controlled to output a common signal to the base display 1317 when is 4 to 7.

The process of outputting the common signal and the process of outputting the segment signal may be separated or configured by one subroutine. The game control code 13131 for executing the process of outputting the data to be sent to the function display unit 1400 and the base calculation / display code 13135 for executing the process of outputting the data to be sent to the base display 1317 are each. It is preferable to call the subroutine at the timing specified by the program and output a signal to the function display unit 1400 or the base display 1317. In this case, the output of the data sent to the function display unit 1400 and the output of the data sent to the base display 1317 are not performed in the same timer interrupt process. Although the game control code 13131 and the base calculation / display code 13135 are executed within one timer interrupt process, the subroutine is called by different timer interrupt processes.

As shown in FIGS. 93 (A) and 96, when the function display unit 1400 and the base display 1317 are connected to different driver circuits 1334, a display (function display unit 1400) provided outside the main control board 1310 is provided. Even if noise is mixed in, the influence on the circuit of the display (base display 1317) inside the main control board 1310 and the circuit of the main control board 1310 can be suppressed.

FIG. 97 is a diagram showing the configuration of the main control I / O port 1314, and as shown in FIG. 93 (B), the function display unit 1400 and the base display 1317 are connected to a common driver circuit 1334 on the common side. It is a circuit diagram of the example. The main control I / O port 1314 is arranged between the main control MPU 1311 and the base display 1317 and the function display unit 1400, and outputs the display data output from the main control MPU 1311 to the base display 1317 and the function display unit 1400. To do.

As mentioned above, the main control I / O port 1314 includes a latch circuit 1333 and a driver circuit 1334. Since the configuration of the circuit included in the main control I / O port 1314 is the same as the circuit configuration described above, the difference from the configuration example shown in FIG. 96 will be described below.

In the example shown in FIG. 97, the operation for lighting the 7-segment LED of the base display 1317 is the same as the example shown in FIG. 96, but the common signal of the function display unit 1400 is the same as that of the base display 1317. It is common.

In order to light the 7-segment LED of the function display unit 1400, the bus data D1 to D8 captured in the latch 3 (1333) is used as segment data (LOW when lit) by the driver 3 (1334) at the rising timing of CS2. Output. Further, the drive timing of the 7-segment LED of the function display unit 1400 is determined by the timing of the voltage applied to the common terminal (LED-C1). That is, at the rising timing of CS0, the driver 1 (1334) outputs the bus data D1 to D4 captured in the latch 1 (1333) as common data (HIGH when driven).

In this way, the circuit scale can be reduced by sharing the driver circuit between the base display 1317 and the function display unit 1400. By reducing the number of parts, the failure rate can be reduced, the size of the board can be reduced, and the board unit (including the main control board 1310 and the main control board box 1320) can be easily miniaturized. In the pachinko machine, the main control board 1310 does not use an inner layer pattern (printed circuit board having three or more layers), but uses a two-layer board having a pattern only on the front surface and the back surface. Therefore, even if the components can be physically arranged on the main control board 1310 composed of the two-layer board, the area for routing the wiring pattern cannot be secured, and the board must be larger than the multi-layer board having three or more layers. Therefore, it is important to reduce the number of parts to reduce the size.

FIG. 98 is a timing diagram of the configuration example of the main control I / O port 1314 shown in FIG. 97. In FIG. 98, the dotted line perpendicular to the time axis indicates the timer interrupt processing delimiter (timer interrupt processing start timing).

In the timer interrupt process, the main control MPU 1311 outputs digit selection data to the data bus at the timing of outputting CS0. Latch 1 (1333) selected by CS0 takes in D1 to D4 from the data bus at the rising timing of CS0, and driver 1 (1334) receives common data (during drive) corresponding to the digits indicated by D1 to D4. Outputs HIGH).

Next, the main control MPU 1311 outputs the data of the segment lit by the function display unit 1400 to the data bus at the timing of outputting CS2. The latch 3 (1333) selected by CS2 takes in D1 to D8 from the data bus at the rising timing of CS2, and the driver 3 (1334) fetches the segment data (LOW when lit) specified by D1 to D8. Output and turn on the 7-segment LED of the function display unit 1400.

After that, the main control MPU 1311 outputs the data of the segment lit by the base display 1317 to the data bus at the timing of outputting the CS1. The latch 2 (1333) selected by the CS1 takes in D1 to D8 from the data bus at the rising timing of the CS1, and the driver 2 (1334) fetches the segment data (LOW when lit) specified by the D1 to D8. Output and turn on the 7-segment LED of the base display 1317.

Finally, the main control MPU 1311 sets all the data on the data bus to 0 at the timing of outputting CS0, CS1 and CS2. As a result, the digit selection data set in the latch 1 (1333) and the display data set in the latches 2, 3 (1333) are erased, and the 7-segment LED is turned off.

In the next timer interrupt process, the main control MPU 1311 outputs the next digit selection data to the data bus at the timing of outputting CS0, repeats the above-mentioned process, and outputs the digit selection data and the display data. In this way, the common driver circuit is shared between the base display 1317 and the function display unit 1400, the segment data is time-divided and output, and the common common data is used to function with the base display 1317. The LED element with the display unit 1400 can be turned on.

As shown in FIGS. 93B and 97, since the function display unit 1400 and the base display 1317 are connected to the common driver circuit 1334, the circuit scale of the main control board 1310 can be reduced, and high-density mounting (for example, high-density mounting) can be performed. , It is possible to easily mount the components on the main control board 1310, which cannot be used for the adoption of the multilayer board or the close arrangement of the components.

Further, in order to control both the function display unit 1400 and the base display 1317 by common common data in one timer interrupt process, the function display unit 1400 and the base display are output during the period when the common data is output. The segment data is output at a timing different from that of 1317. Therefore, while both the function display unit 1400 and the base display 1317 are controlled by a common common data line, both the function display unit 1400 and the base display 1317 can be displayed and controlled within one timer interrupt process. ..

In the case shown in FIG. 98, the display data of the function display unit 1400 is output first, and the display data of the base display 1317 is output later. Each display data is latched at the rising timing of the chip select (CS2, CS1) and erased at the rising timing of the chip select (CS0) corresponding to the erased data. Therefore, as shown in the figure, if the display data of the function display unit 1400 is output first and the display data of the base display unit 1317 is output later, the display time of the function display unit 1400 is the display time of the base display unit 1317. Become longer. This prolongs the lighting time of the LED of the function display unit 1400 arranged on the surface side of the pachinko machine 1 in one cycle and raises the brightness, thereby reducing the visibility due to being directly illuminated by the lighting of the hall. This is to prevent it. Further, since the base display 1317 is arranged on the back side which is darker than the front side of the pachinko machine 1, even if the LED is made to emit light with low brightness, the influence on the visibility of the base display 1317 is small. That is, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the first LED and the second LED controlled by the main control MPU 1311 are provided, and the emission brightness of the first LED is higher than the emission brightness of the second LED.

Contrary to the above, the display data of the base display unit 1317 is output first, the display data of the function display unit 1400 is output later, and the display time of the base display unit 1317 is displayed by the function display unit 1400. It may be longer than the time.

FIG. 99 is a diagram showing changes in the state (interval) involved in the calculation of the base value.

On the base display 1317 of the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, the provisional section display and the fixed section display are switched and displayed at predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) intervals. In the provisional section display, the base value of the section being measured is displayed. Specifically, "bA." Is displayed in the first two digits to indicate that the base value A is displayed, and the base value A being measured is displayed in the last two digits as a two-digit percentage. If the integer portion of the percentage of the base value A is 99, "99" is displayed, if it is 100 or more, "99." is displayed, and if it is 0, "00" is displayed. Therefore, even if the number of display digits of the base display 1317 is two, it can be displayed so that the base value A can be seen as 0% or 100%.

In addition, in the provisional section display, if the number of low-probability / non-time-saving out balls is less than a predetermined number (for example, 6000), the first two digits (or all four digits) are blinked and an accurate base value can be measured. Indicates that it is not. On the other hand, when the number of low-probability / non-time-saving out balls is a predetermined number (for example, 6000) or more, the first two digits are lit and displayed to indicate that an accurate base value can be measured.

In the fixed section display, the base value of the previous section is displayed. Specifically, "bb." Is lit in the first two digits to indicate that the base value B is displayed, and the base value of the previous section is displayed in the last two digits (below the previous period). The base value B), which is the final value of two digits, is lit and displayed at a two-digit percentage. If the integer portion of the percentage of the base value B is 99, "99" is displayed, if it is 100 or more, "99." is displayed, and if it is 0, "00" is displayed. Therefore, even if the number of display digits of the base display 1317 is two, it can be displayed so that the base value B can be seen as 0% or 100%.

In the first section, since the previous section is a test section, the base value has not been measured. Therefore, in the fixed section display, "bb." Is blinked in the first two digits and "---" is blinked in the last two digits.

In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the base value is not calculated for a predetermined number (for example, 256) in which the number of out balls is less than 500 from the first power-on as a test section. This is because, in a predetermined number of launches from the first power-on of the pachinko machine 1, the number of balls to be ejected may vary within the range of the probability distribution, the base value is not stable, and a meaningful base value cannot be measured. .. Therefore, in the test section, the base value is not displayed on the base display 1317. Specifically, in the provisional section display, "bA." Is displayed in the first two digits, "---" is displayed in the last one digit, and "bb." Is displayed in the first two digits in the fixed section display. , "---" is displayed in the last digit. In the test section, the entire number of digits of the base display 1317 is blinked to indicate that the accurate base value cannot be measured.

Here, the first power-on means the first power-on after the completion of 1 of the pachinko machine, or immediately after the initialization of the work area for base calculation (S26 in FIG. 101, S8013 in FIG. 108) is executed. It is in a state. Further, the power-on time generally used in the present specification is a power-on time other than the first power-on time.

If an abnormality is detected in the data and the data is deleted in the inspection of the data in the base calculation area 13128, which will be described later, the calculation of the base value is restarted from the test section.

In each section other than the test section, when the total number of out balls in all game states (big hit, normal game, time saving, non-time saving, high probability, low probability, etc.) reaches 52000, the next section Switch to and measure the base value anew. The number of out balls in one section is not 52,000, and other numbers may be used as long as they are predetermined values. For example, assuming that the daily operating time of the pachinko machine 1 is 10 hours, 60,000 pachinko machines, which are the daily operating hours (number of out balls), may be adopted as the number of out balls in one section. You may adopt 50,000 or 100,000 which are sharp numbers.

The number of out balls in one section may be changed as appropriate. For example, it is preferable that a setting switch (DIP switch, rotary switch, etc.) is provided on the main control board 1310, and the number of out balls in one section is set according to the setting of the switch. The switch is provided on the main control board 1310 provided on the back surface side of the pachinko machine 1 or another board connected to the main control board 1310. Further, if the setting of the switch is changed, the base calculation work area (base calculation area 13128) of the RAM 1312 may be initialized and the base value calculation may be restarted from the test section, or the base value calculation may be restarted from the beginning of the current section. Good. Since many pachinko machines are in operation immediately after being introduced as a new machine, the number of out balls in one section is set to a large number, and after the business period has passed, the number of out balls in one section is set to a small number. That is, the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment has a setting means capable of setting an operation for determining the length of a section which is a unit for calculating the base value, and is based on the operation set by the setting means at the first power-on. The length of one section is set.

In this way, the base value of the section currently being measured and the base value of the immediately preceding section are switched and displayed on the base display 1317 at predetermined time intervals. In addition, a part of the base display 1317 is displayed so that the displayed contents can be distinguished, and the measured base value is displayed on the other part.

FIG. 100 is a diagram showing an example of characters displayed on the base display 1317.

As described above, the base display 1317 is composed of a plurality of digits (for example, 4 digits) of 7-segment LEDs, and displays numbers and characters by lighting or blinking the segments of each digit. The numbers 0 to 9 can be displayed, and the letters A, b, c, d, E, F, L and-codes can also be displayed. In addition, the decimal point can be displayed at the same time as numbers and letters. The case where the number 6 is displayed at the same time as the decimal point and the case where the number 9 is displayed are shown.

101 and 102 are flowcharts showing an example of the initialization process of the pachinko machine of this embodiment.

In the initialization process shown in FIGS. 101 and 102, the check code calculation process (step S50) and the check code storage process (step S52) are deleted as compared with the initialization process described above in FIGS. 21 and 22. Therefore, the calculation of the check code in the base calculation area is executed in the base calculation process (step S8038) of the timer interrupt process. The same steps as those in the initialization process described above in FIGS. 21 and 22 are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

When the power is turned on to the pachinko gaming machine 1, the main control MPU 1311 of the main control board 1310 executes the main control program to perform the initialization process. First, the main control MPU 1311 sets the protection of the RAM 1312 built in the main control MPU 1311 to write permission so that the RAM 1312 can be written (step S10). Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 activates the built-in watchdog timer (step S12), and determines whether a predetermined wait time (time required for the sub-board (peripheral control board 1510, etc.) to start) has elapsed. Determine (step S16). If the predetermined wait time has elapsed, it is determined whether the RAM clear switch is being operated (step S18). When the RAM clear switch is operated, the data in the area other than the base calculation work area (base calculation area 13128) among the data backed up in the work area of the built-in RAM 1312 is erased (step S30), and step S24. Proceed to. On the other hand, when the RAM clear switch is not operated, the data backed up in the built-in RAM 1312 is not erased, and it is determined whether or not the power failure flag is set (step S20).

As a result, if the power failure flag is not set, the data in the work area of the built-in RAM 1312 may not be correct. Therefore, the data backed up in the work area (other than the base calculation area 13128) is deleted (step S30). , Step S24. On the other hand, if the power failure flag is set, the power failure flag is cleared, and the checksum calculated from the data backed up in the work area of the built-in RAM 1312 using the checksum calculated at the time of the previous power failure and the checksum in step S48. The stored checksum is compared (verified) (step S22).

As a result, if the checksum calculated from the backup data and the checksum stored in step S48 do not match, the data in the work area of the built-in RAM 1312 may not be correct, so the data backed up in the work area ( The area (other than the base calculation area 13128) is erased (step S30), and the process proceeds to step S24. On the other hand, if the checksum calculated from the backup data and the checksum stored in step S48 match, the data in the work area of the built-in RAM 1312 is correct, so the data backed up in the work area is not erased, and step S24 Proceed to.

Subsequently, it is determined whether the base calculation work area (base calculation area 13128) is normal by using the check code (step S24). If it is determined to be abnormal, the data in the base calculation work area may not be correct, so the data stored in the base calculation work area is deleted (step S26).

In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, as a case where at least a part of the area of the RAM 1312 is initialized, the operation of the RAM clear switch (S18), the power failure flag abnormality (S20) in which the power failure flag is not set, and the RAM There are a RAM error (S22) in which the checksums do not match, and an error (S24) in the base calculation work. Of these, as shown in the figure, when the operation of the RAM clear switch is detected when the power is turned on, or when the power failure flag is abnormal or the RAM is abnormal, the game control area 13126 (the game work area and the game stack area) is used. Included) is cleared, and the base calculation area 13128 (including the base calculation work area and the base calculation stack area) is not cleared. Further, in the case of a base calculation work abnormality, the base calculation area 13128 (outside the game area) is cleared, and the game control area 13126 is not cleared.

Note that, unlike the ones shown in the figure, in the case of a power failure flag abnormality, a RAM abnormality, or a base calculation work abnormality, the validity of the data stored in the RAM 1312 is not guaranteed, so that the game control area 13126 and the base calculation area 13128 You may clear the entire RAM area including. If the entire RAM area is cleared when the base calculation work is abnormal, the data indicating the game state is lost and normal processing cannot be executed. If the memory configuration is such that the base calculation work area and the base calculation stack area cannot be executed. Only should be initialized. When the operation of the RAM clear switch is detected when the power is turned on, the game control area 13126 (including the game work area and the game stack area) is cleared, and the base calculation area 13128 is set as described above. You don't have to clear it.

When one or more backup areas are provided in the base calculation area 13128, the main area is first determined by using the check code, and when the main area is determined to be abnormal, the backup areas 1 and 2 are provided. , N is determined in this order, and the data in the backup area first determined to be normal may be duplicated in the main area. After that, the data in the backup area may be erased or left as it is. If it is determined that the main area is normal, the data in the backup area may be deleted or left as it is.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the data backed up in the work area of the built-in RAM 1312 is deleted under different conditions (the game control area 13126 and the base calculation area 13128) for each data type. To do. That is, by operating the RAM clear switch, the backed up game control area 13126 is erased, but the backed up base calculation area 13128 is not erased. When the base calculation area 13128 can be erased by operating the RAM clear switch, the base value calculated by the pachinko machine 1 can be erased at an arbitrary timing. Therefore, the backed up base calculation area 13128 is not erased by the operation of the RAM clear switch, the base calculation area 13128 is prevented from being erased by the operation of the staff of the game hall, and the abnormal base value is concealed. Can be prevented. Therefore, it is possible to reliably detect a game machine modified to have a high or low base value.

The main control MPU 1311 has an initial setting process (step S28) for setting in various setting registers of the main control MPU 1311 (CPU 13111) when a power recovery setting or a RAM initialization process of the RAM work area is executed, and a peripheral control board. The power-on command setting process (step S32) for transmitting to 1510 is executed, and execution of interrupt processing including timer interrupt processing is permitted (step S34). Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 acquires the power failure warning signal (step S36) and determines whether or not the power failure warning signal is ON (step S38). When the power failure warning signal is not ON (the result of step S38 is "No"), the random number update process is executed (step S40).

On the other hand, when the power failure warning signal is detected (the result of step S38 is "Yes"), the main control MPU 1311 executes the power cutoff process (power cutoff setting means). In the power off processing, first, the execution of the interrupt processing is prohibited (step S42), the output ports are cleared, and the operation of the device controlled by the output from each port is stopped (step S44). Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 calculates a checksum for determining whether or not the data stored in the work area to be backed up is normally held (step S46), and checks the checksum calculation result in the RAM 1312. Store in the thumb area (step S48).

Subsequently, the data in the main area of the base calculation work (base calculation area 13128) is duplicated in each backup area (step S54). At this time, the calculated check code is also duplicated. The backup may be executed as appropriate (for example, each time the data is updated) in the base calculation process instead of the process when the main board side power is turned off. In this way, by storing the data used for calculating the base value in the backup area together with the calculated (or predetermined value) check code, the data for calculating the base and the calculated base value even when the power is turned off. Can be retained and the base value for long-term operation can be calculated.

The check code checked in step S24 is calculated in step S8038 (FIG. 106) of the base calculation process. Further, in the modification described later, the calculation is performed in step S50 (FIG. 22) of the initialization process.

Further, a value indicating that the backup was normally performed is stored in the backup flag area as a power failure flag (step S56), and "01H" indicating write prohibition is output to the RAM protect register to prohibit writing of the RAM 1312 (step). S58), wait until recovery from power failure (infinite loop).

FIG. 103 is a diagram showing a configuration of a base calculation area 13128 in which the accessory ratio calculation area shown in FIG. 26A is replaced in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment.

The base calculation area 13128 is composed of a part of the RAM 1312, and is provided (outside the game area) separately from the game control area 13126 as described above.

The base calculation area 13128 includes a storage area for a base value A, a base value B, an interval counter, a total number of out balls, a low probability / non-time saving out ball number, and a low probability / non-time saving prize ball number.

The storage area of the base value A is composed of 1 byte and stores the base value of the provisional section currently being measured. The storage area of the base value B is composed of 1 byte, and stores the base value measured in the section immediately before the provisional section. The storage area of the section counter is composed of 1 byte, and stores a value indicating the section for which the base value is currently being measured. The section counter is updated every time the section is switched, and is used to control the display content that differs depending on the section. The section counter may be controlled so as not to be larger than any value of 0, 1, or 2, that is, 2. Specifically, the section counter = 0 in the test section, the section counter = 1 in the first section, and the section counter = 2 in the second and subsequent sections. Further, the section counter may be controlled so as not to be larger than 255 as a value from 0 to 255, and the section counter = 2 or more after the second section.

The storage area for the total number of out balls is composed of 2 bytes, and stores all the number of out balls (that is, a value indicating the operation of the game machine) regardless of the game state. The total number of out balls is used to determine the switching of the interval, which is the unit of measurement of the base. In the pachinko machine of this embodiment, the base value in each section is measured with the operation of one day as one section. Therefore, 2 bytes (65536) are allocated to the storage area of the total number of out balls. As described above, the total number of out balls is a storage area for counting all the number of out balls regardless of the gaming state for each section, and the total number of out balls in the above-described embodiment (the number of out balls in the special prize). It is different from the total value from the start of operation of the pachinko machine 1).

The storage area for the low-probability, non-time-saving out-balls is composed of 2 bytes or more (preferably 4 bytes), and the number of out-balls for calculating the base value (the number of out-balls in the game state other than during the special prize) is calculated. Store. The storage area for the low-probability, non-time-saving prize balls is composed of 2 bytes or more (preferably 4 bytes), and the number of prize balls for calculating the base value (the number of prize balls in the gaming state other than during the special prize) is calculated. Store. The storage area for the low-probability / non-time-saving out balls and the storage area for the low-probability / non-time-saving prize balls may be an area of 2 bytes or more, but considering the calculation process of the base value, the number of bytes is the same. It is better to do it.

The storage capacity (number of bytes) of each storage area described above is only an example as described above, and may be determined according to the number of out balls in one section.

Further, when the main area and the backup area of the base calculation area 13128 are provided, a storage area having the same configuration is provided in the RAM 1312.

FIG. 104 is a flowchart showing an example of timer interrupt processing of the pachinko machine of this embodiment.

Compared with the timer interrupt process described above in FIG. 23, the timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 104 is provided with a base calculation process (step S801) instead of the accessory ratio calculation area update process in step S81, and the combination of step S89. The object ratio calculation / display process is deleted. Note that the same steps as the timer interrupt processing described above in FIG. 23 are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

When the timer interrupt processing is started, the main control MPU 1311 first sets the RBS (register bank selection flag) of the program status word to 1 and switches the register by executing the main control program (step S70).

Next, the main control MPU 1311 executes the switch input process (step S74), the timer update process (step S76), the random number update process 1 (step S78), and the prize ball control process (step S80).

Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 refers to the current game state, adds the number of prize balls paid out as the game value to the area corresponding to the current game state, and adds the base calculation area 13128 of the main control built-in RAM 1312 ( (See FIG. 103) is updated to calculate the base value (step S801). Details of the base calculation process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 105 and 106. The base calculation process (step S801) may be executed in any order after the prize ball control process (step S80), but it may be executed in an early order in order to reliably execute each timer interrupt. ..

Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 has a frame command reception process (step S82), a fraud detection process (step S84), a special symbol and special electric accessory control process (step S86), and a normal symbol and ordinary electric accessory control process (step S86). Step S88), output data setting process (step S90), and peripheral control board command transmission process (step S92) are executed.

Finally, the main control MPU 1311 sets a predetermined value (18H) in the watchdog timer clear register WCL (step S96). Finally, the main control MPU 1311 switches (returns) the register bank. When the above processing is completed, the timer interrupt processing is terminated and the process returns to the processing before the interrupt.

As described above, in the pachinko machine of this embodiment, since the base value is measured by the timer interrupt processing, the base value during the game can be measured in real time.

105 and 106 are flowcharts showing an example of the base calculation process.

The base calculation process (step S801) is called from the timer interrupt process and executed by the main control MPU 1311.

The main control MPU 1311 first determines whether or not there is an error in the calculation of the base value by executing the base calculation program (step S8011). For example, as described above, the winning opening sensor (general winning opening sensor 3015, first starting opening sensor 2104, second starting opening sensor 2551, first large winning opening sensor 2114, second upper large winning opening sensor 2554, second If there is an abnormality in the lower prize opening sensor 2557, etc.) or the discharge ball sensor (board side discharge ball sensor 3060A, frame side discharge ball sensor 3060B), the base value is accurately calculated by the abnormality signal output from the interface circuit 1331. Judge that there is an error that cannot be done. Also, if it is determined that fraudulent activity has been performed (for example, the magnetic detection sensor has detected magnetism, the vibration detection sensor has detected vibration, or the radio wave detection sensor has detected radio waves), the base value is accurate. Judges that there is an error that cannot be calculated. If it is determined that there is this error, the display of the base display 1317 may be turned off. In step S8011, an error that accompanies the game stop (for example, magnetism, vibration, radio wave error, etc.) is determined to be an error (YES), and an error that does not accompany the game stop (for example, prize ball abnormality, door opening, etc.). A failure that is not directly related to the calculation or the base (out of supply, full tank error, etc.) may be determined as not an error (NO). That is, it is not necessary to execute the base calculation process even if there is some abnormality among the plurality of types of abnormal states, and not to execute the base calculation process if there is another abnormality.

Next, the main control MPU 1311 acquires the number of out balls (step S8014). As described above, the number of out balls is detected by the launch ball sensor 1020, the discharge ball sensor 3060, etc., and the switch input process in step S74 reads the detection signals of these sensors and out if there is a sensor detection signal. Acquire the number of balls = 1. When an out ball is detected by a plurality of discharge ball sensors 3060, the total value of the numbers detected by each sensor is acquired as the number of out balls. That is, a plurality of out balls may be detected in one timer interrupt process.

Next, the main control MPU 1311 acquires the number of prize balls (step S8015). As for the number of prize balls, as described above, the number of prize balls calculated based on the input information in the prize ball control process in step S80 is acquired. The number of prize balls acquired in the base calculation process may be the number of prize balls determined to be paid out. Further, the number of prize balls corresponding to the created payout command may be used. Further, the number of prize balls corresponding to the sent payout command may be used. Further, the number of prize balls corresponding to the payout command in which the main control board 1310 transmits the payout command to the payout control board 951 and the receipt confirmation (ACK) is received from the payout control board 951 may be used. Further, the number of prize balls (number of paid prize balls) may be used, in which the main control board 1310 transmits a payout command to the payout control board 951 and the payout control board 951 reports that the payout is completed. This variation is as described with reference to FIGS. 41 to 44.

Next, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether an out ball is detected in step S8014 (step S8016). If the out ball is not detected, the process proceeds to step S8022 without executing the process related to the out ball. On the other hand, if an out ball is detected, the detected out ball number is added to the total number of out balls stored in the base calculation area 13128 (step S8017).

Next, the main control MPU 1311 refers to the section counter stored in the base calculation area 13128, and determines whether or not it is currently a test section (step S8018). The test section is a section in which the number of out balls is less than 500 from the initial power-on of the pachinko machine (or initialization of the base calculation area 13128), and the value of the section counter is 0, which is the initial value. It has become. Therefore, if the interval counter value is 0, it can be determined that the interval is a test interval. If it is a test interval, it is not necessary to calculate the base value, so the process proceeds to step S8028. On the other hand, if it is not a test section, it is determined whether the current gaming state is in the special prize (step S8019). The determination as to whether or not the prize is being awarded can be determined in the same manner as in step S810 of FIG. 39 described above. The fact that the game state is in the special prize means that the big prize openings 2005 and 2006 are open due to the big hit, and it is during the time when the player can win many prize balls, but including the opening and ending time of the big hit game. You may. When the big winning openings 2005 and 2006 repeat opening and closing in one big hit, the time between the closing of the big winning opening and the next opening (closing interval) may be included. That is, during the special prize in step S810, it means that the condition device is operating, for example, from the determination of the jackpot symbol of the special symbol variation display game to the end of the ending. In addition, it may include all the time during the right-handed instruction.

Further, in the starting winning openings 2002 and 2004, the special prize may include the time saving, the probability change (ST), and the electric power support. Further, in a gaming state other than during time reduction, probabilistic change (ST), and electric power support, a predetermined time after opening and closing of the starting winning opening 2004 (for example, a ball winning the starting winning opening is detected as an out ball. The special prize may include up to a few seconds required. The so-called "hidden game state", which is a high-probability game state but does not become during the time saving (during electric power support), is not included in the special prize, and is in the game state as in the normal state (low probability / non-time saving state). The base value may be calculated using the number of prize balls and the number of out balls. In this case, the base value may be calculated separately in each of the normal gaming state and the latent gaming state, and the base value may be displayed so that it can be identified which base display is used.

The latent game state is a game state in which the player does not recognize that the high probability state is high even if the probability is high, but if the latent game state is excluded from the calculation of the base value, the frame is opened during business. In addition, the player may look at the base display 1317 and recognize that it is in a latent game state (that is, a high probability). That is, when the employee of the hall cares for the ball in the winning opening or throws the ball in the out opening in the open frame state, the player can know the playing state depending on whether the base display changes. Such a problem can be avoided by calculating the base value without distinguishing between the normal game state and the latent game state.

On the other hand, in the business of the hall, it may be necessary to manage the base value in a low probability / non-time saving state, and if the base value is calculated including the latent game state, it may not be possible to manage according to the business form of the hall. .. Such a problem can be avoided by calculating the base value excluding the latent game state. The same problem can be avoided by calculating the base value separately for the normal game state and the latent game state. That is, since the normal game state and the latent game state are different game states in the first place, depending on the business form of the hall, it may be desired to manage (inspect) the base value separately for each game state. ..

When the base value is calculated separately for the normal game state and the latent game state, even if the base value is calculated using the dedicated calculation process for each game state, the base value is calculated using the common calculation process. You may. By calculating the base value using a common calculation process, the processing load on the CPU can be reduced and the program capacity can be reduced.

The electrically operated accessory provided in the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment can be divided into two types from the viewpoint of calculating the base value. As described above, the special prizes related to the big prize openings 2005 and 2006 in the game machine of this embodiment are during the operation of the condition device (for example, from the determination of the big hit symbol of the special symbol variation display game to the end of the ending). Since the base value is calculated by the number of prize balls and out balls other than during the special prize, the normal (so-called big hit) prizes to the big prize openings 2005 and 2006 are not used to calculate the base value. On the other hand, in the starting winning opening 2004 (so-called electric tulip) having an opening / closing member, winning balls and prize balls other than during the special prize (low probability time or non-time saving time) are used for calculating the base value. In other words, among the electrically operated accessories, some of the accessories (large prize openings 2005, 2006) are calculated based on the number of winning balls and the number of winning balls regardless of the playing state (whether or not they are in the special prize). Not used, other characters (starting winning opening 2004) switch whether to use the number of winning balls and the number of winning balls in the calculation of the base value according to the game state (whether or not the special prize is in progress). Will be done.

Further, the big winning openings 2005 and 2006 may be opened (as a so-called small hit) even when the condition device does not operate. In general, small hits occur during a short time, and since it is open for a short time, it is unlikely that a game ball will win a prize, so it does not affect the calculation of the base value. However, a small hit may be generated except during the special prize (normal time), and the game ball may be opened only during the time when the possibility of winning the prize is high. In this case, the winning balls and the winning balls to the large winning openings 2005 and 2006 in the small hits generated other than during the special prize may be used in the calculation of the base value. In this way, the expected value (design value) of the base value can be changed by controlling the probability of occurrence of a small hit other than during the special prize. That is, it is possible to provide a pachinko machine that can flexibly respond to the standard of the base value, and it is possible to improve the degree of freedom in design.

If the game state is in the special prize, since it is an out ball that is not related to the calculation of the base value, the process proceeds to step S8022 without updating the low probability / non-time saving out ball number. On the other hand, if the gaming state is not in the special prize, the number of out balls detected in step S8014 should be used for the calculation of the base, so that the number of out balls detected in the base calculation area 13128 is detected in the low probability / non-time saving out balls. The number of out balls is added (step S8020). Then, the update flag is set to 1 (step S8021). The update flag is set to 1 when an out ball or prize ball other than during the special prize is detected for each execution of the base calculation process (timer interrupt process), and indicates the timing for calculating the base value (steps S8026 to S8027). reference).

Next, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether the prize ball is detected in step S8015 (step S8022). If the prize ball is not detected, the process proceeds to step S8026 without executing the process related to the prize ball. On the other hand, if the prize ball is detected, it is determined whether the current gaming state is in the special prize (step S8023). The determination as to whether or not the prize is being awarded may be the same as in step S8019.

If the game state is in the special prize, the prize ball is not related to the calculation of the base value, so the process proceeds to step S8026 without updating the low probability / non-time saving prize ball number. On the other hand, if the gaming state is not during the special prize, the number of prize balls detected in step S8015 should be used for the calculation of the base, so that the number of prize balls detected in the low probability / non-time saving prize balls stored in the base calculation area 13128 is detected. The number of prize balls won is added (step S8024). Then, the update flag is set to 1 (step S8025).

Next, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether the update flag is 1 (step S8026). When the update flag is 1, since an out ball or a prize ball other than the special prize is detected in the base calculation process (timer interrupt process), the low probability / non-time saving prize ball number is set to the low probability / non-time saving out ball. The base value is calculated by dividing by a number and stored in the storage area of the base value A of the base calculation area 13128 (step S8027).

Next, the main control MPU 1311 refers to the section counter and determines whether or not the test section is in progress (step S8028). Then, when the section counter value is 0, indicating that it is a test section, it is determined whether it is the timing to end the test section (step S8029). The test section is a section in which the number of out balls is a predetermined value of less than 500 from the first power-on of the pachinko machine (including the initialization of the base calculation area 13128), and indicates that the section counter is the test section. If the total number of out balls is equal to or greater than the predetermined value, it can be determined that it is the timing to end the test section.

As a result, if it is not the timing to end the test section, the process proceeds to step S8034 without updating the base calculation area 13128 in order to continue the test section. On the other hand, if it is in the test section and it is the timing to end the test section, the process proceeds to step S8032 in order to shift from the test section to the first section. Specifically, the main control MPU 1311 adds 1 to the section counter (step S8032). The interval counter changes from 0 representing the test interval to 1 representing the first interval. Then, the total number of out balls, the number of low-probability / non-time-saving out balls, and the number of low-probability / non-time-saving prize balls are initialized to 0 (step S8033). By this process, the test section is ended and the process shifts to the first section.

On the other hand, when it is determined in step S8028 that the section counter value is not 0 and the test section is not in progress, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether the total number of out balls is 52000 or more (step S8030). If the total number of out balls is less than 52000, the process proceeds to step S8034 in order to continue the current section.

On the other hand, if the total number of out balls is 52000 or more, the process for ending the section and starting a new section (steps S8031 to S8033) is executed. Specifically, the main control MPU 1311 reads the base value A from the base value A storage area and writes it in the base value B storage area in the base calculation area 13128 (step S8031). After that, 1 is added to the section counter (step S8032). As described above, the interval counter is controlled so as not to be larger than any value of 0, 1, or 2, that is, 2. Therefore, even if 1 is added to the interval counter when the interval counter value is 2. The interval counter value does not increase and remains at 2. Then, the total number of out balls, the number of low-probability / non-time-saving out balls, and the number of low-probability / non-time-saving prize balls are initialized to 0 (step S8033), and the process proceeds to the next section.

Next, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether the update flag is 1 (step S8034). When the update flag is 1, data for displaying the newly calculated base value is generated (step S8035). Details of the base display data generation process will be described later with reference to FIG. 107. After that, the main control MPU 1311 sets the update flag to 0 (step S8036).

Next, the main control MPU 1311 adds 1 to the display switching counter (step S8037). The display switching counter is used to switch between the provisional section display and the fixed section display described with reference to FIG. 99 at predetermined time intervals (for example, 5 seconds). The predetermined time for switching between the provisional section display and the fixed section display is the cycle of the blinking display (blinking display controlled in step S8051 of FIG. 107) when the number of low-probability / non-time-saving out balls in each section is less than 6000. It is better to have a sufficiently long time. This is because if the blinking and display switching have the same cycle, the blinking display (that is, whether the number of low-probability / non-time-saving out balls is less than 6000) becomes difficult to understand, so whether it is a blinking display or not. This is to make it easier to understand whether it is a switch.

Next, the main control MPU 1311 calculates a check code (for example, a checksum) from the data in the base calculation area 13128 (step S8038). As the check code calculation method, the same calculation method as the process of calculating the check code in step S50 of the initialization process (FIG. 22) is used. When the check code is set to a fixed value without being calculated, it is preferable to set the value to a plurality of bytes in which adjacent bits of the check code do not have the same value (for example, if it is 2 bytes, it is A55AH (1010010101011010B). To). Further, instead of setting a fixed value in a continuous area, they may be arranged separately. For example, the first fixed value is stored at the beginning of the base calculation area 13128, the second fixed value is stored in the middle, and the third fixed value is stored at the end. When the check code is a fixed value, it is preferable to configure the check code with a larger number of bytes than the check data calculated by the checksum to improve the possibility of determining the RAM abnormality.

In this way, according to the base calculation process of this embodiment, the base value is calculated and displayed for each timer interrupt process, so that the base value can be set without delay at the timing of each occurrence of a prize ball or each occurrence of an out ball ( It can be displayed (in real time), and it can be judged without delay whether the base value is normal or abnormal. Since the capacity of the base calculation area 13128, which is a storage area used for the base calculation, is extremely small as compared with the capacity of the game control area 13126, a check code is displayed at the end of each execution of the base calculation process. Even if calculated, the effect on the processing load of the main control MPU 1311 is small.

In addition, when the base value of the prize balls is calculated and displayed using the planned number of prize balls to be paid out based on the generated winning signal, the timing of calculation and display as the base value and the timing of the prize balls being paid out Is different. That is, a state in which the prize ball is not paid out due to an abnormality in the payout device (out of supply, the upper plate is full, a failure of the payout count sensor provided in the prize ball passage, a failure of the payout motor, etc.) Even if it becomes (stop, etc.), the base value is calculated and displayed.

In the above-mentioned base calculation process, the base value is calculated using the number of out balls detected by the timer interrupt process and the calculated number of prize balls each time the base calculation process is called from the timer interrupt process. The base value may be calculated each time the ball sensor 3060 detects an out ball and each time the various winning opening sensors detect a winning ball. That is, in one timer interrupt process, the base value calculation process is called a plurality of times, and the base value is calculated a plurality of times. In this way, even if the timing of switching the above-mentioned sections (the number of out balls is 52,000) arrives in one base calculation process, it is possible to distinguish which section before and after the calculation is performed as the base value. , Can display accurate base values in real time.

Further, as in steps S815 to S817 of the base calculation area update process (FIG. 46) described above, it is determined whether or not the number of prize balls is abnormal, and if there is an abnormality in the number of prize balls, an abnormality notification command is generated. , The prize ball abnormality notification timer may be reset. Further, as in steps S824 to S825, it is determined whether the prize ball abnormality notification timer has timed up, and when the prize ball abnormality notification timer has timed up, a prize ball abnormality notification stop command is generated to notify the prize ball abnormality. May be stopped.

FIG. 107 is a flowchart showing an example of the base display data generation process.

The base display data generation process is called and executed from step S8035 of the base calculation process.

The main control MPU 1311 first determines whether the display switching counter is smaller than 1250 by executing the base display data generation program (step S8041). Since the timer interrupt process described above is executed every 4 milliseconds, when the display switching counter reaches 1250, 5 seconds have elapsed since the display switching counter was initialized to 0. In step S8053, the display switching counter is initialized to 0 when it reaches 2499. Therefore, the processes of steps S8042 to S8045 are executed while the display switching counter is between 0 and 1249, and the display switching counter is between 1250 and 2499. Executes the processes of steps S8046 to S8049. Therefore, in the base display data generation process of this embodiment, the display data of the base display 1317 is switched every 5 seconds.

If the display switching counter is smaller than 1250, data for displaying "bA." In the first two digits of the base display 1317 is generated (step S8042). After that, the main control MPU 1311 refers to the section counter stored in the base calculation area 13128 and determines whether or not it is currently a test section (step S8043). Since the base value has not been calculated in the test section, data for displaying "---" in the last two digits is generated (step S8044). On the other hand, if it is not a test section, data for displaying the base value A currently being measured in the provisional section is generated (step S8045).

When it is determined in step S8041 that the display switching counter is 1250 or more, data for displaying "bb." In the first two digits of the base display 1317 is generated (step S8046). After that, the main control MPU 1311 refers to the section counter stored in the base calculation area 13128 to determine whether it is currently the test section or the first section (step S8047). In the test section or the first section, since the base value has not been measured in the past fixed section, data for displaying “−−” in the last two digits is generated (step S8048). On the other hand, if it is neither the test section nor the first section, data for displaying the base value B measured in the latest confirmed section is generated (step S8049).

Next, the main control MPU 1311 refers to the number of low-probability / non-time-saving out spheres stored in the base calculation area 13128, and determines whether the number of low-probability / non-time-saving out spheres is smaller than 6000 (step S8050). ). If the number of low-probability, non-time-saving out balls is smaller than 6000, the number of operations (number of out balls) after starting the measurement of the base value in the section is small, so the base value may not be stable. The display of the base display 1317 is controlled to blink (step S8051). On the other hand, if the number of low-probability / non-time-saving out balls is 6000 or more, the display of the base display 1317 is controlled to light without blinking (step S8052).

Next, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether the display switching counter is 2499 or more (step S8053). If the display switching counter is smaller than 2499, the process proceeds to step S8055 without initializing the display switching counter. On the other hand, if the display switching counter is 2499 or more, one repetition is completed, so the display switching counter is initialized to 0 (step S8054).

Finally, the main control MPU 1311 generates a display pattern in which the generated display data and the lighting mode (lighting or blinking) are specified (step S8055).

In this way, in the timer interrupt processing (base calculation processing) executed at predetermined time intervals, the display content on the base display 1317 is switched by using the display switching counter that is periodically updated, so that the current in the provisional section is present. The base value A being measured and the base value B measured in the past in the fixed section can be displayed in an easy-to-understand manner.

Further, since the blinking display is performed in the range where the base value is not stable in each section, it can be easily confirmed by the display of the base display 1317 whether the base value is in the stable range or the unstable range.

FIG. 108 is a flowchart showing a modified example of the base calculation process. In the modified example shown in FIG. 108, it is the same as the base calculation process shown in FIG. 105 except that the check process (steps S8012 and S8013) of the base calculation work is added. Note that FIG. 108 describes up to the calculation of the base value A (step S8027) in the base calculation process, but the processes from steps S8028 to S8038 are the same as those in FIG. 106 described above.

The main control MPU 1311 first determines whether or not there is an error in the calculation of the base value by executing the base calculation program (step S8011).

Next, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether the base calculation work area (base calculation area 13128) is normal by using the check code (step S8012). If it is determined to be abnormal, the data in the base calculation work area may not be correct, so the data stored in the base calculation work area is deleted (step S8013).

When one or more backup areas are provided in the base calculation area 13128, the main area is first determined by using the check code, and when the main area is determined to be abnormal, the backup areas 1 and 2 are provided. , N is determined in this order, and the data in the backup area first determined to be normal may be duplicated in the main area. After that, the data in the backup area may be erased or left as it is. If it is determined that the main area is normal, the data in the backup area may be deleted or left as it is.

In the illustrated example, after determining whether there is an error in the calculation of the base value (step S8011), it is determined whether the base calculation area 13128 is normal (step S8012), but conversely, the base calculation area is determined. After determining whether 13128 is normal (step S8012) and performing necessary processing based on the determination result, it may be determined whether there is an error in the calculation of the base value (step S8011).

Since the subsequent processing (steps S8014 to) is the same as those in FIGS. 105 and 106 described above, their description will be omitted.

In the base calculation process shown in FIG. 108, it is determined whether the data in the base calculation area 13128 is normal for each timer interrupt (that is, every 4 milliseconds), so that an abnormality in the base calculation area 13128 can be detected quickly and an abnormality can be detected. It is possible to suppress the display of various base values.

Next, an abnormality determination method for the base calculation area 13128 in the pachinko machine of this embodiment will be described. The value used for calculating the base value and the calculated base value are the base calculation area 13128 of the work area of the built-in RAM 1312 (the "feature ratio calculation area 13128" shown in FIG. 26 is the "base calculation area 13128". It is stored in (replaced) and determines whether the data is normal at a predetermined timing. There are the following variations in which process (timing) is used to perform the normal / abnormal determination step and the check code calculation step.
101 and 106: The check code calculated in the base calculation process (timer interrupt process) is determined when the power is turned on.
21 and 22: The check code calculated when the power is turned off is determined when the power is turned on (initialization process).
106 and 108: The check code calculated in the base calculation process (timer interrupt process) is determined by the base calculation process (timer interrupt process).

(A case where the check code is calculated for each timer interrupt and judged when the power is turned on)
First, using FIGS. 101 and 106, a process of determining the check code calculated in the base calculation process (timer interrupt process) at the time of turning on the power will be described.

When the initialization process is shown in FIGS. 101 and 102 and the base calculation process is shown in FIGS. 105 and 106, the base calculation area 13128 is set in step S8038 of the base calculation process (FIGS. 105 and 106). The check code (for example, checksum) is calculated from the data of.

Further, in step S24 of the initialization process (FIGS. 101 and 102), it is determined whether the base calculation work area (base calculation area 13128) is normal by using the check code. As a result, if it is determined to be abnormal, the data in the base calculation work area may not be correct, so the data stored in the base calculation work area is deleted (step S26).

When the data in the base calculation area 13128 is deleted, the state related to the calculation of the base value is initialized, so that the calculated base value is cleared and the calculation of the base value is started from the test period.

When one or more backup areas are provided in the base calculation area 13128, the main area is first determined by using the check code, and when the main area is determined to be abnormal, the backup areas 1 and 2 are provided. , N, and the data in the backup area determined to be normal first may be duplicated in the main area to recover the data in the base calculation area 13128. After that, the data in the backup area may be erased or left as it is. If it is determined that the main area is normal, the data in the backup area may be deleted or left as it is.

In this case, the frequency of the check code determination is low, and the consumption of the calculation resource (main control MPU 1311) required for the abnormality determination can be reduced.

(Case where the check code is calculated when the power is turned off and judged when the power is turned on)
Next, with reference to FIGS. 21 and 22, a process of determining the check code calculated when the power is turned off at the time of turning on the power (initialization process) will be described.

When the initialization process is as shown in FIGS. 21 and 22, and the base calculation process is as shown in FIGS. 105 and 106, in step S50 of the power cutoff process of the initialization process (FIGS. 21 and 22), A check code (for example, a checksum) is calculated from the data in the base calculation work area (base calculation area 13128).

Further, in step S24 of the initialization process (FIGS. 21 and 22), it is determined whether the base calculation work area (base calculation area 13128) is normal by using the check code. As a result, if it is determined to be abnormal, the data in the base calculation work area may not be correct, so the data stored in the base calculation work area is deleted (step S26).

In this case, the calculation of the check code in step S8038 of the base calculation process may be omitted.

In this case, the frequency of calculation and determination of the check code is low, and the consumption of the calculation resource (main control MPU 1311) required for the abnormality determination can be reduced.

(Case where check code is calculated by timer interrupt processing and judged)
Next, a process of determining the check code calculated by the base calculation process (timer interrupt process) by the base calculation process (timer interrupt process) will be described with reference to FIGS. 106 and 108.

Assuming that the base calculation process is shown in FIGS. 108 and 106, a check code (for example, a checksum) is calculated from the data in the base calculation area 13128 in step S8038 of the base calculation process (FIGS. 108 and 106).

Further, in step S8012 of the base calculation process (FIGS. 108 and 106), it is determined whether the base calculation work area (base calculation area 13128) is normal by using the check code. As a result, if it is determined to be abnormal, the data in the base calculation work area may not be correct, so the data stored in the base calculation work area is deleted (step S8013).

In this case, the initialization process is shown in FIGS. 101 and 102, and the step of determining whether the base calculation work area in steps S24 and S26 is normal may be omitted.

In this case, the abnormality in the base calculation area 13128 can be detected more quickly than in the case described above.

When a fixed value is used for the checksum instead of the checksum, the timing of setting and determining the checksum may be the same as the timing of calculating and determining the checksum. Further, both the checksum and the fixed value may be used together as the check code for determination.

FIG. 109 is a diagram showing the calculation of the base value when the gaming state is switched.

One game ball won a prize while the start winning opening 2004 (electric tulip) was opened, and then the predetermined number of variable display games ended, the time saving state ended, and the normal state returned. After that, in the normal state, it is assumed that the game ball wins a prize in the opening winning opening 2004 which is being opened.

In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the second special symbol is variablely displayed on the second special symbol display according to the winning of the starting winning opening 2004. That is, a variable display game is played in which the second special symbol is variablely displayed in connection with any of the illustrated winning points in the starting winning opening 2004.

Further, in the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, since the out ball in the special prize is not used in the base calculation, the first winning ball to the starting winning opening 2004 is not added to the low probability / non-time saving out ball number. , The second winning ball is added to the low probability / non-time saving out ball number.

In the above, the time when the time saving state ends has been described, but the same applies when the probability change ends by ST.

In addition to the above-mentioned time saving state ending, the same phenomenon occurs when a big hit of the special symbol fluctuation display game occurs. In the normal state, it is assumed that one game ball wins while the start winning opening 2004 (electric tulip) is open, then the big hit state starts, and the game ball wins the opening winning opening 2004. To do.

In this case as well, a variable display game is played in which the second special symbol is variablely displayed in relation to the winning of any of the starting winning openings 2004. On the other hand, since the out ball in the special prize is not used in the base calculation, the first winning ball to the starting winning opening 2004 is added to the low probability / non-time saving out ball number, but the second winning ball is low. Probability / Non-time saving Not added to the number of out balls.

Furthermore, the same phenomenon occurs when a specific error occurs. In the normal state, when one game ball wins while the start winning opening 2004 (electric tulip) is open, a specific error occurs after that, and the game ball wins in the opening winning opening 2004. Suppose. As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, when a specific error occurs (when it is determined that there is an error in which the base value cannot be calculated accurately due to the abnormal signal output from the interface circuit 1331), the machine is out. Do not use spheres for base calculations.

In this case as well, a variable display game is played in which the second special symbol is variablely displayed in relation to the winning of any of the starting winning openings 2004. On the other hand, since the out ball during a specific error is not used in the base calculation, the first winning ball to the starting winning opening 2004 is added to the low probability / non-time saving out ball number, but the second winning ball. Balls are not added to the low probability non-time saving out ball number.

That is, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, a plurality of game balls that have won prizes during the operation of the electric accessory under specific conditions (at the end of the time reduction, at the time of a big hit of the special symbol fluctuation display game, at the time of a specific error, etc.). There are cases where it is used for calculating the base value and cases where it is not used for calculating the base value, and it is possible to start the fluctuation of the special figure in any winning.

Further, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, regarding the look-ahead effect of the special symbol variation display game on hold, the first prize that is won in the start winning opening 2004 in a short time state is not subject to the look-ahead effect, and is in the normal state. The second prize won in may be the target of the look-ahead effect. On the contrary, the first prize that is won in the start winning opening 2004 in a short time state may be the target of the look-ahead effect, and the second prize that is won in the normal state may not be the target of the look-ahead effect.

Although the timing of changing from the time saving state to the normal state has been described, the same applies to the timing of changing from the probability change state (ST) or the electric support state to the normal state.

[10. Record of game history]
Next, an example of a pachinko machine that records and outputs a game history will be described.

[10-1. Basic configuration of a game machine that records game history]
In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the peripheral control unit 1511 determines from among a plurality of effects that match the fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the main control board 1310, and determines the determined effects from the liquid crystal display device. Display at 1600. At that time, when the peripheral control unit 1511 decides to display a specific effect (for example, two specific effects out of three types of super reach) among a plurality of prepared effects, the switching of the game state is the starting point. As a result, how many times the special symbol variation display game was played and the specific effect appeared (in other words, at what rotation the effect appeared) was displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1600 together with the progress of the game. indicate.

Specifically, according to the game history shown in FIG. 110, Super Reach 1 appears at the 34th rotation at 10:25, and the result of the special symbol variation display game is lost, and at the 127th rotation at 10:54. Super Reach 2 appeared, the result of the special symbol fluctuation display game was lost, Super Reach 2 appeared at 428 rotations at 11:30, and the result of the special symbol fluctuation display game was a probable change jackpot. Is displayed.

The display of the jackpot history (for example, the history of the jackpot at the 15th rotation and the jackpot at the 50th rotation) can be confirmed on the data display provided in the hall, but the specific effect that appears by the jackpot cannot be confirmed. Some players determine whether the pachinko machine 1 is performing well or not based on the appearance of a specific effect (for example, if Super Reach 2 appears within 50 rotations after the end of the jackpot, it is considered that the jackpot will be won in a short time). In order to meet the expectations of such players, the degree of appearance of the production is visually displayed. In addition, since the game ball is not fired when the player confirms the degree of appearance of the effect, if a display showing the degree of appearance of all of the multiple effects prepared is displayed, the player will perform each effect. It takes time to confirm the degree of appearance of the game console, and the operation of the game console may decrease. Therefore, it is preferable to display only a specific reach effect (reach effect with high expectation for a big hit) among the reach effects. Further, the appearance history for each effect may be confirmed by operating a predetermined operation means (such as the effect operation button 220C).

As a specific process, when the peripheral control unit 1511 receives the fluctuation pattern command from the main control board 1310, the peripheral control unit 1511 stores the number of fluctuations and the information of the appearance of the effect. Further, the peripheral control unit 1511 updates the number of fluctuations and the information of the displayed effect based on the received fluctuation pattern command. Then, when a predetermined operation means (such as the effect operation button 220C) is operated, the number of fluctuations required until a limited specific effect appears is added and displayed instead of all the appearing effects. You just have to do the processing.

In addition, when an error occurs in the pachinko machine 1 during business, the error information is output from the pachinko machine 1 and notified to the employees in the hall. In this form of notification, the error screen shown in FIG. 111A is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1600, or the detailed error screen shown in FIG. 111B is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1600 to notify the cause of the error. The error signal shown in FIG. 112 is output from the external terminal plate 784. In addition, typical errors in the pachinko machine 1 are shown in FIGS. 113, 114, and 115. The error that occurs in the pachinko machine 1 is notified to the outside of the pachinko machine 1 so that the employees in the hall can know the cause. For example, the code defined for each type of error may be displayed on the status display LED included in the function display unit 1400. Specifically, when the cable connection between the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951 is defective, "0" is displayed on the status display LED included in the function display unit 1400, and the LED on the right side of the door is displayed. Lights blue.

However, the error occurs due to various causes such as a minor failure of the pachinko machine 1 (for example, a connector disconnection), a serious failure requiring parts replacement, or a fraudulent act.

The pachinko machine 1 in which the error has occurred must search for the cause of the error, recover from the error, and operate the machine. It takes time and cost to search for the cause of the error, and the suspension of operation of the pachinko machine 1 due to the error causes a decrease in sales. Therefore, if the hall can know the detailed information of the error that has occurred, the error can be resolved at an early stage, and the operation stop time of the pachinko machine 1 can be shortened.

More specifically, the hall uses a hall computer to determine the state of the pachinko machine 1 based on the signal output from the external terminal plate 784. However, in order to search for the cause of the error, in addition to the signal output from the external terminal board 784, it is desirable that "the number of winnings of the general winning opening", "the number of winnings of the large winning opening", "the number of passing gates", and "normal symbol fluctuation". Game history information such as "number" is required. If the pachinko machine 1 is out of order, it will be solved by repair or parts replacement, so there is no big problem, but if the game ball is acquired by cheating, the chances that a normal player can make a profit will decrease, and the hall It may interfere with the business of the pachinko parlor, and eventually the hall may become difficult to manage.

When such game history information is output from the external terminal board 784, the number of terminals of the connector used for the external terminal board 784 increases, and the cost of the pachinko machine 1 increases. Furthermore, since events such as "winning to the general winning opening", "winning to the big winning opening", "passing through the gate", and "normal design fluctuates" occur frequently, if all the data is output from the pachinko machine 1, the data will be displayed. A high-performance hall computer is required to analyze the data, which increases the burden on the hall.

In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, in order to solve the above-mentioned problems, data that is not output as a real-time signal from the external terminal plate 748 is stored inside the pachinko machine 1, and the stored data can be referred to later. By doing so, it is possible to confirm the details of the process leading up to the error.

In addition, the time of occurrence of events (number of general winning openings, number of large winning openings, number of gate passages, number of normal symbol changes, etc.) that occurred in the process up to the occurrence of these errors is recorded, so how long You can see how many events have occurred in. For example, it can be seen that the number of winnings in the general winning opening was 50 per minute.

If the date and time of occurrence is recorded for each event, the amount of data used for searching for the cause of the error increases, and it takes time to search for the cause of the error. Therefore, when a predetermined number or more of events occur in a predetermined time (for example, 1 minute), the error information may be output and notified.

For example, since it is possible to win a prize in the general winning opening in any game state, it is advisable to output error information and notify when there are more than a predetermined number of winnings in a predetermined time, but the big winning opening is won only during the big hit game. Therefore, it is advisable to set a predetermined time from the start to the end of the jackpot game, and output error information to notify when a predetermined number or more of the prizes are won in the jackpot at the predetermined time.

In the pachinko machine described below, the peripheral control unit 1511 records the game history and outputs the data in a predetermined format.

FIG. 116 is a flowchart showing an example of the peripheral control unit power-on processing of this embodiment. In the peripheral control unit power-on processing shown in FIG. 116, a game history recording process (step S1023) is added to the peripheral control unit power-on processing described above with reference to FIG. 60.

In the game history recording process, the peripheral control unit 1511 records the game history in the memory when the received command is a predetermined command based on the analysis result of the command received from the main control board 1310. The game history is recorded as the event occurrence date and time in the format shown in FIG. 118, for example. The memory in which the game history is recorded may be DRAM, but it is preferable to record in SRAM, which does not require a refresh operation and consumes low power, in consideration of retaining the stored contents even when the power is cut off.

The game history recording process (step S1023) may be executed before the process related to game control (steps S1024 to S1032). By executing the game history recording process at an early stage of the peripheral control unit steady-state processing, the game history can be accurately recorded even if the process related to the game control is stopped in the middle and some effects are not executed. That is, even if some of the effects are not executed (even if all the effects are not executed), the result of the lottery already performed on the main control board 1310 does not change, and the privilege given to the player also changes. Since there is no such thing, the game history is recorded with priority over the production. Further, since the game history recording process is not affected by the process related to the game control, the game history recording process can be shared among a plurality of models of pachinko machines.

Next, processing when the memory capacity of the recorded game history reaches the upper limit will be described. When the amount of recorded game history data has reached the upper limit of the memory capacity, the game history recording process is executed, but the game history recorded in the memory does not have to be updated. That is, the information recorded in the memory does not change. In this way, by executing the game history recording process even if there is no free space in the memory for recording the game history, it is not necessary to check the free state of the memory for recording the game history, and the peripheral control unit 1511 is required to check each time. Processing can be reduced.

Further, when the capacity of the recorded game history memory has reached the upper limit, the game history recording process may be executed to update the game history recorded in the memory. In this case, a ring buffer having a plurality of (for example, 10) storage areas may be provided in the game history storage area of the peripheral control SRAM 1511d, the oldest game history may be deleted, and the latest game history may be recorded. Even in this case, it is not necessary to check the free state of the memory for recording the game history, and the processing of the peripheral control unit 1511 can be reduced each time.

Further, when the recorded game history reaches the upper limit of the memory capacity, it is not necessary to skip step S1023 and execute the game history recording process. By not executing the game history recording process when the recorded game history reaches the upper limit of the memory capacity, it is possible to prevent unnecessary processing from being executed. Therefore, other processes (effect control, lamp) performed by the peripheral control unit 1511. Control and sound control can be executed reliably, and new processing (for example, processing that is executed over multiple peripheral control unit steady processing because there is not enough processing time) can be executed by utilizing the free processing time. Alternatively, since it is not necessary to execute each time, a process (for example, a process of switching the selection table) that is executed once in several peripheral control unit steady processes may be executed.

Immediately after the interrupt timer activation process (step S1010), the received command may be analyzed (step S1022) and the game history recording process (step S1023) may be executed.

FIG. 117 is a diagram showing a configuration example of the game history recording condition setting table. The game history recording condition setting table is a command recorded as a game history among the commands received from the main control board 1310 by the peripheral control unit 1511. Register the type, that is, the event recorded as the game history.

For example, the following command types are registered in the game history recording condition setting table, and the conditions for generating the command and the purpose of recording as the game history are as follows.

For example, when the start opening 1 winning command and the starting opening 2 winning command detect the winning of the game ball to the starting winning opening 2002 and the starting winning opening 2004, respectively, the command is transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control unit 1511. , Peripheral control unit 1511 can count the number of winning balls to each starting winning opening. Further, the special symbol 1 symbol type command and the special symbol 2 symbol type command are transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control unit 1511 at the start of the fluctuation of the special symbol, respectively, and the peripheral control units 1511 of the special symbols 1 and 2 The number of fluctuations can be counted.

Further, the power-on command is transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control unit 1511 at the time of power-on, and the peripheral control unit 1511 can acquire a ram clear operation or the like. The change start state command is transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control unit 1511 at the start of the change of the special symbol, and the peripheral control unit 1511 can acquire the state at the start of the change of the special symbol. There are four states that can be distinguished by the change start state command: low probability / time saving, low probability / non-time saving, high probability / time saving, and high probability / non-time saving. You can get the change of state and start in each state. You can count the number of fluctuations that have occurred. Here, the low probability is a state in which the probability that a jackpot is derived in the jackpot lottery associated with the special symbol variation display game is a normal probability, and the high probability is a jackpot in the jackpot lottery associated with the special symbol variation display game. Is in a state where the probability that is derived is higher than usual. The time reduction is the time from when the above-mentioned second start door member 2549 is opened (or expanded) to a higher probability than when it is not, or when the normal symbol starts to fluctuate. The frequency with which the second start opening door member 2549 is opened (or expanded) is higher than that in the non-time saving state, such as being shortened. Along with this, the probability that an effect having a short time in one special symbol variation display game will be selected increases.

The large winning opening 1 winning command (for each winning) and the large winning opening 2 winning command (for each winning) are sent from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control unit 1511 when the game ball wins the large winning opening 2005 and the large winning opening 2006, respectively. A command is transmitted, and the peripheral control unit 1511 can count the number of winning balls to each large winning opening.

The large prize opening 1 winning command (less than the specified winning amount) and the large winning opening 2 winning command (less than the specified winning amount) will win only the specified number of game balls or less by the end of the round at the large winning opening 2005 and the large winning opening 2006, respectively. If not, a command is transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control unit 1511 when a predetermined time elapses from the closing of each grand prize opening (for example, from 1 second later to before the next opening), and the peripheral control unit 1511 sends a command. You can get the winning status in one round for each big winning opening. The large winning opening 1 winning command (larger than the specified winning) and the large winning opening 2 winning command (larger than the specified winning) are rounded by winning more game balls than the specified number in the large winning opening 2005 and the large winning opening 2006, respectively. When the above is completed, a command is transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control unit 1511 when a predetermined time elapses from the closing of each large winning opening (for example, from 1 second later to before the next opening), and the peripheral control unit 1511 sends a command. You can get the status of winning in one round for each big winning opening. It should be noted that this command is transmitted when a predetermined time has elapsed from the closing of each of the large winning openings 2005 and 2006 by detecting the specified number of winning balls (for example, 10) specified in one round and the large winning openings. There is a possibility that an undetected game ball may exist in the large winning opening when the game is closed, and this is to accurately grasp the winning situation even at the time of such an over winning.

The jackpot OP command is transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control unit 1511 when a jackpot occurs (that is, when the condition device is activated or the accessory continuous operating device is activated), and the peripheral control unit 1511 acquires the change to the jackpot state. You can count the number of big hits. The transition destination command at the end of the jackpot operation is transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control unit 1511 at the end of the jackpot state, and the end of the jackpot state and the peripheral control unit 1511 can acquire the status after the jackpot.

The small hit OP command is for opening the big winning opening in a relatively short time (for example, one opening time is 1.8 seconds, or the total of multiple opening times is less than 1.8 seconds). Therefore, when the accessory continuous operation device does not operate (so-called small hit), a command is transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control unit 1511, and the peripheral control unit 1511 can count the number of small hits.

The normal symbol stop command is transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control unit 1511 when the normal symbol is stopped, and the peripheral control unit 1511 can acquire the stop symbol of the normal symbol and count the number of fluctuations of the normal symbol. When the game ball passes through the gate unit 2003, the command is transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control unit 1511, and the peripheral control unit 1511 can acquire the number of game balls that have passed through the gate unit 2003.

Even if a special symbol or a normal symbol is not drawn even if a prize is won in the start winning opening or the gate is passed (such as when there is no overflow or memory), the main control board 1310 is connected to the peripheral control unit 1511 and the starting opening 1 A winning command, a starting port 2 winning command, and a general gate passage command are transmitted. Therefore, the peripheral control unit 1511 can count the number of winning balls to the starting port and the number of balls passing through the gate unit.

The error display command is transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control unit 1511 when an error occurs, and the peripheral control unit 1511 can acquire the error occurrence timing and count the number of error occurrences.

When the game ball wins a prize in each general winning opening 2001, the general winning opening 1 winning command, the general winning opening 2 winning command, and the general winning opening 3 winning command are sent from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control unit 1511, respectively, and the surroundings. The control unit 1511 can count the number of winning balls to each general winning opening 2001. The general winning opening winning command may be determined by the number of general winning openings 2001 provided in the game area 5a, and the above-mentioned example illustrates the case where three general winning openings 2001 are provided. As shown in FIGS. 10 and 16, the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment is provided with four general winning openings 2001, and therefore, four types of general winning opening winning commands from the general winning opening 1 winning command to the general winning opening 4 winning command are provided. The command is defined.

FIG. 118 is a diagram showing a configuration example of the game history recorded in the memory.

The game history includes a history number, an event, and an event occurrence date and time, and is preferably recorded in the memory in the order of the event occurrence time. As the event occurrence date and time, the time when the peripheral control board 1511 receives a command from the main control board 1310 may be recorded as the event occurrence date and time, and the time when the main control board 1310 detects the event occurrence is notified to the peripheral control unit 1511. The peripheral control board 1511 may record the event occurrence time notified from the main control board 1310. In the illustrated game history, the event occurrence date and time are recorded in the particle size up to minutes, but may be recorded up to seconds.

By analyzing the game history in the form shown in FIG. 118, it is possible to know the details of the event generated in connection with the command transmitted from the main control board 1310 (for example, the change in the game state, the result of the variable display game, etc.). .. For example, the power-on command of history number 1 occurred at 15:30 on March 15, 2016, RAM was cleared from the contents of the command, and the game started in a low probability and non-time saving state. I understand. That is, the hall started operations at 15:30, the pachinko machine 1 was turned on, and the player started hitting after a while (for example, after igniting a cigarette) and won the general prize opening 2001. I understand. In addition, the special symbol 1 fluctuation start event of history number 4 occurs at 15:34 on March 15, 2016, and the special symbol fluctuation is performed based on the content of the received special symbol 1 symbol type command (type of stop symbol). You can see the result of the display game. The special symbol 1 fluctuation start event of history number 6 occurs at 15:34 on March 15, 2016, and the special symbol fluctuation display game is based on the content of the received special symbol 1 symbol type command (type of stop symbol). You can see the result of. Although the result of the special symbol variation display game is not shown in FIG. 118, each special symbol variation display game is based on the numerical value indicating the result of the variation display game included in the symbol type command received at the start of the variation of the special symbol. The result of the variable display game (loss, usually per 4 rounds, high probability per 4 rounds, high probability per 16 rounds, etc.) may be recorded as a game history.

Next, a method in which the hall refers to the information (game history) recorded in the memory will be described.

First, a history output interface 1590 that outputs information recorded in a memory from the peripheral control unit 1511 is provided. Then, when the peripheral control unit 1511 receives the history reference command from the main control board 1310, the peripheral control unit 1511 outputs the game history recorded in the memory from the history output interface 1590.

Further, when the data collection terminal is connected to the pachinko machine 1 and the peripheral control unit 1511 receives the history reference command from the data collection terminal, the peripheral control unit 1511 outputs the game history recorded in the memory from the history output interface 1590. The history output interface 1590 may be configured by the history output terminal provided in the peripheral control unit 1511, or may be provided separately from the peripheral control unit 1511. The data collection terminal may be owned by the hall for data management of the pachinko machine 1.

The connection between the data collection terminal and the pachinko machine 1 may be a cable connection via the history output interface 1590 or a wireless connection via short-range radio (for example, Bluetooth®).

The command that triggers the peripheral control unit 1511 to output the game history is a command that is not transmitted when the pachinko machine 1 is performing a normal game even if it is a history reference command dedicated to the game history output (FIG. 117). A command when a special condition (operation) is performed under a command (command not defined in) may be used as a history reference command. The special condition (operation) is, for example, operating the RAM clear button while the pachinko machine 1 is powered on. Further, a history reference command may be transmitted even if the command is transmitted during a normal game, on condition that an event that cannot occur (or is unlikely to occur). For example, when 50 pieces are won in the start opening or the general winning opening in one minute. Further, the game history may be output when the commands used for the game control are received in a special order that is not normally possible.

An operation panel (keyboard) and a display (liquid crystal display device) may be provided on the back side (a place invisible to the player) of the pachinko machine 1 to display the game history.

FIG. 119 is a block diagram showing a configuration of a peripheral control board and its surroundings.

The peripheral control board 1510 performs effect control based on various commands from the main control board 1310, and also transmits control commands and various information (various data) to the effect display drive board 4450 via the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868. It controls the drawing of the peripheral control unit 1511 that interacts with the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460, and also controls the sounds such as music and sound effects flowing from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573. It has a liquid crystal display control unit 1512, and a real-time clock (hereinafter, referred to as “RTC”) control unit 4165 that holds calendar information that specifies the date and time information that specifies the hour, minute, and second.

As shown in FIG. 119, the peripheral control unit 1511 that performs the effect control controls the peripheral control MPU 1511a as a microprocessor and the power-on processing executed at the time of power-on, and after a predetermined time has elapsed from the time of power-on. A peripheral control ROM 1511b that stores various control programs such as a sub-control program that controls the effected operation to be executed, various data, various control data, and various schedule data, and a V blank from the sound source built-in VDP 1512a of the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 described later. Various information (for example, schedule data that defines a screen to be drawn on the game board side effect display device 1600, various LED light emitting modes, etc.) that are continued across the peripheral control unit steady processing that is executed each time a signal is input. Peripheral control RAM 1511c that stores information for managing specified schedule data, etc., and various information that continues over days (for example, information for managing the history of jackpot game states and special effects) Peripheral control SRAM 1511d that stores information for managing flags, and peripheral control external watch dock timer 1511e (hereinafter, "peripheral control external WDT1511e") for monitoring whether peripheral control MPU1511a is operating normally. It is described as).

The peripheral control SRAM 1511c loses its contents when the power is cut off for a long time (when a power interruption occurs for a long time), whereas the peripheral control SRAM 1511d has a large capacity (not shown) provided on the power supply board 931. By supplying backup power from the electrolytic capacitor (hereinafter referred to as "electrolytic capacitor for SRAM"), the stored contents can be retained for about 50 hours. Since the power supply board 931 is provided with an electrolytic capacitor for SRAM, when the game board 5 is removed from the pachinko machine 1, backup power is not supplied to the peripheral control SRAM 1511d, so that the peripheral control SRAM 1511d retains the stored contents. You can't do it and lose its contents.

Further, a part of the peripheral control SRAM 1511d is supplied with power by a backup power source 1513 different from the backup power source supplied from the power supply board 931. The game history is recorded in the area of the peripheral control SRAM 1511d to which the power is supplied by the backup power supply 1513, and the stored contents can be retained even if the power of the pachinko machine 1 is cut off. The backup power supply 1513 is composed of a secondary battery such as a lithium ion battery, and is preferably capable of holding data in at least a part of the peripheral control SRAM 1511d for several weeks to one month.

FIG. 120 is a block diagram showing a peripheral configuration of the peripheral control SRAM 1511d.

In the peripheral control SRAM 1511d, the area for storing the game history may be configured in a package different from the peripheral control CPU including the peripheral control MPU, or may be configured in the peripheral control CPU package together with the peripheral control MPU.

FIG. 120A shows the peripheral configuration of the peripheral control SRAM 1511d in which an area for storing the game history is configured in a package different from the peripheral control CPU. As shown in the figure, the effect control area where power is not supplied from the backup power supply 1513 is provided outside the peripheral control CPU package, and the game history storage area where power is supplied from the backup power supply 1513 is provided outside the peripheral control CPU package. Be done.

When the pachinko machine 1 is reset by operating the RAM clear switch, the data of the peripheral control SRAM (effect control area) 1511d in the peripheral control CPU is cleared, but the peripheral control SRAM (game history storage) outside the peripheral control CPU is cleared. Area) The data of 1511d is not cleared.

FIG. 120B shows the peripheral configuration of the peripheral control SRAM 1511d that constitutes an area for storing the game history in the package of the peripheral control CPU. As shown in the figure, both an effect control area in which power is not supplied from the backup power supply 1513 and a game history storage area in which power is supplied from the backup power supply 1513 are provided in the peripheral control CPU package.

Even in the configuration shown in FIG. 120 (B), when the pachinko machine 1 is reset by operating the RAM clear switch, the data of the peripheral control SRAM (effect control area) 1511d in the peripheral control CPU is cleared, but the peripheral control The data of the peripheral control SRAM (game history storage area) 1511d outside the CPU is not cleared. Therefore, it is preferable that the effect control area and the game history storage area of the peripheral control SRAM 1511d are physically separated from each other.

In the peripheral control SRAM 1511d, the area for storing the game history may be configured by a flash memory instead of the SRAM. By storing the game history in the flash memory, the game history can be held even in the pachinko machine 1 to which the power is not supplied without providing the backup power supply 1513.

In both forms of FIGS. 120A and 120B, the pachinko machine 1 has means for initializing the data in the game history storage area of the peripheral control SRAM 1511d. The means for initializing the data in the game history storage area of the peripheral control SRAM 1511d can be any method different from the normal data initialization method of turning on the power of the pachinko machine 1 while operating the RAM clear switch. Good. For example, if a history clear switch is provided in addition to the RAM clear switch and the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on while operating the history clear switch, the stored game history is initialized. In this case, when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on while operating both the RAM clear switch and the history clear switch, both the stored game state information and the game history are initialized. The history clear switch may be directly connected to the peripheral control board 1510.

Further, when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on while operating the RAM clear switch and the RAM clear switch is continuously operated for a predetermined time even after the power is turned on, both the stored game state information and the game history are initialized. It may be changed.

When initializing the game history stored in the peripheral control SRAM 1511d, the main control board 1310 transmits a command different from the normal power-on command to the peripheral control board 1510.

Further, the main control board 1310 continues to transmit a power-on command to the peripheral control board 1510 while the RAM clear switch is being operated, and the peripheral control board 1510 receives a predetermined number of power-on commands within a predetermined time. When the power-on command is continuously received, the game history stored in the peripheral control SRAM (game history storage area) 1511d may be initialized. By providing the means for initializing the data in the game history storage area in this way, for example, even if the game machine continues to operate in the hall for one year, the latest information can be accurately recorded and analyzed.

The peripheral control external WDT1511e is a timer for monitoring whether the system of the peripheral control MPU1511a is out of control, and when the timer is up, it is reset by hardware. That is, when the peripheral control MPU1511a does not output a clear signal for clearing the timer of the peripheral control external WDT1511e to the peripheral control external WDT1511e within a certain period of time (until the timer starts up), the peripheral control MPU1511a is reset. When the peripheral control MPU1511a outputs a clear signal to the peripheral control external WDT1511e within a certain period of time, the timer count of the peripheral control external WDT1511e is restarted, so that the reset is not applied.

The peripheral control MPU 1511a has a plurality of parallel I / O ports, serial I / O ports, etc. built-in, and when various commands from the main control board 1310 are received, each decorative board of the game board 5 is based on these various commands. The game board side light emission data for outputting the lighting signal, blinking signal, or gradation lighting signal to a plurality of LEDs provided in the lamp drive board is transmitted from the serial I / O port for the lamp drive board via a peripheral control output circuit (not shown). Serial for motor drive board to transmit game board side motor drive data for transmission to drive board 4170 and output drive signals to electrical drive sources such as motors and solenoids that operate various movable bodies provided on the game board 5. The door side motor drive data for transmitting from the I / O port to the motor drive board 4180 via the peripheral control output circuit and outputting the drive signal to the electric drive source provided in the door frame 3 is frame-decorated drive. Transmission from the serial I / O port for the amplifier board motor to the frame decoration drive amplifier board via the peripheral control output circuit and frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, or to a plurality of LEDs provided on each decorative board of the door frame 3. Door-side light emission data for outputting lighting signal, blinking signal or gradation lighting signal is driven by frame decoration from the serial I / O port for frame decoration drive amplifier board LED via peripheral control output circuit and frame peripheral relay terminal board 868. Send to the amplifier board.

Various commands from the main control board 1310 are input to the main control board serial I / O port of the peripheral control MPU 1511a via a peripheral control input circuit (not shown). Further, from the detection signal from the rotation detection switch for detecting the rotation (rotation direction) of the dial operation unit 401 and the press detection switch for detecting the operation of the press operation unit 405 provided in the effect operation unit 400. The detection signal is serialized by a door-side serial transmission circuit (not shown) provided on the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194, and the serialized production operation unit detection data is transmitted from the door-side serial transmission circuit to the peripheral door relay terminal board 882. , The frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, and the peripheral control MPU 1511a are input to the effect operation unit detection serial I / O port via the peripheral control input circuit.

Detection signals from various detection switches (for example, a photo sensor) for detecting the original position, movable position, etc. of various movable bodies provided on the game board 5 are on the game board side (not shown) provided on the motor drive board 4180. It is serialized by the serial transmission circuit, and this serialized movable body detection data is input from the game board side serial transmission circuit to the serial I / O port for the motor drive board of the peripheral control MPU1511a via the peripheral control input circuit. There is. The peripheral control MPU 1511a is adapted to exchange various data between the peripheral control board 1510 and the motor drive board 4180 by switching the input / output of the serial I / O port for the motor drive board.

As described above, in the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the event that occurred during the game is recorded as the game history according to the command transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510, so that the event occurred during the game. The event can be analyzed later (for example, after the hall is closed) to understand the performance and failure of the game machine. Further, since the game history is stored in the non-volatile memory (SRAM to which the backup power supply is input), the game history can be confirmed even after the game machine is restarted.

In the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 117, 118, etc., various information is recorded together with the occurrence time. Further, for example, when a prize is won in the starting prize opening 1, (1) the fact that the starting winning opening 1 is won, (2) the time when the starting winning opening 1 is won, and (3) before the starting winning opening 1 is won. Like the event that occurred, more information than the information output from the external terminal plate 748 shown in FIG. 112 is stored inside the pachinko machine 1. This means that the minimum necessary information (information indicating the fact that the starting prize opening has been won) is output from the external terminal board 784 in a special case (for example, an error), such as when the starting winning opening is won. This is because the information stored inside the pachinko machine 1 can be confirmed when investigating the cause of the problem. This is because if all the information stored inside at the time of winning the starting prize opening is output from the external terminal board 784, the amount of output of the information related to the operation of the pachinko machine 1 increases, which may be a burden on the hall. Because. That is, when an event occurs, more information than the information output from the external terminal board 784 is recorded inside the pachinko machine 1, and a part of the information recorded inside is recorded in the pachinko machine via the external terminal board 784. It is output to the outside of 1 so that the information stored inside the pachinko machine 1 can be confirmed in special cases.

[10-2. Compact plan 1]
Next, a modified example of the pachinko machine that records and outputs the game history will be described. It should be noted that some of the modifications described below modify a part of the above-described embodiment and form a part of the embodiment.

In the above-described embodiment, among the commands transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510, the event (command type) that occurred and the event occurrence date and time were recorded for a predetermined command. However, the capacity of the SRAM 1511d for recording the game history is finite, and it is difficult to record all of the enormous amount of events that occur during the game over a long period of time. Therefore, in the modified example 1 (compact plan 1), the change in the state of the pachinko machine 1 and the number of counting events generated in the state are recorded.

FIG. 121 is a diagram showing a configuration example of the game history recording condition setting table of the first modification.

In the game history recording condition setting table of the first modification, the commands recorded as the game history are defined separately as a command to be counted and a command to trigger a state change, and a command in which both attributes are set. There is also. Note that the countable information column and the acquireable state change column are provided for convenience of explanation, and when the game history recording condition setting table is implemented in the pachinko machine 1, only the command type column is sufficient. ..

When the peripheral control unit 1511 receives a command for which the attribute to be counted is set, the peripheral control unit 1511 counts the number of events that triggered the issuance of the command as a result of the command analysis. Further, when the peripheral control unit 1511 receives a command in which an attribute that triggers a state change is set, the peripheral control unit 1511 updates the state of the game history recorded in the memory as a result of the command analysis, and counts the number of events. To add.

For example, the power-on command, the change start state command, the jackpot OP command, the jackpot operation end transition destination command, and the error display command are commands issued by the state change, and are the power-on command, the special symbol change display start, respectively. It can be grasped as a change of the state of the jackpot state start, the jackpot state end, and the error state occurrence state.

In addition, the counting command is used to count the number of events that triggered the issuance of the counting command. Specifically, the starting port 1 winning command and the starting port 2 winning command can count the number of winning balls to each starting winning opening. The special symbol 1 symbol type command and the special symbol 2 symbol type command can count the number of fluctuations of each special symbol. The large winning opening 1 winning command (for each winning) and the large winning opening 2 winning command (for each winning) can count the number of winning balls to each large winning opening. The large prize opening 1 winning command (less than the specified winning prize) and the large winning opening 2 winning command (less than the specified winning prize) can count the number of rounds completed with the specified number of winning or less. The large winning opening 1 winning command (larger than the specified winning) and the large winning opening 2 winning command (larger than the specified winning) can count the number of rounds completed in excess of the specified number of winnings (that is, over winning).

The small hit OP command can count the number of small hits. The normal symbol stop command can count the number of fluctuations in the normal symbol. The command for passing through the gate can acquire the number of game balls that have passed through the gate. The error display command can count the number of error occurrences. The general winning opening 1 winning command, the general winning opening 2 winning command, and the general winning opening 3 winning command can count the number of winning balls to each general winning opening.

FIG. 122 is a diagram showing a game history recorded in the memory of the first modification.

The game history of the modification 1 is the state change event that triggered the state change of the pachinko machine 1, the state after the state change event, the time when the state change event occurred, and the state from a predetermined starting point. Includes the cumulative number of counting events detected until the end of (until the next state change event). The number of counting events recorded as the game history may be the number of counting events detected during the state (between the previous state change event and the state change event). The predetermined starting point is the time when the game history storage area of the peripheral control SRAM 1511d is initialized. The states in which the counting events are recorded separately are assumed to be five states: low probability / non-time saving state, low probability / time saving state, high probability / non-time saving state, high probability / time saving state, and jackpot state. The state may be further subdivided.

Next, the details of the game history recording process in the first modification will be described. In the game history shown in FIG. 122, as counting events, the starting port 1 winning number, the starting opening 2 winning number, the special symbol 1 variation number, the special symbol 2 variation number, the general winning opening 1 winning number, the general winning opening 2 winning number, The number of general winning openings 3 winnings, the number of large winning openings 1 winning, the number of large winning openings 2 winnings, the number of passing gates, and the number of changes in normal symbols are recorded. The number of events other than those shown may be counted.

Two bytes is sufficient to store the cumulative number of each counting event. In particular, the data that is not derived so frequently and the cumulative number does not increase (for example, the number of general winning openings) may be 1 byte, and the other data may be 2 bytes. In this case, it is preferable to arrange the 1-byte data and the 2-byte data in the order of 2 bytes and 1 byte (or the order of 1 byte and 2 bytes) without mixing them.

When a state change event occurs, the type of the state change event, the state after the event occurs, and the date and time when the event occurs are recorded, and a new record is created in the game history. Then, the counting event after the state change is recorded in a new record.

The counting result of the counting event in the current state may be recorded in the work area of the peripheral control RAM 1511c, and stored in a new record created in the game history storage area of the SRAM 1511d after the state change. Although a new record in the game history storage area of the peripheral control SRAM 1511d is created when the state changes, a new record may be created at the start of the period in which the counting event is counted. In this case, while the counting event is counted, data may not be stored in the new record created, or 0 may be stored as the initial value. You may also create a new record at the end of the period during which the counting event is counted. In this case, immediately after creating a new record, the counting result of the counting event in the period is stored in the new record.

When the game state changes and the data recorded in the work area (peripheral control RAM 1511c) is stored in the game history storage area (peripheral control SRAM 1511d), the data is read from the game history storage area and recorded in the work area. Numerical values are added and stored in the game history storage area. On the other hand, when the number of counting events detected during the state (between the previous state change event and the state change event) is recorded as the game history, the count value of the counting event is recorded as the game of the peripheral control SRAM 1511d. Store in the history storage area.

That is, every time a state change event occurs, the count value in the game history storage area of the peripheral control SRAM 1511d is updated. Therefore, the counting result in the current state recorded in the work area of the peripheral control RAM 1511c is recorded in the peripheral control RAM 1511c until the next state change event occurs, and the stored contents are backed up when a power failure occurs. , Will be initialized by normal ram clear operation. Specifically, for example, in a low probability / non-time saving state, the game history information in which 50 winning numbers in the starting winning opening 1 are recorded in the work area (peripheral control RAM 1511c) is the pachinko of the modified example 1. In the machine 1, after the game state changes, it is recorded in the game history storage area of the peripheral control SRAM 1511d. In other words, if the game state does not change, the game history is not recorded in the game history storage area of the peripheral control SRAM 1511d. Therefore, if the power is cut off and the ram clear operation is performed while the low probability and non-time saving state is maintained, the number of winnings of 50 is initialized to 0.

Further, the counting result of the counting event in the current state may be written in the game history storage area of the peripheral control SRAM 1511d. That is, every time a counting event occurs, the counting value in the game history storage area of the peripheral control SRAM 1511d is updated. In this case, the counting result in the current state recorded in the peripheral control SRAM 1511d is not initialized by the normal ram clear operation, but is initialized by the game history initialization operation described above.

Further, even when the recorded game history reaches the upper limit of the memory capacity, the game history recording process may be executed. In this case, it is not necessary to continuously record the game history in the peripheral control RAM 1511c in the current state and store the cumulative number of counting events from the peripheral control RAM 1511c to the peripheral control SRAM 1511d when the state changes. Further, the game history (cumulative number of counting events) in the oldest state may be deleted and the cumulative number of counting events in the immediately preceding state may be recorded. In this case, it is preferable to configure a ring buffer in the game history storage area of the peripheral control SRAM 1511d.

By executing the game history recording process even if there is no free space in the memory for recording the game history, it is not necessary to check the free state of the memory for recording the game history, and the processing of the peripheral control unit 1511 is reduced every time. it can. Further, since the cumulative number of counting events in the current state is recorded in the peripheral control RAM 1511c, the latest game history can be confirmed.

Further, when the recorded game history reaches the upper limit of the memory capacity, it is not necessary to skip step S1023 and execute the game history recording process. By not executing the game history recording process when the recorded game history reaches the upper limit of the memory capacity, it is possible to prevent the execution of unnecessary processing and reduce the processing of the peripheral control unit 1511.

As described above, in the modification 1, the switching of the states of the pachinko machine 1 is recorded, and the number of counting events (number of winnings, number of fluctuations, etc.) in each state between the switching is recorded. Therefore, the game of SRAM 1511d. A long game history can be recorded without increasing the capacity of the history storage area.

Further, as described above, the pachinko machine 1 of the modified example 1 is characterized in that it internally records more information than the information output from the external terminal plate 784.

Further, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 of the modification 1, the condition for creating a new record in the game history is a change in the game state, and if the game state does not change, the game history storage area of the peripheral control SRAM 1511d Information (game history) is not written. That is, if fraud is performed in a state where no new record is created in the game history storage area (while the same game state is continuing), it may be difficult to detect the fraud. As described above, in the hall, in order to analyze the information (game history) written in the memory, the information written in the game history storage area of the peripheral control SRAM 1511d can be confirmed, but in the pachinko machine 1 of the modification 1, the hall can confirm the information written in the game history storage area. Since the information is not written in the game history storage area of the peripheral control SRAM 1511d unless the game state is changed, the information of the current state (game history) cannot be confirmed even if the information is read from the peripheral control SRAM 1511d. Even in such a case, a check function that can detect fraud at an early stage may be provided.

Specifically, the first record (the latest record of the peripheral control SRAM 1511d) in which the game history of the latest state is recorded and the second record (the record of the peripheral control RAM 1511c) in which the game history of the current state is recorded). If the result of comparison with is satisfied with a predetermined condition, an error may be notified.

For example, in the so-called right-handed pachinko machine 1, which launches a game ball so as to roll on the right side of the game area 5a in a high-probability / short-time state or a jackpot game state, the transition from the high-probability / short-time state to the big hit game state However, if the game transitions to a high-probability / short-time state after the jackpot game state ends, even if the state is switched, the player is usually hitting right, so there is a possibility of winning the general winning opening on the left side of the game area 5a. Extremely low. In this case, the number of winnings in the general winning opening may be compared between the jackpot game state and the subsequent high probability / time saving state, and if a difference is detected, an error may be notified. The permissible value of the difference in the number of winning balls to the general winning opening between the states is set to 1, and if a difference of 2 or more occurs, an error may be notified. This is because when the hand is released from the launch handle, the launch force becomes uneven and the game ball may roll on the left side of the game area 5a.

Instead of the error notification, a security signal may be transmitted from the external terminal plate 784 shown in FIG. 112. The above-mentioned early fraud detection check function predicts the game from the game state of the pachinko machine 1 (for example, it will hit right because it is in a high probability and time saving state), so an unfamiliar player can There is a possibility that an error will be detected when hitting unexpectedly. Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 may not notify the error, only output the security signal from the external terminal plate 784, and may not notify the player. By doing so, the clerk in the hall can confirm the possibility of an error from a place away from the pachinko machine 1 without being noticed by the player, and trouble with the player can be prevented.

As described above, since the error detection function of the pachinko machine 1 is not perfect, the cause of the error can be checked by analyzing the game history outside the pachinko machine 1.

[10-3. Compact plan 2]
In the above-described modification 1, among the commands transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510, the state change event of the pachinko machine 1 is recorded, and the number of counting events in each state during the change is recorded. Was recorded. However, the number of events in each changing state may not be important, and it may be sufficient to know the number of events for each type of recurring state. Therefore, in the modified example 2 (compact plan 2), the state of the pachinko machine 1 and the cumulative number of counting events for each state are recorded.

In the second modification, the game history is recorded using the same game history recording condition setting table (FIG. 121) as in the first modification.

FIG. 123 is a diagram showing a game history recorded in the memory of the second modification.

As shown in FIG. 123, the game history of the second modification is composed of a history of state events and a cumulative number of each counting event for each state. The history of the state event includes the state change event that triggered the state change of the pachinko machine 1, the state after the state change event, and the time when the state change event occurred. In the pachinko machine 1 of the modified example 2, the cumulative number of counting events is recorded in five states of low probability / non-time saving state, low probability / time saving state, high probability / non-time saving state, high probability / time saving state, and jackpot state. To. The counting events (and commands related to the event) recorded in the second modification are the starting port 1 winning number (starting port 1 winning command), the starting port 2 winning number (starting port 2 winning command), and special. Symbol 1 variation number (special symbol 1 symbol type command), special symbol 2 variation number (special symbol 2 symbol type command), general winning opening 1 winning number (general winning opening 1 winning command), general winning opening 2 winning number (general) Winning opening 2 winning command), general winning opening 3 winning number (general winning opening 3 winning command), large winning opening 1 winning number (large winning opening 1 winning command), large winning opening 2 winning number (large winning opening 2 winning command) ), The number of gate passages (normal symbol gate passage command), and the number of normal symbol fluctuations (ordinary symbol stop command).

The number of counting events other than those described above may be counted, and the state in which the counting events are recorded separately may be further subdivided.

Next, the details of the game history recording process in the second modification will be described. In the game history shown in FIG. 123, when a state change event occurs, the type of the state change event, the state after the event occurs, and the date and time when the event occurs are recorded in the state event history. When a change in the state of the gaming machine is detected by the state change event, the cumulative number of counting events counted in the state before the change is recorded in the non-volatile memory, and the above-mentioned counting event corresponds to the state after the change. Start recording the cumulative number of.

The counting result of the counting event in the current state is recorded in the work area of the peripheral control RAM 1511c, and after the state changes, the game history storage area (cumulative value of the state) of the SRAM 1511d is read out and stored in the work area of the peripheral control RAM 1511c. It is preferable to add the recorded values and store them in the game history storage area of the SRAM 1511d. That is, each time a state change event occurs, the cumulative value of the game history storage area of the SRAM 1511d is updated using the value before the state change recorded in the work area of the peripheral control RAM 1511c. Therefore, the counting result in the current state recorded in the work area of the peripheral control RAM 1511c is backed up in the event of a power failure, but is initialized by a normal ram clear operation.

Further, the counting result of the counting event in the current state may be written in the game history storage area of the SRAM 1511d. That is, every time a counting event occurs, the cumulative value of the game history storage area of SRAM 1511d is updated. In this case, the counting result in the current state recorded in the SRAM 1511d is not initialized by the normal ram clear operation, but is initialized by the game history initialization operation described above.

As described above, in the modification 2, the switching of the state of the pachinko machine 1 is recorded, and the counting event (the number of winnings, the number of fluctuations, etc.) for each state type is recorded. Therefore, the game history storage area of the SRAM 1511d You can record a long game history without increasing the capacity of the game.

[10-4. Compact plan 3]
In the above-described modification 2, among the commands transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510, the state change of the pachinko machine 1 is recorded by the state change event, and the cumulative number of counting events for each state is recorded. However, the timing of state switching may not be important, and it may be sufficient to know the number of events for each state type. Therefore, in the modified example 3 (compact plan 3), the change of the state of the pachinko machine 1 is not recorded, but the cumulative number of counting events for each state is recorded.

In the third modification, the game history is recorded using the same game history recording condition setting table (FIG. 121) as in the first modification.

In the third modification, the same event as the event recorded in the first modification is recorded by using the game history recording condition setting table shown in FIG. 121.

FIG. 124 is a diagram showing a game history recorded in the memory of the modification example 3.

As shown in FIG. 124, the game history of the modification 3 is composed of the cumulative number of counting events in each state. Further, the game history of the modified example 3 includes the cumulative time of each state. The cumulative time is included so that the hall can estimate the number of event occurrences (for example, the number of jackpot occurrences) from the cumulative time. There are five states in which counting events are recorded separately: low probability / non-time saving state, low probability / time saving state, high probability / non-time saving state, high probability / time saving state, and jackpot state, but they are further subdivided. Counting events may be recorded.

The counting events (and commands related to the event) recorded in the third modification are the starting port 1 winning number (starting port 1 winning command), the starting port 2 winning number (starting port 2 winning command), and special. Symbol 1 variation number (special symbol 1 symbol type command), special symbol 2 variation number (special symbol 2 symbol type command), general winning opening 1 winning number (general winning opening 1 winning command), general winning opening 2 winning number (general) Winning opening 2 winning command), general winning opening 3 winning number (general winning opening 3 winning command), large winning opening 1 winning number (large winning opening 1 winning command), large winning opening 2 winning number (large winning opening 2 winning command) ), The number of gate passages (normal symbol gate passage command), and the number of normal symbol fluctuations (ordinary symbol stop command). The number of counting events other than those described above may be counted.

Next, the details of the game history recording process in the second modification will be described. In the game history shown in FIG. 124, when a state change event occurs, the cumulative number of the above-mentioned counting events is recorded corresponding to the state of the game machine changed by the state change event.

The counting result of the counting event in the current state is recorded in the work area of the peripheral control RAM 1511c, and after the state changes, the game history storage area (cumulative value of the state) of the SRAM 1511d is read out and stored in the work area of the peripheral control RAM 1511c. It is preferable to add the recorded values and store them in the game history storage area of the SRAM 1511d. That is, every time a state change event occurs, the cumulative value of the game history storage area of SRAM 1511d is updated. Therefore, the counting result in the current state recorded in the work area of the peripheral control RAM 1511c is backed up in the event of a power failure, but is initialized by a normal ram clear operation.

Further, the counting result of the counting event in the current state may be written in the game history storage area of the SRAM 1511d. That is, every time a counting event occurs, the cumulative value of the game history storage area of SRAM 1511d is updated. In this case, the counting result in the current state recorded in the SRAM 1511d is not initialized by the normal ram clear operation, but is initialized by the game history initialization operation described above.

As described above, in the modification 2, the switching of the state of the pachinko machine 1 is recorded, and the counting event (the number of winnings, the number of fluctuations, etc.) for each state type is recorded. Therefore, the game history storage area of the SRAM 1511d You can record a long game history without increasing the capacity of the game.

As described above, with respect to the modified examples 1 to 3, when the condition of temporarily recording in the work area (peripheral control RAM 1511c) when an event occurs by the game history recording process and writing to the game history storage area of the peripheral control SRAM 1511d is satisfied. The data of the work area is written in the game history storage area of the SRAM 1511d. Further, in the normal ram clear operation, the information written in the game history storage area of the SRAM 1511d is not erased (initialized), but the information recorded in the work area (peripheral control RAM 1511c) is erased (initialized).

Here I will briefly touch on the sales of the hall. In many cases, the hall has fixed business hours, for example, the opening time is 10:00 and the closing time is 23:00. For this reason, it may be difficult for a clerk to monitor whether or not a player is playing an illegal game during a time when many players are present, such as a time zone shortly after the store opens or a time zone in the evening. However, as the closing time approaches, the number of pachinko players will decrease, and if there is a pachinko machine with a high probability and a short time just before the store closes, the pachinko machine with a high probability and a short time will be initialized for the next day's business, and the probability will be low. It may be in a non-time saving state. In this case, since the number of pachinko players is small, it is possible to monitor pachinko machines with a high probability and a short time, so it is possible to know whether the latest game has been fraudulent. In other words, considering the situation that some pachinko machines do not need the latest game history, it is possible to provide an efficient game machine by allowing the clerk to select whether to keep the latest information.

Specifically, by initializing the pachinko machine 1 by the ram clear operation, the game history stored in the work area for the event that occurred after the latest event is deleted, and the game history is stored for the event that occurred before the latest event. The game history stored in the area is left. That is, although the pachinko machine records information that is not output from the external terminal board 784, the information recorded in the work area that is erased by the RAM clear operation and the information recorded in the game history storage area that is not erased by the RAM clear operation. The game history is recorded separately for. By doing this, if you want to keep a record of all the events recorded in the work area, if the clerk wants to cause a change of state of the pachinko machine, and if you want to delete the record of the event recorded in the work area, The clerk may perform the ram clear operation. As mentioned above, it was decided to delete only the game history stored in the work area related to the event that occurred after the latest event without deleting all the game history by the ram clear operation, before the latest event. This is because the clerk has not seen the events that have occurred so far (because there are many players, they cannot see them).

As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, not only the information that the starting winning slot has been won, but also the winning of the general winning slot that is not related to the lottery is once recorded in the work area. Even if (a symbol that starts to change by winning a prize in the start winning opening and a symbol that shows the winning lottery result with the stop mode of this symbol) does not change, while the game ball is launched into the game area 5a. Is characterized by collecting game history. That is, it can be said that the game history recording process is not a process that is executed when the winning lottery is triggered, but a process that may be executed at any time while the power is being supplied to the pachinko machine.

In addition, in the low probability and non-time saving state, the game ball is launched so that the game ball wins the starting winning opening 2002, as in the so-called left-handed hit or choro-hit. In such a case, the starting winning opening 2002 and the general winning opening 2001 should be appropriately won. However, there is no prize in the general prize opening 2001 (or very few), but there are many game balls in the starting prize opening 2002, or conversely, there is no winning in the starting winning opening 2002 (or). (Very few), but if many game balls have won in the general winning opening 2001, there is a possibility that fraud has been committed. Therefore, the first winning opening and the second winning opening in which the game ball wins at the same time are set as monitoring targets, and the number of winnings in the first winning opening is a predetermined magnification of the number of winnings in the second winning opening. When the value exceeds, an error may be notified.

Further, instead of the error notification, a security signal may be transmitted from the external terminal board 784. With the above-mentioned detection method, there is a possibility that an error may be detected when an unfamiliar player makes an unexpected hit. Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 may not notify the error, only output the security signal from the external terminal plate 784, and may not notify the player. By doing so, the clerk in the hall can confirm the possibility of an error from a place away from the pachinko machine 1 without being noticed by the player, and trouble with the player can be prevented.

Further, the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment is also characterized in that information accumulated in a plurality of games is collected as a game history. Since there is an upper limit to the amount of game history data that can be recorded, if you record for each game (1 variation), you will not be able to record many games (long time), so you can keep more game records. There is.

[11. Game performance setting function]
Next, an example of a pachinko machine having a setting function will be described. The pachinko machine of this embodiment has a setting function of changing the operating ratio of the condition device as a game performance.

[11-1. Basic configuration of pachinko machines with setting function]
FIG. 125 is a block diagram schematically showing a control configuration of a pachinko machine having a setting unit, and FIG. 126 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine having a setting unit as viewed from the back side with the door open. FIG. 127. Is a perspective view of the pachinko machine shown in FIG. 126 as viewed from the back surface side in a closed state, and FIG. 128 is a view showing a setting portion of the pachinko machine shown in FIG. 126.

The pachinko machine shown in FIG. 125 has a setting board 970 for setting the gaming performance of the pachinko machine. The setting board 970 is connected to the payout control board 951, and the payout control unit 952 acquires the operation state of each switch and controls the display of the setting display 974.

As shown in the front view of FIG. 128 (A), the setting board 970 has a setting key 971 for changing the operation mode of the pachinko machine 1 to the setting mode, a setting change switch 972 for changing the setting value, and a change. A setting confirmation switch 973 for confirming and inputting the set value and a setting display 974 for displaying the set or selected setting value are provided. The setting board 970 functions as a setting change operation unit that accepts a setting change operation.

In this embodiment, the operation signals of the setting key 971, the setting change switch 972, and the setting confirmation switch 973 on the setting board 970 are taken into the payout control unit 952. Further, the setting display 974 is controlled by the payout control unit 952. The finalized setting is transmitted from the payout control unit 952 to the main control board 1310. As will be described later, the main control board 1310 may control the components on the setting board 970.

The setting key 971 is a signal that triggers a change to the setting mode by inserting a predetermined key into the keyhole (key insertion part) and maintaining the short-circuited or open state of the contacts by turning the key to the set position. It is a switch that outputs. It should be noted that other switches may be used in combination without providing the setting key 971. In this case, the setting mode is started by operating the setting change switch 972 for a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) or longer (long press), and the setting mode is ended by long pressing the setting change switch 972 in the setting mode. May be good.

Further, the setting mode may be started / ended by operating the RAM clear switch 954. For example, the setting mode is started by turning on the power while operating the RAM clear switch 954 and continuing the operation of the RAM clear switch 954 for a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) or longer (holding down). Further, the power is turned on while operating the RAM clear switch 954, and if the continuous operation of the RAM clear switch 954 is less than a predetermined time, the RAM clear process is executed. Further, the setting mode may be terminated by pressing and holding the RAM clear switch 954 in the setting mode.

In this way, even an employee who does not have the key for the setting key 971 can change the setting, so that the pachinko machine 1 can be easily handled in the hall. Further, since the operation time of the setting change switch 972 is detected, it is preferable to detect the operation when the setting change switch 972 falls.

The setting change switch 972 is composed of, for example, a push button switch, and is operated to switch and select a set value (1 to 6) in order. That is, when the setting change switch 972 is pressed once, the set value is incremented by 1, and when the setting change switch 972 is operated when the set value = 6, the set value = 1. It should be noted that the set value may be selectable by operating the RAM clear switch 954 without providing the setting change switch 972. The set value may be not 6 steps, but may be less steps (for example, 2 steps) or more steps (for example, 8 steps).

The set value changes the operation ratio of the condition device (that is, the hit probability of the special symbol). The set value = 1 has a low hit probability, and the set value = 6 has a high hit probability. In addition, depending on the set value, the probability variation jackpot ratio, the time reduction (ST) ratio after the jackpot, the number of time reductions, the number of rounds and counts of the jackpot, the probability of hitting a regular figure, the general winning opening, the starting winning opening, and the big winning opening Various parameters related to the game, such as the number of prize balls, may be changed to change the number of prize balls that the player can obtain.

The setting confirmation switch 973 is composed of, for example, a momentary type switch, and is a switch for confirming the setting value selected by the operation of the setting change switch 972 and inputting it to the pachinko machine 1. The setting confirmation switch 973 may be a push button switch or a momentary toggle switch as long as it is a momentary type switch. The setting change switch 972 and the setting confirmation switch 973 may be configured by switches having different operation methods (operation directions) and shapes so that both switches are not operated by mistake. For example, the setting change switch 972 may be composed of a push button switch, and the setting confirmation switch 973 may be composed of a momentary toggle switch.

The setting selected by the operation of returning the setting key 971 to the normal position may be confirmed without providing the setting confirmation switch 973. Further, the selected set value may be determined by the operation of another switch or sensor provided in the pachinko machine 1. For example, the operation of the handle lever 504 of the handle unit 500, the contact detection by the contact detection sensor 509 by touching the handle lever 504, the operation of the stop button of the handle unit 500, the operation of the effect operation button 220C, and the ball rental. The selected setting may be confirmed by operating the button, operating the return button, detecting the winning of the game ball in the starting winning openings 2002 and 2004, and the like. The operation unit that substitutes for the setting confirmation switch 973 may be a switch that can be operated by the player (used for the game) or a switch that cannot be operated by the player (provided on the back side of the pachinko machine).

That is, in the illustrated example, three switches (including setting keys) are provided on the setting board 970 in order to set the game performance on the pachinko machine 1, but one or two switches are provided on the setting board 970. It is enough to provide it.

Further, the setting change operation may be performed only by the RAM clear switch 954 without providing any of the setting key 971, the setting change switch 972, and the setting confirmation switch 973. For example, the setting mode is started by turning on the power while operating the RAM clear switch 954 and continuing the operation of the RAM clear switch 954 for a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) or longer (holding down). Further, the power is turned on while operating the RAM clear switch 954, and if the continuous operation of the RAM clear switch 954 is less than a predetermined time, the RAM clear process is executed. Further, instead of the setting change switch 972, the set value can be selected by operating the RAM clear switch 954 in the setting mode for less than a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds), and instead of the setting confirmation switch 973, the RAM clear switch 954 The set value can be confirmed by operating (holding down) for a predetermined time or longer. Further, the setting mode may be terminated by pressing and holding the RAM clear switch 954 after the setting is confirmed.

The setting display 974 is composed of, for example, a 7-segment LED, displays a setting value selected by operating the setting change switch 972, and displays the current setting value by a predetermined operation (for example, operating the setting key 971). .. The setting display 974 may be configured by a number of LEDs having a settable value instead of the 7-segment LED. In this case, the LED corresponding to the set value lights up to display the set value.

In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the payout control board 951 is provided with an error type indicator using a 7-segment LED that displays the type of the payout error. However, this error type indicator and the setting indicator 974 are also used. The selected setting value or the current setting value may be displayed on the error type display. In this case, it is advisable to change the display mode so that the display of the error type and the display of the set value can be distinguished. For example, the dot may be turned off when displaying the error type, and the dot may be turned on when displaying the set value. Further, the error type display may be a lighting display (not blinking), and the set value display may be a blinking display.

In the illustrated example, the setting board 970 is connected to the payout control board 951, but it may be connected to the power supply board (not shown) in the power supply board box 930. By providing the setting board 970 side by side with the power supply board (or inside the power supply board box 930), the setting key 971 and the power supply switch 932 operated at the time of setting change are arranged in the vicinity, and the operability of setting change is performed. Can be improved.

Further, as will be described later, the setting board 970 may be connected to the main control board 1310.

As yet another form, the setting board 970 may be formed not as an independent board but also as a part of a payout control board 951, a power supply board, or a main control board 1310. That is, the setting key 971, the setting change switch 972, the setting confirmation switch 973, and the setting display 974 may be mounted on any of the payout control board 951, the power supply board, or the main control board 1310.

As shown in FIG. 126, the setting board 970 is attached to the right side surface of the lower part (that is, the frame side instead of the game board 5) of the main body frame 4 constituting the pachinko machine 1, and as shown in FIG. 127, When the main body frame 4 is housed in the outer frame 2, at least a part of the setting board 970 faces the right frame member 40 of the outer frame 2. When the main body frame 4 is housed in the outer frame 2, the distance between the setting board 970 and the right frame member 40 is narrow, so that it is difficult to operate the keys and switches on the setting board 970 in this state. In this way, the right frame member 40 hides the setting key 971 and hinders the insertion of the key into the keyhole of the setting key 971, making it difficult to operate the setting board 970 (setting change operation unit). Functions as a means. In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, with the main body frame 4 housed in the outer frame 2, the setting key 971 may face the right frame member 40 of the outer frame 2 at a narrow interval as at least a part of the setting board 970. However, the entire setting board 970 may face the right frame member 40 of the outer frame 2 at a narrow interval. In this case, the keys and switches may be arranged vertically so that the width of the setting board 970 does not exceed the width of the right frame member 40. In this way, when all of the setting board 970 faces the right frame member 40 of the outer frame 2 at a narrow interval, it is set during the operation of the pachinko machine 1 (that is, the main body frame 4 is housed in the outer frame 5). It is possible to make the operation of the board 970 difficult and suppress fraudulent acts in which the player changes the settings of the pachinko machine 1.

The member (means for making setting change difficult) facing the setting substrate 970 in a state where the main body frame 4 is housed in the outer frame 5 is the right frame member 40 in the illustrated example, but other members may be used. For example, the cover provided on the outer frame 5 may be arranged at a position facing the setting board 970 at a narrow interval in a state where the main body frame 4 is housed in the outer frame 5. Further, a cover that moves in conjunction with the opening and closing of the main body frame 4 may be provided, and when the main body frame 4 is housed in the outer frame 5, the cover may be arranged at a position facing the setting board 970 at a narrow interval. ..

The setting change difficulty means composed of the members provided so as to face the setting board 970 may be a cover covering the setting board 970. In this case, the setting key 971 that triggers the start of the setting mode may be covered with a double cover. For example, an inner cover that covers the setting board 970 and an outer cover that covers various control boards including the setting board 970 are provided. Further, an inner cover that covers the keyhole of the setting key 971 and an outer cover that covers the setting board 970 may be provided. More specifically, the setting board 971 is housed in the setting board case, and the setting board case has a first cover that prevents inadvertent operation of the setting key 971 and the switches 972 and 973 (at least the setting key 971). Provide a body (for example, a door-shaped lid that can be opened during operation). Further, a second cover body covering various control boards including the setting board 970 and the main control board 1310 is provided on the outer frame 5. The second cover body may be provided on the main body frame 4 or the game board 2 to cover various control boards. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the start of the setting mode due to an inadvertent operation, and it is possible to suppress an illegal act in which an unauthorized player changes the setting of the pachinko machine 1.

The distance at which the setting board 970 faces a member such as the right frame member 40 while the main body frame 4 is housed in the outer frame 5 is the head of the key inserted into the keyhole of the setting key 971 (the key head to be gripped during operation). ) Should be shorter than the length.

The setting board 970 may be arranged in the vicinity of the power switch 932 so that the setting key 971 and the power switch 932 operated when the setting is changed are arranged in the vicinity. By doing so, the operability when activating the setting change mode can be improved.

Further, as shown in FIG. 127, the power supply board box 930 is provided with a power switch 932 for energizing the pachinko machine 1, and the payout control board unit 950 is initially equipped with the game control RAM 1312 of the pachinko machine 1. A RAM clear switch 954 is provided. As described above, the pachinko machine 1 is provided with a plurality of switches that are not operated during the game and can be operated from the back side. However, the power switch 932 and the RAM clear switch 954 described above are from the back side. It is provided at a position where it can be visually recognized and operated. On the other hand, the setting key 971 (preferably also the setting change switch 972 and the setting confirmation switch 973) is provided at a position where it is difficult to see and operate from the back surface side during the operation of the pachinko machine 1. This is because the power switch 932 and the RAM clear switch 954 are frequently operated in the manufacturing process, so that they are provided at positions that can be operated from the back surface side during the operation of the pachinko machine 1. On the other hand, the setting key 971 is hidden so that it is difficult to operate while the pachinko machine 1 is in operation, so that the setting board 970 is operated during the game to suppress fraudulent acts of changing the setting of the pachinko machine 1. As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the switches on the back side of the pachinko machine 1 are arranged so as to achieve both convenience and suppression of fraudulent activities.

Similarly, it is desirable that the current set value of the pachinko machine 1 is not known to the player because it is important information for selecting the machine of the player. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 127, similarly to the setting key 971, the setting display 974 may be opposed to the right frame member 40 at a narrow interval so that the display cannot be seen. Normally, when the main body frame 4 is housed in the outer frame 2 or the setting key 971 is not operated, the setting display 974 is turned off so that the player does not know the set value. Is desirable. In this way, the right frame member 40 functions as a visibility difficulty means for hiding the display content of the setting display 974 and making it difficult to visually recognize the display content of the setting display 974 (setting state display unit).

FIG. 128 (B) is a view of the setting board 970 viewed from above with the main body frame 4 housed in the outer frame 2. In this state, since the setting board 970 faces the right frame member 40 at a narrow interval, the head of the key 975 inserted into the keyhole of the setting key 971 and the right frame member 40 interfere with each other, and the setting key 971 The key 975 cannot be inserted into the keyhole.

On the other hand, when the main body frame 4 is released from the outer frame 2, the right frame member 40 is not located in front of the keyhole of the setting key 971, and the key 975 can be inserted into the keyhole of the setting key 971.

Further, the display surface of the setting display 974 faces the side surface of the pachinko machine 1, and when the main body frame 4 is housed in the outer frame 2, it faces the right frame member 40, so that the player faces the right frame member 40 from the front. It is difficult to check the current settings of pachinko machines.

FIG. 129 is a diagram showing a modified example of the setting board 970.

In this modified example as well, the setting board 970 is provided with the setting key 971, the setting change switch 972, the setting confirmation switch 973, and the setting display 974, as in the above-described example. However, in this modification, the setting key 971 is arranged sideways on the setting board 970, and the key 975 is inserted from the side of the setting board.

Therefore, the setting board 970 of this modification is installed not on the side surface side of the main body frame 4 but on the back surface side so that the keyhole faces the side surface. Then, as shown in FIG. 129 (B), when the setting board 970 is viewed from above, the side surface (that is, the keyhole) of the setting board 970 is the right frame member 40 in a state where the main body frame 4 is housed in the outer frame 2. Since the head of the key 975 inserted into the keyhole of the setting key 971 interferes with the right frame member 40, the key 975 cannot be inserted into the keyhole of the setting key 971.

In the modified example shown in FIG. 129, the board of the pachinko machine 1 can be arranged in the same direction as the other boards, and even if the difficulty of board placement is reduced, the setting board 970 is operated while the pachinko machine 1 is in operation. It is possible to suppress fraudulent acts that change the settings of the pachinko machine 1.

Next, a modified example of the pachinko machine having the setting unit will be described. In this modification, the setting board 970 is provided on the game board 5 instead of the main body frame 4, and is connected to the main control board 1310.

FIG. 130 is a block diagram schematically showing a control configuration of a pachinko machine of this modified example, FIG. 131 is a perspective view of a game board having a setting unit from behind, and FIG. 132 is a perspective view of FIG. 131. It is a perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine which mounted the game board shown from the back.

The setting board 970 is provided with a setting key 971, a setting change switch 972, a setting confirmation switch 973, and a setting display 974. The setting board 970 may be the one shown in FIG. 128 (A) or the one shown in FIG. 129 (A).

In the pachinko machine 1 shown in FIG. 130, the setting board 970 for setting the game performance of the pachinko machine is connected to the main control board 1310, and the main control MPU 1310 acquires the operation state of each switch, and the main control MPU 1310 Controls the display of the setting display 974.

The functions and configurations of the setting board 970 and each component on the setting board are the same as those in the above-described embodiment, and common description will be omitted.

The main control board 1310 is provided with a base display 1317 composed of 7-segment LEDs. Therefore, the base display 1317 and the setting display 974 may be used in combination, and the selected setting value or the current setting value may be displayed on the base display 1317. In this case, the display mode may be changed so that the display of the base value and the display of the set value can be distinguished. For example, although four digits are used for displaying the base value, only a predetermined one digit may be used for displaying the set value, and "-" may be displayed for the other digits. Further, in the base display, the first two digits indicate the type of display data, and the numbers are not displayed. Therefore, the setting value may be displayed using the most significant digit.

In the illustrated example, the setting board 970 is connected to the main control board 1310, but the setting board 970 may be formed on a part of the main control board 1310 instead of an independent board. That is, the setting key 971, the setting change switch 972, the setting confirmation switch 973, and the setting display 974 may be mounted on the main control board 1310.

The setting board 970 may be enclosed in the main control board box 1320 together with the main control board 1310. When the setting board 970 is enclosed in the main control board box 1320, the main control board box 1320 has holes or notches for operating the setting key 971, the setting change switch 972, and the setting confirmation switch 973 on the setting board 970. Is provided.

When the setting board 970 is enclosed in the main control board box 1320, the structure of the main control board box 1320, that is, the opening / closing direction differs depending on the direction of the keyhole of the setting key 971 on the setting board 970. Specifically, when the key 975 is inserted vertically into the board from the front of the board, the main control board box 1320 is vertically separated from the setting board 970 by the front surface and the back surface of the setting board 970, or the front side box body ( Alternatively, the cover) and the backside box may be configured to be openable and closable with one side as a hinge. On the other hand, when the key 975 is inserted in the direction in which the substrate is stretched from the side, the main control board box 1320 is formed by the front side box (or cover) of the setting board 970 and the back side box in the stretching direction of the setting board 970. It is preferable to have a structure that slides in (the insertion direction of the key 975) to separate the keys.

In this modification, the operation signals of the setting key 971, the setting change switch 972, and the setting confirmation switch 973 on the setting board 970 are taken into the main control MPU 1311. Further, the setting display 974 is controlled by the main control MPU 1311.

As shown in FIG. 131, the setting board 970 is attached to the right side surface (left side in FIG. 131) of the game board 5 constituting the pachinko machine 1, and as shown in FIG. 132, the game board 5 is attached. When the main body frame 4 is housed in the outer frame 2, at least a part of the setting board 970 faces the right frame member 40 of the outer frame 2. When the main body frame 4 is housed in the outer frame 2, the distance between the setting board 970 and the right frame member 40 is narrow. Therefore, when the main body frame 4 is housed in the outer frame 2, the keys on the setting board 970 The operation of the switch is difficult. In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, with the main body frame 4 housed in the outer frame 2, the setting key 971 may face the right frame member 40 of the outer frame 2 at a narrow interval as at least a part of the setting board 970. However, the entire setting board 970 may face the right frame member 40 of the outer frame 2 at a narrow interval. In this case, the keys and switches may be arranged vertically so that the width of the setting board 970 does not exceed the width of the right frame member 40. In this way, when all of the setting board 970 faces the right frame member 40 of the outer frame 2 at a narrow interval, it is set during the operation of the pachinko machine 1 (that is, the main body frame 4 is housed in the outer frame 5). By operating the board 970, it is possible to suppress fraudulent acts that change the settings of the pachinko machine 1.

The member (means for making setting change difficult) facing the setting substrate 970 in a state where the main body frame 4 is housed in the outer frame 5 is the right frame member 40 in the illustrated example, but other members may be used. For example, the cover provided on the outer frame 5 may be arranged at a position facing the setting board 970 at a narrow interval in a state where the main body frame 4 is housed in the outer frame 5. Further, a cover that moves in conjunction with the opening and closing of the main body frame 4 may be provided, and when the main body frame 4 is housed in the outer frame 5, the cover may be arranged at a position facing the setting board 970 at a narrow interval. ..

The distance at which the setting board 970 faces a member such as the right frame member 40 while the main body frame 4 is housed in the outer frame 5 is the head of the key inserted into the keyhole of the setting key 971 (the key head to be gripped during operation). ) Should be shorter than the length.

Further, as shown in FIG. 132, the power supply board box 930 is provided with a power switch 932 for energizing the pachinko machine 1, and the payout control board unit 950 is initially equipped with the game control RAM 1312 of the pachinko machine 1. A RAM clear switch 954 is provided. As described above, the pachinko machine 1 is provided with a plurality of switches that are not operated during the game and can be operated from the back side. However, the power switch 932 and the RAM clear switch 954 described above are from the back side. It is provided at a position where it can be visually recognized and operated. On the other hand, the setting key 971 (preferably also the setting change switch 972 and the setting confirmation switch 973) is provided at a position where it is difficult to see and operate from the back surface side during the operation of the pachinko machine 1. This is because the power switch 932 and the RAM clear switch 954 are frequently operated in the manufacturing process, so that they are provided at positions that can be operated from the back surface side during the operation of the pachinko machine 1. On the other hand, the setting key 971 is hidden so that it is difficult to operate while the pachinko machine 1 is in operation, so that the setting board 970 is operated during the game to suppress fraudulent acts of changing the setting of the pachinko machine 1. As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the switches on the back side of the pachinko machine 1 are arranged so as to achieve both convenience and suppression of fraudulent activities.

Similarly, it is desirable that the current set value of the pachinko machine 1 is not known to the player because it is important information for selecting the machine of the player. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 132, similarly to the setting key 971, the setting display 974 may be opposed to the right frame member 40 at a narrow interval so that the display cannot be seen. Normally, when the main body frame 4 is housed in the outer frame 2 or the setting key 971 is not operated, the setting display 974 is turned off so that the player does not know the set value. Is desirable. In this way, the right frame member 40 functions as a visibility difficulty means for hiding the display content of the setting display 974 and making it difficult to visually recognize the display content of the setting display 974 (setting state display unit).

In the pachinko machine 1 shown in FIG. 130, a view of the setting board 970 viewed from above with the main body frame 4 housed in the outer frame 2 is as shown in FIGS. 128 (B) and 129 (B). .. In this state, the keyholes of the setting board 970 and the setting key 971 face the right frame member 40 at a narrow interval, so that the head of the key 975 inserted into the keyhole of the setting key 971 interferes with the right frame member 40. However, the key 975 cannot be inserted into the keyhole of the setting key 971.

Further, the display surface of the setting display 974 faces the side surface of the pachinko machine 1, and when the main body frame 4 is housed in the outer frame 2, it faces the right frame member 40, so that the player faces the right frame member 40 from the front. It is not possible to check the current settings of the pachinko machine.

Next, the process related to the setting change will be described.

FIG. 133 is a flowchart showing an example of the initialization process. The initialization process shown in FIG. 133 is compared with the initialization process described above in FIG. 21, and the point where the RAM clear process is performed when the setting key is operated (step S17, step S30) and the CPU initialization process (step). The difference is that the setting change process is performed in S28). The same steps as those in the initialization process described above in FIG. 21 are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

When the power is turned on to the pachinko gaming machine 1, the main control MPU 1311 of the main control board 1310 executes the main control program to perform the initialization process. First, the main control MPU 1311 sets the protection of the RAM 1312 built in the main control MPU 1311 to write permission so that the RAM 1312 can be written (step S10). Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 activates the built-in watchdog timer (step S12), and determines whether a predetermined wait time (time required for the sub-board (peripheral control board 1510, etc.) to start) has elapsed. Determine (step S16). If the predetermined wait time has elapsed, it is determined whether the setting key 971 is being operated and its output is on (step S17). When the setting key 971 is operated, among the data backed up in the work area of the built-in RAM 1312, the set value data and the game state (for example, probabilistic state, time saving state, hold storage of special symbol or normal symbol, prize ball) Data other than the data of) is deleted (step S30), and the process proceeds to step S24.

On the other hand, when the setting key 971 is not operated, it is determined whether the RAM clear switch is operated (step S18). When the RAM clear switch is operated, the data in the area other than the base calculation work area (base calculation area 13128) among the data backed up in the work area of the built-in RAM 1312 is erased (step S30), and step S24. Proceed to. On the other hand, when the RAM clear switch is not operated, the data backed up in the built-in RAM 1312 is not erased, and it is determined whether or not the power failure flag is set (step S20).

As a result, if the power failure flag is not set, the data in the work area of the built-in RAM 1312 may not be correct. Therefore, the data backed up in the work area (other than the base calculation area 13128) is deleted (step S30). , Step S24. On the other hand, if the power failure flag is set, the power failure flag is cleared, and the checksum calculated from the data backed up in the work area of the built-in RAM 1312 using the checksum calculated at the time of the previous power failure and the checksum in step S48. The stored checksum is compared (verified) (step S22).

As a result, if the checksum calculated from the backup data and the checksum stored in step S48 do not match, the data in the work area of the built-in RAM 1312 may not be correct, so the data backed up in the work area ( The area (other than the base calculation area 13128) is erased (step S30), and the process proceeds to step S24. On the other hand, if the checksum calculated from the backup data and the checksum stored in step S48 match, the data in the work area of the built-in RAM 1312 is correct, so the data backed up in the work area is not erased, and step S24 Proceed to.

Subsequently, it is determined whether the base calculation work area (base calculation area 13128) is normal by using the check code (step S24). If it is determined to be abnormal, the data in the base calculation work area may not be correct, so the data stored in the base calculation work area is deleted (step S26).

In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, as a case where at least a part of the area of the RAM 1312 is initialized, the operation of the setting key 971 (step S17), the operation of the RAM clear switch (S18), and the power failure flag are set. There are a power failure flag error (S20) that has not been set, a RAM error (S22) in which the RAM checksums do not match, and an error (S24) in the base calculation work. Of these, as shown in the figure, when the operation of the setting key 971 is detected when the power is turned on, the set value and the game state in the game control area 13126 (including the game work area and the game stack area). Data other than (for example, probabilistic state, time saving state, reserved memory of special symbol or normal symbol, information on prize ball) is cleared, and base calculation area 13128 (outside the game area) is not cleared. If the operation of the RAM clear switch is detected when the power is turned on, or if the power failure flag is abnormal or the RAM is abnormal, the game control area 13126 (including the game work area and the game stack area) is cleared and the base is calculated. Area 13128 (including the base calculation work area and the base calculation stack area) is not cleared. Further, in the case of a base calculation work abnormality, the base calculation area 13128 (outside the game area) is cleared, and the game control area 13126 is not cleared.

Note that, unlike the ones shown in the figure, in the case of a power failure flag abnormality, a RAM abnormality, or a base calculation work abnormality, the validity of the data stored in the RAM 1312 is not guaranteed, so that the game control area 13126 and the base calculation area 13128 You may clear the entire RAM area including. If the entire RAM area is cleared when the base calculation work is abnormal, the data indicating the game state is lost and normal processing cannot be executed. If the memory configuration is such that the base calculation work area and the base calculation stack area cannot be executed. Only should be initialized. When the operation of the RAM clear switch is detected when the power is turned on, the game control area 13126 (including the game work area and the game stack area) is cleared, and the base calculation area 13128 is set as described above. You don't have to clear it.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the data backed up in the work area of the built-in RAM 1312 is used for base calculation for each data type (game control area 13126 (set value, game state data)). Area 13128) Erase under different conditions. That is, by operating the RAM clear switch, the backed up game control area 13126 other than the set value is erased, and the set value and the base calculation area 13128 are not erased. This is because if the set value is erased by operating the RAM clear switch, it is necessary to reset the set value every time the RAM clear switch is operated, which complicates the maintenance of the pachinko machine 1 in the hall. Therefore, the set value is not erased by operating the RAM clear switch.

For the processing after step S28, either FIG. 22 or FIG. 102 may be adopted as necessary. The difference between FIGS. 22 and 102 is the presence or absence of processing (steps S50 and S52) in which a check code is calculated and stored from the data in the base calculation work area (base calculation area 13128) when the power is turned off.

134 and 135 are flowcharts showing an example of setting change processing and setting display processing, and FIG. 134 shows that the setting board 970 is connected to the payout control board 951 (or is integrally configured with the payout control board 951). FIG. 135 shows the processing when the setting board 970 is connected to the main control board 1310 (or is integrally configured with the main control board 1310).

First, the setting change process in which the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951 shown in FIG. 134 (A) are linked will be described.

When the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 1, (1) the payout control unit 952 determines whether the setting key 971 is turned on and whether the main body frame 4 is released from the outer frame 2. Whether or not the main body frame 4 is open from the outer frame 2 can be determined by the detection signal from the main body frame open switch. Considering from the arrangement position of the setting key 971, in order to operate the setting key 971, the main body frame 4 is opened from the outer frame 2, so that the determination of opening the main body frame 4 may be omitted. ..

If the setting key 971 is turned on and the main body frame 4 is released from the outer frame 2, the payout control unit 952 starts the setting mode. In this way, the payout control unit 952 functions as a setting change allowable state generating means. As the start conditions of the setting mode other than the above, the operation of the handle lever 504 of the handle unit 500, the detection by the contact detection sensor 509 by touching the handle lever 504, and the prepaid card being inserted in the CR unit (prepaid card). It is not necessary to start the setting mode when there is a balance put into the cash sand. Further, even when the pachinko machine 1 detects the possibility of some kind of fraudulent activity (for example, a magnetic error), it is better not to start the setting mode. The determination of these conditions may be performed after the main control MPU 1311, not the payout control unit 952, receives the setting change start command. In such a case, it is presumed that the maintenance of the pachinko machine 1 is not performed by the hall, and there is a possibility that an unauthorized player is trying to change the setting. Therefore, it is better not to shift to the setting mode.

(2) When the setting mode is started, the payout control unit 952 transmits a setting change start command to the main control board 1310.

(3) When the main control MPU 1311 receives the setting change start command from the payout control unit 952, the main control MPU 1311 executes the RAM clear process before the setting change. The RAM clearing process before this setting change is performed in the game control area 13126 (including the game work area and the game stack area) in the game state (for example, the probability change state, the time saving state, the special symbol, and the hold storage of the normal symbol). , Information about prize balls) is cleared, and the base calculation area 13128 (outside the game area) is not cleared. Since the set value is set to the initial value later in step (6), it does not have to be cleared in this step.

(4) After that, the main control MPU 1311 transmits a setting change start command to the peripheral control unit 1511.

(5) When the peripheral control unit 1511 receives the setting change start command from the main control MPU 1311, the peripheral control unit 1511 notifies that the setting mode is in progress. The notification in the setting mode performs the initial operation of the accessory or makes a predetermined display on the liquid crystal display device 1600. The peripheral control unit 1511 does not have to perform the initial operation of the accessory. For example, when displaying the procedure or status of setting change on the liquid crystal display device 1600, if the initial operation of the accessory is performed during the setting change, the display of the liquid crystal display device 1600 is partially hidden, and the setting change work. Because it interferes with.

Further, the main control MPU 1311 may also notify the setting mode in accordance with the notification of the setting mode by the peripheral control unit 1511. For example, the display of the function display unit 1400 may be displayed in a special mode that does not appear during the normal game (for example, all the LEDs for displaying the special symbol are turned off or on) to stop the progress of the game. .. Further, the main control MPU 1311 may notify the setting mode by stopping the detection of the winning ball and the out ball and stopping the progress of the game. As a result, the base value is not calculated in the setting mode. Further, the main control MPU 1311 may notify the setting mode by stopping the output of the launch permission signal, stopping the launch of the game ball controlled by the launch control device, and functioning as a launch disabled means. Good. When the firing of the game ball is stopped during the setting mode, the firing of the game ball during the firing stop period may be regarded as an error, and an error may be detected when the handle lever 504 of the handle unit 500 is operated during the period.

(6) Next, the main control MPU 1311 resets the set value to 0. As described above, the set value can be selected from 1 to 6, the set value = 0 is the state in which the setting is not set, and the set value = 0 cannot end the setting mode, and the game (launching the game ball). , Variable display game, etc.) does not start.

(7) After that, each time the player operates the setting change switch 972, the payout control unit 952 displays the selected set value on the setting display 974.

(8) The payout control unit 952 determines whether the main body frame 4 is open from the outer frame 2. Although the opening of the main body frame 4 is determined in the above-mentioned procedure (1), it may be determined at least once before determining the operation of the setting confirmation switch 973. In this way, the payout control unit 952 functions as a setting change permissible state generating means for determining whether or not the setting change condition is satisfied before the setting change is confirmed.

(9) Further, the payout control unit 952 determines whether the setting confirmation switch 973 is operated.

(10) If the main body frame 4 is open from the outer frame 2 and the setting confirmation switch 973 is operated, the payout control unit 952 confirms the selected set value, and the set value is confirmed. Is displayed on the setting display 974. The set value confirmation display may display a value that cannot be selected as the setting value (for example, 8), or may display the confirmed setting value blinking for a predetermined time.

(11) After that, the payout control unit 952 determines whether or not the setting key 971 is turned off.

(12) If the setting key 971 is turned off, the setting mode is terminated, so that the payout control unit 952 transmits a setting change end command to the main control board 1310. By this setting change end command, the confirmed setting value is notified to the main control MPU 1311.

(13) When the main control MPU 1311 receives the setting change end command from the payout control unit 952, the main control MPU 1311 transmits the setting change end command to the peripheral control unit 1511.

(14) When the peripheral control unit 1511 receives the setting change end command from the main control MPU 1311, the peripheral control unit 1511 ends the notification during the setting change. At the same time, if the main control MPU 1311 notifies that the setting is being changed, this also ends.

The notification (including the game stop and the launch stop) may be canceled immediately after the setting mode is completed, or may be canceled after a predetermined time has elapsed. If the notification performed in the procedure (5) is considered to be a mere notification to the outside (player, hall employee), the notification may be canceled immediately after the setting mode ends. However, if the notification performed in the procedure (5) is caught from the viewpoint of finding fraudulent activity, it is preferable to cancel the notification after the setting mode ends and a predetermined time elapses. This is because when the setting is changed, the predetermined display is displayed for a predetermined time or the game is stopped, so that it becomes easy to detect that an unauthorized player has changed the setting during business hours. is there.

When the launch of the game ball is stopped in a predetermined period after the end of the setting mode, the launch of the game ball during the launch stop period is regarded as an error, and an error is detected when the handle lever 504 of the handle unit 500 is operated during the period. You may.

(15) After that, the main control MPU 1311 executes the RAM clear process after the setting change. The RAM clear processing after this setting change is performed in the game control area 13126 (including the game work area and the game stack area) with the set value and the game state (for example, the probability change state, the time saving state, the special symbol, and the normal symbol). Data other than the hold memory and prize ball information) are cleared, and the base calculation area 13128 (outside the game area) is not cleared. That is, in the RAM clear process after the setting change, the set value is not initialized unlike the RAM clear process before the setting change.

Then, the setting mode is terminated.

In this way, when the setting board 970 is connected to the payout control board 951 and functions as a child board of the payout control board 951 (or the setting board 970 is integrally configured with the payout control board 951). , The main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951 cooperate with each other to execute the setting change process.

In the above-described processing, the payout control unit 952 determines whether the setting key 971 is being operated, but the main control MPU 1311 may determine. In this case, the signal related to the operation of the setting key 971 from the payout control unit 952 to the main control board 1310 is transmitted by serial communication, a predetermined pulse signal (a predetermined number of pulses of a predetermined frequency is transmitted), or a power supply voltage. However, a signal having an intermediate potential that is neither the ground voltage nor the ground voltage may be output. In order to prevent fraudulent activity that short-circuits the terminal of the setting key 971 and activates the setting mode, a signal related to the operation of the setting key 971 is sent from the main control board from the payout control unit 952 by a signal that cannot occur due to the short-circuiting of the terminal. This is because it is preferable to transmit to 1310.

Next, the setting display process in which the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951 shown in FIG. 134 (B) are linked will be described.

When the setting key 971 is turned on while the pachinko machine 1 is operating (energized), the payout control unit 952 detects the operation of the setting key 971 and starts the setting display mode.

(1) In the setting display mode, the payout control unit 952 determines whether the main body frame 4 is open from the outer frame 2. Considering from the arrangement position of the setting key 971, in order to operate the setting key 971, the main body frame 4 is opened from the outer frame 2, so that the determination of opening the main body frame 4 may be omitted. ..

(2) When it is determined that the main body frame 4 is open from the outer frame 2, the payout control unit 952 transmits a set value request command to the main control board 1310.

(3) When the main control MPU 1311 receives the set value request command from the payout control unit 952, the main control MPU 1311 reads the set value stored in the main control RAM 1312 and transmits the set value notification command to the payout control unit 952.

(4) The payout control unit 952 displays the set value notified by the set value notification command from the main control MPU 1311 on the setting display 974.

In the above, the set value stored in the main control board 1310 (main control RAM 1312) is displayed on the setting display 974, but the payout control unit 952 stores the set value and stores it in the payout control unit 952. The set value may be displayed on the setting display 974.

Next, the setting change process by the main control board 1310 shown in FIG. 135 (A) will be described.

When the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 1, (1) the main control MPU 1311 determines whether the setting key 971 is turned on and whether the main body frame 4 is released from the outer frame 2. In this way, the main control MPU 1311 functions as a setting change allowable state generating means. Whether or not the main body frame 4 is open from the outer frame 2 can be determined by the detection signal from the main body frame open switch. The detection signal of the main body frame release switch is transmitted to the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 951. The payout control board 951 may transmit a main body frame opening detection command to the main control board 1310 based on the received detection signal of the main body frame opening detection switch. Further, the payout control board 951 may output the received detection signal of the main body frame opening detection switch to the main control board 1310 as it is. Considering from the arrangement position of the setting key 971, in order to operate the setting key 971, the main body frame 4 is opened from the outer frame 2, so that the determination of opening the main body frame 4 may be omitted. ..

If the setting key 971 is turned on and the main body frame 4 is released from the outer frame 2, the main control MPU 1311 starts the setting mode. As the start conditions of the setting mode other than the above, the operation of the handle lever 504 of the handle unit 500, the detection by the contact detection sensor 509 by touching the handle lever 504, and the prepaid card being inserted in the CR unit (prepaid card). It is not necessary to start the setting mode when there is a balance put into the cash sand. Further, even when the pachinko machine 1 detects the possibility of some kind of fraudulent activity (for example, a magnetic error), it is better not to start the setting mode. In such a case, it is presumed that the maintenance of the pachinko machine 1 is not performed by the hall, and there is a possibility that an unauthorized player is trying to change the setting. Therefore, it is better not to shift to the setting mode.

(3) When the setting mode starts, the main control MPU 1311 executes the RAM clear processing before the setting change when receiving the setting change start command from the payout control unit 952. The RAM clearing process before this setting change is performed in the game control area 13126 (including the game work area and the game stack area) in the game state (for example, the probability change state, the time saving state, the special symbol, and the hold storage of the normal symbol). , Information about prize balls) is cleared, and the base calculation area 13128 (outside the game area) is not cleared. Since the set value is set to the initial value later in step (6), it does not have to be cleared in this step.

(4) After that, the main control MPU 1311 transmits a setting change start command to the peripheral control unit 1511.

(5) When the peripheral control unit 1511 receives the setting change start command from the main control MPU 1311, the peripheral control unit 1511 notifies that the setting mode is in progress. The notification in the setting mode performs the initial operation of the accessory or makes a predetermined display on the liquid crystal display device 1600. The peripheral control unit 1511 does not have to perform the initial operation of the accessory. For example, when displaying the procedure or status of setting change on the liquid crystal display device 1600, if the initial operation of the accessory is performed during the setting change, the display of the liquid crystal display device 1600 is partially hidden, and the setting change work. Because it interferes with.

Further, the main control MPU 1311 may also notify the setting mode in accordance with the notification of the setting mode by the peripheral control unit 1511. For example, the display of the function display unit 1400 may be displayed in a special mode that does not appear during a normal game (for example, all the LEDs for displaying special symbols are turned off or on) to stop the progress of the game. .. Further, the main control MPU 1311 may notify the setting mode by stopping the detection of the winning ball and the out ball and stopping the progress of the game. As a result, the base value is not calculated in the setting mode. Further, the main control MPU 1311 may notify the setting mode by stopping the output of the launch permission signal, stopping the launch of the game ball controlled by the launch control device, and functioning as a launch disabled means. Good. When the firing of the game ball is stopped during the setting mode, the firing of the game ball during the firing stop period may be regarded as an error, and an error may be detected when the handle lever 504 of the handle unit 500 is operated during the period.

(6) Next, the main control MPU 1311 resets the set value to 0. As described above, the set value can be selected from 1 to 6, the set value = 0 is the state in which the setting is not set, and the set value = 0 cannot end the setting mode, and the game (launching the game ball). , Variable display game, etc.) does not start.

(7) After that, each time the player operates the setting change switch 972, the main control MPU 1311 displays the selected set value on the setting display 974.

(8) The main control MPU 1311 determines whether the main body frame 4 is open from the outer frame 2. Although the opening of the main body frame 4 is determined in the above-mentioned procedure (1), it may be determined at least once before determining the operation of the setting confirmation switch 973. In this way, the payout control unit 952 determines whether the conditions for the setting change are satisfied (in particular, whether the detection signal of the main body frame release switch is input from the payout control board 951) before the setting change is confirmed. It functions as a means for generating an allowable state.

(9) Further, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether the setting confirmation switch 973 is operated.

(10) If the main body frame 4 is open from the outer frame 2 and the setting confirmation switch 973 is operated, the main control MPU 1311 confirms the selected set value and confirms that the set value is confirmed. It is displayed on the setting display 974. The set value confirmation display may display a value that cannot be selected as the setting value (for example, 8), or may display the confirmed setting value blinking for a predetermined time.

(11) After that, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether or not the setting key 971 is turned off.

(13) If the setting key 971 is turned off, the setting mode is terminated, so that the main control MPU 1311 transmits a setting change end command to the peripheral control unit 1511.

(14) When the peripheral control unit 1511 receives the setting change end command from the main control MPU 1311, the peripheral control unit 1511 ends the notification during the setting change. At the same time, if the main control MPU 1311 notifies that the setting is being changed, this also ends.

The notification (including the game stop and the launch stop) may be canceled immediately after the setting mode is completed, or may be canceled after a predetermined time has elapsed. If the notification performed in the procedure (5) is considered to be a mere notification to the outside (player, hall employee), the notification may be canceled immediately after the setting mode ends. However, if the notification performed in the procedure (5) is caught from the viewpoint of finding fraudulent activity, it is preferable to cancel the notification after the setting mode ends and a predetermined time elapses. This is because when the setting is changed, the predetermined display is displayed for a predetermined time or the game is stopped, so that it becomes easy to detect that an unauthorized player has changed the setting during business hours. is there.

When the launch of the game ball is stopped in a predetermined period after the end of the setting mode, the launch of the game ball during the launch stop period is regarded as an error, and an error is detected when the handle lever 504 of the handle unit 500 is operated during the period. You may.

(15) After that, the main control MPU 1311 executes the RAM clear process after the setting change. The RAM clear processing after this setting change is performed in the game control area 13126 (including the game work area and the game stack area) with the set value and the game state (for example, the probability change state, the time saving state, the special symbol, and the normal symbol). Data other than the hold memory and prize ball information) are cleared, and the base calculation area 13128 (outside the game area) is not cleared. That is, in the RAM clear process after the setting change, the set value is not initialized unlike the RAM clear process before the setting change.

Then, the setting mode is terminated.

In this way, when the setting board 970 is connected to the main control board 1310 and functions as a child board of the main control board 1310 (or the setting board 970 is integrally configured with the main control board 1310). Since the main control board 1310 acquires the detection signal of the main body frame release switch from the payout control board 951, the setting change process cannot be executed only by the main control board 1310, and the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951 cooperate with each other. Is executing the setting change process.

Next, the setting display process in which the setting board 970 and the payout control board 951 shown in FIG. 135 (B) are linked will be described.

When the setting key 971 is turned on while the pachinko machine 1 is operating (energized), the main control MPU 1311 detects the operation of the setting key 971 and starts the setting display mode.

In the setting display mode, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether the main body frame 4 is open from the outer frame 2. Considering from the arrangement position of the setting key 971, in order to operate the setting key 971, the main body frame 4 is opened from the outer frame 2, so that the determination of opening the main body frame 4 may be omitted. ..

When it is determined that the main body frame 4 is open from the outer frame 2, the main control MPU 1311 reads the set value stored in the main control RAM 1312 and displays it on the setting display 974.

If the pachinko machine 1 detects an error during the setting mode in the setting change process described with reference to FIGS. 134 (A) and 135 (A), the setting mode may be invalidated and the setting mode may be temporarily stopped. Then, by shutting off the power of the pachinko machine 1 and turning it on again, the stopped setting mode is restarted. The setting mode may be restarted from the stage where it was stopped due to error detection, or from the beginning of the setting mode (setting value = 0 when the setting value is not selected).

To change the set value, it is advisable to record the history a predetermined number of times. Specifically, the date and time when the setting is confirmed and the confirmed setting value are stored in the RAM of the main control RAM 1312 or the peripheral control unit 1511. When the history of set values is stored in the peripheral control unit 1511, it is preferable to store it in the RAM in the RTC provided in the peripheral control unit 1511 because the stored contents are backed up even when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is cut off. Furthermore, the history of changes in the recorded setting values can be output. For example, it is preferable to display the history of changes in the recorded set values on the liquid crystal display device 1600 by a predetermined operation.

When the set value is changed, the measurement interval of the base value may be changed. That is, when the set value is changed, even if the total number of out balls in the section currently measuring the base value is less than 52000, the section is ended and the next section is started. Since the game performance of the game machine is changed by the set value, by changing the section by changing the set value, it is possible to calculate the base value in which different game performances are not mixed, and it is possible to grasp the transition of the base value by changing the set value. ..

Further, when the set value is changed, the section in which the base value is currently being measured may be continued without changing the interval in which the base value is measured. Since the set value changes the operating ratio of the condition device, it is possible to design the base value so that the base value does not change significantly by changing the set value. In such a case, it is not necessary to change the calculation interval of the base value by changing the set value.

Further, when both the operation of the RAM clear switch 954 and the on operation of the setting key 971 are detected when the power is turned on, the setting mode may be activated. In the ON operation of the RAM clear switch 954 and the setting key 971, considering the operation method and the arrangement of the operation means, the operation of the setting key 971 is less likely to be operated by mistake, so that the setting mode is activated. This is because it is considered to be the intention of the operator. Further, in the setting mode, the stored contents of the main control RAM 1312 other than the game state and the base value are cleared. Therefore, even if the RAM clearing is desired, it is considered sufficient to activate the setting mode.

On the other hand, when both the operation of the RAM clear switch 954 and the on operation of the setting key 971 are detected when the power is turned on, the RAM may be cleared without activating the setting mode. This is because it is considered that the operator wants at least RAM clear when both are operated. Further, when both the operation of the RAM clear switch 954 and the on operation of the setting key 971 are detected when the power is turned on, neither the setting mode is activated nor the RAM is cleared. This is because, from the viewpoint of file-safe against erroneous operations, it is preferable not to accept operations for which the intention of the operator is not clear.

In the RAM clearing in steps (3) and (15) described above, the game state data is maintained, but the reserved memory of the special symbol may be erased. Since the set value changes the operating ratio of the condition device, the random number determination result of the special symbol lottery may change. For this reason, it is preferable to erase the reserved memory of the special symbol and have a new lottery performed.

On the other hand, the lottery of special symbols (extraction of winning random numbers) is performed when the game ball wins the starting winning opening, but the lottery result is judged at the start of the variable display game, so the conditions after changing the set value. The random number value held and stored in is determined. Therefore, the reserved memory of the special symbol may be maintained.

Further, in the RAM clearing in the steps (3) and (15) described above, the main control RAM 1312 may be initialized in the same area as the area erased due to the operation of the RAM clear switch 954. That is, in the RAM clear process in the setting mode, the backed up game control area 13126 other than the set value is erased (the game state data is also erased), and the set value and the base calculation area 13128 are not erased. Normally, setting changes are made between the closing of the hall and the opening of the next day, so the game status data (probability change status, time saving status, reserved memory of special symbols and ordinary symbols, information on prize balls, etc.) is deleted. There is no need to maintain it without it.

[11-2. Production on pachinko machines with setting functions]
[11-2-1. Special design and special electric accessory control processing]
The details of the processing by the main control MPU 1311 will be described below. First, the special symbol and the special electric accessory control process will be described. FIG. 136 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the special symbol and the special electric accessory control process. The special symbol and the special electric accessory control process are executed in the process of step S86 in the main control side timer interrupt process. Hereinafter, the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004 are also collectively referred to as a starting port. In addition, the first major winning opening 2005 and the second major winning opening 2006 are collectively referred to as simply the major winning opening. In addition, the first special symbol and the second special symbol are collectively called a special symbol.

In the special symbol and special electric accessory control process, when the game ball is accepted into the starting port, that is, when the starting prize is won (the starting condition is satisfied), a big hit is made for each starting memory information (starting information) for which this starting condition is satisfied. A random number for determination is acquired, and it is determined whether or not the random number for jackpot determination matches the jackpot determination value stored in advance in the main control built-in ROM (lottery means). Then, it is determined whether or not to generate the jackpot game state based on the lottery result, and when the jackpot random number value matches the jackpot determination value (predetermined winning conditions are satisfied), it is usually Shift from the game state to the jackpot game state. Hereinafter, the procedure of the special symbol and the special electric accessory control process will be described with reference to the flowchart shown in FIG. 136.

When the special symbol and special electric accessory control process is started, the main control MPU 1311 first determines whether or not the game ball B has won a prize in the large winning opening (step S100). When the game ball B wins the grand prize opening (the result of step S100 is "yes"), the grand winning opening winning designation command is set (step S102).

Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether or not the game ball has won a prize at the starting port (step S112). Then, whether or not the game ball has won a prize in the start port is determined by the presence or absence of a detection signal from the first start port sensor 3002 or the second start port sensor 2511 in the switch input process (step S74) in the main control side timer interrupt process. It is read and performed based on the input information stored in the input information storage area of the main control built-in RAM.

When the game ball wins a prize in the start opening (the result of step S114 is “yes”), the main control MPU 1311 executes the start opening winning process (step S116). In the start-up opening winning process, a start-up opening winning command to be transmitted when a new game ball is won in the starting opening is set, a random number for jackpot judgment is extracted and stored in a predetermined area, and a special symbol is used. It executes processing for executing the look-ahead effect.

Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 executes the corresponding process based on the special symbol / electric accessory operation number which is the game progress state variable in which the type of the branch process executed according to the progress of the game is specified (step). S124). The game progress state variable is stored in the game progress state storage area of the main control built-in RAM, and is updated in each branch process executed according to the progress of the game. In the process of step S124, the process shifts to the branch process specified based on the value of the game progress state variable stored in the game progress state storage area, and when the transferred branch process is completed, the special symbol and the special electric accessory control End the process. Since the value of the game progress state variable stored in the game progress state storage area is game information, it is backed up in the main control side power off processing.

In the process of step S130, special symbol change waiting process (step S130), special symbol change process (step S132), special symbol jackpot determination process (step S134), as branching process, based on the value of the game progress state variable. Special symbol loss stop processing (step S136), special symbol big hit stop processing (step S138), big winning opening pre-opening interval processing (step S140), big winning opening opening processing (step S142), big winning opening closing processing (step) S144) or the large winning opening opening end interval process (step S146) is executed.

In the special symbol change waiting process (step S130), a process of starting the variation display of the special symbol on the special symbol display is performed based on the fact that the game ball B has entered the start port.

In the special symbol change processing (step S132), a process of controlling the change display of the special symbol is performed. In the special symbol jackpot determination process (step S134), it is determined whether or not the special symbol that has been confirmed and stopped causes the jackpot game state based on the fact that the game ball has entered the start opening.

In the special symbol loss stop process (step S136), when the big hit game state is not generated, the variation display of the special symbol is stopped and a process for notifying the fact is performed. In the special symbol jackpot stop process (step S138), when a jackpot game state is generated, a process of stopping the variable display of the special symbol and notifying the fact is performed.

In the interval process before opening the big winning opening (step S140), a process for generating a big hit game state and notifying that the big hit operation is started is performed. In the large winning opening opening process (step S142), processing related to the big hit operation that makes it easy for the game ball to enter each large winning opening is performed by opening the large winning opening.

In the processing during closing of the large winning opening (step S144), processing related to the big hit operation that makes it difficult for the game ball to enter each large winning opening is performed by changing the large winning opening from the open state to the closed state. In the winning opening opening end interval processing (step S146), when the jackpot operation is completed, a process for notifying that fact is performed.

[11-2-2. Special symbol change waiting process]
Subsequently, the details of the special symbol change waiting process (step S130) in the special symbol and special electric accessory control process will be described. FIG. 137 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the special symbol change waiting process. The special symbol change waiting process is executed in a state in which the change display of the special symbol is not executed, and when the change display is suspended, preparations are made to start the change display of the special symbol.

The main control MPU 1311 first determines whether or not the change of the special symbol is suspended (step S420). Specifically, it is determined whether or not the number of balls on hold for special symbol operation is not 0. In addition, when a plurality of start ports are provided, the number of special symbol operation hold balls is stored for each start port. If the change of the special symbol is not reserved (the result of step S420 is "no"), the change display of the special symbol is not started, so this process ends.

On the other hand, when the variable display of the special symbol is suspended (the result of step S420 is "yes"), the main control MPU 1311 sets the reserved ball number designation command as command data (step S438).

Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 executes a special symbol / flag setting process (step S442). In the special symbol / flag setting process, a special lottery is executed based on a random number for determining a jackpot acquired at the time of winning the starting opening.

Further, the main control MPU 1311 executes a special symbol variation pattern setting process (step S444). In the special symbol variation pattern setting process, the variation pattern is set based on the result of the special lottery. Details of the special symbol variation pattern setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 122.

Next, the main control MPU 1311 creates a variation pattern command to be transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510. Specifically, first, as a command value, a high-order byte of the special symbol variation pattern reference command corresponding to the special symbol identification flag is set (step S452). Further, the fluctuation pattern value stored in the fluctuation pattern area is set as the lower command data (step S458). Further, by acquiring the variation type type value from the variation type type area (step S460) and adding the variation type type value to the command value set in the process of step S452, the upper byte of the variation pattern command according to the variation type. Is calculated (step S462). The command data of the variation pattern command created in this way is stored in a predetermined area.

Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 sets a symbol type command to be transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 (step S466). Further, the variable state specification command is set in the command buffer (step S474).

Each command created by the above process is set in the command buffer. The reserved ball number designation command set in the command buffer is transmitted by the peripheral control board command transmission process (step S92) in the main control side timer interrupt process.

[11-2-3. Special symbol fluctuation pattern setting process]
Subsequently, the details of the special symbol variation pattern setting process (step S444) in the special symbol variation waiting process will be described. The special symbol variation pattern setting process is a process for setting a variation pattern in the variation display of the special symbol. FIG. 138 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the special symbol variation pattern setting process.

The main control MPU 1311 first acquires the number of balls on hold for special symbol operation (step S530). The number of balls on hold for special symbol operation is stored in the number of balls on hold for special symbol operation. Further, the main control MPU 1311 sets the jackpot flag from the jackpot flag area (step S538).

Then, the main control MPU 1311 executes a variation pattern selection determination process for selecting a variation pattern of the special symbol based on the number of balls on hold for special symbol operation and the jackpot flag (step S542). Details of the variation pattern selection determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. 139.

Next, the main control MPU 1311 acquires the fluctuation pattern value extracted by the fluctuation pattern selection determination process (step S544). Then, the data (variation time value) corresponding to the fluctuation pattern value is searched from the special symbol fluctuation time data (step S546).

Further, the main control MPU 1311 executes a variation type determination process for selecting the variation type defined in the variation pattern in the variation display of the special symbol (step S548). The variation type type value acquired by the variation type determination process is set (step S550).

Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 searches the fluctuation time addition value data for the fluctuation time addition value corresponding to the fluctuation type type value (step S552). The fluctuation time addition value is the addition time corresponding to the fluctuation type, and corresponds to, for example, the addition time according to the number of pseudo-reams. Then, the main control MPU 1311 adds the fluctuation time addition value searched in the process of step S552 to the reference fluctuation time value searched in the process of step S546 to acquire the final fluctuation time (step S554). .. Finally, the final fluctuation time is stored in the special symbol / electric accessory operation timer area (step S556), and the special symbol fluctuation pattern setting process is completed.

[11-2-4. Fluctuation pattern selection judgment processing]
Subsequently, the details of the variation pattern selection determination process (step S542) will be described. FIG. 139 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the variation pattern selection determination process. The variation pattern selection determination process is a process for selecting a variation pattern in the variation display of a special symbol.

The main control MPU 1311 first acquires the fluctuation information source table based on the fluctuation table number (step S340). The variable table number is a value for selecting (acquiring) the variable information source table from the variable information source address table. The fluctuation information source table is a hit (hit fluctuation selection information status table), a miss (missing fluctuation selection information status table), a reach (reach fluctuation selection information status table), and a reach probability (special symbol reach probability) according to the game state. A data table in which table information for referring to a table) and a variation type (variation type determination data table) is stored.

Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 acquires a winning determination value for deriving the result of the special lottery (step S346). It is determined whether or not the jackpot is won by determining whether or not the hit determination value matches the jackpot value (step S350). If the jackpot is won (the result of step S350 is "yes"), the jackpot flag and the jackpot symbol type are acquired (step S354).

Next, the main control MPU 1311 executes the fluctuation information number search process based on the jackpot flag and the jackpot symbol type (step S358). In the variation information number search process, the variation information number for determining the hit-time variation pattern selection value data table is acquired from the jackpot variation selection information type table. The main control MPU 1311 acquires a random number 1 for a variation pattern from the jackpot variation selection information type table based on the acquired variation information number (step S360).

On the other hand, if the main control MPU 1311 has not won a big hit or a small hit (the result of step S350 is "no"), it determines whether or not to generate reach in the variable display corresponding to the start winning (step). S372).

When the main control MPU 1311 does not generate reach in the fluctuation display (the result of step S372 is "no"), the main control MPU 1311 acquires the random number 1 for the fluctuation pattern from the out-of-bounds fluctuation selection information reservation table based on the number of reserved balls (step). S376).

On the other hand, when the main control MPU 1311 generates a reach in the fluctuation display (the result of step S372 is “yes”), the main control MPU 1311 acquires the random number 1 for the fluctuation pattern from the reach fluctuation selection information status table based on the status flag. (Step S382).

Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 executes the variation information number search process based on the random number 1 for the variation pattern acquired in the processes of step S360, step S378 or step S382 (step S388). Then, the variation pattern selection value data table is acquired by the variation information number search process, and the variation pattern random number 2 is acquired from the variation pattern selection value data table (step S392). Further, the variation information number search process is executed based on the variation pattern random number 2 and the variation pattern selection value data table (step S394). A variation pattern is selected based on the result of the variation information number search process (step S396), and this process ends.

In the present embodiment, the variation pattern is selected in two steps by two types of random numbers, the variation pattern random number 1 (steps S360, S372, S378) and the variation pattern random number 2 (step S392). First, the type of fluctuation pattern (variation pattern group such as XX reach) is selected based on the random number 1 for the fluctuation pattern. Further, from the variation pattern group selected by the variation pattern random number 1 based on the variation pattern random number 2, the variation pattern (value set in the variation pattern command) to be finally varied is selected. The lottery method is not limited to two stages, and a lottery method may be used in three or more stages, or a random number for one fluctuation pattern may be used to directly select a fluctuation pattern.

[11-3. Explanation of production on pachinko machines with setting functions]
Hereinafter, the effect of the pachinko machine 1 having the setting function will be described. Specifically, a setting suggestion effect that suggests the current setting will be described. In the pachinko machine 1 having a setting function, for example, the higher the setting, the larger the number of game balls paid out with respect to the number of special lottery. Specifically, for example, the higher the setting, the higher the jackpot winning probability in the non-probability state (for example, setting 1: 1/300, setting 2: 1/290, setting 3: 1/280, setting 4: 1/270). , Setting 5: 1/250, Setting 6: 1/230, etc.). Therefore, since the player wants to play the game with the pachinko machine 1 having a setting as high as possible, the motivation for playing is increased by installing the setting suggestion effect.

Hereinafter, in this chapter, for convenience of explanation, the main control MPU 1311 directly selects a fluctuation pattern with a random number for one fluctuation pattern in the fluctuation pattern selection determination process in step S542. Specifically, in this chapter, the main control MPU 1311 shall execute the following processing in step S542.

In step S542, the main control MPU 1311 is in the current gaming state (whether it is a time saving state (a state in which the time saving control is executed) or a normal state other than the time saving state) and the result of the special lottery (winning a big hit). Select the fluctuation pattern table according to whether it is done or not. When the result of the special lottery is a big hit, the main control MPU 1311 acquires a random number for the fluctuation pattern, and based on the acquired random number for the fluctuation pattern and the distribution of each fluctuation pattern in the selected fluctuation pattern table, A variation pattern shall be selected from the selected variation pattern table. In addition, if the result of the special lottery is out of order, it is further determined whether or not reach has occurred, a random number for the fluctuation pattern is acquired, and the acquired random number for the fluctuation pattern and each fluctuation pattern in the selected fluctuation pattern table are distributed. A variation pattern shall be selected from the selected variation pattern table based on.

FIG. 140 (A) is an example of a variation pattern table selected when the gaming state is the normal state and the result of the special lottery is out of order. FIG. 140 (B) is an example of a variation pattern table selected when the game state is the normal state and the result of the special lottery is a big hit.

The variation pattern table is stored in, for example, the main control ROM 1313. The variation pattern table includes, for example, a variation pattern type column, a variation time column, a corresponding effect content column, and a random number distribution column for determining a variation pattern. The variation pattern type column stores information for specifying the type for identifying the variation pattern in the table. The fluctuation time column stores information that identifies the fluctuation time in the corresponding fluctuation pattern type. The corresponding effect content column stores information that identifies the effect content to be executed in the corresponding variation pattern.

The distribution random number column for determining the fluctuation pattern stores the distribution in which the corresponding fluctuation pattern is selected for each setting. In addition, the random number column for determining the fluctuation pattern of the fluctuation pattern table (that is, the fluctuation pattern table of FIG. 140 (A) and FIG. 145 (A) described later) selected when the special lottery result is out of order is displayed when reach occurs. And for each of the times when reach does not occur, the distribution in which the corresponding fluctuation pattern is selected is stored for each setting.

[11-4. Setting suggestion effect that is executed after the temporary display of the special lottery result]
First, the setting suggestion effect in the deviation variation pattern stored in the variation pattern table of FIG. 140 (A) will be described. First, the effect executed in the deviation fluctuation patterns 24 to 29 will be described with reference to FIG. 141.

FIG. 141 is a schematic diagram showing an example of the effects executed in the deviation variation patterns 20 and 24 to 29 in the variation pattern table of FIG. 140 (A). In the fluctuation of the deviation variation pattern 20, after the temporary display indicating that the special lottery result is likely to be out of order is displayed on the effect display device 1600 after the SP reach 1 is executed, the special lottery result is subsequently out of order. A confirmation display indicating the presence is displayed on the effect display device 1600. On the other hand, in the fluctuations of the deviation fluctuation patterns 25 to 29, a temporary display indicating that the special lottery result is likely to be deviation is displayed on the effect display device 1600 after the SP reach 1 is executed, and then the setting is made. The suggestion effect is executed, and then a confirmation display indicating that the special lottery result is out of order is displayed on the effect display device 1600.

In this way, in the fluctuation patterns 25 to 29, even if the temporary display is executed by executing the setting suggestion effect after performing the temporary display indicating that the special lottery result is likely to be out of order. The player can expect the subsequent setting suggestion effect to occur and maintain a sense of expectation. Further, when the setting suggestion effect occurs due to the deviation fluctuation, even if the special lottery result is out of order, the player's disappointment due to the special lottery result can be suppressed, and eventually the feeling of exhilaration can be enhanced.

In the fluctuation of the deviation variation pattern 24, after the SP reach 1 is executed, a temporary display indicating that the special lottery result is likely to be deviation is displayed on the effect display device 1600, and then the setting suggestion effect is executed. However, the setting suggestion effect itself is not performed, and a definite display indicating that the special lottery result is out of order is displayed on the effect display device 1600.

The SP reach is a reach effect in which a high percentage is selected when the result of the special lottery is a big hit, and a low percentage is selected when the result of the special lottery is out of order. In other words, the expectation of a big hit of the fluctuation in which SP reach is executed is high.

Hereinafter, the effects executed in the deviation fluctuation patterns 20 and 24 to 29 will be specifically described. In addition to the contents described below, in each effect, sound output from various speakers, light emission from various lamps, operation of various movable bodies, and / or display on the effect display device 1600 are simultaneously executed. May be good.

In the deviation variation patterns 20 and 24-29, first, the pre-reach effect is executed. In the pre-reach effect, all the decorative symbols are changed in the effect display device 1600. Subsequently, in the deviation fluctuation patterns 20 and 24-29, the normal reach effect is developed. In the normal reach effect, the decorative symbol is in the reach state on the effect display device 1600. Specifically, for example, of the three decorative symbols (for example, the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol), the left symbol and the right symbol stop at the same symbol, and the middle symbol is in a changing state.

Subsequently, in the deviation fluctuation patterns 20 and 24 to 29, the SP reach 1 is developed, and the first half effect of the SP reach 1 is executed. In SP reach 1, for example, one main character and one enemy character are displayed on the effect display device 1600, and a rock-paper-scissors game is played. In the first half of the SP reach 1 in the deviation variation patterns 20 and 24 to 29, the effect display device 1600 executes an effect in which the main character loses to the enemy character in a rock-paper-scissors game. In the SP reach, the decorative symbol may be displayed at a position closer to the periphery of the display device 1600, for example, as compared with the pre-reach effect and the normal reach effect.

Subsequently, in the deviation fluctuation patterns 20 and 24-29, the latter half of SP reach 1 is produced. In the second half production of SP reach 1 in the deviation variation pattern 20 and 24-29, for example, a so-called revival production is executed, and for example, at the start of the second half production, the voice of the main character such as "Still more!" On the display device 1600, the effect of playing a rock-paper-scissors game between the main character and the enemy character is executed again. In the latter half of the SP reach 1 in the deviation fluctuation patterns 24 to 29, the effect display device 1600 executes an effect in which the main character loses to the enemy character again in a rock-paper-scissors game.

Subsequently, a temporary display in which the special lottery result is out of order is executed on the effect display device 1600. Specifically, for example, in the effect display device 1600, one combination of decorative symbols in the detached state (for example, the left symbol and the right symbol of the decorative symbol are the same symbols as the symbols stopped in the reach state, and the middle symbol is the corresponding symbol. A symbol different from the same symbol) is displayed in a manner as if it is shaking with a small width.

Subsequently, in the disengagement variation pattern 20, after the provisional display, a definite display indicating that the special lottery result was deviated is displayed on the effect display device 1600 without performing any other effect. In the deviation variation pattern 24, the setting suggestion ghost effect is executed after the provisional display, and then a final display indicating that the special lottery result is deviation is displayed on the effect display device 1600. On the other hand, in the deviation variation patterns 25 to 29, the setting suggestion effect is executed after the provisional display, and then a definite display indicating that the special lottery result is out is displayed on the effect display device 1600. In the final display, for example, in the effect display device 1600, the same combination as the combination of the decorative symbols displayed in the temporary display is displayed in a completely stopped manner. In the temporary display and the final display, the decorative symbol is displayed, for example, in the central portion of the effect display device 1600 in the same size as in the pre-reach effect and the normal reach effect.

In the setting suggestion Gase effect in the deviation variation pattern 24, for example, in the effect display device 1600, one main character discovers two enemy characters, and an effect that chases the enemy character but cannot catch it is executed. As in the distribution of the deviation variation pattern 24 in FIG. 140 (A), it is desirable that the distribution of the variation pattern in which the setting suggestion gassing effect is executed is equal or approximately equal in all the settings. This is because if the distribution is not even, the setting suggestion effect suggests the setting.

Further, it is desirable that the ratio of the deviation pattern 24 distribution to the total distribution of the fluctuations in which the SP reach 1 is executed is low (for example, 20% or less). This is because if the distribution is high, the setting suggestion effect will be generated frequently when the SP reach 1 is developed, and the player's expectation for the occurrence of the setting suggestion effect may be reduced.

In the setting suggestion effect in the deviation fluctuation patterns 25 to 29, for example, in the effect display device 1600, one main character discovers two enemy characters, chases and catches the enemy character, and then three people play a rock-paper-scissors game. The production is executed.

In the setting suggestion effect in the deviation variation pattern 25, in a rock-paper-scissors game with three people, all three people play goo and become enthusiastic. Further, in FIG. 140 (A), the deviation variation pattern 25 is defined so as to be distributed only at low settings (settings 1, 2, and 3). That is, the setting suggestion effect in the deviation variation pattern 25 is an effect in which the low setting is fixed.

In the example of FIG. 140 (A), the distribution of the deviation variation pattern 25 is the same value as the distribution of the deviation variation pattern 26 and the like in the high setting (settings 4, 5, and 6), but the low setting confirmation effect is achieved. If it occurs, the player may stop the game early, so the distribution of the deviation variation pattern 25 may be set lower than the distribution of the other setting confirmation effect in other settings, or the deviation variation pattern 25 itself does not have to exist.

In the setting suggestion effect in the deviation variation pattern 26, in a rock-paper-scissors game with three people, all three people play a choki and become a friend. Further, in FIG. 140 (A), the deviation variation pattern 26 is defined so as to be distributed only at high settings (settings 4, 5, and 6). That is, the setting suggestion effect in the deviation variation pattern 26 is an effect in which the high setting is fixed.

In the setting suggestion effect in the deviation variation pattern 27, in a rock-paper-scissors game with three people, all three people give a par and become a friend. Further, in FIG. 140 (A), the deviation variation pattern 27 is defined so as to be distributed only in even-numbered settings (settings 2, 4, and 6). That is, the setting suggestion effect in the deviation variation pattern 27 is an effect in which the even number setting is fixed.

In the setting suggestion effect in the deviation variation pattern 28, in the rock-paper-scissors game with three people, the effect of making a different move by all three people is executed. Further, in FIG. 140 (A), the deviation variation pattern 28 is defined so as to be distributed only in odd-numbered settings (settings 1, 3, and 5). That is, the setting suggestion effect in the deviation variation pattern 28 is an effect in which the odd number setting is fixed.

For example, when the odd number setting and the even number setting have different characteristics, the player can be interested in the effect by installing the odd number setting confirmation effect or the even number setting confirmation effect as described above. ..

Specifically, for example, the jackpot winning probability in the normal state is high in the order of settings 6, 4, 2, 5, 3, 1 (6 is the highest, 1 is the lowest), and settings 5, 3, 1, 6, 4, Probability change jackpot ratio is higher in the order of 2 jackpots (5 is the highest, 2 is the lowest), and the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004 are in the order of settings 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, 1. It is assumed that the jackpot winning probability and the probability variation ratio in each setting are set so that the ratio of the total number of game balls paid out to the number of prizes won in the game balls is high (6 is the highest and 1 is the lowest).

In this case, the even number setting has a higher probability of winning a big hit in the normal state than the odd number setting, but the probability variation rate is low, that is, the number of game balls required to win the so-called first hit tends to be smaller. The total amount of game balls that can be obtained from a single consecutive villa from the first hit tends to be small. On the other hand, the odd number setting has a lower probability of winning a big hit in the normal state than the even number setting, but the probability variation rate is high, that is, the number of game balls required to win the first hit tends to be larger, but the first hit The total amount of game balls that can be obtained from one consecutive villa is likely to increase. In such a case, there is a possibility that one player prefers an even-numbered ball ejection tendency and another player prefers an odd-numbered ball ejection tendency. Therefore, an odd-numbered setting confirmation effect or an even-numbered setting confirmation effect may occur. The player's interest in the production will increase. Further, the even number setting may have a feature that the jackpot winning probability in the normal state is higher than that of the odd number setting, but a jackpot with a small number of rounds is easily selected.

In the above-mentioned deviation fluctuation patterns 25 to 29, the effects until the setting suggestion effect starts are the same, but the contents of the setting suggestion effect are different (the results in the rock-paper-scissors game with three people are different). It is desirable that the rock-paper-scissors game production by three people is used only in the out-of-range fluctuation patterns 25 to 29. As a result, the player can recognize that the setting suggestion production has started when the rock-paper-scissors game production by three people starts, and the feeling of exhilaration is further enhanced.

Note that, for example, the deviation variation pattern 25 is a variation pattern in which an effect of determining the high setting is executed, but may be a variation pattern in which an effect suggesting that the high setting is likely to be executed is executed. Specifically, for example, if the variation pattern 25 is distributed even at the low setting and the distribution is lower than the distribution of the variation pattern 25 at the high setting (for example, 50% or less), the effect of the deviation variation pattern 25 is achieved. Is not an effect in which the high setting is fixed, but an effect that suggests that there is a high possibility of a high setting.

In addition to the variation pattern in which the effect of determining the high setting is executed, the variation pattern in which the effect suggesting that the high setting is likely to be set is executed may be defined. The same applies to the low setting confirmation effect, the odd number setting confirmation effect, the even number setting confirmation effect, the maximum setting confirmation effect, and the like.

According to the fluctuation pattern table of FIG. 140 (B) (the fluctuation pattern table at the time of normal and big hit winning), when the special lottery result is a big hit in the normal state, other than the hit fluctuation pattern 34 in which the maximum setting is determined. The setting suggestion effect of is not executed. In addition, the distribution of fluctuation patterns in which the setting suggestion effect is not executed is higher than in the case where the special lottery result is out of order. As a result, the setting suggestion effect is mainly executed when the special lottery result is out of order, and the player can obtain a sense of expectation even when the special lottery result is out of order.

[11-5. Setting suggestion effect using shortening fluctuation]
Hereinafter, the deviation variation pattern 30 will be described with reference to FIG. 142. FIG. 142 is a schematic diagram showing an example of the effects executed in the deviation fluctuation patterns 1, 2, and 30 in the fluctuation pattern table of FIG. 140 (A).

Shortening variation is performed in the deviation variation patterns 1, 2, and 30. The shortened variation is, for example, a variation in which the variation time is shorter than that of other variation patterns, and after the variation of the decorative symbol is started on the effect display device 1600, all the decorative symbols do not develop into a reach state. Is a fluctuation that stops. In the normal variation, in the effect display device 1600, the decorative symbols are stopped in the order of, for example, the left symbol, the right symbol, and the middle symbol, but in the shortened variation, all the decorative symbols may be stopped at the same time.

Subsequently, in the deviation fluctuation patterns 1, 2, and 30, a provisional display indicating that the special lottery result is likely to be out is performed, and then a definite display is performed to indicate that the special lottery result is out of order. The description of the provisional display and the final display is the same as the above description, and is therefore omitted.

The deviation variation pattern 30 has a variation time different from the variation time of all other variation patterns in which the shortened variation such as the deviation variation patterns 1 and 2 is executed. In the example of FIG. 140 (A), the fluctuation time of the deviation fluctuation pattern 1 is 2 seconds, the fluctuation time of the deviation fluctuation pattern 2 is 5 seconds, and the fluctuation time of the deviation fluctuation pattern 30 is 3.5 seconds. .. Further, in FIG. 140 (A), the deviation variation pattern 30 is defined so as to be distributed only at the highest setting (setting 6). That is, when the deviation variation pattern 30 is executed, the maximum setting is determined.

Further, the distribution of the deviation variation pattern 30 which is the variation pattern in which the shortening variation is executed and suggests the setting is extremely low as compared with the distribution of the other variation patterns in which the shortening variation is executed (for example, the other variation pattern). It is desirable that it is 10% or less of the minimum distribution of. Further, it is desirable that the execution time of the provisional display and the final display is the same in each fluctuation pattern in which the shortened fluctuation is executed, and only the time of the shortened fluctuation is different. Further, it is desirable that the difference between the fluctuation time of the deviation fluctuation pattern 30 and the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern in which other shortened fluctuations are executed is such that the player can recognize it (for example, 1.5 seconds or more). ..

As a result, when the shortened fluctuation is executed, the player assumes a fluctuation time such as the deviation fluctuation patterns 1 and 2 with many distributions, but when the deviation fluctuation pattern 30 is executed, the fluctuation time is assumed to be the same. You can recognize that they are different, and you can enjoy the production where the highest setting is fixed. In particular, in the example of FIG. 140 (A), since the fluctuation pattern including the shortening fluctuation is selected only when the shortening fluctuation is out of reach, the player loses the expectation that the shortening fluctuation is executed and is interested in the shortening fluctuation. I can't have it. However, by executing the setting suggestion effect using the shortening fluctuation in this way, the player can have a sense of expectation for the shortening fluctuation that is selected only when the player is out of reach, and suppresses the decline in interest. can do.

Further, in the deviation fluctuation patterns 1, 2, and 30, the contents displayed on the effect display device 1600 are the same, but only the time of the shortened fluctuation is different. As a result, the player can concentrate on the production so as not to overlook the highest setting final production.

The deviation variation pattern 30 is a variation pattern in which the maximum setting is fixed and the shortening variation is executed. However, for each setting other than the maximum setting, the setting is fixed and the shortening variation is executed. Patterns may exist. In this case, for example, it is desirable that the fluctuation time of each of the fluctuation patterns is different from the fluctuation time of other deviation fluctuation patterns in which the shortened fluctuation is executed.

[11-6. Setting suggestion effect executed before the temporary display of the special lottery result]
Hereinafter, the deviation variation pattern 31 and the hit variation pattern 34 will be described with reference to FIG. 143. FIG. 143 is a schematic diagram showing an example of the effect executed in the deviation variation pattern 31 and the hit variation pattern 34 in the variation pattern table of FIG. 140 (A). In FIG. 140, the deviation variation pattern 31 and the hit variation pattern 34 are defined so as to be sorted only at the highest setting (setting 6). That is, when the deviation variation pattern 31 and the hit variation pattern 34 are executed, the maximum setting is determined.

In the deviation variation pattern 31 and the hit variation pattern 34, for example, the special movie 1 is played on the effect display device 1600 at the same time as the variation starts. The special movie 1 is an effect that occurs only in the deviation variation pattern 31 and the hit variation pattern 34, that is, the effect in which the maximum setting is fixed.

In the deviation variation pattern 31, after the end of the special movie 1, a provisional display indicating that the special lottery result is likely to be out is performed, and then a definite display indicating that the special lottery result is out is performed. In the hit variation pattern 34, after the end of the special movie 1, a provisional display indicating that the special lottery result is a hit is performed, and then a definite display indicating that the special lottery result is a hit is performed.

In the deviation variation pattern 31 and the hit variation pattern 34, unlike the deviation variation patterns 25 to 30, etc., the setting suggestion effect is started before the provisional display (specifically, at the same time as the start of the variation). As a result, the player can obtain an uplifting feeling of waiting for the notification of the jackpot lottery result in the state where the maximum setting is confirmed. Further, especially when the display time of the special movie 1 is long (for example, 30 seconds or more), it is possible to appeal to other players that the setting of the pachinko machine 1 is the highest setting, and by extension, the player. Can feel superiority to the other player, and it becomes easier for the hall to appeal to the other player that the highest setting is used.

[11-7. Setting suggestion production where big hit winning or high setting is confirmed]
Hereinafter, the deviation variation pattern 32 and the hit variation pattern 35 will be described with reference to FIG. 144. FIG. 144 is a schematic view showing an example of the effect executed in the deviation variation pattern 32 and the hit variation pattern 35 in the variation pattern table of FIG. 140 (A). In FIG. 140 (A), the deviation variation pattern 32 is defined so as to be distributed only at high settings (settings 4, 5, and 6). That is, when the deviation variation pattern 32 is executed, the maximum setting is determined.

In the deviation variation pattern 32 and the hit variation pattern 35, for example, the special movie 2 is played on the effect display device 1600 at the same time as the variation starts. The special movie 2 is an effect that occurs only in the deviation variation pattern 31 and the hit variation pattern 34.

In the deviation variation pattern 32, after the end of the special movie 2, a provisional display indicating that the special lottery result is likely to be out is performed, and then a definite display indicating that the special lottery result is out is performed. In the hit variation pattern 35, after the end of the special movie 2, a provisional display indicating that the special lottery result is a hit is performed, and then a definite display indicating that the special lottery result is a hit is performed.

Therefore, when the special movie 2 occurs, one of the high setting and the big hit in the fluctuation is determined. That is, if the special lottery result is out of order after the special movie 2 is generated, the high setting is confirmed, so that the player can suppress the disappointment that the special lottery result is out of order, and by extension, the high setting. A feeling of exhilaration can be obtained by confirming.

Further, especially when the display time of the special movie 2 is long (for example, 30 seconds or more), the player can feel superiority to other players, and after the special movie 2 is generated. If the special lottery result is out of order, it will be easier for the hall to appeal to other players that the high setting is being used.

[11-8. Setting suggestion effect in a time saving state]
Hereinafter, the fluctuation pattern selected in the game state and the time saving state will be described. FIG. 145 (A) is an example of a variation pattern table selected when the game state is a time saving state and the result of the special lottery is out of order. FIG. 145 (B) is an example of a variation pattern table selected when the game state is a time saving state and the result of the special lottery is a big hit.

In the example of FIG. 145 (A), the higher the setting, the larger the distribution of the deviation fluctuation pattern 3 and the smaller the distribution of the deviation fluctuation pattern 2 at the time of non-reach deviation. Further, the fluctuation time of the deviation fluctuation pattern 2 is shorter than the fluctuation time of the deviation fluctuation pattern 3. For example, if the higher the setting, the higher the jackpot winning probability, and if the distribution of each fluctuation pattern is the same in all settings, the higher the setting, the easier it is to win the jackpot in a short time, and per unit time. The number of game balls to be paid out will increase, which may lead to a burden on the hall.

However, as in the example of FIG. 145 (A), the higher the setting, the more the fluctuation pattern with a long fluctuation time is distributed, so that the number of game balls paid out by the jackpot per unit time in each setting can be made equal. it can. Further, the higher the setting, the higher the selection rate of the deviation variation pattern 3 having a long variation time among the variation patterns including the shortened variation. Therefore, the deviation variation pattern 3 also functions as a variation pattern suggesting a high setting. Can be done.

Similarly, even when there is a reach, the higher the setting, the larger the distribution of the deviation fluctuation pattern 11 having a long fluctuation time, and the smaller the distribution of the deviation fluctuation pattern 12 having a short fluctuation time. Similarly, at the time of winning a big hit, the higher the setting, the larger the distribution of the hit fluctuation pattern 2 having a long fluctuation time, and the smaller the distribution of the hit fluctuation pattern 3 having a short fluctuation time.

As described above, for example, when the higher the setting, the higher the jackpot winning probability, and if the distribution of each fluctuation pattern is the same in all the settings, the higher the setting, the easier it is to win the jackpot in a short time. In other words, the lower the setting, the longer it takes to win the jackpot, and the number of game balls fired before winning the jackpot increases. For example, if the lower the setting, the larger the distribution of the fluctuation pattern with a long fluctuation time, and the smaller the selection rate of the fluctuation pattern with a short fluctuation time, the player who stops firing the game ball during the fluctuation, The number of game balls fired per unit time in the setting can be made equal.

It should be noted that a predetermined sound effect may be output or a predetermined light emission effect may be executed at the timing when the setting is suggested in the various setting suggestion effects described in this chapter. The predetermined sound effect and the predetermined light emission effect may be dedicated to be executed only at the time of setting suggestion effect. Further, particularly in the setting suggestion effect in which the high setting or the maximum setting is determined, it is preferable that a predetermined sound effect output or a predetermined light emission effect, which is executed only by the setting suggestion effect, is executed.

It is desirable that the distribution of the fluctuation pattern in which the effect suggesting that the high setting or the maximum setting is fixed or the possibility is high is executed is extremely low as compared with the distribution of other fluctuation patterns. If the distribution of the fluctuation pattern is high, the player loses the sense of expectation if the high setting suggestion effect or the highest setting suggestion effect is not executed even though the player plays only a short game time, and eventually the game is played early. This is because there is a risk of canceling.

Further, it is desirable that the distribution of the fluctuation pattern in which the effect suggesting that the low setting or the minimum setting is fixed or the possibility is high is executed is extremely low as compared with the distribution of the other fluctuation patterns. This is because if the distribution of the fluctuation pattern is high, the low setting suggestion effect and the minimum setting suggestion effect are frequently executed, which may cause the player to lose the sense of expectation and eventually stop the game at an early stage.

Further, although the setting suggestion effect suggesting a group of settings such as high setting, low setting, maximum setting, odd number setting, and even number setting has been described, the setting group in the setting suggestion effect is not limited to these. A setting suggestion effect for any group consisting of one or more settings may be executed. For example, settings 1 and 2 may be set as low settings, settings 3 and 4 may be set as intermediate settings, and settings 5 and 6 may be set as high settings, or there may be a group consisting of only setting 5.

[12. Slot machine]
Up to this point, the arrangement of the programs and data stored in the ROM of the pachinko machine has been described. Next, the arrangement of the programs and data stored in the RAM and ROM of the slot machine (rotary type gaming machine) will be described. Although the pachinko machine has been outlined with reference to FIG. 26, the programs and data are arranged in the RAM and ROM as in the case of the slot machine 4000 described below.

[12-1. Construction]
First, the structure of the slot machine 4000 in this embodiment will be described. FIG. 146 is a perspective view of the slot machine 4000, and FIG. 147 is a perspective view of the slot machine 4000 with the front member 4200 open.

As shown in FIGS. 146 and 147, in the slot machine 4000 of the present embodiment, various devices are provided inside a box-shaped housing 4100 having an open front surface, and a front member is provided on the front surface of the housing 4100. The 4200 is provided so as to be openable and closable in a single-sided manner. An image display body 4500 for displaying and displaying information according to the progress of the game, a speaker for producing sound, and the like are provided above the front member 4200. The image display body 4500 is composed of, for example, a liquid crystal display panel, and displays various information in addition to the effect display related to the game. Then, various effect displays and history information displays on the image display body 4500 are controlled by the effect control board 4700. That is, the image display body 4500 serves as an effect display means capable of displaying an effect according to the progress of the game, and the effect control board 4700 provides a display control means capable of performing display control of the effect display means. Eggplant.

At the center of the front member 4200, a front panel is arranged so that the rear cannot be seen and a pattern for decoration is drawn, and the rear can be seen at the center of the front panel (for example, transparent). ) A design display window 4401 is formed. The front panel may be configured by a display device, and the reel 4301 can be visually recognized when the image is not displayed on the symbol display window 4401, and an image for producing a game is mainly displayed around the symbol display window 4401. To do. In this case, it is also possible to display an image for producing the game on the portion of the symbol display window 4401.

Through the symbol display window 4401 (window portion), it is possible to visually recognize the symbol that is variablely displayed by the rotation of the reel 4301 arranged in the housing. The reel 4301 includes a cylindrical left reel 4301a, a middle reel 4301b, and a right reel 4301c arranged side by side in the horizontal direction. A strip-shaped sheet on which a plurality of symbols are drawn is wound around the outer peripheral surfaces of these reels 4301a, 4301b, 4301c, so that the plurality of symbols are arranged according to a predetermined arrangement.

Reel drive motors 4341a, 4341b, 4341c (see FIG. 148), which are stepping motors, are provided on the reels 4301a, 4301b, 4301c, respectively, and the reels 4301a, 4301b, 4301c are independently rotated and stopped. It is possible to do. That is, the reel drive motors 4341a, 4341b, 4341c form the drive source of the reels 4301a, 4301b, 4301c, respectively. Further, the reel drive motors 4341a, 4341b, and 4341c are controlled by a two-phase excitation method in the same manner as the payout motor 839 of the pachinko gaming machine 1 described above, thereby increasing the drive torque and the static torque. As a result, it becomes possible to adopt a small motor as a drive source, and the cost can be reduced.

In the following, the reels 4301a, 4301b, and 4301c will be referred to as the left reel 4301a, the middle reel 4301b, and the right reel 4301c, respectively, as necessary. The corresponding reel stop buttons 4211a, 4211b, and 4211c are designated as the left reel stop button 4211a, the middle reel stop button 4211b, and the right reel stop button 4211c. Further, the reel drive motors 4341 corresponding to each reel are the left reel drive motor 4341a, the middle reel drive motor 4341b, and the right reel drive motor 4341c.

Further, by rotating the reel 4301 by the reel drive motor 4341, a plurality of types of symbols visually recognized from the symbol display window 4401 are changed so as to circulate from top to bottom, for example (variation display). On the other hand, when the reels 4301 are stopped, for each reel 4301a, 4301b, 4301c, a predetermined number (for example, three) of consecutive symbols, that is, a total of nine symbols of 3 × 3, are transmitted through the symbol display window 4401. It is visible. That is, the effective display units of the reels 4301a, 4301b, and 4301c for deriving and displaying the stop result of the game can be visually recognized through the symbol display window 4401.

A predetermined enableable line is set for the 3 × 3 symbol matrix visually recognized from the symbol display window 4401. In the present embodiment, a line (middle line) that crosses the middle symbol of each reel 4301a, 4301b, 4301c, a line that diagonally crosses each reel 4301a, 4301b, 4301c from the left reel 4301a lower-middle reel 4301b middle-right reel 4301c upper stage ( (Right-up line), left reel 4301a upper-middle reel 4301b middle-right reel 4301c lower line that diagonally crosses each reel 4301a, 4301b, 4301c (right-down line) is an enableable line. Then, the enableable line is activated by the player inserting a medal or inputting from a credit (hereinafter referred to as "bet operation"), and based on the symbol combination mode (roll) formed on this valid line. It is judged whether or not the prize (role) is established.

When a prize is established, three predetermined symbols may be lined up on the effective line, or three predetermined symbols may be lined up on another line in appearance. As such a line, there is a line (upper line) that crosses the upper symbol of each reel 4301a, 4301b, 4301c. It should be noted that the line (lower line) that crosses the lower symbol of each reel 4301a, 4301b, 4301c and the front portion (visible part) facing the symbol display window 4401 of each reel 4301a, 4301b, 4301c other than the above are crossed. The symbols may appear to be lined up on the virtual line located. Below, the enableable lines (middle, rising to the right, falling to the right), the lines where the symbols can be visually aligned at the time of winning (upper line), and other lines (lower line, etc.) are grouped together to stop the symbols (design alignment). Line).

The upper, middle, lower, upward-sloping, and downward-sloping lines are set as enableable lines, and a predetermined enableable line is activated according to the number of bets, and a prize is won based on the symbol combination mode formed on this valid line. Judge the establishment / non-establishment of the combination). For example, in the number of bets 1, the middle line is the effective line, in the number of bets 2, the middle line is added to the upper and lower lines, and in the number of bets 3, the upper, middle and lower lines are added to the upper, middle and lower lines, and the upward and downward right lines are the effective lines. And. In addition, all lines may be valid regardless of the number of bets (even if the number of bets is 1 or 2), or may be dedicated to 3 cards.

Around (for example, below) the symbol display window 4401, a payout number display LED 4562 that displays the number of medals paid out by the game is provided. A credit display for displaying the number of medals stored in the slot machine 4000 and a count display for displaying the number of remaining games in the special prize may be provided.

A step portion projecting to the front side is formed below the design display window 4401, and the upper surface of this step portion is an operation unit 4202 that inclines downward toward the front side. The operation unit 4202 is provided with a medal insertion port 4203, a single insertion button 4205, and a max bet button 4206 as a progress operation unit for advancing the game.

The medal insertion slot 4203 is arranged on the right side of the operation unit 4202 when viewed from the front side of the slot machine 4000. The game can be executed when the player inserts a medal into the medal insertion slot 4203 and performs a betting operation. A insertion sensor 4207b for detecting the passage of medals is provided in the path through which the medals inserted from the medal insertion port 4203 pass, and the number of inserted medals is counted based on the detection information by the insertion sensor 4207b.

The one-sheet insertion button 4205 and the max bet button 4206 are arranged on the left side of the operation unit 4202 when viewed from the front side of the slot machine 4000. The one-sheet insertion button 4205 can be input one by one from the credit by performing the pressing operation once. The max bet button 4206 can input from credits to the maximum number of bets (for example, 3) by performing a pressing operation once, but if the number of credits is less than the maximum number, the number of credits is input as the number of bets. It has become like.

A refund button 4209, a start lever 4210, a return button 4208, a reel stop button 4211, a key device 4215, and the like are provided below the operation unit 4202. The refund button 4209 is paid out as a medal inserted from the medal insertion slot 4203, a medal (bet medal) input as the number of bets by the single insertion button 4205, and the max bet button 4206, or a prize is established and stored as a credit. It is used when giving a command to return the medal (stored medal) to the medal tray 4201. In addition, when medals are inserted from the medal slot 4203 after the automatic betting operation based on the establishment of the replay winning (replay winning), or the medals exceeding the predetermined number that can be stored as credits are also for medals via the medal selector 4207. It will be returned to the saucer 4201.

The start lever 4210 is an operation lever for starting a break game. The key device 4215 is for inserting a key when opening the front member 4200 or when resetting the error (for example, hopper error) state of the slot machine 4000. The return button 4208 is used when the medal inserted from the medal insertion slot 4203 and packed inside the medal selector 4207 is returned to the medal tray 4201.

The reel stop button 4211 includes a left reel stop button 4211a, a middle reel stop button 4211b, and a right reel stop button 4211c, which are provided in a one-to-one correspondence with the left reel 4301a, the middle reel 4301b, and the right reel 4301c, respectively. The purpose is to stop the rotation of the corresponding reels 4301a, 4301b, 4301c according to the stop operation, respectively.

Further, below the portion where these operation buttons are provided, a decorative plate (decorative panel) forming a lower region of the front member 4200 is provided. Further, below the decorative plate and at the bottom of the front member 4200, a medal tray 4201 for storing medals, a medal payout outlet, a speaker 4512 for outputting sound, and the like are provided.

A main board (game control device) 4600 (see FIG. 148) that controls the entire slot machine 4000 is arranged in the upper part inside the housing. A bonus ratio indicator 1317 and a bonus ratio display switch 1318 are provided on the main board 4600. The accessory ratio display 1317 is composed of, for example, a 4-digit 7-segment LED, similar to the pachinko machine described above. The accessory ratio display 1317 may be configured by a liquid crystal display device provided on the main board 4600.

The accessory ratio display 1317 is not provided on the main board 4600, but is also used as another display (for example, payout number display LED4562 or image display 4500) provided in front of the slot machine 4000, and payout number display LED4562. Or the image display body 4500 may display the accessory ratio.

When the accessory ratio display switch 1318 is operated, the accessory ratio is displayed on the accessory ratio display 1317. It is preferable to indicate on the printed circuit board near the accessory ratio display switch 1318 or on the housing 4100 that the switch is for operating the accessory ratio display (printing, engraving, sticker, etc.). It is desirable that the accessory ratio display switch 1318 is provided near the accessory ratio indicator 1317, but even if it is not the main control unit 1300, if it is in a place where it is easy to operate, another board (for example, an effect) It may be provided on the control board 4700, the power supply device 4112), the housing 4100, or the front member 4200. Further, as will be described later, the accessory ratio display switch 1318 may also be used as a RAM clear switch. By providing the accessory ratio display switch 1318 at a position where the player cannot operate it, it is possible to prevent the player from erroneously operating it.

Further, a symbol variation display device 4300 is provided substantially in the center of the inside of the housing, and rotatable reels 4301a, 4301b, 4301c are placed. Further, an external relay terminal plate 4131 for outputting a signal from the main board 4600 to an external device is provided inside the housing of the slot machine 4000.

Further, a medal payout device (hopper) 4110 is arranged in the lower part inside the housing. The medal payout device 4110 receives and stores medals inserted from the medal insertion slot 4203 and guided by the medal selector 4207, and when a predetermined symbol combination mode is formed on the effective line and a prize is established, the prize is won. The number of medals (payout medals) corresponding to the above, or the medals exceeding the upper limit of credits due to the addition accompanying the establishment of the prize are paid out to the medal tray 4201. The medals for the credits are paid out to the medal tray 4201 by the medal payout device 4110 by operating the refund button 4209. Further, on the right side of the medal payout device 4110, medals overflowing from the medal payout device 4110 and flowing in are stored, and the inflowing medals are sent to the medal collection mechanism of the installation island where the slot machine 4000 is installed. An overflow tank is provided for guidance.

[12-2. Internal configuration of slot machine]
FIG. 148 is a block diagram showing the configurations of various mechanical elements, electronic devices, operating members, and the like provided in the slot machine 4000. The slot machine 4000 has a main board 4600 for comprehensively controlling the progress of the game, and the main board 4600 is equipped with a CPU 4601, a ROM 4602, a RAM 4603, an input / output interface 4604, and the like.

Further, as described above, the main board 4600 is provided with a bonus ratio display 1317 for displaying the bonus ratio calculated by the CPU 4601 and a bonus ratio display switch 1318 for switching the display of the bonus ratio display 1317. The accessory ratio display switch 1318 may be composed of a push button switch that performs a momentary operation, but may be a switch of another type. When the accessory ratio display switch 1318 is operated, the accessory ratio may be displayed on the accessory ratio display 1317.

The above-mentioned single push button 4205, max bet button 4206, start lever 4210, reel stop buttons 4211a, 4211b, 4211c, refund button 4209, etc. are all connected to the main board 4600, and these operation buttons are not shown. Is operated by the player, and the detected operation signal is output to the main board 4600. Specifically, when the start lever 4210 is operated, an operation signal for starting the above-mentioned symbol variation display device 4300 (starting rotation of the reels 4301a, 4301b, 4301c) is output to the main board 4600, and the reel stop button 4211a When 4211b and 4211c are operated, an operation signal for stopping the reels 4301a, 4301b and 4301c is output to the main board 4600.

Further, the slot machine 4000 accommodates other devices together with the main board 4600, and various signals are input from these devices to the main board 4600. In addition to the symbol variation display device 4300, the devices include a medal payout device 4110 and the like.

As described above, the symbol variation display device 4300 includes reel drive motors 4341a, 4341b, 4341c for rotating the reels 4301a, 4301b, 4301c, respectively (left reel drive motor 4341a, middle reel drive motor 4341b, right). Reel drive motor 4341c). The reel drive motor 4341 is composed of a stepping motor, and the reels 4301a, 4301b, and 4301c can be independently rotated and stopped. During the rotation, a plurality of types of symbols are displayed from above on the symbol display window 4401. It is displayed while continuously changing downward.

Further, each reel 4301a, 4301b, 4301c has a position sensor 4331a, 4331b, 4331c for detecting a reference position regarding rotation, and each reel 4301a, 4301b, 4301c has a position sensor 4331a, 4331b, 4331c, respectively. It is provided correspondingly in the reel (left reel position sensor 4331a, middle reel position sensor 4331b, right reel position sensor 4331c). By inputting the detection signals (index signals) from these position sensors to the main board 4600, the main board 4600 can obtain the stop position information of each reel.

The solenoid 4207a and the insertion sensor 4207b described above are installed in the medal selector 4207. The insertion sensor 4207b detects the medals inserted from the medal insertion port 4203, and outputs the medal detection signal to the main board 4600. When the solenoid 4207a is in the OFF state, the inserted medals are detected by the insertion sensor 4207b. On the contrary, when the solenoid 4207a is ON, the passage reaching the insertion sensor 4207b in the medal selector 4207 is locked out and the insertion of medals cannot be accepted, and even if the player inserts a medal, the medal selector 4207 The medals that flowed through the return trough return to the medal tray 4201. At this time, the function of the insertion sensor 4207b is invalidated, so that neither betting nor storage of medals is performed by inserting medals.

The medal payout device 4110 has a payout sensor 4110e for detecting the paid medals one by one in the discharge port, and a payout medal signal for each medal is input to the main board 4600 from the payout sensor 4110e. .. Further, the auxiliary storage box for game medals is provided with a medal full tank sensor 4111a, and when the number of medals stored inside exceeds a predetermined quantity, a detection signal in which the number of medals exceeds a predetermined quantity is transmitted to the main board 4600. Output to. At this time, an error display for notifying the abnormality of the medal storage is performed by the image display body 4500, the error lamp 4554, etc., and the player, the hall employee, or the like is notified that the abnormality has occurred.

On the other hand, a control signal is output from the main board 4600 to the symbol variation display device 4300 and the medal payout device 4110. That is, a drive pulse signal for controlling the start and stop of each of the reel drive motors 4341a, 4341b, 4341c described above is output from the main board 4600. Further, a drive signal is input from the main board 4600 to the medal payout device 4110 according to the type of combination of symbols stopped on the effective line, and the medal payout device 4110 performs a medal payout operation in response to the drive signal. At this time, if the number of medals required for payout is insufficient in the medal payout device 4110, or if there are no medals at all, the number detection by the payout sensor 4110e will be delayed. Then, when a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) elapses, an error signal of the payout medal is output from the payout sensor 4110e to the main board 4600, and in response to this, the main board 4600 notifies that an abnormality has occurred in the payout of the medal. Is displayed on the error lamp 4554, the image display body 4500, etc. to notify the player, the hall employee, or the like that an abnormality has occurred.

The slot machine 4000 includes an effect control board 4700 in addition to the main board 4600, and the effect control board 4700 includes CPU 4701, ROM 4702, RAM 4703, input / output interface 4707, VDP (Video Display Processor) 4704, and AMP (audio amplifier). ) 4705, sound source IC4706 and the like are mounted. The effect control board 4700 receives various command signals from the main board 4600 and controls the display of the image display body 4500, the light emission (or lighting, blinking, extinguishing, etc.) of the lighting device 4502 and the operation of the speaker 4512.

Further, an external relay terminal plate 4131 is provided, and the slot machine 4000 is connected to the hall computer 4800 in the amusement park via the external relay terminal plate 4131. The external relay terminal board 4131 plays a role of relaying various signals (inserted medal signal, payout medal signal, game status, etc.) transmitted from the main board 4600 to the hall computer 4800.

The power supply device 4112 creates a plurality of types of DC power supplies from an AC 24 volt (AC24V) power supply supplied from the island facility. For example, three types of power supplies are created: DC + 5V (hereinafter, "+ 5V"), DC + 12V (hereinafter, "+ 12V"), and DC + 24V (hereinafter, "+ 24V"). The three types of power supplies of + 5V, + 12V, and + 24V created by the power supply device 4112 are supplied to each configuration included in the slot machine 4000. For example, two types of power supplies of + 5V and + 12V are supplied to the reel 4301 and the reel drive motor 4341. It is supplied to the symbol variation display device 4300 provided with.

In addition, the power supply device 4112 is provided with a setting change key switch 4112t, a reset switch 4112u, a power supply switch 4112v, and the like. None of these switches are exposed to the outside of the slot machine 4000, and can be operated only by opening the front member 4200. The power switch 4112v is for turning on / off the power supply to the slot machine 4000, and the setting change key switch 4112t is for changing the setting (for example, settings 1 to 6) of the slot machine 4000. Further, the reset switch 4112u is for canceling an error generated in the slot machine 4000, and is further operated when changing the setting together with the setting change key switch 4112t.

Further, the main board 4600 is provided with a reel drive motor voltage switching circuit 4605. When the output shaft of the reel drive motor 4341 is rotationally driven to obtain the drive torque for rotating the reel 4301, the CPU 4601 sets the voltage switching signal logic (for example, HI) to the reel drive motor voltage switching circuit 4605. By outputting to, + 12V is controlled to be supplied to the reel drive motor 4341 as the motor drive voltage. On the other hand, when obtaining a quiescent torque for maintaining the state in which the output shaft of the reel drive motor 4341 is stopped, the CPU 4601 sets the voltage switching signal logic (for example, LOW) to the reel drive motor voltage switching circuit 4605. By outputting to, + 5V is supplied to the reel drive motor 4341 as a motor drive voltage.

The above is a configuration example of the slot machine 4000. In the game using the slot machine 4000, when the player operates the start lever 4210 while the number of medals to be multiplied is determined, the reels 4301a, 4301b, 4301c rotate, and then the player presses the reel stop buttons 4211a, 4211b, 4211c. When the corresponding reels 4301a, 4301b, 4301c are stopped and controlled, and when all the reels 4301a, 4301b, 4301c are stopped, the game result is judged from the combination mode of the symbols on the effective line, and it is necessary. A specified number of medals corresponding to the corresponding winning combination will be awarded accordingly.

As described above, each reel 4301a, 4301b, 4301c has a reel band on which a design is drawn. Then, when all the reels 4301a, 4301b, 4301c are stopped, the display content displayed in the symbol display window 4401 (combination mode of the symbols displayed on the effective line) indicates that the symbol corresponding to the predetermined winning combination. It is determined whether or not the combination mode (symbol combination) is displayed. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the combination mode of the symbols corresponding to the predetermined winning combination is displayed on the above-mentioned effective line in the symbol display window 4401. In addition, it is determined whether or not the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination is displayed in each of the plurality of effective lines. As a result, when it is determined that a combination of symbols of a plurality of winning combinations is displayed, the total number of medals to be paid out corresponding to each of the displayed winning combinations is paid out.

[12-3. Storage area configuration]
Subsequently, the storage area provided by the ROM 4602, the RAM 4603, and the like provided on the main board 4600 will be described. Although the storage area of the pachinko machine has been outlined with reference to FIG. 24, it has the same configuration as that of the slot machine 4000 shown in FIGS. 149 to 152. FIG. 149 is a diagram showing details of an access area in game control of the slot machine 4000 in the present embodiment and a ROM area 5100 which is a storage area corresponding to the ROM 4602.

The storage area in the present embodiment is provided by media such as ROM4602 and RAM4603, and is provided as one access area to which addresses from "0000H" to "FFFFH" are assigned. Further, the access area of the present embodiment is divided into a predetermined area corresponding to the medium that provides the access area, and includes a ROM area 5100, a RAM area 5200, an I / O area 5300, and a parameter information setting area 5400. It has been. It should be noted that each area does not necessarily correspond to the medium that provides the access area, and one area may be provided by a plurality of media, or a plurality of areas may be provided by one medium.

When the access area of the present embodiment is configured as described above, the CPU 4601 can access the program or data by designating the address without being aware of the medium that actually provides the access area. The details of the access area will be described below.

[12-3-1. ROM area]
First, the configuration of the ROM area 5100 will be described. The ROM area 5100 corresponds to the storage area provided by ROM 4602. The ROM 4602 is a non-volatile storage medium in which the stored contents are retained even when the power of the game machine 1 is turned off, and the stored data can be read out, but can be updated or deleted. You can't do that. The ROM 4602 may be any non-volatile storage medium, and the data stored in the ROM area 5100 may be updatable.

Addresses from "0000H" to "1FFFH" are assigned to the ROM area 5100. The data stored in the ROM 4602 can be accessed by the CPU 4601 specifying "1FFFH" from the address "0000H".

The ROM area 5100 includes a first control area, a first isolation area, a first data area, a second control area, a second isolation area, a second data area, a third control area, a third isolation area, and a fourth isolation area. included. A start address and an end address are set in each area.

The first control area is a game control area, and a program for performing game control and the like are stored. Further, the first data area is a game data area in which data necessary for performing game control is stored. That is, the program stored in the first control area is executed, and the game control is performed while referring to the data stored in the first data area. The area used for game control (first control area, first data area) is defined as a game control area (first storage area).

In the second control area, a program for debugging (functional inspection) the control program and the like are stored. The second data area is an area for storing data for debugging (functional inspection). The second data area is not always necessary, and debugging data may be stored in the second control area. The area (second control area, second data area) in which the program and data for debugging the game control program (functional inspection) that is not used for game control is stored is the debug (inspection function) area (inspection function). Second storage area).

In the third control area, a program for calculating and displaying the accessory ratio is stored. Data for calculating the accessory ratio is also stored in the third control area. A third data area for storing data for calculating the accessory ratio may be provided. An area (third control area) in which a program or data for calculating the accessory ratio is stored without being used for game control is defined as an area for calculating the accessory ratio (third storage area). In this way, by designing the accessory ratio calculation / display code 13135 separately from the game control code 13131 and storing it in a different area, the inspection of the accessory ratio calculation / display code 13135 and the game control code 13131 Can be performed separately from the inspection of the slot machine 4000, and the labor of inspection of the slot machine 4000 can be reduced. Further, the accessory ratio calculation / display code 13135 can be commonly used by a plurality of models regardless of the model.

The first quarantine area, the second quarantine area, the third quarantine area, and the fourth quarantine area are areas allocated between the control area and the data area, and are areas for which access is prohibited. In the process by the CPU 4601, when the isolated area is accessed, the reset process is forcibly executed. The first quarantine area, the second quarantine area, the third quarantine area, and the fourth quarantine area are areas continuous with the previous and next quarantine areas. ("0A00H"), and the end address of the first quarantine area is the address immediately before the first data area ("0AFFH"). Further, the third isolation area is arranged between the game control area and the debug (functional inspection) area, and is treated as the game control area in FIG. 30, but the debug (functional inspection) area. It may be treated as. Similarly, the fourth isolation area is arranged between the debug (functional inspection) area and the accessory ratio calculation area, and is treated as the debug (functional inspection) area in FIG. 149. It may be treated as an area for calculating the object ratio.

[12-3-2. RAM area]
Subsequently, the configuration of the RAM area 5200 will be described. FIG. 150 is a diagram showing details of the RAM area 5200 in this embodiment. The RAM area 5200 corresponds to the storage area provided by the RAM 4603. The RAM 4603 is a volatile storage medium in which the stored contents are erased when the power of the game machine 1 is turned off, and the stored data can be read and written. The RAM area 5200 temporarily stores the program and data stored in the ROM area 5100, and stores the data derived by executing the program. The RAM 4603 may be a non-volatile storage medium as long as the data can be read and written. Further, when a power failure occurs, the data stored in the RAM 4603 by the backup power supply can be retained for a predetermined period.

Addresses from "3000H" to "31FFH" are assigned to the RAM area 5200. The CPU 4601 can access the data stored in the RAM 4603 by designating the addresses "3000H" to "31FFH".

The RAM area 5200 includes a game control work area, a debug (inspection function) work area, a save area, and an isolated area. A start address and an end address are set in each area.

The game control work area is a work area (temporary area) used when the game control (first control) is executed. The debug (inspection function) work area is a work area used when executing debug control (second control) of a program. The work area for calculating the bonus ratio is an area for storing data for calculating the bonus ratio and the calculated bonus ratio (feature ratio, continuous bonus ratio, advantageous section bonus ratio, etc.). It should be noted that the work area for debugging (inspection function) and the work area for calculating the accessory ratio do not necessarily have to secure a dedicated work area, and the work area for game control may be used, or the work area for game control may be used. A work area for debugging (inspection function) or a work area for calculating the accessory ratio may be assigned to the work area. In this case, the independence between the game control area, the debug (inspection function) control area, and the accessory ratio calculation work area is reduced. However, if the program configuration is such that the work area for debugging (inspection function) and the work area for calculating the accessory ratio are not used, the work area for debugging (inspection function) and the work area for calculating the accessory ratio are not necessarily used. May be good.

The evacuation area is an area for temporarily storing data used in game control, debug (inspection function) control, or accessory ratio calculation. For example, when an interrupt occurs and a predetermined process is executed, the values of various CPU registers (arithmetic registers, flag registers, stack pointers, etc.) are copied to the save area before the predetermined process is executed. The value copied after the processing is completed is returned to various registers of the CPU. The evacuation area may be used in common for game control, debugging (inspection function), and accessory ratio calculation, but like the work area, game control, debugging (inspection function), and accessory ratio. It may be divided individually by calculation. As a result, the game control, the debug (inspection function) control, and the accessory ratio calculation can maintain more independence.

The isolation area is between the work area for game control, the work area for debugging (inspection function), and the work area for calculating the accessory ratio, the work area for debugging (inspection function), the evacuation area, and the evacuation area for calculating the accessory ratio. It is assigned between, and is a continuous area with each area (front and back areas). For example, the start address of the isolation area between the game control work area and the debug (inspection function) work area is the address (“3076H”) next to the end address of the game control work area, and the end address is This is the address ("307FH") immediately before the work area for debugging (inspection function). Further, the isolated area is an area where access is prohibited, and is configured to forcibly execute the reset process when accessed in the process by the CPU 4601.

FIG. 150 shows the details of the work area for calculating the accessory ratio on the right side thereof. The work area for calculating the accessory ratio may be provided with a backup area 1 and a backup area 2 for storing a copy of the data stored in the main area, in addition to the main area for storing the calculation result of the accessory ratio. .. The backup area may be one or more. A check code is added to each area to detect data errors. The check code may be a checksum of data in each area or a predetermined value. The check code is set in the initialization process when the power of the slot machine 4000 is turned on, or is set every time the data in the main area is updated in the accessory ratio calculation / display process, or the initialization process (step S1020 in FIG. 153). ) May be set. In particular, when the check code is a fixed value, even if the check code is initialized when it is determined to be normal in the initialization process or the data is deleted and the fixed value is set in the initialization process (step S1020 in FIG. 153). Good. The check code may also be used as a power failure flag. That is, if a predetermined value is set in the check code of the main area, it may be determined that the power failure flag is set. Further, if a predetermined value is set in the power failure flag, it may be determined that the check code of each area is a correct value (that is, the data of each area is normal).

In the initialization process (step S1020 of FIG. 153), it is determined whether or not the data in the backup area is normal, and the data in the backup area determined to be normal may be duplicated in the main area. Further, in the power off processing executed when the power is turned off, the value of the main area may be duplicated in each backup area.

An unused space is provided between the main area and the backup area 1 and between the backup area 1 and the backup area 2. By providing an unused space between each area, the address of each area can be separated, and each area can be distinguished by the upper digit of the address.

FIG. 151 is a diagram showing a specific structure of a work area for storing each data in the work area for calculating the accessory ratio.

FIG. 151 (A) shows the structure of the work area in the simplest method. In the structure of the work area shown in FIG. 151 (A), the number of bonuses paid out, the number of continuous bonuses paid out, the total number of payouts, the bonus ratio, the continuous bonus ratio, the number of advantageous section games, the number of non-advantageous section games, and the advantageous section Store the ratio. The number of bonuses paid out is the number of medals paid out while the bonus is in operation (for example, during a regular bonus). The number of consecutive winning balls is the number of medals paid out while the continuous winning ball is operating (for example, during a big bonus). The total number paid out is the number of all medals paid out by the game. The bonus ratio can be calculated by dividing the number of bonuses paid out by the total number of payouts. The continuous bonus ratio can be calculated by dividing the number of continuous bonuses paid out by the total number of catches paid out. The number of advantageous section games is the number of games played in a game state that is advantageous to the player (for example, a game state in which the medals on hand such as ART (assist replay time) are difficult to decrease), and the number of non-advantageous section games is , The number of games played in a game state other than the advantageous section. The advantageous section ratio can be calculated by dividing the number of advantageous section games by (the number of advantageous section games + the number of non-advantageous section games).

Among the structures of the work areas shown in FIG. 151 (A), the number of bonuses paid out, the number of continuous bonuses paid out, the total number of payouts, the number of advantageous section games and the number of non-advantageous section games are the total of FIG. 151 (B) described later. It corresponds to the cumulative total and is a storage area of 3 or 4 bytes, respectively, and can store numerical values up to 16777215 or 42949672795 in decimal. Since these data are not erased unless an abnormality occurs in the data, a large storage area is prepared so that the data can be stored for a long period of time. Further, the accessory ratio, the continuous accessory ratio, and the advantageous section ratio are storage areas of 1 byte, and can store numerical values up to 255 in decimal numbers.

The number of bonuses paid out, the number of continuous bonuses paid out, the total number of payouts, the number of advantageous section games, and the number of non-advantageous section games are updated by the area update process for calculating the bonus ratio (step S1038 in FIG. , The continuous bonus ratio, and the advantageous section ratio are calculated and stored in the bonus ratio calculation / display process (step S1119 in FIG. 154).

FIG. 151 (B) shows the structure of a work area using a ring buffer. In the structure of the work area shown in FIG. 151 (B), the number of replays, the number of winning prizes paid out, the number of bonuses paid out, the number of continuous bonuses paid out, the number of games, the bonus ratio, the continuous bonus ratio, the number of advantageous section games, and non-playing Advantageous section The number of games and the ratio of advantageous sections are stored. Further, the storage area of each data is composed of a ring buffer having n storage areas for every predetermined number of games (for example, 15 storage areas for every 400 games), and the number of executed games is predetermined. When the number (400 times) is reached, the write pointer of all the data moves, and the storage area where the data is updated changes. Then, after the data of the predetermined number of games is stored in the nth storage area, the write pointer moves to the first storage area and stores the data in the first storage area.

The write pointer and read pointer of the ring buffer are common to all data, and the write pointer of all data moves for each predetermined number of prize balls. In addition, as the write pointer moves, the read pointer also moves. The read pointer points to a storage area that is one lag behind the write pointer. This is to calculate the accessory ratio using the data for 400 games.

The cumulative total of each data is the cumulative value of the data stored in the n storage areas of the ring buffer, and the cumulative value of the bonus ratio and the continuous bonus ratio is the value calculated from the cumulative value of each data. When the ring buffer goes around and is cleared in one storage area of the ring buffer to write new data, the cumulative value is calculated excluding the data in the cleared area. The total cumulative value of each data is the cumulative value of the data collected in the past, and the cumulative value of the bonus ratio and the continuous bonus ratio is the value calculated from the cumulative value of each data, and the ring buffer goes around. Even if the data is cleared in one storage area of the ring buffer to write new data, the total cumulative value including the data in the cleared area is calculated.

In the structure of the work area shown in FIG. 151 (B), the number of replays, the number of prizes paid out, the number of bonuses paid out, the number of continuous bonuses paid out, and the number of games in the ring buffer are storage areas of 2 bytes each. You can store numbers up to 65535 in decimal. The total number of re-games, the number of winning prizes paid out, the number of bonuses paid out, the number of continuous bonuses paid out, and the total number of games are stored in a storage area of 3 bytes, and numbers up to 16777215 can be stored in decimal numbers. Since the cumulative total is, for example, the total of data for 400 games × n (6000 games in the case of n = 15), a large storage area is prepared. The total number of re-games, the number of prizes paid out, the number of bonuses paid out, the number of continuous bonuses paid out, and the total number of games are stored in a storage area of 3 or 4 bytes, respectively, and can store numerical values up to 16777215 or 42949672795 in decimal numbers. Since the total cumulative total is not erased unless an abnormality occurs in the data, a larger storage area is prepared so that the data can be stored for a long period of time. Further, the cumulative total and the cumulative total of the bonus ratio and the continuous bonus ratio are storage areas of 1 byte each, and can store numerical values up to 255 in decimal numbers. The number of advantageous section games and the number of non-advantageous section games are storage areas of 3 bytes each, and can store numerical values up to 16777215 in decimal numbers. The advantageous section ratio is a 1-byte storage area, and can store a numerical value up to 255 in decimal.

By increasing the number of games corresponding to the data stored in each storage area constituting the ring buffer (for example, 600 games), the number of continuous storage areas for storing time-series data (for example, 600 games) Even if n) is reduced to 10, the same data for 6000 games can be stored in total. Therefore, the size of the storage area used as the ring buffer can be reduced.

Among the structures of the work areas shown in FIG. 151 (B), the number of bonuses paid out, the number of continuous bonuses paid out, the bonus ratio, the continuous bonus ratio, the number of advantageous section games, the number of non-advantageous section games, and the advantageous section ratio are It is the same as the description in FIG. 151 (A). The number of replays is the number of games that have been replayed. The number of prizes paid out is the number of all medals paid out by the game. The number of games is the number of games executed, and when this value reaches a predetermined number, the write pointer moves.

The number of replays, the number of winning prizes paid out, the number of bonuses paid out, the number of continuous bonuses paid out, the total number of payouts, the number of advantageous section games, and the number of non-advantageous section games are determined by the area update process for calculating the bonus ratio (step S1038 in FIG. 153). ), The bonus ratio, the continuous bonus ratio, and the advantageous section ratio are calculated and stored in the bonus ratio calculation / display process (step S1119 in FIG. 154).

In the data structure shown in FIG. 151 (A), when it is determined that the stored value is abnormal, the data in the work area for calculating the accessory ratio is deleted in the initialization process (step S1020 in FIG. 153). However, the data is not erased at other times. Therefore, the data in the work area for calculating the accessory ratio may be deleted every predetermined period (for example, one day, one week, one month, etc.). Similarly, the total cumulative total of FIG. 151 (B) may be deleted at predetermined intervals.

In addition, the data of the work area for calculating the accessory ratio and the calculated accessory ratio are abnormal values (for example, the accessory ratio exceeds 100%, and the calculation result of the accessory ratio has changed significantly from the previous calculated value. , Number of bonuses paid out> Total number of payouts, etc.), the abnormal value may be deleted. Not only the abnormal value but also all the data in the work area for calculating the accessory ratio may be deleted. Further, when the data of the work area for calculating the accessory ratio or the calculated accessory ratio is an abnormal value, it may be notified that the value is abnormal. Further, the data in the backup area may be inspected using the check code, the data in the normal backup area may be duplicated in the main area, and then the accessory ratio may be calculated again.

[12-3-3. I / O area configuration]
Subsequently, the I / O region 5300 will be described. Input / output ports correspond to the I / O area 5300, and each input / output port can be accessed by the CPU 4601 accessing the I / O area 5300. The input / output port corresponds to, for example, a port related to input of a switch or the like, a port related to output of a large winning opening solenoid, an LED drive signal, or the like. The input / output port settings (settings related to use / non-use of input settings, output settings, etc.) are set based on the set values of the parameter information setting area 5400.

[12-3-4. Parameter information setting area]
Subsequently, the parameter information setting area 5400 will be described. FIG. 152 is a diagram showing details of the parameter information setting area 5400 of the present embodiment. The parameter information setting area 5400 is an area where various settings can be made. For example, as shown in FIG. 152, various settings include start / end addresses of each control area and data area. Although the definition of the start address and the end address of each area of the third control area, the work area for calculating the accessory ratio, and the evacuation area for calculating the accessory ratio is omitted in FIG. 152, the third control area start setting And the third control area end setting is defined in the same way as the start and end settings of other control areas, and the work area start setting for calculating the accessory ratio and the work area end setting for calculating the accessory ratio are the start and end settings of other work areas. It is defined in the same way as the end setting, and the save area start setting for calculating the accessory ratio and the save area end setting for calculating the accessory ratio are defined in the same way as the start and end settings of other save areas. Areas other than the area set here are regarded as unused (unset) areas. As a result, when the CPU 4601 accesses the unused area, the reset signal is forcibly input to the CPU 4601. Although it is set in a continuous area in FIG. 152, it does not have to be continuous as a setting area. For example, parameters may be grouped and arranged at predetermined intervals.

Further, in the present embodiment, when an area other than the set area (the first to fourth isolated areas of the ROM 5100 and the isolated area of the RAM 5200) is accessed, a reset is forcibly generated. Therefore, it is possible to perform the initial startup of the program by causing a reset by intentionally accessing the isolated area. Since the slot machine executes the processing sequentially, the program can be executed from the startup processing and the initial setting can be executed again by accessing the quarantine area after the final game processing is completed. As a result, even if the initial setting function is set to a value different from the set value due to noise or the like during the game, the normal value can be reset by executing the initial setting again. Furthermore, in the initial setting process, RAM clear is determined by the power failure flag, but it is possible to forcibly generate RAM clear by accessing the isolation area without setting the power failure flag. Become. On the other hand, in the above-mentioned pachinko machine, the game is played in parallel, so if the game itself is initialized, the game cannot be continued, but in the case of the slot machine, it is no longer necessary after the game ends. Since it is necessary to initialize the RAM information, it is possible to eliminate the process for initializing the RAM information by accessing the isolated area.

The value set in the parameter information setting area 5400 is not sequentially set by the user program processing such as the initial setting of the CPU 4601, but by setting the address and the setting value of the parameter area in the ROM 4602 separately from the program. , The parameter information set in the ROM 4602 is sequentially set in each function setting register of the CPU before the CPU 4601 starts the control program at the time of startup. As a result, various parameters can be set when the power of the game machine 1 is turned on. Since the set values of various parameters are information managed (determined) by the user, they are set in the ROM 4602 in which the game control program is stored.

[12-4. Game control]
[12-4-1. System reset boot process]
Subsequently, the control of the slot machine of the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 153 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure of a system reset startup process executed when the slot machine 4000 is reset. The system reset start process is a process executed when the power of the slot machine 4000 is turned on, a power failure occurs, or the like, and is a process of starting when a reset signal is input to the CPU 4601.

When the system reset activation process is started, the CPU 4601 first executes a parameter setting process for setting various parameters necessary for executing the game (step S1010). Specifically, the setting value stored in the parameter information setting area 5400 included in the storage area is set in each function setting register of the CPU 4601, or the address of each area assigned to the access area is set as the setting value. By setting the address of each area as a set value, for example, a work area or a save area is allocated to the RAM area 5200 as a used area, and an area not allocated as a used area (isolated area in FIG. 150) is set as an unused area. Assigned. The work area and the evacuation area are divided into a game control area and a debugging (inspection function) (or other use) area, respectively. Further, in the ROM area 5100, as in the RAM area 5200, an area for storing programs and data is allocated as a used area, and an area not allocated as a used area is allocated as an unused area.

Next, the CPU 4601 executes the security check process (step S1012). The security check process is a process of determining whether or not the data stored in the ROM 4602 is normal data. If the data stored in the ROM 4602 is not normal data, for example, the ROM 4602 may have been replaced with an invalid ROM, so that the startup of the slot machine 4000 is stopped. Further, the CPU 4601 waits until the time required for the security check elapses (step S1014).

The process from turning on the power of the slot machine to the end of the security check (process up to step S1014) is not a process defined by the user program, but a process composed of hardware in the CPU that cannot be changed by the developer. It has become.

Subsequently, the CPU 4601 executes a device initialization setting process for initializing (step S1016). In the device initialization setting process, a process such as a start setting of a periodic process (FIG. 154, timer interrupt process) that periodically executes a predetermined process is executed. In this embodiment, a function such as a random number function setting that prevents the game lottery setting from being rewritten by a user program after a security check is executed by a parameter setting process, and other than these functions, a device initialization setting process is performed. Is running on. By dividing the initialization of the CPU 4601 into a parameter setting process and a device initialization setting process in this way, the degree of freedom in game control is increased and fraud is less likely to occur in the game.

Further, the CPU 4601 determines whether or not to execute the initialization of the RAM 4603 (step S1018). In the process of step S1018, it is determined whether to perform a cold start for initializing the RAM 4603 or a hot start for returning to the game with the contents of the backed up RAM 4603.

When the CPU 4601 performs a cold start for initializing the RAM 4603 (the result of step S1018 is "Yes"), the CPU 4601 executes an initialization process for executing the initialization of the RAM 4603 (step S1020). The cold start is performed when the setting of the game machine 1 is changed, when an abnormality occurs in the contents of the RAM 4603, or when the power failure flag is not set.

On the other hand, when the CPU 4601 performs a hot start for returning to the game based on the contents of the RAM 4603 (the result of step S1018 is "No"), the CPU 4601 executes a process of returning the game based on the contents of the backed up RAM 4603. (Step S1022). At this time, the return process returns to the process interrupted at the time of power failure. Specifically, any of the processes from step S1024 to step S1042 of the system reset activation process to be described later or steps S1110 to S1130 of the periodic process (FIG. 154) returns to the process interrupted at the time of power failure.

In the slot machine 4000 of the present embodiment, the checksum is calculated based on the information stored in the RAM 4603 when a power failure occurs and when the recovery process is executed. At this time, only the game control work area excluding the debug (inspection function) work area out of all the areas where the checksum calculation target is used as the work (game control work area and debug (inspection function) work area). May be. The checksum is calculated only in the work area for game control because the debug (inspection function) process is designed to maintain independence from the game control process and affects the result of the game. Since it is a non-processing, it is possible that some bugs may remain due to insufficient verification. In this case, a work area for debugging (inspection function) that holds the information obtained by executing such processing is provided. Targeting the checksum calculation may impair the reliability of returning to normal from a power failure. On the other hand, since the game control process is directly related to the game, if it is installed in the product with bugs remaining, it will cause a big trouble in the market. In some cases, it is possible that sales will be discontinued and it will be necessary to collect the product. In this case, it is extremely likely that it will cause enormous cost damage to the manufacturer and the hall. This is because the game control work area is more reliable than the debug (inspection function) work area because the verification is performed.

When the initialization process is completed or a series of games is completed, the CPU 4601 executes a game initial setting process in order to start a new game (step S1024). In the game initial setting process, a process of temporarily returning the RAM 4603 information that is no longer needed for performing a series of game controls to the initial setting state is executed.

When the game initial setting process is completed, the CPU 4601 executes the information signal 1 output process for outputting the debug (inspection function) signal at the start of the game (step S1026). In the information signal 1 output process, processing such as setting the debug (inspection function) signal to the initial state is performed. Information signal output processing is defined as information signal 1 to N output processing, and a required module is called at the timing of outputting the information signal. For example, when a debug (inspection function) signal (information about reel rotation start, start lever ON, winning combination) is output in the game start process, the debug (inspection function) signal related to the stop of each reel is output in the symbol stop process. When the (inspection function) signal (stop operation signal, stopped symbol information, etc.) is output, the debug (inspection function) signal related to the fixed combination in the winning judgment process (fixed combination displayed as stopped on each reel, payout associated with the fixed combination) At the time of output of the number of sheets information, output signal information (number of payout medals) related to the number of payouts at the time of payout, etc.), the "information signal N output process" module required for the process is appropriately called and executed.

Subsequently, the CPU 4601 executes a standby process for performing a pre-stage process in which the player operates the start lever 4210 (step S1028). Before operating the start lever 4210, for example, it is determined whether or not an instruction to execute a replay is given, whether or not a medal has been inserted, whether or not a medal has been cleared, and the like. The game settings are confirmed.

When the start lever 4210 is operated, the CPU 4601 executes a game start process for starting the game (step S1030). In the game start process, a random number value for drawing a game is acquired, a winning combination or the like is determined, and the rotation of the reel 4301 is started. After that, the CPU 4601 executes a Wait process for waiting until the reel 4301 reaches a normal rotation speed (step S1032).

When the reel 4301 reaches a normal rotation speed, the CPU 4601 can accept the input of the reel stop button 4211 and executes a symbol stop process for processing until all the reels 4301 are stopped (step S1034).

Further, when all the reels 4301 are stopped, the CPU 4601 executes a winning determination process for determining a winning combination based on the stopped symbol (step S1036). In the prize-winning determination process, the winning combination is determined, and if it is determined that the winning combination is won, the setting corresponding to the winning combination is made, and the setting for executing the payout process corresponding to the winning combination is made.

Subsequently, the CPU 4601 determines the current game state, adds the number of prize medals paid out as the game value to the area corresponding to the current game state, and adds the work area for calculating the accessory ratio of the RAM area 5200 (FIG. 150, see FIG. 151) is updated (step S1038). The process of step S1038 can be skipped when there is no prize medal to be paid out in step S1036, and the load on the CPU 4601 can be reduced.

Even if the slot machine 4000 detects fraud and stops the game, the accessory ratio calculation area update process (step S1038) is executed. By executing these processes regardless of whether or not fraud is detected, it is possible to collect data for calculating the accessory ratio even during fraud notification.

Finally, the CPU 4601 executes a game end process for performing a game end process (step S1042). In the game end process, the payout process corresponding to the winning combination is executed, and if there is no winning or if there is no paying out, the processing is skipped. When the game end process is completed, the game returns to the game initial setting process, and the main loop process from step S1024 to step S1038 is executed.

[12-4-2. Periodic processing]
Next, periodic processing, which is interrupt processing that is activated at a predetermined cycle while the main loop processing of the system reset initial startup processing is being executed, will be described. FIG. 154 is a flowchart showing the procedure of periodic processing.

When the periodic processing is executed, the CPU 4601 first saves the values stored in all the registers (step S1110). At this time, the data to be saved is stored in the game control save area shown in FIG. 150. As described above, since the periodic processing is interrupt processing that is started while the main loop processing is being executed, the processing can be continued after returning by saving the register of the CPU used in the main loop processing. Need to be.

Subsequently, the CPU 4601 resets the watchdog timer built in the CPU (step S1112). As a result, the watchdog timer can be cleared periodically.

Next, the CPU 4601 executes a switch input process for sampling input signals from various switches (step S1114). Further, the game state check process is executed (step S1116). In the game state check process, a process related to drive control of a drive body (stepping motor) that rotates the reel 4301 is performed. Specifically, the pulse output of the stepping motor, the detection of the origin position, and the like are performed.

Subsequently, the CPU 4601 executes a timer measurement process for updating various timers used in the game control (step S1118). Since the periodic processing is executed periodically, the set time is the execution interval of the periodic processing x the set number of times.

Subsequently, the CPU 4601 determines whether or not the accessory ratio display switch 1318 is operated, and if the accessory ratio display switch 1318 is operated, calls the accessory ratio calculation / display process to call the accessory ratio calculation work. The bonus ratio is calculated by referring to the number of medals paid out stored in the area. Then, the calculated bonus ratio is displayed on the bonus ratio display 1317 (step S1119). The accessory ratio calculation / display process is the same as the accessory ratio calculation / display process (FIGS. 24 and 25) described in the embodiment of the pachinko machine 1. Further, the specific calculation method of the accessory ratio and the specific display method of the accessory ratio are the same as the methods described in the examples of the pachinko machine 1. In this way, by calling the accessory ratio calculation / display process in the timer interrupt process and calculating the accessory ratio, the accessory ratio (gambling of the slot machine 4000) based on the latest data can be confirmed.

When the bonus ratio display switch 1318 is operated, all kinds of values (feature ratio, continuous bonus ratio, cumulative total, total cumulative total) may be calculated, but the bonus ratio display switch 1318 Only the displayed value may be calculated for each operation of. In addition, the bonus ratio is calculated regardless of whether the bonus ratio display switch 1318 is operated, and the calculated bonus ratio is displayed on the bonus ratio display 1317 triggered by the operation of the bonus ratio display switch 1318. You may.

Subsequently, the CPU 4601 executes an LED output process for controlling the LED (step S1120). The LED to be controlled is the one controlled by the main board 4600, and is, for example, the payout number display LED 4562. In addition, data for displaying the accessory ratio on the LED is output.

The CPU 4601 executes an information output process for outputting a signal to the external relay terminal plate 4131 (step S1122). The output signal is transmitted to the hall computer 4800 via the external relay terminal plate 4131. Further, the CPU 4601 outputs the command stored in the command buffer to the effect control board 4700 (step S1124).

The CPU 4601 executes a random number update process for updating the random numbers used in the game (step S1126). In the random number update process, the random number is updated to be generated by software processing. Here, in addition to the random numbers generated only by the software, the update processing of the soft random numbers built in the CPU is executed. With the soft random numbers built into the CPU, the count itself is executed by the hardware, but the trigger for updating is determined by this process. With such a configuration, it is possible to reduce the program processing related to the random number update.

When the random number update process is completed, the CPU 4601 performs a process for returning to the interrupted process (main loop process). Specifically, the value of the register saved in the process of step S1110 is restored (step S1128). Further, the execution of the interrupt is permitted (step S1130). During the execution of periodic processing (timer interrupt processing), even if a new timer interrupt occurs, the new timer interrupt is pending, and after the timer interrupt processing executed immediately before is normally completed and the interrupt is enabled. It is supposed to be executed. Therefore, it is configured so that periodic processing (timer interrupt processing) is not executed multiple times.

[12-4-3. Information signal output processing]
Subsequently, the information signal output process executed in the system reset start process and the like will be described. The information signal output process is provided according to each function (1 to N) of the output signal, and is composed of a plurality of modules. For example, there are "for condition device output signal (signal output related to condition device operation)" and "lottery determination process (signal output related to lottery)". Although the output signals are different, the configuration of each information output process is basically the same, so the explanation of each flow is omitted. FIG. 155 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the information signal output processing of the present embodiment.

When the information signal output process is started, the CPU 4601 first saves the values of all the registers of the CPU (step S1210). This is to prevent the values set in the registers from being destroyed by executing the information signal output processing (to ensure that the values are restored even if they are destroyed), and save the values of all the registers to the stack area. It is designed to let you. Further, the stack area used at this time is allocated to the debug (inspection function) evacuation area, and is allocated to a different area separated from the game control evacuation area.

Subsequently, the CPU 4601 acquires information to be referred from the RAM 4603 for selecting (ON / OFF) the information signal to be output (debugging (inspection function) signal) (step S1212). In each information signal output process, only the information stored in the RAM 4603 is referred to, and no data is written to the RAM 4603 within the process. When writing is required, the information is output to the debug (inspection function) work area. A dedicated work is provided, and the work is configured not to be used (including reference) in processing other than information signal output processing. As a result, even if the program that executes the information signal output processing is arranged in a different place from the other game control programs, the independence from the other game control programs can be ensured without using a common area. ..

Next, the CPU 4601 generates an information signal to be output based on the information acquired in the process of step S1212 (step S1214), and outputs the generated signal to the corresponding port (step S1216). Further, it waits until the information signal output time, which is the time for maintaining the output signal, elapses (step S1218). The information signal output time is predetermined, and by setting a sufficient time, the debug (inspection function) signal can be reliably transmitted to the transmission destination. After that, the values of all the registers saved in the process of step S1210 are restored (step S1220), and this process is terminated.

As described above, the information signal (debugging (inspection function) signal) is generated and output in the processes from step S1210 to step S1220. Then, the processes from step S1210 to step S1220 are executed for the amount of the debug (inspection function) signal to be output. Outputs different types and numbers of signals for each output signal function (1 to N). In this embodiment, a plurality of types of information signal output processing are defined for each function, but the table in which the output signals corresponding to the functions are defined is defined in the debug (inspection function) area. (Ii) The information signal output processing may be standardized by preparing in the data area, selecting a signal corresponding to the function specified by the caller, and configuring the signal to be output.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the program (signal output program) for executing the information signal output processing and the like is stored in the area clearly distinguished from the area for storing the game control program (game control area). By providing an area (area for debugging (inspection function)), a program for debugging (inspection function) of the game machine 1 can be independently arranged. The signal output program is used for the purpose of debugging (inspection function) of the game machine 1, and is a process that does not affect the result of the game and does not impair the fairness of the game. Also, for other purposes (for example, to place a game control program or a general-purpose program to make up for the lack of capacity in the game control area), the program should not be placed in the debug (inspection function) area. It has become.

The signal output program is executed after being statically called from the game control program, and at this time, the address of the callee is specified. Further, the signal output program is modularized for each function, and when called, protects all the registers used in the game control area. Further, as described above, when the program processing of the game control area is executed, the access to the debug (inspection function) work area is prohibited, and the program processing of the debug (inspection function) area is executed. If so, it is configured to allow only reference to the game control work area and prohibit writing. Furthermore, it is configured to prohibit calling modules (including subroutines) arranged in the game control area from the debug (inspection function) area. The program placed in the debug (inspection function) area including the signal output program is always called in the subroutine format, and after the subroutine ends, it returns immediately after the call by the return instruction. The modules stored in the debug (inspection function) area are configured for each purpose. With this configuration, the execution of the signal output program (the program arranged in the debug (inspection function) area) does not affect the execution of the game control program.

In the embodiment of the slot machine 4000, the erasing timing of the RAM (work area for game control, work area for calculating the accessory ratio) may be the same as in steps S18 to S26 of FIG. 21 of the embodiment of the pachinko machine 1. The slot machine 4000 does not have a RAM clear switch, and when the setting change key switch 4112t is operated, the backup data in the game state is erased.

As described above, according to the present embodiment, in addition to the effects described in the above-described embodiment of the pachinko machine, it is possible to accurately calculate the accessory ratio of the slot machine in operation, and the gambling of the gaming machine in operation can be obtained. You can check it.

Although the present invention has been described in detail with reference to the accompanying drawings, the present invention is not limited to such a specific configuration, and various modifications and equivalents within the scope of the attached claims are equivalent. It includes the configuration.

Among the inventions disclosed in the present specification, the following are typical examples of the viewpoints of inventions other than those described in the claims.

(0) A game machine that gives a player a game value.
A main control device that executes a program that controls the progress of the game,
Equipped with a character ratio display that displays information about the given game value,
The accessory ratio indicator has a display device and a driver circuit for driving the display device.
The main control device is
Data to be displayed on the accessory ratio display is transmitted to the driver circuit by serial communication, and the data is transmitted to the driver circuit.
The game according to each of the preceding paragraphs, characterized in that, after the power is turned on, the synchronization method, the communication rate, the parity, and the stop bit are set for serial communication with the driver circuit. Machine.

(1) The gaming machine according to each of the preceding paragraphs, wherein the communication between the main control device and the driver circuit is slower than the communication between the main control device and the peripheral control device.

As a result, it is possible to suppress an inaccurate display of the accessory ratio due to garbled data during communication.

(2) The main control device is
It has a work RAM that holds data related to the progress of the game and data for calculating the accessory ratio even when the power is cut off.
The gaming machine according to each of the preceding sections, wherein the setting for serial communication is executed after the work RAM is cleared.

As a result, it is possible to prevent the display of the wrong accessory ratio by using the data of the RAM having the wrong content.

(3) The main control device is
It has a function to transmit the data stored in the FIFO buffer by serial communication.
The gaming machine according to each of the preceding paragraphs, wherein the data storage amount for determining the timing of transmitting data from the FIFO buffer is set after the power is turned on.

As a result, data can be transmitted from the FIFO buffer with an arbitrary number of bits.

(4) A game machine that gives a player a game value.
A main control device that executes a program that controls the progress of the game,
Equipped with a character ratio display that displays information about the given game value,
The accessory ratio indicator has a display device and a driver circuit for driving the display device.
The length of the signal line connecting the main control device and the driver circuit is longer than the length of the signal line connecting the driver circuit and the display device, so that the main control device, the display device, and the driver are longer. The gaming machine according to each of the preceding paragraphs, characterized in that a circuit is arranged.

By lengthening the signal line connecting the main controller and the driver circuit, it is easy to detect unauthorized modifications without arranging parts around the main controller, and the signal line connecting the driver circuit and the display device. By making the signal line shorter than the signal line connecting the main controller and the driver circuit, the influence of noise can be reduced and the accessory ratio can be displayed more accurately.

(5) The gaming machine according to each of the preceding paragraphs, wherein the main control device and the accessory ratio indicator are housed in one case.

This makes it easier to detect unauthorized modifications without arranging other parts around the main control unit, and further reduces the influence of noise.

(6) The gaming machine according to each of the preceding paragraphs, wherein the main control device and the accessory ratio display are arranged on one printed circuit board.

This makes it easier to detect unauthorized modifications without arranging other components on the printed circuit board around the main control device, and further reduces the effects of noise.

(7) The gaming machine according to each of the preceding paragraphs, wherein the accessory ratio display is configured by accommodating the display device and the driver circuit in one package.

As a result, the influence of noise on the signal line connecting the driver circuit and the display device can be reduced. Further, the signal line connecting the driver circuit and the display device can be shortened.

(8) The gaming machine according to each of the preceding paragraphs, wherein a guard pattern (ground pattern or power supply pattern) is provided along a signal line connecting the main control device and the driver circuit.

As a result, the influence of noise on the signal line connecting the main control device and the driver circuit can be reduced.

(9) The gaming machine according to each of the preceding paragraphs, wherein the display direction of the accessory ratio display is the same direction as the display direction of the model number on the surface of the main control device.

As a result, it is possible to easily confirm whether or not the main control device has been replaced and the displayed accessory ratio without taking an unreasonable posture.

(10) The driver circuit has a standby mode in which characters and numbers are not displayed on the display device and power consumption is reduced.
The game according to each of the preceding paragraphs, wherein the main control device sets the driver circuit to a standby state when the accessory ratio display is in a closed state in which the accessory ratio indicator cannot be visually recognized in the installed state of the game machine. Machine.

As a result, it is possible to prevent wasteful power consumption of the game machine when it is not necessary to display the accessory ratio.

(11) A gaming machine that grants a prize ball as a game value to a player by winning a prize in a predetermined winning opening of a game ball launched toward a game area.
The main control device that controls the progress of the game,
Equipped with an accessory ratio indicator that displays information about prize balls
The winning openings include a general winning opening whose entrance shape does not change depending on the gaming state and an electric winning opening whose entrance opens or expands depending on the gaming state.
The main control device determines the number of prize balls to be paid out to the player, at least with the number of first prize balls paid out in the wake of winning the general winning opening and the winning of the electric winning opening. Count separately from the number of second prize balls to be paid out,
The gaming machine according to each of the preceding paragraphs, wherein the accessory ratio indicator displays information regarding a ratio between the number of the first prize balls and the number of the second prize balls.

(12) The main control device stores the counted number of prize balls in the memory.
The memory stores a check code for verifying the number of stored prize balls, and stores the check code.
The gaming machine according to each of the preceding paragraphs, wherein the main control device erases the number of prize balls stored in the memory when the check code is not normal.

As a result, it is possible to detect an abnormality in the number of prize balls stored in the memory, and it is possible to suppress the display of an erroneous accessory ratio (ratio of the number of first prize balls to the number of second prize balls).

(13) The main control device is
The memory has a first backup area and a second backup area in which the stored contents are retained even when the power is cut off.
Data for game control is stored in the first backup area, and
The data of the number of prize balls for calculating the accessory ratio is stored in the second backup area, and
The gaming machine according to each of the preceding paragraphs, wherein the data stored in the first backup area and the data stored in the second backup area are erased under different conditions.

As a result, when at least one of the data for game control and the data for the number of prize balls for calculating the accessory ratio is normal, only the abnormal data can be deleted and the normal data can be left.

(14) The main control device is
The memory has a first backup area and a second backup area in which the stored contents are retained even when the power is cut off.
Data for game control is stored in the first backup area, and
The data of the number of prize balls for calculating the accessory ratio is stored in the second backup area, and
If the RAM clear switch is operated when the power of the game machine is turned on, the data stored in the first backup area is erased, but the data stored in the second backup area is not erased. The gaming machine described in the section.

If the bonus ratio calculation / display data 13136 can be erased by operating the RAM clear switch, the bonus ratio calculated by the game machine can be erased at an arbitrary timing. Therefore, the backed up accessory ratio calculation / display data 13136 is not deleted by the operation of the RAM clear switch, and the deletion of the accessory ratio calculation / display data 13136 by the operation of the staff of the game hall is prevented. , It is possible to prevent concealment in a state where the ratio of accessories is high. Therefore, it is possible to easily detect the game machine modified to the state where the accessory ratio is high, and it is possible to prevent concealment of the state where the accessory ratio is high.

(15A) A game machine that gives a player a game value.
A control means that executes a program that controls the progress of the game,
It is equipped with a display means for displaying information on the given game value.
The gaming machine according to each of the preceding paragraphs, wherein the control means updates information on a game value to be displayed on the display means, triggered by input / output of a predetermined signal.

(15B) The information on the game value is based on
The control means
Control the progress of the game by switching between a special game state in which the player can acquire a lot of game value and a normal game state other than the special game state.
The number of prize balls paid out to the player in the normal game state is the number of balls consumed by the player in the normal game state (for example, the number of game balls launched into the game area, the game discharged from the game machine). The gaming machine according to each of the preceding paragraphs, wherein the base is calculated by dividing by the number of balls, the sum of the number of gaming balls passing through the out opening and the number of winning balls).

(15C) The control means receives, as the predetermined signal, a prize detection signal for detecting a prize in the prize opening, a reception confirmation signal for a prize ball payout command, or a prize ball payout completion signal, or a prize ball. The gaming machine according to each of the preceding paragraphs, characterized in that the number of prize balls used for calculating the base for displaying on the display means is updated at the timing when the prize ball payout command instructing the payout is transmitted.

(15D) The control means
It stores the total number of prize balls used to calculate the base,
In the normal gaming state, when a signal for detecting the winning of a game ball is received by the winning opening provided in the game area, the number of winning balls determined corresponding to the winning opening is calculated.
The total number of prize balls is updated using the calculated number of prize balls.
The gaming machine according to each of the preceding paragraphs, wherein the base is calculated by dividing the updated total number of prize balls by the number of balls consumed in the normal gaming state.

(15E) A payout control means for controlling the payout of prize balls to the player is provided.
The control means
It stores the total number of prize balls used to calculate the base,
When a winning ball is detected in the winning opening provided in the game area in the normal gaming state, the number of winning balls determined corresponding to the winning opening is calculated.
Instructing the payout control means to pay out the calculated number of prize balls to the player,
The total number of prize balls is updated using the number of prize balls instructed to the payout control means.
The gaming machine according to each of the preceding paragraphs, wherein the base is calculated by dividing the updated total number of prize balls by the number of balls consumed in the normal gaming state.

(15F) A payout control means for controlling the payout of prize balls to the player is provided.
The control means
It stores the total number of prize balls used to calculate the base,
When a winning ball is detected in the winning opening provided in the game area in the normal gaming state, the number of winning balls determined corresponding to the winning opening is calculated.
Instructing the payout control means to pay out the calculated number of prize balls to the player,
Upon receiving the confirmation of receipt of the instruction from the payout control means,
The total number of prize balls is updated by using the number of prize balls corresponding to the instruction for receiving the reception confirmation.
The gaming machine according to each of the preceding paragraphs, wherein the base is calculated by dividing the updated total number of prize balls by the number of balls consumed in the normal gaming state.

(15G) A payout control means for controlling the payout of prize balls to the player is provided.
The control means
It stores the total number of prize balls used to calculate the base,
When a winning ball is detected in the winning opening provided in the game area in the normal gaming state, the number of winning balls determined corresponding to the winning opening is calculated.
Instructing the payout control means to pay out the calculated number of prize balls to the player,
Upon receiving the completion of the payout of the prize ball according to the instruction from the payout control means,
The total number of prize balls is updated using the number of prize balls corresponding to the instruction upon receiving the completion of the payout.
The gaming machine according to each of the preceding paragraphs, wherein the base is calculated by dividing the updated total number of prize balls by the number of balls consumed in the normal gaming state.

(15H) The control means includes an information updating means for updating information on a game value to be displayed on the display means, and the display means for displaying the updated information on the game value, triggered by input / output of a predetermined signal. The gaming machine according to each of the preceding paragraphs, characterized in that it has a processing display means capable of processing (statistical processing) and displaying the result of arithmetic processing performed when the information is updated.

According to the inventions of 15A to 15H, the process relating to the acquisition of the game medium can be accurately executed.

(16A) A gaming machine that imparts gaming value to a player.
A control means that executes a program that controls the progress of the game,
It is equipped with a display means for displaying information on the given game value.
The gaming machine according to each of the preceding paragraphs, wherein the control means updates information regarding a game value to be displayed on the display means in relation to the game situation satisfying a predetermined condition.

(16B) The information on the game value is based on
The control means
Control the progress of the game by switching between a special game state in which the player can acquire a lot of game value and a normal game state other than the special game state.
The gaming machine according to each of the preceding paragraphs, wherein the base is calculated at the timing when the number of prize balls paid out to the player reaches a predetermined number in the normal gaming state.

(16C) The control means
It stores the total number of prize balls used to calculate the base,
When a winning ball is detected in the winning opening provided in the game area in the normal gaming state, the number of winning balls determined corresponding to the winning opening is calculated and stored in the buffer.
The predetermined number is moved from the buffer to the total prize balls at a predetermined timing, and the total prize balls are consumed by the player in the normal gaming state (for example, the number of game balls launched into the game area). , The game machine according to each of the preceding paragraphs, wherein the base is calculated by dividing by the number of game balls discharged from the game machine, the sum of the number of balls passing through the out port and the number of winning balls).

(16D) The predetermined timing is a timing when the number of prize balls in the buffer exceeds the predetermined number.
When the number of prize balls in the buffer exceeds the predetermined number, the control means subtracts the predetermined number from the buffer and adds the predetermined number to the total prize balls, thereby causing the total prize balls from the buffer. The gaming machine according to each of the preceding paragraphs, which comprises moving the predetermined number to a number.

(16E) The control means includes an information updating means for updating information on a game value to be displayed on the display means, and the display means for displaying the updated information on the game value, triggered by input / output of a predetermined signal. The gaming machine according to each of the preceding paragraphs, characterized in that it has a processing display means capable of processing (statistical processing) and displaying the result of arithmetic processing performed when the information is updated.

According to the inventions of 16A to 16E, it is possible to accurately execute a process different from the game property while maintaining the game property within the restrictions of the main control device according to the rules.

(17A) A game machine that gives a player a game value.
A control means that executes a program that controls the progress of the game,
It is equipped with a display means for displaying information on the given game value.
The control means
Count the number of balls consumed by the player and
The gaming machine according to each of the preceding paragraphs, wherein the information on the gaming value for displaying on the display means is updated in relation to the counted number of consumed balls satisfying a predetermined condition.

(17B) The control means
Control the progress of the game by switching between a special game state in which the player can acquire a lot of game value and a normal game state other than the special game state.
The gaming machine according to each of the preceding paragraphs, characterized in that information on the gaming value is calculated at the timing when the number of balls consumed in the normal gaming state reaches a predetermined number.

(17C) The control means is the number of balls consumed by the number of game balls launched into the game area, the number of game balls discharged from the game machine, or the sum of the number of game balls passing through the out port and the number of winning balls. The gaming machine according to each of the preceding paragraphs, which is characterized by counting.

(17D) The information on the game value is based on
The control means
It stores the total number of out balls used to calculate the base.
The number of balls consumed in the normal game state is calculated and stored in the buffer.
The base is calculated by moving a predetermined number from the buffer to the total number of out balls at a predetermined timing and dividing the number of prize balls paid out to the player in the normal gaming state by the total number of out balls. The gaming machine described in each of the preceding paragraphs, characterized in that.

(17E) The predetermined timing is a timing when the number of balls consumed in the buffer exceeds the predetermined number.
When the number of spheres consumed in the buffer exceeds the predetermined number, the control means subtracts the predetermined number from the buffer and adds the predetermined number to the total number of out spheres, thereby causing the total out spheres from the buffer. The gaming machine according to each of the preceding paragraphs, characterized in that a predetermined number is moved to a number.

(17F) The control means
Taking the opportunity of winning the start winning opening, the special symbol variation display game for deriving the special game state is executed, and the game is executed.
The gaming machine according to each of the preceding paragraphs, wherein when the hold memory of the special symbol variation display game is the upper limit value, the winning balls to the starting winning opening are not stored and the number of winning balls is counted.

(17G) The control means includes an information updating means for updating information on a game value to be displayed on the display means, and the display means for displaying the updated information on the game value, triggered by input / output of a predetermined signal. The gaming machine according to each of the preceding paragraphs, characterized in that it has a processing display means capable of processing (statistical processing) and displaying the result of arithmetic processing performed when the information is updated.

According to the inventions of 17A to 17G, it is possible to accurately execute a process different from the game property while maintaining the game property.

(18A) A gaming machine that imparts gaming value to a player.
A control means that executes a program that controls the progress of the game,
A display means for displaying information on the given game value, and
It is provided with a main body frame to which a game board having a game area in which the game is played can be detachably attached.
The gaming machine according to each of the preceding paragraphs, wherein the display means displays information on the game value even when the main body frame is closed.

(18B) The main body frame is rotatably attached to an outer frame attached to the island equipment of the amusement park.
The gaming machine according to each of the preceding paragraphs, wherein the display means is provided on the back surface side of the gaming machine, which is visible when the main body frame is opened.

(18C) The control means is attached to the main body frame.
The gaming machine according to each of the preceding paragraphs, wherein the display means is visibly provided in the case of the control means from the back surface side of the gaming machine.

According to the inventions of 18A to 18C, the decrease in sales of halls can be suppressed.

(19A)
It is a game machine that gives the player the game value.
A control means that executes a program that controls the progress of the game,
It is equipped with a display means for displaying information on the given game value.
The control means
Information updating means for updating information on the game value to be displayed on the display means in relation to satisfying a predetermined condition in the game, and
It has a game execution means to play a special symbol variation display game triggered by winning a prize at the start winning opening.
Each of the preceding paragraphs is characterized in that the information regarding the game value is updated even when the predetermined condition is satisfied while the special symbol variation display game is being performed by the game executing means. Described game machine.

(19B) The information on the game value is based on
As the predetermined condition, the control means said at any timing of detecting a prize to the winning opening, transmitting a prize ball payout command, receiving confirmation of receipt of the prize ball payout command, and receiving a prize ball payout completion signal. The gaming machine according to each of the preceding paragraphs, characterized in that the number of prize balls used for calculating the base for displaying on the display means is updated.

According to the inventions of 19A to 19B, it is possible to provide a game machine in which sufficient countermeasures against fraud are taken even in a variable display game.

(20A) A gaming machine that imparts gaming value to a player.
The main control means that executes the program that controls the progress of the game,
A production control means that controls the production of a special symbol variation display game that is performed when a prize is won at the start port, and
It is equipped with a game value information display means for displaying information on the given game value.
The effect control means
Control the transition to the low power mode in which the power consumption of the game machine is reduced from the normal mode.
The game machine according to each of the preceding paragraphs, characterized in that the display mode is not changed so as to reduce the power consumption of the game value information display means during the low power mode.

(20B) Displaying the effect of the special symbol variation display game, the effect display means composed of a liquid crystal display means having a backlight is provided.
The effect display means reduces the brightness of the backlight during the low power mode.
The game machine according to each of the preceding paragraphs, wherein the game value information display means is composed of a light emitting diode and does not reduce the brightness even during the low power mode.

(20C) Provided with an effect display means for displaying the effect of the special symbol variation display game.
The effect display means controls the display mode to the low power mode when a predetermined time elapses after the hold memory of the special symbol variation display game is exhausted.
The game value information display means does not change the display mode so as to reduce power consumption even after a predetermined time has elapsed after the reserved memory of the special symbol variation display game is exhausted. The game machines described in the preceding paragraphs.

According to the inventions of 20A to 20C, it is possible to provide a game machine having a full energy saving mode.

(21A) A gaming machine that imparts gaming value to a player.
A control means that executes a program that controls the progress of the game,
It is equipped with a display means for displaying information on the given game value.
The control means
It has a game state control means for controlling a normal game state and one of a plurality of advantageous game states that are more advantageous to the player than the normal game state.
Described in the preceding paragraphs, wherein the information on the game value is calculated and updated by dividing the number of prize balls in the normal game state by the number of balls consumed by the player in the normal game state. Game machine.

(21B) The control means depends on any one of the number of game balls launched into the game area, the number of game balls discharged from the game machine, and the number of game balls passing through the out port and the number of winning balls. The gaming machine according to each of the preceding paragraphs, which comprises counting the number of balls consumed in the normal gaming state.

(21C) The control means
When the special symbol variation display game becomes a big hit, the advantageous game state is derived, and the player is controlled to open the winning opening where a large amount of game value can be acquired.
The period from the determination of the jackpot by the special symbol variation display game to the start of the next special symbol variation display game is regarded as the advantageous gaming state, and the number of prize balls and the number of consumed balls during this period are excluded from the calculation of the information regarding the game value. The gaming machine described in each of the preceding paragraphs, characterized by.

(21D) The control means
In the advantageous gaming state, the player is controlled to open the winning opening where a large amount of gaming value can be acquired.
The game machine according to each of the preceding paragraphs, wherein the number of game balls won in the winning opening is excluded from the number of game balls launched into the game area, and the number of balls consumed in the normal game state is counted.

According to the inventions of 21A to 21D, accurate information can be output to the outside of the game machine.

(22A) A gaming machine that grants a gaming ball when a predetermined condition is satisfied.
A control means that executes a program that controls the progress of the game,
It is equipped with a display means for displaying information about the given game ball.
In the game area where the launched game ball rolls, a start port that is an opportunity to derive a special game state that facilitates acquisition of a large amount of game balls, and an opportunity to derive an open state from the closed state of the start port. At least there is a passageway
The control means
It is also possible to control the special gaming state in which the open state of the starting port can be easily derived.
The number of prize balls given to the player is used as the number of prize balls given to the player, excluding the number of prize balls given and the number of balls consumed by the player when controlled by either the special gaming state or the special gaming state. The game machine according to each of the preceding paragraphs, characterized in that information about the game ball is calculated and updated by dividing by the number of balls consumed by the person.

(22B) The control means depends on any one of the number of game balls launched into the game area, the number of game balls discharged from the game machine, and the number of game balls passing through the out port and the number of winning balls. The gaming machine according to each of the preceding paragraphs, which comprises counting the number of balls consumed in the normal state.

(22C) The control means sets the expanded state from the confirmation of the hit by the normal symbol variation display game to the start of the next normal symbol variation display game, and determines the number of prize balls and the number of consumed balls during this period with respect to the game ball. The game machine described in each of the preceding paragraphs, which is characterized by being excluded from the calculation of information.

(22D) The control means is characterized in that the number of game balls launched into the game area is excluded from the number of game balls that have won a prize at the start port, and the number of balls consumed in the normal state is counted. The gaming machine described in each section.

According to the inventions of 22A to 22D, accurate information can be output to the outside of the game machine.

(23A) A launching device that can be operated by the player and launches a game ball toward the game area,
A prize ball granting means for granting a predetermined number of prize balls when the game ball is detected at the winning opening provided in the game area, and
When the game ball is detected in a predetermined winning opening among the winning openings, a main control means for executing a lottery for whether or not to give an advantageous gaming state to the player, and
A gaming machine including peripheral control means for determining an effect to be displayed based on information transmitted from the main control means.
The main control means has an information updating means capable of updating the information about the given game ball in any increase or decrease.
The first state in which the information about the game ball given by the information updating means can be updated to increase or decrease, and the first state in which the information about the game ball given by the information updating means can be updated to increase or decrease. There is at least a second state in which the rate at which the information about the given game ball is updated to increase is suppressed as compared with the first state.
The gaming machine according to each of the preceding paragraphs, wherein the peripheral control means determines the appearance of a special effect indicating that the transition from the first state to the second state has occurred.

(23B) The information on the game value is based on
The main control means
Control the progress of the game by switching between a special game state in which the player can acquire a lot of game value and a normal game state other than the special game state.
The base is calculated by dividing the number of prize balls in the normal game state by the number of balls consumed by the player in the normal game state.
The gaming machine according to each of the preceding paragraphs, wherein the peripheral control means determines the appearance of the adversity effect with a timing at which the base is likely to decrease as the second state.

(23C) The main control means
Information about the game ball is written in the storage area at any timing of a predetermined time, a predetermined number of prize balls, or a predetermined number of consumed balls.
The information about the game ball written in the storage area is compared with the information about the game ball stored in the storage area before the writing, and the increase / decrease of the information about the game ball is determined.
The gaming machine according to each of the preceding paragraphs, wherein the peripheral control means determines the appearance of the adversity effect according to the determined increase / decrease.

According to the inventions of 23A to 23C, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest even if the variable display game is interrupted for a long time.

(24A) A gaming machine that imparts gaming value to a player.
A control means that repeatedly executes a program that controls the progress of the game,
A display means for displaying information on the given game value, and
A means for acquiring the number of prize balls to be acquired by the player at a predetermined timing,
It is equipped with a consumption ball detecting means for detecting the consumption balls consumed by the player.
The control means
When the predetermined timing and the detection of the consumed balls by the consumed ball number detecting means occur within the same repetition, the number of prize balls acquired at the predetermined timing and the detected number of consumed balls are within the same repetition. Count with
The game machine according to each of the preceding paragraphs, wherein information on the game value is calculated using the counted number of prize balls and the number of consumed balls.

(24B) The information on the game value is based on
The control means
Control the progress of the game by switching between a special game state in which the player can acquire a lot of game value and a normal game state other than the special game state.
The total number of prize balls in the normal game state and the number of game balls consumed by the player in the normal game state are counted within the same repetition.
The game according to each of the preceding paragraphs, characterized in that information on the game value is calculated by dividing the total number of prize balls in the normal game state by the number of game balls consumed by the player in the normal game state. Machine.

According to the inventions of 24A to 24B, the information on the number of game media acquired by the player can be quickly displayed.

(25A) A game machine that gives a player a game value.
A control means that executes a program that controls the progress of the game,
A display means for displaying information on the given game value, and
An out-port detection means for detecting a game ball that has passed through an out-port provided at the bottom of the game area,
It is equipped with a winning ball detecting means for detecting a winning ball to a predetermined winning opening.
The control means
It has a game state control means for controlling a normal game state and a special game state in which a player can acquire more game value than the normal game state.
The number of game balls that have passed through the out port is counted from the output of the out port detecting means.
The number of winning balls is counted from the output of the winning ball detecting means, and the number of winning balls is counted.
The number of balls consumed by the player is counted by the sum of the number of game balls that have passed through the out port and the number of winning balls.
It is characterized in that information on the game value is calculated by dividing the number of prize balls paid out to the player in the normal game state by the number of balls consumed in the normal game state at a predetermined timing. , The gaming machines described in the preceding paragraphs.

(25B) A game machine that gives a player a game value.
A control means that executes a program that controls the progress of the game,
A display means for displaying information on the given game value, and
It is equipped with a detection means for counting the number of game balls launched into the game area.
The control means
It has a game state control means for controlling a normal game state and a special game state in which a player can acquire more game value than the normal game state.
The number of game balls launched into the game area is counted from the output of the detection means, and the consumed game balls consumed by the player are counted.
It is characterized in that information on the game value is calculated by dividing the number of prize balls paid out to the player in the normal game state by the number of balls consumed in the normal game state at a predetermined timing. , The gaming machines described in the preceding paragraphs.

(25C) A game machine that gives a player a game value.
A control means that executes a program that controls the progress of the game,
A display means for displaying information on the given game value, and
It is equipped with a detection means for counting the number of game balls ejected from the game machine.
The control means
It has a game state control means for controlling a normal game state and a special game state in which a player can acquire more game value than the normal game state.
The number of game balls discharged from the game machine is counted from the output of the detection means, and the number of balls consumed by the player is counted.
It is characterized in that information on the game value is calculated by dividing the number of prize balls paid out to the player in the normal game state by the number of balls consumed in the normal game state at a predetermined timing. , The gaming machines described in the preceding paragraphs.

According to the inventions of 25A to 25C, the process relating to the acquisition of the game medium can be accurately executed.

(26A) A gaming machine that imparts gaming value to a player.
A control means that executes a program that controls the progress of the game,
It is equipped with a display means for displaying information on the given game value.
The control means
A game state control means for controlling a normal game state and a special game state in which a player can acquire more game value than the normal game state, and controlling the game state to any one of the normal game states.
A means for counting the number of prize balls, excluding the number of prize balls given when a game ball launched toward the right side of the game area wins a prize opening, and a means for counting the number of prize balls.
It has a consumption ball number counting means for counting the number of consumption balls consumed by the player by excluding the number of game balls launched toward the right side of the game area.
The gaming machine according to each of the preceding paragraphs, wherein the control means updates information on the game value by using the counted number of prize balls and the number of consumed balls.

(26B) The information on the game value is based on
The number of prize balls in the normal game state is counted by excluding the number of prize balls given when the game ball launched toward the right side of the game area wins a prize opening that is considered to be able to win.
The number of balls consumed in the normal game state is counted by excluding the number of game balls launched toward the right side of the game area.
The control means is described in each of the preceding paragraphs, wherein the control means calculates information on the game value by dividing the counted number of prize balls in the normal game state by the number of balls consumed in the normal game state. Game machine.

(26C) For a predetermined period of time after the control means detects the passage of the game ball of the gate portion provided on the right side of the game area or the winning of the winning opening provided on the right side of the game area. The gaming machine according to each of the preceding paragraphs, which is excluded from the counting of the number of prize balls and the number of balls consumed.

(26D) The control means determines the predetermined period according to either the lapse of a predetermined time from the last detection, the time for consuming a predetermined number of game balls, or the time for paying out a predetermined number of prize balls. The gaming machine described in each of the preceding paragraphs, characterized by.

(26E) The control means excludes the number of passing balls of the gate portion provided on the right side of the game area and the number of winning balls to the winning opening provided on the right side of the game area, and the number of winning balls and the number of winning balls The gaming machine according to each of the preceding paragraphs, which comprises counting the number of balls consumed.

According to the inventions of 26A to 26E, accurate information can be output to the outside of the game machine.

(27A) A gaming machine that imparts gaming value to a player.
A main control means for deriving a game state advantageous to the player based on the result of the winning lottery in the game,
The first data setting means for setting the first data according to the result of the game,
A second data setting means for setting the second data that does not depend on the result of the game,
A third data setting means that sets the third data according to the result of the game,
A first conversion means for obtaining the first conversion data from the first data set by the first data setting means and the second data set by the second data setting means, and
A second conversion means for obtaining the second conversion data from the first conversion data obtained by the first conversion means and the third data set by the third data setting means, and
A gaming machine characterized by having a display means for displaying the second conversion data without displaying the first conversion data.

(27B) The gaming machine according to each of the preceding paragraphs, wherein the display means device does not display the second conversion data when the second conversion data is a numerical value in a predetermined range.

(27C) The first conversion means is a multiplication means, and is characterized in that the first conversion data is obtained by multiplying the first data and the second data at a timing when a predetermined condition is satisfied. The gaming machines described in the preceding paragraphs.

(27D) The second conversion means is a division means, and is characterized in that the first conversion data is divided by the third data to obtain the second conversion data at the timing when a predetermined condition is satisfied. , The gaming machine described in each of the preceding paragraphs.

(27E) The first data is the game value (for example, the number of prize balls) given to the player.
The third data is the game value consumed by the player (for example, the number of out balls).
The second conversion means divides the first conversion data by the third data to obtain information on the given game value as the second conversion data.
The game machine according to each of the preceding paragraphs, wherein the display device displays information (for example, a base) regarding the game value obtained by the second conversion means.

According to the inventions of 27A to 27E, information on the result of the game can be displayed accurately and quickly. In particular, the base value required for evaluation of a game machine can be accurately displayed in real time. Further, by using the second conversion means (division means), information on the game value (for example, a base value) can be accurately displayed in real time while suppressing an increase in the processing load of the control means.

(28A) A gaming machine that imparts gaming value to a player.
A control means that executes periodic processing that controls the progress of the game,
A display means for displaying information on the given game value, and
It has a conversion means for calculating information on the game value, and has
The control means
An argument is passed to the conversion means at a predetermined timing, and the result converted based on the argument by the conversion means is obtained from the conversion means.
A gaming machine characterized in that a process of passing the argument and a process of acquiring the result of the conversion can be executed within one periodic process.

(28B) The conversion means
It is an arithmetic circuit that performs division operations.
It has a divisor register in which a divisor is input, a divisor register in which a divisor is input, and a result register for outputting the quotient of the division operation.
The control means
Write arguments to the divisor register and the divisor register,
After a predetermined time has elapsed from the writing of the argument, the quotient is read from the result register.
The gaming machine according to each of the preceding paragraphs, wherein the process of writing an argument to the divisor register and the divisor register is executed before the predetermined time from the end of the repeatedly executed program.

(28C) A prize game medium number counting means for counting the game media given to the player in a predetermined game state, and
It has a consumption game medium number counting means for counting the game media consumed by the player in the predetermined game state.
The control means
A value obtained by multiplying the number of prize game media counted by the prize game medium number counting means by 100 is written to the divisor register.
The number of consumption game media counted by the consumption game medium number counting means is written in the divisor gista.
The gaming machine according to each of the preceding paragraphs, wherein the base value is read from the result register.

According to the inventions of 28A to 28C, information on the result of the game can be displayed accurately and quickly. In particular, since the process of passing an argument to the conversion circuit and the process of acquiring the conversion result from the conversion circuit are executed within one iterative process (timer interrupt process), the complexity of control can be suppressed.

(29A) A gaming machine that imparts gaming value to a player.
A winning opening where a game ball can be won, and
Control means to control the progress of the game,
A display means for displaying information on the given game value, and
A consumption ball counting means for counting the consumption balls consumed by the player,
It has a prize ball counting means for counting the prize balls given to the player,
At least one of the winning openings is a specific winning opening that can be switched between an open state in which it is easy to win a game ball and a closed state in which it is difficult to win a prize.
The control means
Based on the counted number of consumed balls and the number of prize balls, the information regarding the game value to be displayed on the display means is updated.
If a prize is detected in the specific winning opening even though the specific winning opening is in the closed state, it is determined that the winning is abnormal, and if the determination is made, the number of winning balls related to the winning abnormality. Is excluded from the number of balls consumed, and the information regarding the game value for displaying on the display means is updated.

(29B) At least one of the winning openings is a starting winning opening that serves as an opportunity to derive a special gaming state that facilitates the acquisition of a large number of game balls.
When the starting winning opening is closed and a winning is detected in the starting winning opening, the control means determines that the winning is abnormal and excludes the number of winning balls related to the winning from the number of consumed balls. , The gaming machine according to each of the preceding paragraphs, characterized in that information regarding the gaming value for displaying on the display means is updated.

(29C) At least one of the winning openings is a large winning opening opened in a special gaming state.
When the big winning opening is closed and a winning is detected in the big winning opening, the control means determines that the winning is abnormal and excludes the number of winning balls related to the winning from the number of consumed balls. , The gaming machine according to each of the preceding paragraphs, characterized in that information regarding the gaming value for displaying on the display means is updated.

(29D) It has a consumption ball detecting means for detecting the consumption ball consumed by the player.
Each of the preceding means is characterized in that the consumption ball counting means counts the consumption balls consumed by the player by subtracting the number of winning balls related to the winning abnormality from the number of consumption balls detected by the consumption ball number detecting means. The gaming machine described in the section.

(29E) The control means stores the total number of balls consumed for calculating the information regarding the game value.
The consumption ball counting means adds the number of consumption balls detected by the consumption ball number detecting means to the total number of consumption balls, subtracts the number of winning balls related to the winning abnormality from the total number of consumption balls, and obtains the consumption balls. The gaming machine according to each of the preceding paragraphs, which is characterized by counting.

(29F) The control means stores the total number of balls consumed for calculating the information regarding the game value.
The consumption ball counting means counts the consumption balls by adding a value obtained by subtracting the number of consumption balls related to the winning abnormality from the number of consumption balls detected by the consumption ball number detection means to the total number of consumption balls. The gaming machine described in each of the preceding sections, which is a feature.

(29G) The winning opening can be switched between an open state in which it is easy to win a game ball and a closed state in which it is difficult to win a prize.
When the control means detects the winning of the winning opening in the closed state and does not pay out the winning balls in connection with the winning, the control means determines that the winning is abnormal and determines the number of winning balls for the winning. The gaming machine according to each of the preceding paragraphs, characterized in that the information regarding the gaming value for displaying on the display means is updated by excluding it from the number of balls consumed.

(29H) When the winning abnormality in the winning opening is detected a plurality of times within a predetermined period, the control means excludes the winning balls related to the winning abnormality from the consumption balls and displays them on the display means. The gaming machine described in each of the preceding paragraphs, characterized in that information regarding the gaming value for playing is updated.

According to the inventions of 29A to 29H, information on the result of the game can be displayed accurately and quickly. In particular, the number of winning balls that are abnormally won can be excluded from the number of out balls, and information on the game value (for example, the base value) can be accurately displayed in real time.

(30) A game machine that gives a game medium as a prize to a player.
A game area where multiple winning openings are arranged,
When a game medium is detected in each of the winning openings, a prize-giving means for granting a predetermined specific prize among a plurality of prizes, and
A calculation processing means for executing a predetermined calculation process using the number of game media flowing into the game area and the number of game media given as prizes given by the prize giving means.
A processing means for processing the result of the arithmetic processing executed by the arithmetic processing means, and
A display means for displaying the result of arithmetic processing processed by the processing means on a predetermined display device is provided.
When a specific prize is generated among the plurality of prizes in the game, the prize-giving means grants the specific prize, and the display means displays the result of the arithmetic processing so as not to change. Amusement machine.

According to the thirtieth invention, information on the result of the game can be displayed accurately and quickly. In particular, prizes (for example, prize balls that are paid out when a prize is given to a prize opening (for example, a general prize opening or a large winning opening with a large number of prize balls) to which a high-value prize is given) are generated. Even if it is given, the result of the calculation process (calculated base value) can be displayed so that it does not change, and it is easy to determine whether the game machine is exhibiting the specified performance (for example, whether it is according to the set payout rate). it can.

(31A) A game including a main control means including a lottery means for executing a lottery regarding winning when a specific condition is satisfied, and a peripheral control means for controlling a predetermined effect based on a signal from the main control means. It ’s a machine,
The peripheral control means
Temporary storage means for storing information based on the signal received from the main control means, and
An information storage means that is updated by the information stored in the temporary storage means, and
By providing a first information output means for outputting at least a part of the information stored in the information storage means to the outside when a predetermined condition is satisfied.
A gaming machine characterized in that the status history of the gaming machine can be grasped.

(31B) Equipped with a general winning opening where a game ball launched in the game area can be won even if it is not in a special game state.
The signal transmitted from the main control means to the peripheral control means includes a signal indicating winning to the general winning opening.
The gaming machine according to each of the preceding paragraphs, wherein the first information output means outputs information regarding winning to the general winning opening to the outside when a predetermined condition is satisfied.

(31C) When the predetermined conditions are satisfied, an external output means for outputting information based on the predetermined conditions to the external terminal board and
When the predetermined conditions are satisfied, an information storage means for storing more detailed information than the information output to the external terminal board, and
The gaming machine according to each of the preceding paragraphs, comprising: an information presenting means for presenting information stored by the information storing means.

(31D) A first initialization means for initializing the state of the game machine is provided.
The peripheral control means
A storage means for storing information based on a signal received from the main control means, and a storage means.
The game according to each of the preceding paragraphs, which comprises a limited initialization means that does not initialize a part of the information stored in the storage means even when it is initialized by the first initialization means. Machine.

(31E) The first initialization means for initializing the state of the game machine,
A second initialization means for initializing the stored contents of the information storage means is provided.
The information storage means can retain the stored contents even when the power of the game machine is cut off.
The gaming machine according to each of the preceding paragraphs, wherein the first initialization means does not initialize the stored contents of the information storage means, but initializes the stored contents of the temporary storage means.

(31F) The gaming machine according to each of the preceding paragraphs, wherein the peripheral control means stores the type of a signal received from the main control means and the time when the signal is received in the information storage means.

(31G) The signals transmitted from the main control means to the peripheral control means include a signal related to a counting event counted according to the progress of the game and a signal related to a state change event that triggers a change in the state of the game machine. Including
The peripheral control means
Temporary storage means for storing information based on the signal received from the main control means, and
An information storage means that is updated by the information stored in the temporary storage means, and
It has a first information output means that outputs at least a part of the information stored in the information storage means to the outside when a predetermined condition is satisfied.
The peripheral control means
The counting event is counted based on the signal received from the main control means, and the counting result is stored in the temporary storage means.
When a signal relating to the state change event is received from the main control means, the state change event is stored in the information storage means, and the counting result of the counting event stored in the temporary storage means is stored in the information storage means. The gaming machine described in each of the preceding paragraphs, characterized in that.

(31H) The signal transmitted from the main control means includes a signal related to a counting event counted for management of the game machine and a signal related to a state change event that triggers a change in the state of the game machine.
The information storage means stores the counting result of the counting event for each state of the game machine.
The peripheral control means
The signal related to the counting event received from the main control means is counted and stored in the temporary storage means.
When a signal related to the state change event is received from the main control means, the type of the signal related to the state change event, the time when the signal is received and the information storage means are stored, and the counting event stored in the temporary storage means. The gaming machine according to each of the preceding paragraphs, wherein the counting result of the counting event is added to the counting result of the counting event stored in the information storage means.

(31I) The signal transmitted from the main control means includes a signal related to a counting event counted for management of the game machine and a signal related to a state change event that triggers a change in the state of the game machine.
The information storage means stores the counting result of the counting event for each state of the game machine.
The peripheral control means
The signal related to the counting event received from the main control means is counted and stored in the temporary storage means.
When a signal relating to the state change event is received from the main control means, the counting result of the counting event stored in the temporary storage means is added to the counting result of the counting event stored in the information storage means. The gaming machine described in each section before.

According to the inventions of 31A to 31I, it is possible to know how the ball has changed. In particular, according to the inventions of 31D and 31E, information on the game can be properly stored.

(32) A game machine that gives a player a prize game medium as a game value.
A control means that executes periodic processing related to the progress of the game,
Consumed game media counting means for counting consumed game media consumed by the player,
A prize game medium counting means for counting prize game media given to a player,
A calculation means for calculating information on the given game value using the counted number of consumption game media and the number of prize game media, and
A first light emitting element group including a plurality of light emitting elements for displaying information about a game including a variable display of a symbol, and
It has a second light emitting element group including a plurality of light emitting elements that display information on the given game value, and has.
The first light emitting element group includes a first terminal to which one terminal of the plurality of light emitting elements is commonly connected and a plurality of second terminals to which the other terminal of the plurality of light emitting elements is connected. And have
The second light emitting element group includes a third terminal to which one terminal of the plurality of light emitting elements is commonly connected and a plurality of fourth terminals to which the other terminal of the plurality of light emitting elements is connected. And have
The first terminal of the first light emitting element group and the third terminal of the second light emitting element group are connected to one output driving means.
Although the control means outputs a selection signal at a timing common to the first terminal and the third terminal, at least one of the first light emitting elements group is output during the period during which the selection signal is output. A signal output to the plurality of second terminals for lighting one light emitting element and a signal output to the plurality of fourth terminals for lighting at least one light emitting element of the second light emitting element group. The game machine is characterized in that the display control of the first light emitting element group and the second light emitting element group is performed within one periodic process by outputting the above at different timings.

According to the invention of 32, the circuit for displaying the information on the given game value (for example, the base value and the accessory ratio) can be simply configured, and the information on the game value can be displayed quickly and accurately.

(33) A game machine that gives a player a prize game medium as a game value.
A control means that executes periodic processing related to the progress of the game,
Consumed game media counting means for counting consumed game media consumed by the player,
A prize game medium counting means for counting prize game media given to a player,
A calculation means for calculating information on the given game value using the counted number of consumption game media and the number of prize game media, and
A first light emitting element group including a plurality of light emitting elements for displaying information about a game including a variable display of a symbol, and
It has a second light emitting element group including a plurality of light emitting elements that display information on the given game value, and has.
The first light emitting element group includes a first terminal to which one terminal of the plurality of light emitting elements is commonly connected and a plurality of second terminals to which the other terminal of the plurality of light emitting elements is connected. And have
The second light emitting element group includes a third terminal to which one terminal of the plurality of light emitting elements is commonly connected and a plurality of fourth terminals to which the other terminal of the plurality of light emitting elements is connected. And have
At least one light emitting element of the first light emitting element group corresponds to the selection signal output to the first terminal of the first light emitting element group and the selection signal output to the first terminal. A signal output to the plurality of second terminals for lighting, a selection signal output to the third terminal of the second light emitting element group, and a selection signal output to the third terminal. Although the signals output to the plurality of fourth terminals for lighting at least one light emitting element of the second light emitting element group corresponding to the above are output within the same periodic processing, the first The process of outputting the selection signal output to the terminal 1 and the signal output to the plurality of second terminals corresponding to the selection signal, and the selection signal output to the third terminal and the selection signal. The process of outputting signals to the plurality of corresponding fourth terminals is a gaming machine characterized in that signals are output at different timings in the periodic process by different processes in the same periodic process. ..

According to the invention of 33, a circuit for displaying information regarding the game value to be given can be simply configured. Therefore, information on the game value can be displayed quickly and accurately.

(34A) A game machine that gives a player a prize game medium as a game value.
Control means to control the progress of the game,
Consumed game media counting means for counting consumed game media consumed by the player,
A prize game medium counting means for counting prize game media given to a player,
A calculation means for calculating information on the given game value using the counted number of consumption game media and the number of prize game media, and
It has a calculation result display means for displaying information on the game value calculated by the calculation means.
The control means
A control device that executes processing for game control,
A timing means for generating a signal (for example, a clock signal or a reset signal) that determines the operation timing of the control device, and
It has an output driving means that is controlled by the control device and at least outputs a control signal for displaying by the calculation result display means.
In the substrate on which the control device is mounted, the timing means is arranged in one direction with respect to the control device, and the output driving means and the calculation result display means are arranged in a direction different from the one direction. A gaming machine characterized in that it is placed away from the timing means.

(34B) The connection line between the control device and the timing means and the connection line between the control device and the output drive means are arranged on the substrate so as not to intersect with each other. The gaming machine described in each of the preceding paragraphs.

(34C) The timing means includes a reset circuit that generates a reset signal input to the control device and an oscillation circuit that generates a clock signal input to the control device.
On the printed circuit board on which the control means is realized, the reset circuit is arranged from the processor in the same direction as the oscillation circuit, and the driver circuit and the display device are arranged apart from the reset circuit and the oscillation circuit. The gaming machine described in each of the preceding paragraphs, characterized in that.

According to the inventions of 34A to 34C, it is possible to suppress the interference between the signal related to the game control and the signal for displaying the information related to the game. Therefore, the influence on the game control can be suppressed, and the information on the game value can be displayed quickly and accurately.

(35A) A game machine that gives a player a prize game medium as a game value.
Control means to control the progress of the game,
Consumed game media counting means for counting consumed game media consumed by the player,
A prize game medium counting means for counting prize game media given to a player,
A calculation means for calculating information on the given game value using the counted number of consumption game media and the number of prize game media, and
It has a display means controlled by the control means and displays information on the game value.
The control means
A control device that executes processing for game control,
It has a memory that the control device accesses at the time of executing the process and stores at least information about the game value.
The game machine is provided with an input means for instructing the initialization of the memory.
The control means
At a predetermined timing, it is determined whether or not the data stored in the memory is normal, and if it is determined that the data is abnormal, the first initialization means for initializing the predetermined first area of the memory. ,
At the time of turning on the power, it is determined whether or not the input means is operated, and if it is determined that the input means is operated, the second initialization means for initializing a predetermined second area of the memory is provided. Have and
The first region initialized by the first initialization means and the second region initialized by the second initialization means are the second initial region also by the first initialization means. Includes overlapping areas that are commonly initialized by the conversion means
At least the first region includes a region that does not overlap with the second region.
The game machine, characterized in that the information regarding the game value is stored in the first area other than the overlapping area.

(35B) In the first area, data used for calculating information regarding the game value is stored.
Data used for controlling the progress of the game is stored in the second area.
The control means
When it is determined that the data stored in the first area is abnormal, the first area is initialized and the data is initialized.
When it is determined that the data stored in the second area is abnormal, the second area is initialized and the data is initialized.
The gaming machine according to each of the preceding paragraphs, wherein when it is determined that the input means is being operated, the second region is initialized without initializing the first region.

(35C) In the first area, data used for calculating information regarding the game value is stored.
Data used for controlling the progress of the game is stored in the second area.
The control means
When it is determined that the data stored in the first area is abnormal, the first area and the second area are initialized.
When it is determined that the data stored in the second area is abnormal, the first area and the second area are initialized.
The gaming machine according to each of the preceding paragraphs, wherein when it is determined that the input means is being operated, the second region is initialized without initializing the first region.

(35D) Each of the preceding items, wherein the control means determines whether or not the data stored in the first area is abnormal for each execution of periodic processing that is repeatedly executed at predetermined time intervals. The game machine described in.

(35E) The gaming machine according to each of the preceding paragraphs, wherein the control means determines whether or not the data stored in the first region is abnormal each time the information regarding the gaming value is calculated. ..

(35F) The gaming machine according to each of the preceding paragraphs, wherein the control means determines whether or not the data stored in the first region is abnormal when the power of the gaming machine is turned on.

According to the inventions of 35A to 35F, it is possible to appropriately control the memory for storing the information (base value and accessory ratio) regarding the game value to be given. Therefore, information about the game can be displayed accurately and quickly.

(36A) A game machine that gives a player a prize game medium as a game value.
Control means to control the progress of the game,
Consumed game media counting means for counting consumed game media consumed by the player,
A prize game medium counting means for counting prize game media given to a player,
A calculation means for calculating information on the given game value using the counted number of consumption game media and the number of prize game media, and
A display means for displaying information on the game value and
It has an electric accessory that is operated by the control means.
Under specific conditions, when a plurality of game media win a prize during the operation of the electric accessory triggered by one hit, among the winning game media, some of the game media have information on the game value. A game machine characterized in that it is used for calculation and is not used for calculation of information on the game value for other game media, but any game medium can be an opportunity for a variable display game.

(36B) The control means
When the predetermined start conditions are met, the variable display game is executed, and
Depending on the result of the variable display game, a first gaming state (time saving, high probability state, big hit, etc.) that is advantageous to the player and a second gaming state (normal state) that is less advantageous than the first gaming state. Control to either
When a plurality of game media win a prize during one operation of the electric accessory, the game medium won in the second game state is used for calculating information on the game value, and the first game The game machines described in the preceding paragraphs, characterized in that the game media won in the state are not used for calculating the information on the game value, but any game medium can trigger a variable display game.

(36C) The control means
Detects multiple types of errors that occur in game machines and
When a plurality of game media win a prize during one operation of the electric accessory, the game medium won in a state where the error of a predetermined type is detected is used for calculating the information on the game value. However, although the game medium that won the prize in the state where the error of the predetermined type is not detected is used for calculating the information on the game value, any game medium can be a trigger for the variable display game. The game machine described in each item before.

According to the inventions of 36A to 36C, since the game medium is switched to be used for calculating the information on the game value according to the state of the game machine, the information on the game value can be displayed quickly and accurately.

1 Pachinko machine (game machine)
2 Outer frame 3 Door frame 4 Main body frame 5 Game board 5a Game area 930 Power supply board box 951 Payout control board 1300 Main control unit 1310 Main control board 1311 Main control MPU (CPU)
1312 RAM
13121 Arithmetic circuit 1313 ROM
1314 Main control I / O port 1317 Accessory ratio indicator (base indicator)
1510 Peripheral control board 1600 Main liquid crystal display device 2002 First start port 2004 Second start port 4000 Slot machine (game machine)
4210 Start lever 4211 Reel stop button 4300 Design fluctuation display device 4301 Reel 4341 Reel drive motor 4500 Image display unit 4600 Main board (game control device)
4601 CPU
4602 ROM
4603 RAM
4700 Production control board 5100 ROM area 5200 RAM area 5300 I / O area 5400 Parameter information setting area

Claims (1)

A game board having a game area in which a game ball launched by operating a predetermined launch handle can flow down is provided, a winning lottery is performed based on the establishment of a predetermined condition, and a winning result is derived in the corresponding losing lottery. In a game machine that executes a hit game
Number game balls flowing down the gaming area has entered the special winning hole, and, with a number of not ball entrance to the winning port, the specific information calculating means for calculating the specific information about a stream of result of game balls,
A specific information display unit that displays the calculation result of the specific information calculation means, and
A setting mode generating means for generating a setting mode capable of setting a setting value regarding the probability that a winning result is derived in the winning lottery is provided.
The setting mode can be started by performing the first administrator operation when the power is turned on, and the set value can be displayed by using the specific information display unit.
In the setting mode, even if the game ball enters the winning opening, the calculation is not performed by the specific information calculation means , and even if the launch handle is operated, the game ball moves toward the game area. It is something that will never be fired
further,
The first clearing means for clearing predetermined information when the first administrator operation is performed when the power is turned on, and
A second clearing means for clearing predetermined information without starting the setting mode when a second administrator operation different from the first administrator operation is performed when the power is turned on is provided.
A gaming machine characterized in that the specific information calculated by the specific information calculation means is not cleared by either the first clearing means or the second clearing means .

Images